Service Manual

LBP5960/5900/5600 Series

Apr 17 2008
 Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair
of products. This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this
manual that does not apply to your locality.

Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products. When
changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need
arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition
of this manual.

The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.

Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies.

Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, reproduced or
translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Canon Inc.

COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.

Printed in Japan

Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.
 Introduction

Symbols Used
This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information:

Symbol Description

Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).

Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.

Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet.

Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in question.
Memo

Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

REF.

Provides a description of a service mode.

Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

 Introduction

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with refer-
ence to the timing of operation.
In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol , the arrow indicates the
direction of the electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in
supplying the machine with power.
2. In the digital circuits, '1'is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low".(The voltage value, how-
ever, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when '0'.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors
used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the
DC controller PCB to the loads.

The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be com-
municated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be
able to identify and isolate faults in the machine."
 Contents

Contents

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

1.1 Features .....................................................................................................................................................1- 1
1.1.1 Features .................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 1
1.1.2 Features .................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 1
1.2 System construction ...................................................................................................................................1- 1
1.2.1 System Configuration .............................................................................................................................................. 1- 1
1.2.2 System Configuration .............................................................................................................................................. 1- 2
1.3 Product Specifications ................................................................................................................................1- 2
1.3.1 Product Specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 1- 2
1.3.2 Product Specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 1- 3
1.3.3 Finisher Specifications............................................................................................................................................. 1- 4
1.4 Detailed Specifications ...............................................................................................................................1- 5
1.4.1 Printing Speed ......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 5
1.4.2 Printing Speed ......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 6
1.5 Name of Parts.............................................................................................................................................1- 7
1.5.1 External View........................................................................................................................................................... 1- 7
1.5.2 External View........................................................................................................................................................... 1- 8
1.5.3 Cross Sectional View............................................................................................................................................... 1- 9
1.5.4 Cross Sectional View............................................................................................................................................. 1- 10
1.6 Using the Machine ....................................................................................................................................1- 12
1.6.1 Control Panel......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 12
1.6.2 Control Panel......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 15
1.6.3 Job Menu............................................................................................................................................................... 1- 17
1.6.4 Settings Menu (1) .................................................................................................................................................. 1- 18
1.6.5 Settings Menu (2) .................................................................................................................................................. 1- 19
1.6.6 Settings Menu (3) .................................................................................................................................................. 1- 20
1.6.7 Settings Menu (4) .................................................................................................................................................. 1- 22
1.6.8 Settings Menu (5) .................................................................................................................................................. 1- 22
1.6.9 Settings Menu (6) .................................................................................................................................................. 1- 23
1.6.10 Settings Menu (7) ................................................................................................................................................ 1- 24
1.6.11 Utility Menu .......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 27
1.6.12 Reset Menu ......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 28
1.6.13 Feeder Selection Menu........................................................................................................................................ 1- 28
1.6.14 Job Menu ............................................................................................................................................................. 1- 30
1.6.15 Settings Menu (1) ................................................................................................................................................ 1- 30
1.6.16 Settings Menu (2) ................................................................................................................................................ 1- 33
1.6.17 Settings Menu (3) ................................................................................................................................................ 1- 34
1.6.18 Settings Menu (4) ................................................................................................................................................ 1- 39
1.6.19 Settings Menu (5) ................................................................................................................................................ 1- 40
1.6.20 Utility Menu .......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 43
1.6.21 Reset Menu ......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 44
1.6.22 Feeder Selection Menu........................................................................................................................................ 1- 44
1.7 Safety .......................................................................................................................................................1- 45
1.7.1 Safety of Toner ...................................................................................................................................................... 1- 45
1.7.2 Points to Note When Replacing/Disposing of the Lithium Battery......................................................................... 1- 45
1.7.3 Safety of Laser Light.............................................................................................................................................. 1- 46
1.7.4 CDRH Regulations ................................................................................................................................................ 1- 46
1.7.5 Handling the Laser System ................................................................................................................................... 1- 46
1.7.6 Safety of Toner ...................................................................................................................................................... 1- 46
1.7.7 Points to Note When Replacing/Disposing of the Lithium Battery......................................................................... 1- 46
 Contents

Chapter 2 TECHNICAL REFERENCE

2.1 Functional Configuration ............................................................................................................................ 2- 1
2.1.1 Functional Construction ...........................................................................................................................................2- 1
2.1.2 Functional Construction ...........................................................................................................................................2- 1
2.2 Basic Sequense ......................................................................................................................................... 2- 2
2.2.1 Power-On Sequence................................................................................................................................................2- 2
2.2.2 Power-On Sequence................................................................................................................................................2- 2
2.3 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM ................................................................................................................... 2- 4
2.3.1 Overview/Configuration............................................................................................................................................2- 4
2.3.1.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 4
2.3.1.2 Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 5
2.3.2 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing ...................................................................................................................2- 7
2.3.2.1 Turning On and Off the Laser Light ......................................................................................................................................... 2- 7
2.3.2.2 Controlling Synchronization in Main Scanning Direction ......................................................................................................... 2- 8
2.3.2.3 Turning On and Off the Laser Light ......................................................................................................................................... 2- 9
2.3.2.4 Controlling Synchronization in Sub Scanning Direction......................................................................................................... 2- 11
2.3.2.5 Controlling Synchronization in Main Scanning Direction ....................................................................................................... 2- 13
2.3.2.6 Controlling Synchronization in Sub Scanning Direction......................................................................................................... 2- 14
2.3.3 Laser Control .........................................................................................................................................................2- 16
2.3.3.1 APC Control ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 16
2.3.3.2 APC Control ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 17
2.3.3.3 BD Correction ........................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 17
2.3.3.4 BD Correction ........................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 20
2.3.4 Laser Scanner Motor Control.................................................................................................................................2- 22
2.3.4.1 Controlling the Speed of the Laser Scanner Motor................................................................................................................ 2- 22
2.3.4.2 Controlling the Speed of the Laser Scanner Motor................................................................................................................ 2- 22
2.4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM................................................................................................................ 2- 24
2.4.1 Overview/Configuration..........................................................................................................................................2- 24
2.4.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 24
2.4.1.2 Printing Process..................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 24
2.4.1.3 Static Image Formation Block ................................................................................................................................................ 2- 25
2.4.1.4 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 26
2.4.1.5 Developing Block ................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 27
2.4.1.6 Printing Process..................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 28
2.4.1.7 Transfer Block........................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 29
2.4.1.8 Fixing Block............................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 31
2.4.1.9 Static Image Formation Block ................................................................................................................................................ 2- 31
2.4.1.10 ITB Cleaning Block............................................................................................................................................................... 2- 33
2.4.1.11 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Block ................................................................................................................................... 2- 33
2.4.1.12 Developing Block ................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 34
2.4.1.13 Transfer Block ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 35
2.4.1.14 Fixing Block.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 36
2.4.1.15 ITB Cleaning Block............................................................................................................................................................... 2- 37
2.4.1.16 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Block ................................................................................................................................... 2- 37
2.4.2 High-Voltage Control..............................................................................................................................................2- 38
2.4.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 38
2.4.2.2 Generation of the Primary Charging Bias .............................................................................................................................. 2- 39
2.4.2.3 Generation of the Developing Bias ........................................................................................................................................ 2- 39
2.4.2.4 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 40
2.4.2.5 Generation of the Primary Transfer Bias ............................................................................................................................... 2- 40
2.4.2.6 Generation of the Secondary Transfer Bias........................................................................................................................... 2- 41
2.4.2.7 Generation of the Primary Charging Bias .............................................................................................................................. 2- 41
2.4.2.8 Generation of the Developing Bias ........................................................................................................................................ 2- 41
2.4.2.9 Generation of the Primary Transfer Bias ............................................................................................................................... 2- 41
2.4.2.10 Generation of the Secondary Transfer Bias......................................................................................................................... 2- 41
2.4.3 Image Stabilizaton Control.....................................................................................................................................2- 42
2.4.3.1 Overview of Image Stabilization............................................................................................................................................. 2- 42
2.4.3.2 Timing of Image Stabilization Control .................................................................................................................................... 2- 42
2.4.3.3 Drum Film Thickness Detection ............................................................................................................................................. 2- 43
 Contents

2.4.3.4 ATR Control ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 44

2.4.3.5 D-max Control........................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 45
2.4.3.6 D-half Control......................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 48
2.4.3.7 Overview of Image Stabilization............................................................................................................................................. 2- 51
2.4.3.8 Abridged D-half Control ......................................................................................................................................................... 2- 52
2.4.3.9 Color Displacement Correction Control ................................................................................................................................. 2- 53
2.4.3.10 ATVC Control ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 57
2.4.3.11 Timing of Image Stabilization Control .................................................................................................................................. 2- 59
2.4.3.12 Drum Film Thickness Detection ........................................................................................................................................... 2- 59
2.4.3.13 ATR Control ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 60
2.4.3.14 D-max Control ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 61
2.4.3.15 D-half Control ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 64
2.4.3.16 Abridged D-half Control........................................................................................................................................................ 2- 67
2.4.3.17 Color Displacement Correction Control................................................................................................................................ 2- 68
2.4.3.18 ATVC Control ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 72
2.4.4 Toner Cartridge ..................................................................................................................................................... 2- 74
2.4.4.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 74
2.4.4.2 Detecting the Presence/Absence of the Toner Cartridge ...................................................................................................... 2- 74
2.4.4.3 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 75
2.4.4.4 Supplying Toner..................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 76
2.4.4.5 Detecting the Presence/Absence of the Toner Cartridge ...................................................................................................... 2- 78
2.4.4.6 Supplying Toner..................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 78
2.4.4.7 Detecting the Level of Toner.................................................................................................................................................. 2- 80
2.4.4.8 Detecting the Level of Toner.................................................................................................................................................. 2- 81
2.4.5 Drum Cartridge ...................................................................................................................................................... 2- 82
2.4.5.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 82
2.4.5.2 Detecting the Presence/Absence of the Drum Cartridge ....................................................................................................... 2- 83
2.4.5.3 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 84
2.4.5.4 Identifying a New/Old Drum Cartridge ................................................................................................................................... 2- 84
2.4.5.5 Detecting the Presence/Absence of the Drum Cartridge ....................................................................................................... 2- 86
2.4.5.6 Detecting the Life of the Drum ............................................................................................................................................... 2- 87
2.4.5.7 Opening/Closing the Toner Shutter ....................................................................................................................................... 2- 88
2.4.5.8 Identifying a New/Old Drum Cartridge ................................................................................................................................... 2- 90
2.4.5.9 Detecting the Life of the Drum ............................................................................................................................................... 2- 91
2.4.5.10 Opening/Closing the Toner Shutter...................................................................................................................................... 2- 92
2.4.6 Transfer Unit.......................................................................................................................................................... 2- 94
2.4.6.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 94
2.4.6.2 Primary Transfer Block .......................................................................................................................................................... 2- 94
2.4.6.3 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 94
2.4.6.4 ITB Soiling Removal Sequence Control................................................................................................................................. 2- 95
2.4.6.5 Primary Transfer Block .......................................................................................................................................................... 2- 96
2.4.6.6 ITB Soiling Removal Sequence Control................................................................................................................................. 2- 96
2.4.6.7 Secondary Transfer Block...................................................................................................................................................... 2- 97
2.4.6.8 Secondary Transfer Block...................................................................................................................................................... 2- 97
2.4.7 Waste Toner Collection ......................................................................................................................................... 2- 97
2.4.7.1 Collecting the Waste Toner.................................................................................................................................................... 2- 97
2.4.7.2 Collecting the Waste Toner.................................................................................................................................................... 2- 98
2.4.7.3 Detecting the Level of Waste Toner....................................................................................................................................... 2- 99
2.4.7.4 Preventing Spilling of Waste Toner...................................................................................................................................... 2- 101
2.4.7.5 Detecting the Level of Waste Toner..................................................................................................................................... 2- 102
2.4.7.6 Preventing Spilling of Waste Toner...................................................................................................................................... 2- 103
2.5 Pickup/Feeding/Delivery System ............................................................................................................2- 105
2.5.1 Overview/Configuration ....................................................................................................................................... 2- 105
2.5.1.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 105
2.5.1.2 Major Functional Areas ........................................................................................................................................................ 2- 105
2.5.1.3 Paper Paths ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 105
2.5.1.4 Arrangement of Rollers ........................................................................................................................................................ 2- 106
2.5.1.5 Arrangement of Sensors ...................................................................................................................................................... 2- 107
2.5.1.6 Arrangement of Clutches and Solenoids ............................................................................................................................. 2- 107
2.5.1.7 Overview .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 108
2.5.1.8 Major Functional Areas ........................................................................................................................................................ 2- 108
 Contents

2.5.1.9 Paper Paths ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 109

2.5.1.10 Arrangement of Rollers ...................................................................................................................................................... 2- 110
2.5.1.11 Arrangement of Sensors .................................................................................................................................................... 2- 111
2.5.1.12 Arrangement of Clutches and Solenoids............................................................................................................................ 2- 112
2.5.2 Other Control .......................................................................................................................................................2- 113
2.5.2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 113
2.5.2.2 Pickup Control...................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 114
2.5.2.3 Registration Control ............................................................................................................................................................. 2- 115
2.5.2.4 Fixing Arch Control .............................................................................................................................................................. 2- 117
2.5.2.5 Duplexing Control ................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 118
2.5.2.6 Detecting Paper Size for Transport...................................................................................................................................... 2- 118
2.5.2.7 Cassette Size Detection....................................................................................................................................................... 2- 119
2.5.2.8 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper .......................................................................................................................... 2- 119
2.5.2.9 Overview .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 120
2.5.2.10 Pickup Control.................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 121
2.5.2.11 Registration Control ........................................................................................................................................................... 2- 122
2.5.2.12 Fixing Arch Control............................................................................................................................................................. 2- 124
2.5.2.13 Duplexing Control............................................................................................................................................................... 2- 125
2.5.2.14 Detecting Paper Size for Transport.................................................................................................................................... 2- 125
2.5.2.15 Cassette Size Detection..................................................................................................................................................... 2- 126
2.5.2.16 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper ........................................................................................................................ 2- 126
2.5.3 Detecting Jams ....................................................................................................................................................2- 127
2.5.3.1 Jam Detection Outline.......................................................................................................................................................... 2- 127
2.5.3.2 Delay Jams .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 129
2.5.3.3 Stationary Jams ................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 131
2.5.3.4 Other Jams .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 132
2.5.4 Finisher ................................................................................................................................................................2- 134
2.5.4.1 Basic Construction ............................................................................................................................................................... 2- 134
2.5.4.2 Basic Operation ................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 138
2.5.4.3 Feed Drive System .............................................................................................................................................................. 2- 142
2.5.4.4 Process Tray Assembly ....................................................................................................................................................... 2- 145
2.5.4.5 Staple Operation .................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 147
2.5.4.6 Detecting Jams .................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 148
2.5.4.7 Power Supply....................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 148
2.6 FIXING UNIT SYSTEM .......................................................................................................................... 2- 149
2.6.1 Overview/Configuration........................................................................................................................................2- 149
2.6.1.1 Major Components............................................................................................................................................................... 2- 149
2.6.1.2 Construction of the Control System ..................................................................................................................................... 2- 149
2.6.1.3 Major Components............................................................................................................................................................... 2- 150
2.6.1.4 Construction of the Control System ..................................................................................................................................... 2- 151
2.6.2 Various Control Mechanisms ...............................................................................................................................2- 152
2.6.2.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Unit .............................................................................................................................. 2- 152
2.6.2.2 Fixing Temperature Control ................................................................................................................................................. 2- 153
2.6.3 Protective Functions ............................................................................................................................................2- 157
2.6.3.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 157
2.6.3.2 Fixing System Error Code.................................................................................................................................................... 2- 158
2.6.3.3 Overview .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 159
2.6.3.4 Fixing System Error Code.................................................................................................................................................... 2- 160
2.7 EXTERNAL AND CONTROLS SYSTEM ............................................................................................... 2- 161
2.7.1 Fan.......................................................................................................................................................................2- 161
2.7.1.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 161
2.7.1.2 Sequence of Operation ........................................................................................................................................................ 2- 161
2.7.1.3 Overview .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 162
2.7.1.4 Sequence of Operation ........................................................................................................................................................ 2- 162
2.7.2 Power Supply.......................................................................................................................................................2- 163
2.7.2.1 Power Supply....................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 163
2.7.2.2 Other Function ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 165
2.8 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ............................................................................................................... 2- 165
2.8.1 Construction.........................................................................................................................................................2- 165
2.8.1.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 165
 Contents

2.8.1.2 Overview .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 165

2.8.2 DC Controller....................................................................................................................................................... 2- 165
2.8.2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 165
2.8.2.2 Operation of Various Blocks ................................................................................................................................................ 2- 166
2.8.2.3 Controlling the Motors and Fans.......................................................................................................................................... 2- 167
2.8.2.4 Overview .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 168
2.8.2.5 Operation of Various Blocks ................................................................................................................................................ 2- 169
2.8.2.6 Controlling the Motors and Fans.......................................................................................................................................... 2- 170
2.8.3 Video Controller PCB .......................................................................................................................................... 2- 171
2.8.3.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 171
2.8.3.2 Overview .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 172
2.8.3.3 Outline of the Block (operation) ........................................................................................................................................... 2- 172
2.8.3.4 Outline of the Block (operation) ........................................................................................................................................... 2- 174

Chapter 3 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

3.1 Before Parts Replacement .........................................................................................................................3- 1
3.1.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 1
3.1.2 Arrangement of the External Covers ....................................................................................................................... 3- 1
3.1.3 Points to Note About the Optional HDD .................................................................................................................. 3- 2
3.1.4 Removing the Toner Cartridge ................................................................................................................................ 3- 2
3.1.5 Removing the Drum Cartridge................................................................................................................................. 3- 3
3.1.6 General.................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 6
3.1.7 Arrangement of the External Covers ....................................................................................................................... 3- 6
3.1.8 Points to Note About the Optional HDD .................................................................................................................. 3- 7
3.1.9 Removing the Toner Cartridge ................................................................................................................................ 3- 7
3.1.10 Removing the Drum Cartridge ............................................................................................................................... 3- 8
3.2 EXTERNAL AND CONTROLS SYSTEM .................................................................................................3- 10
3.2.1 Rear Cover ............................................................................................................................................................ 3- 10
3.2.1.1 Removing the Rear Cover ..................................................................................................................................................... 3- 10
3.2.1.2 Detaching Rear Cover ........................................................................................................................................................... 3- 10
3.2.2 Right Cover............................................................................................................................................................ 3- 10
3.2.2.1 Preparation for Removing the Right Cover ............................................................................................................................ 3- 10
3.2.2.2 Removing the Right Cover..................................................................................................................................................... 3- 10
3.2.2.3 Before Detaching Right Cover ............................................................................................................................................... 3- 11
3.2.2.4 Detaching Right Cover........................................................................................................................................................... 3- 11
3.2.3 Inside Right Cover ................................................................................................................................................. 3- 11
3.2.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Inside Right Cover ................................................................................................................. 3- 11
3.2.3.2 Removing the Inside Right Cover .......................................................................................................................................... 3- 11
3.2.3.3 Before Detaching Inner Right Cover ...................................................................................................................................... 3- 11
3.2.3.4 Detaching Inner Right Cover.................................................................................................................................................. 3- 12
3.2.4 Left Cover .............................................................................................................................................................. 3- 12
3.2.4.1 Before Detaching Left Cover.................................................................................................................................................. 3- 12
3.2.4.2 Detaching Left Cover ............................................................................................................................................................. 3- 12
3.2.4.3 Removing the Left Cover ....................................................................................................................................................... 3- 13
3.2.5 Inside Left Cover ................................................................................................................................................... 3- 14
3.2.5.1 Before Detaching Inner Left Cover ........................................................................................................................................ 3- 14
3.2.5.2 Preparation for Removing the Inside Left Cover.................................................................................................................... 3- 14
3.2.5.3 Detaching Inner Left Cover .................................................................................................................................................... 3- 14
3.2.5.4 Removing the Inside Left Cover............................................................................................................................................. 3- 14
3.2.6 Upper Cover .......................................................................................................................................................... 3- 14
3.2.6.1 Before Detaching Upper Cover.............................................................................................................................................. 3- 14
3.2.6.2 Detaching Upper Cover ......................................................................................................................................................... 3- 15
3.2.6.3 Preparation for Removing the Upper Cover........................................................................................................................... 3- 16
3.2.6.4 Removing the Upper Cover ................................................................................................................................................... 3- 16
3.2.7 Front Cover............................................................................................................................................................ 3- 17
3.2.7.1 Before Detaching Front Cover ............................................................................................................................................... 3- 17
3.2.7.2 Detaching Front Cover........................................................................................................................................................... 3- 17
3.2.7.3 Preparation for Removing the Front Cover ............................................................................................................................ 3- 18
Contents

3.2.7.4 Removing the Front Cover..................................................................................................................................................... 3- 18

3.2.8 Front Cover (left)....................................................................................................................................................3- 19
3.2.8.1 Before Detaching Front Cover (Left)...................................................................................................................................... 3- 19
3.2.8.2 Detaching Front Cover (Left) ................................................................................................................................................. 3- 19
3.2.8.3 Preparation for Removing the Front Cover (left).................................................................................................................... 3- 19
3.2.8.4 Removing the Front Cover (left)............................................................................................................................................. 3- 20
3.2.9 Front Cover (right)..................................................................................................................................................3- 20
3.2.9.1 Before Detaching Front Cover (Right) ................................................................................................................................... 3- 20
3.2.9.2 Detaching Front Cover (Right) ............................................................................................................................................... 3- 20
3.2.9.3 Preparation for Removing the Front Cover (right).................................................................................................................. 3- 21
3.2.9.4 Removing the Front Cover (right) .......................................................................................................................................... 3- 21
3.2.10 Inside Front Cover (right) .....................................................................................................................................3- 21
3.2.10.1 Before Detaching Inner Front Cover (Right) ........................................................................................................................ 3- 21
3.2.10.2 Preparation for Removing the Inside Front Cover (right) ..................................................................................................... 3- 22
3.2.10.3 Removing the Inside Front Cover (right) .............................................................................................................................. 3- 22
3.2.10.4 Detaching Inner Front Cover (Right) .................................................................................................................................... 3- 22
3.2.11 Inside Front Cover (left) .......................................................................................................................................3- 22
3.2.11.1 Removing the Inside Front Cover (left) ................................................................................................................................ 3- 22
3.2.11.2 Before Detaching Inner Front Cover (Left)........................................................................................................................... 3- 23
3.2.11.3 Detaching Inner Front Cover (Left) ...................................................................................................................................... 3- 23
3.2.12 Waste Toner Cover ..............................................................................................................................................3- 23
3.2.12.1 Removing the Waste Toner Cover....................................................................................................................................... 3- 23
3.2.12.2 Detaching Waste Toner Cover............................................................................................................................................. 3- 23
3.2.13 Controller Box ......................................................................................................................................................3- 24
3.2.13.1 Before Removing Controller Box.......................................................................................................................................... 3- 24
3.2.13.2 Removing the Controller Box ............................................................................................................................................... 3- 25
3.2.13.3 Removing Controller Box ..................................................................................................................................................... 3- 25
3.2.14 DC Controller PCB ...............................................................................................................................................3- 26
3.2.14.1 Preparation for Removing the DC Controller PCB ............................................................................................................... 3- 26
3.2.14.2 Removing the DC Controller PCB........................................................................................................................................ 3- 26
3.2.14.3 Before Removing DC Controller PCB .................................................................................................................................. 3- 26
3.2.14.4 Removing DC Controller PCB.............................................................................................................................................. 3- 27
3.2.15 Video Controller PCB ...........................................................................................................................................3- 27
3.2.15.1 Preparation for Removing the Video Controller PCB ........................................................................................................... 3- 27
3.2.15.2 Before Removing Video Controller PCB .............................................................................................................................. 3- 27
3.2.15.3 Removing the Video Controller PCB.................................................................................................................................... 3- 27
3.2.15.4 Removing Video Controller PCB.......................................................................................................................................... 3- 28
3.2.16 HDD .....................................................................................................................................................................3- 28
3.2.16.1 Removing the HDD .............................................................................................................................................................. 3- 28
3.2.17 Low-Voltage Power Supply Assembly .................................................................................................................3- 29
3.2.17.1 Preparation for Removing the Low-Voltage Power Supply Unit........................................................................................... 3- 29
3.2.17.2 Removing the Low-Voltage Power Supply Unit ................................................................................................................... 3- 29
3.2.17.3 Before Removing Low-Voltage Power Unit.......................................................................................................................... 3- 29
3.2.17.4 Removing Low-Voltage Power Unit ..................................................................................................................................... 3- 29
3.2.18 All Night Power Supply PCB ................................................................................................................................3- 30
3.2.18.1 Before Removing All-Night Power Supply PCB ................................................................................................................... 3- 30
3.2.18.2 Removing All-Night Power Supply PCB............................................................................................................................... 3- 30
3.2.19 HVT1 ....................................................................................................................................................................3- 30
3.2.19.1 Preparation for Removing the HVT1 .................................................................................................................................... 3- 30
3.2.19.2 Removing the HVT1............................................................................................................................................................. 3- 30
3.2.19.3 Before Removing HVT1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 3- 32
3.2.19.4 Removing HVT1................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 32
3.2.20 HVT2 ....................................................................................................................................................................3- 33
3.2.20.1 Before Removing HVT2 ....................................................................................................................................................... 3- 33
3.2.20.2 Preparation for Removing the HVT2 .................................................................................................................................... 3- 33
3.2.20.3 Removing HVT2................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 33
3.2.20.4 Removing the HVT2............................................................................................................................................................. 3- 34
3.2.21 Fuse Contact PCB ...............................................................................................................................................3- 34
3.2.21.1 Preparation for Removing the Fuse Contact PCB ............................................................................................................... 3- 34
3.2.21.2 Removing the Fuse Contact PCB ........................................................................................................................................ 3- 35
 Contents

3.2.21.3 Before Removing Fuse Contact PCB................................................................................................................................... 3- 36

3.2.21.4 Removing Fuse Contact PCB .............................................................................................................................................. 3- 36
3.2.22 Color Displacement Sensor PCB A ..................................................................................................................... 3- 37
3.2.22.1 Removing the Color Displacement Sensor PCB A .............................................................................................................. 3- 37
3.2.22.2 Before Removing Color Displacement Sensor PCB A......................................................................................................... 3- 38
3.2.22.3 Removing Color Displacement Sensor PCB A .................................................................................................................... 3- 38
3.2.23 Color Displacement Sensor PCB B ..................................................................................................................... 3- 39
3.2.23.1 Before Removing Color Displacement Sensor PCB B......................................................................................................... 3- 39
3.2.23.2 Removing Color Displacement Sensor PCB B .................................................................................................................... 3- 39
3.2.23.3 Removing the Color Displacement Sensor PCB B .............................................................................................................. 3- 40
3.2.24 Machine Outside Environment Sensor ................................................................................................................ 3- 41
3.2.24.1 Preparation for Removing the Machine Outside Environment Sensor................................................................................. 3- 41
3.2.24.2 Removing the Machine Outside Environment Sensor ......................................................................................................... 3- 41
3.2.24.3 Before Removing External Environment Sensor.................................................................................................................. 3- 41
3.2.24.4 Removing External Environment Sensor ............................................................................................................................. 3- 41
3.2.25 Interlock Switch.................................................................................................................................................... 3- 42
3.2.25.1 Preparation for Removing the Interlock Switch .................................................................................................................... 3- 42
3.2.25.2 Removing the Interlock Switch............................................................................................................................................. 3- 42
3.2.25.3 Before Removing Inter Lock Switch ..................................................................................................................................... 3- 42
3.2.25.4 Removing Inter Lock Switch................................................................................................................................................. 3- 42
3.2.26 Cartridge Fan....................................................................................................................................................... 3- 43
3.2.26.1 Removing the Cartridge Fan ................................................................................................................................................ 3- 43
3.2.26.2 Before Removing Cartridge Fan .......................................................................................................................................... 3- 43
3.2.26.3 Removing Cartridge Fan ...................................................................................................................................................... 3- 43
3.2.27 Power Supply Fan ............................................................................................................................................... 3- 44
3.2.27.1 Removing the Power Supply Fan......................................................................................................................................... 3- 44
3.2.27.2 Before Removing Power Supply Fan ................................................................................................................................... 3- 44
3.2.27.3 Removing Power Supply Fan............................................................................................................................................... 3- 44
3.2.28 Drive Fan ............................................................................................................................................................. 3- 44
3.2.28.1 Before Removing Drive Fan................................................................................................................................................. 3- 44
3.2.28.2 Preparation for Removing the Drive Fan.............................................................................................................................. 3- 44
3.2.28.3 Removing Drive Fan ............................................................................................................................................................ 3- 44
3.2.28.4 Removing the Drive Fan ...................................................................................................................................................... 3- 45
3.2.29 Fixing Fan 1 ......................................................................................................................................................... 3- 45
3.2.29.1 Before Removing Fixing Fan 1............................................................................................................................................. 3- 45
3.2.29.2 Removing Fixing Fan 1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 3- 45
3.2.29.3 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Fan 1 ......................................................................................................................... 3- 46
3.2.29.4 Removing the Fixing Fan 1 .................................................................................................................................................. 3- 46
3.2.30 Fixing Fan 2 ......................................................................................................................................................... 3- 46
3.2.30.1 Before Removing Fixing Fan 2............................................................................................................................................. 3- 46
3.2.30.2 Removing Fixing Fan 2 ........................................................................................................................................................ 3- 47
3.2.30.3 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Fan 2 ......................................................................................................................... 3- 47
3.2.30.4 Removing the Fixing Fan 2 .................................................................................................................................................. 3- 47
3.2.31 Controller Fan ...................................................................................................................................................... 3- 47
3.2.31.1 Preparation for Removing the Controller Fan ...................................................................................................................... 3- 47
3.2.31.2 Removing the Controller Fan ............................................................................................................................................... 3- 47
3.2.31.3 Before Removing Controller Fan.......................................................................................................................................... 3- 48
3.2.31.4 Removing Controller Fan ..................................................................................................................................................... 3- 48
3.2.32 Color Displacement Sensor Shutter Solenoid ..................................................................................................... 3- 48
3.2.32.1 Removing the Color Displacement Sensor Solenoid ........................................................................................................... 3- 48
3.2.32.2 Before Removing Color Displacement Sensor Shutter Solenoid ......................................................................................... 3- 50
3.2.32.3 Removing Color Displacement Sensor Shutter Solenoid..................................................................................................... 3- 50
3.3 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM .................................................................................................................3- 50
3.3.1 Laser Scanner Unit................................................................................................................................................ 3- 50
3.3.1.1 Preparation for Removing the Laser Scanner Unit ................................................................................................................ 3- 50
3.3.1.2 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit ......................................................................................................................................... 3- 51
3.3.1.3 After Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit................................................................................................................................. 3- 54
3.3.1.4 Before Removing Laser Scanner Unit ................................................................................................................................... 3- 54
3.3.1.5 Removing Laser Scanner Unit ............................................................................................................................................... 3- 54
3.3.1.6 Points to Note When Replacing Laser Scanner Unit ............................................................................................................. 3- 58
 Contents

3.4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM................................................................................................................ 3- 59

3.4.1 Drum/ITB Motor .....................................................................................................................................................3- 59
3.4.1.1 Preparation for Removing the Drum/ITB Motor ..................................................................................................................... 3- 59
3.4.1.2 Removing the Drum/ITB Motor .............................................................................................................................................. 3- 59
3.4.1.3 Before Removing Drum/ITB Motor......................................................................................................................................... 3- 59
3.4.1.4 Removing Drum/ITB Motor .................................................................................................................................................... 3- 59
3.4.2 Hopper Drive Unit (Y).............................................................................................................................................3- 60
3.4.2.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Drive Unit (Y)............................................................................................................. 3- 60
3.4.2.2 Removing the Hopper Drive Unit (Y) ..................................................................................................................................... 3- 60
3.4.2.3 Before Removing Hopper Drive Unit (Y)................................................................................................................................ 3- 60
3.4.2.4 Removing Hopper Drive Unit (Y) ........................................................................................................................................... 3- 61
3.4.3 Hopper Drive Unit (M) ............................................................................................................................................3- 61
3.4.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Drive Unit (M) ............................................................................................................ 3- 61
3.4.3.2 Removing the Hopper Drive Unit (M)..................................................................................................................................... 3- 61
3.4.3.3 Before Removing Hopper Drive Unit (M) ............................................................................................................................... 3- 61
3.4.3.4 Removing Hopper Drive Unit (M)........................................................................................................................................... 3- 61
3.4.4 Hopper Drive Unit (C) ............................................................................................................................................3- 62
3.4.4.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Drive Unit (C) ............................................................................................................ 3- 62
3.4.4.2 Removing the Hopper Drive Unit (C) ..................................................................................................................................... 3- 62
3.4.4.3 Before Removing Hopper Drive Unit (C)................................................................................................................................ 3- 62
3.4.4.4 Removing Hopper Drive Unit (C) ........................................................................................................................................... 3- 62
3.4.5 Hopper Drive Unit (Bk)...........................................................................................................................................3- 62
3.4.5.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Drive Unit (Bk)........................................................................................................... 3- 62
3.4.5.2 Removing the Hopper Drive Unit (Bk).................................................................................................................................... 3- 63
3.4.5.3 Before Removing Hopper Drive Unit (Bk) .............................................................................................................................. 3- 63
3.4.5.4 Removing Hopper Drive Unit (Bk).......................................................................................................................................... 3- 63
3.4.6 Hopper Shutter Unit (Y) .........................................................................................................................................3- 63
3.4.6.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Y) ................................................................................................ 3- 63
3.4.6.2 Removing the Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Y)......................................................................................................................... 3- 63
3.4.6.3 Before Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Y) ................................................................................................................... 3- 64
3.4.6.4 Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Y)............................................................................................................................... 3- 64
3.4.7 Hopper Shutter Unit (M).........................................................................................................................................3- 65
3.4.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (M) ............................................................................................... 3- 65
3.4.7.2 Removing the Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (M) ........................................................................................................................ 3- 65
3.4.7.3 Before Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (M)................................................................................................................... 3- 66
3.4.7.4 Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (M) .............................................................................................................................. 3- 66
3.4.8 Hopper Shutter Unit(C) ..........................................................................................................................................3- 67
3.4.8.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (C)................................................................................................ 3- 67
3.4.8.2 Removing the Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (C)......................................................................................................................... 3- 67
3.4.8.3 Before Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (C) ................................................................................................................... 3- 68
3.4.8.4 Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (C)............................................................................................................................... 3- 68
3.4.9 Hopper Shutter Unit (Bk)........................................................................................................................................3- 69
3.4.9.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Bk) .............................................................................................. 3- 69
3.4.9.2 Removing the Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Bk) ....................................................................................................................... 3- 69
3.4.9.3 Before Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Bk) ................................................................................................................. 3- 70
3.4.9.4 Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Bk) ............................................................................................................................. 3- 70
3.4.10 Toner Supply Pipe Unit (Y) ..................................................................................................................................3- 71
3.4.10.1 Preparation for Removing the Toner Supply Pipe Unit (Y) .................................................................................................. 3- 71
3.4.10.2 Removing the Toner Supply Pipe Unit (Y) ........................................................................................................................... 3- 71
3.4.10.3 Before Removing Toner Supply Pipe Unit (Y)...................................................................................................................... 3- 71
3.4.10.4 Removing Toner Supply Pipe Unit (Y) ................................................................................................................................. 3- 72
3.4.11 Toner Supply Pipe Unit (M)..................................................................................................................................3- 72
3.4.11.1 Preparation for Removing the Toner Supply Pipe Unit (M).................................................................................................. 3- 72
3.4.11.2 Removing the Toner Supply Pipe Unit (M)........................................................................................................................... 3- 72
3.4.11.3 Before Removing Toner Supply Pipe Unit (M) ..................................................................................................................... 3- 72
3.4.11.4 Removing Toner Supply Pipe Unit (M)................................................................................................................................. 3- 73
3.4.12 Toner Supply Pipe Unit (C) ..................................................................................................................................3- 73
3.4.12.1 Preparation for Removing the Toner Supply Pipe Unit (C) .................................................................................................. 3- 73
3.4.12.2 Removing the Toner Supply Pipe Unit (C) ........................................................................................................................... 3- 73
3.4.12.3 Before Removing Toner Supply Pipe Unit (C) ..................................................................................................................... 3- 73
 Contents

3.4.12.4 Removing Toner Supply Pipe Unit (C) ................................................................................................................................. 3- 74

3.4.13 Toner Supply Pipe Unit (Bk) ................................................................................................................................ 3- 74
3.4.13.1 Preparation for Removing the Toner Supply Pipe Unit (Bk)................................................................................................. 3- 74
3.4.13.2 Removing the Toner Supply Pipe Unit (Bk) ......................................................................................................................... 3- 74
3.4.13.3 Before Removing Toner Supply Pipe Unit (Bk).................................................................................................................... 3- 74
3.4.13.4 Removing Toner Supply Pipe Unit (Bk) ............................................................................................................................... 3- 75
3.4.14 Hopper Supply Unit.............................................................................................................................................. 3- 75
3.4.14.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Supply Unit .............................................................................................................. 3- 75
3.4.14.2 Removing the Hopper Supply Unit....................................................................................................................................... 3- 75
3.4.14.3 Before Removing Hopper Supply Unit ................................................................................................................................. 3- 77
3.4.14.4 Removing Hopper Supply Unit............................................................................................................................................. 3- 77
3.4.15 Waste Toner Feeder Unit .................................................................................................................................... 3- 80
3.4.15.1 Before Removing Waste Toner Primary Feed Unit.............................................................................................................. 3- 80
3.4.15.2 Removing Waste Toner Primary Feed Unit ......................................................................................................................... 3- 80
3.4.16 Y/M Developing Motor ......................................................................................................................................... 3- 83
3.4.16.1 Preparation for Removing the Y/M_Developing Motor......................................................................................................... 3- 83
3.4.16.2 Removing the Y/M_Developing Motor ................................................................................................................................. 3- 83
3.4.16.3 Before Removing Y/M Developing Motor............................................................................................................................. 3- 83
3.4.16.4 Removing Y/M Developing Motor ........................................................................................................................................ 3- 83
3.4.17 C/Bk Developing Motor........................................................................................................................................ 3- 83
3.4.17.1 Preparation for Removing the C/Bk_Developing Motor ....................................................................................................... 3- 83
3.4.17.2 Removing the C/Bk_Developing Motor ................................................................................................................................ 3- 84
3.4.17.3 Before Removing C/Bk Developing Motor ........................................................................................................................... 3- 84
3.4.17.4 Removing C/Bk Developing Motor ....................................................................................................................................... 3- 84
3.4.18 Y Developing Sylinder Clutch .............................................................................................................................. 3- 84
3.4.18.1 Preparation for Removing the Y Developing Sleeve Clutch................................................................................................. 3- 84
3.4.18.2 Removing the Y Developing Sleeve Clutch ......................................................................................................................... 3- 84
3.4.18.3 Before Removing Y Developing Sleeve Clutch.................................................................................................................... 3- 85
3.4.18.4 Removing Y Developing Sleeve Clutch ............................................................................................................................... 3- 85
3.4.19 M Developing Sylinder Clutch.............................................................................................................................. 3- 86
3.4.19.1 Preparation for Removing the M Developing Sleeve Clutch ................................................................................................ 3- 86
3.4.19.2 Removing the M Developing Sleeve Clutch......................................................................................................................... 3- 86
3.4.19.3 Before Removing M Developing Sleeve Clutch ................................................................................................................... 3- 86
3.4.19.4 Removing M Developing Sleeve Clutch............................................................................................................................... 3- 87
3.4.20 C Developing Sylinder Clutch .............................................................................................................................. 3- 87
3.4.20.1 Preparation for Removing the C Developing Sleeve Clutch ................................................................................................ 3- 87
3.4.20.2 Removing the C Developing Sleeve Clutch ......................................................................................................................... 3- 87
3.4.20.3 Before Removing C Developing Sleeve Clutch.................................................................................................................... 3- 88
3.4.20.4 Removing C Developing Sleeve Clutch ............................................................................................................................... 3- 88
3.4.21 Bk Developing Sylinder Clutch ............................................................................................................................ 3- 89
3.4.21.1 Preparation for Removing the Bk Developing Sleeve Clutch............................................................................................... 3- 89
3.4.21.2 Removing the Bk Developing Sleeve Clutch........................................................................................................................ 3- 89
3.4.21.3 Before Removing Bk Developing Sleeve Clutch .................................................................................................................. 3- 89
3.4.21.4 Removing Bk Developing Sleeve Clutch.............................................................................................................................. 3- 90
3.4.22 Intermediate Transfer Unit ................................................................................................................................... 3- 90
3.4.22.1 Removing the ITB ................................................................................................................................................................ 3- 90
3.4.22.2 After Replacing the ITB ........................................................................................................................................................ 3- 91
3.4.22.3 Before Removing ITB........................................................................................................................................................... 3- 91
3.4.22.4 Removing ITB ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 91
3.4.22.5 Points to Note When Replacing ITB..................................................................................................................................... 3- 92
3.4.23 Secondary Transfer Outside Roller ..................................................................................................................... 3- 92
3.4.23.1 Preparation for Removing the Secondary Transfer Outside Roller...................................................................................... 3- 92
3.4.23.2 Removing the Secondary Transfer Outside Roller............................................................................................................... 3- 92
3.4.23.3 Before Removing Secondary Transfer External Roller ........................................................................................................ 3- 93
3.4.23.4 Removing Secondary Transfer External Roller.................................................................................................................... 3- 93
3.4.24 Waste Toner Sensor Unit .................................................................................................................................... 3- 93
3.4.24.1 Preparation for Removing the Waste Toner Senser Unit..................................................................................................... 3- 93
3.4.24.2 Removing the Waste Toner Sensor Unit.............................................................................................................................. 3- 93
3.4.24.3 Before Removing Waste Toner Sensor Unit ........................................................................................................................ 3- 93
3.4.24.4 Removing Waste Toner Sensor Unit.................................................................................................................................... 3- 94
Contents

3.4.25 Y Toner Level Sensor ..........................................................................................................................................3- 94

3.4.25.1 Preparation for Removing the Y Toner Level Sensor .......................................................................................................... 3- 94
3.4.25.2 Removing the Y Toner Level Sensor ................................................................................................................................... 3- 94
3.4.25.3 Before Removing Y toner Level Sensor............................................................................................................................... 3- 94
3.4.25.4 Removing Y toner Level Sensor .......................................................................................................................................... 3- 94
3.4.26 M Toner Level Sensor..........................................................................................................................................3- 94
3.4.26.1 Preparation for Removing the M Toner Level Sensor.......................................................................................................... 3- 94
3.4.26.2 Removing the M Toner Level Sensor................................................................................................................................... 3- 95
3.4.26.3 Before Removing M toner Level Sensor .............................................................................................................................. 3- 95
3.4.26.4 Removing M toner Level Sensor.......................................................................................................................................... 3- 95
3.4.27 C Toner Level Sensor ..........................................................................................................................................3- 95
3.4.27.1 Preparation for Removing the C Toner Level Sensor .......................................................................................................... 3- 95
3.4.27.2 Removing the C Toner Level Sensor ................................................................................................................................... 3- 95
3.4.27.3 Before Removing C toner Level Sensor............................................................................................................................... 3- 95
3.4.27.4 Removing C toner Level Sensor .......................................................................................................................................... 3- 95
3.4.28 Bk Toner Level Sensor.........................................................................................................................................3- 96
3.4.28.1 Preparation for Removing the Bk Toner Level Sensor......................................................................................................... 3- 96
3.4.28.2 Removing the Bk Toner Level Sensor ................................................................................................................................. 3- 96
3.4.28.3 Before Removing Bk toner Level Sensor ............................................................................................................................. 3- 96
3.4.28.4 Removing Bk toner Level Sensor......................................................................................................................................... 3- 96
3.4.29 Y Toner Supply Amount Sensor...........................................................................................................................3- 96
3.4.29.1 Preparation for Removing the Y Toner Supply Level Sensor .............................................................................................. 3- 96
3.4.29.2 Removing the Y Toner Supply Level Sensor ....................................................................................................................... 3- 96
3.4.29.3 Before Removing Y Toner Supply Sensor ........................................................................................................................... 3- 96
3.4.29.4 Removing Y Toner Supply Sensor....................................................................................................................................... 3- 96
3.4.30 M Toner Supply Amount Sensor ..........................................................................................................................3- 97
3.4.30.1 Preparation for Removing the M Toner Supply Level Sensor.............................................................................................. 3- 97
3.4.30.2 Removing the M Toner Supply Level Sensor....................................................................................................................... 3- 97
3.4.30.3 Before Removing M Toner Supply Sensor........................................................................................................................... 3- 97
3.4.30.4 Removing M Toner Supply Sensor ...................................................................................................................................... 3- 97
3.4.31 C Toner Supply Amount Sensor ..........................................................................................................................3- 97
3.4.31.1 Preparation for Removing the C Toner Supply Level Sensor .............................................................................................. 3- 97
3.4.31.2 Removing the C Toner Supply Level Sensor ....................................................................................................................... 3- 97
3.4.31.3 Before Removing C Toner Supply Sensor ........................................................................................................................... 3- 97
3.4.31.4 Removing C Toner Supply Sensor....................................................................................................................................... 3- 97
3.4.32 Bk Toner Supply Amount Sensor.........................................................................................................................3- 97
3.4.32.1 Preparation for Removing the Bk Toner Supply Level Sensor............................................................................................. 3- 97
3.4.32.2 Removing the Bk Toner Supply Level Sensor ..................................................................................................................... 3- 97
3.4.32.3 Before Removing Bk Toner Supply Sensor ......................................................................................................................... 3- 98
3.4.32.4 Removing Bk Toner Supply Sensor ..................................................................................................................................... 3- 98
3.4.33 Toner Cartridge Sensor........................................................................................................................................3- 98
3.4.33.1 Preparation for Removing the Toner Cartridge Sensor........................................................................................................ 3- 98
3.4.33.2 Removing the Toner Cartridge Sensor ................................................................................................................................ 3- 98
3.4.33.3 Before Removing Toner Cartridge Sensor........................................................................................................................... 3- 99
3.4.33.4 Removing Toner Cartridge Sensor ...................................................................................................................................... 3- 99
3.4.34 Waste Toner Shutter Open/closed Sensor ........................................................................................................3- 101
3.4.34.1 Preparation for Removing the Waste Toner Shutter Open/Closed Sensor........................................................................ 3- 101
3.4.34.2 Removing the Waste Toner Shutter Open/Closed Sensor ................................................................................................ 3- 101
3.4.34.3 Before Removing Waste Toner Shutter Sensor................................................................................................................. 3- 102
3.4.34.4 Removing Waste Toner Shutter Sensor ............................................................................................................................ 3- 102
3.4.35 Toner Shutter Position Sensor ...........................................................................................................................3- 103
3.4.35.1 Preparation for Removing the Toner Supply Shutter Open/Closed Sensor....................................................................... 3- 103
3.4.35.2 Removing the Toner Supply Shutter Open/Closed Sensor................................................................................................ 3- 103
3.4.35.3 Before Removing Toner Supply Shutter Sensor ................................................................................................................ 3- 104
3.4.35.4 Removing Toner Supply Shutter Sensor............................................................................................................................ 3- 104
3.4.36 Waste Toner Case Sensor.................................................................................................................................3- 105
3.4.36.1 Preparation for Removing the Waste Toner Case Sensor................................................................................................. 3- 105
3.4.36.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case Sensor.......................................................................................................................... 3- 105
3.4.36.3 Before Removing Waste Toner Case Sensor .................................................................................................................... 3- 106
3.4.36.4 Removing Waste Toner Case Sensor................................................................................................................................ 3- 106
 Contents

3.4.37 Y Toner Supply Motor........................................................................................................................................ 3- 106

3.4.37.1 Preparation for Removing the Y Toner Supply Motor ........................................................................................................ 3- 106
3.4.37.2 Removing the Y Toner Supply Motor ................................................................................................................................. 3- 106
3.4.37.3 Before Removing Y Toner Supply Motor ........................................................................................................................... 3- 106
3.4.37.4 Removing Y Toner Supply Motor ....................................................................................................................................... 3- 106
3.4.38 M Toner Supply Motor ....................................................................................................................................... 3- 106
3.4.38.1 Preparation for Removing the M Toner Supply Motor........................................................................................................ 3- 106
3.4.38.2 Removing the M Toner Supply Motor ................................................................................................................................ 3- 106
3.4.38.3 Before Removing M Toner Supply Motor........................................................................................................................... 3- 107
3.4.38.4 Removing M Toner Supply Motor ...................................................................................................................................... 3- 107
3.4.39 C Toner Supply Motor........................................................................................................................................ 3- 107
3.4.39.1 Preparation for Removing the C Toner Supply Motor ........................................................................................................ 3- 107
3.4.39.2 Removing the C Toner Supply Motor................................................................................................................................. 3- 107
3.4.39.3 Before Removing C Toner Supply Motor ........................................................................................................................... 3- 107
3.4.39.4 Removing C Toner Supply Motor....................................................................................................................................... 3- 107
3.4.40 Bk Toner Supply Motor ...................................................................................................................................... 3- 107
3.4.40.1 Preparation for Removing the Bk Toner Supply Motor ...................................................................................................... 3- 107
3.4.40.2 Removing the Bk Toner Supply Motor ............................................................................................................................... 3- 107
3.4.40.3 Before Removing Bk Toner Supply Motor.......................................................................................................................... 3- 108
3.4.40.4 Removing Bk Toner Supply Motor ..................................................................................................................................... 3- 108
3.4.41 Waste Toner Feed Motor................................................................................................................................... 3- 108
3.4.41.1 Preparation for Removing the Waste Toner Feeding Motor .............................................................................................. 3- 108
3.4.41.2 Removing the Waste Toner Feeding Motor ....................................................................................................................... 3- 108
3.4.41.3 Before Removing Waste Toner Feed Motor ...................................................................................................................... 3- 108
3.4.41.4 Removing Waste Toner Feed Motor .................................................................................................................................. 3- 108
3.4.42 Waste Toner Detection PCB.............................................................................................................................. 3- 109
3.4.42.1 Preparation for Removing the Waste Toner Case Full Sensor .......................................................................................... 3- 109
3.4.42.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case Full Sensor................................................................................................................... 3- 109
3.4.42.3 Before Removing Waste Toner Full Level Sensor ............................................................................................................. 3- 109
3.4.42.4 Removing Waste Toner Full Level Sensor......................................................................................................................... 3- 109
3.4.43 Waste Toner Case............................................................................................................................................. 3- 110
3.4.43.1 Removing the Waste Toner Case ...................................................................................................................................... 3- 110
3.4.43.2 Detaching Waste Toner Case ............................................................................................................................................ 3- 110
3.5 PICKUP/FEEDING/DELIVERY SYSTEM...............................................................................................3- 111
3.5.1 Pickup Motor........................................................................................................................................................ 3- 111
3.5.1.1 Preparation for Removing the Pickup Motor ........................................................................................................................ 3- 111
3.5.1.2 Removing the Pickup Motor................................................................................................................................................. 3- 111
3.5.1.3 Before Removing Pickup Motor ........................................................................................................................................... 3- 111
3.5.1.4 Removing Pickup Motor....................................................................................................................................................... 3- 111
3.5.2 Cassette Pickup Roller ........................................................................................................................................ 3- 111
3.5.2.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Roller ................................................................................................................................. 3- 111
3.5.2.2 Before Detaching Cassette Pickup Roller............................................................................................................................ 3- 112
3.5.2.3 Detaching Cassette Pickup Roller ....................................................................................................................................... 3- 112
3.5.3 Cassette Size Switch........................................................................................................................................... 3- 112
3.5.3.1 Removing the Cassette Size Switch .................................................................................................................................... 3- 112
3.5.3.2 Before Detaching Cassette Size Switch .............................................................................................................................. 3- 112
3.5.3.3 Detaching Cassette Size Switch .......................................................................................................................................... 3- 112
3.5.4 Cassette Paper Sensor ....................................................................................................................................... 3- 113
3.5.4.1 Preparation for Removing the Cassette Paper Sensor........................................................................................................ 3- 113
3.5.4.2 Removing the Cassette Paper Sensor................................................................................................................................. 3- 115
3.5.4.3 Before Removing Cassette Paper Sensor ........................................................................................................................... 3- 115
3.5.4.4 Removing Cassette Paper Sensor....................................................................................................................................... 3- 115
3.5.5 Cassette Pickup Clutch ....................................................................................................................................... 3- 117
3.5.5.1 Preparation for Removing the Cassette Pickup Clutch........................................................................................................ 3- 117
3.5.5.2 Removing the Cassette Pickup Clutch................................................................................................................................. 3- 117
3.5.5.3 Before Removing Cassette Pickup Clutch ........................................................................................................................... 3- 117
3.5.5.4 Removing Cassette Pickup Clutch....................................................................................................................................... 3- 117
3.5.6 Cassette Separation Pad..................................................................................................................................... 3- 118
3.5.6.1 Removing the Cassette Separation Pad.............................................................................................................................. 3- 118
3.5.6.2 Before Detaching Cassette Separation Pad ........................................................................................................................ 3- 118
Contents

3.5.6.3 Detaching Cassette Separation Pad.................................................................................................................................... 3- 118

3.5.7 Manual Pickup Unit ..............................................................................................................................................3- 119
3.5.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Manual Pickup Unit .............................................................................................................. 3- 119
3.5.7.2 Removing the Manual Pickup Unit....................................................................................................................................... 3- 119
3.5.7.3 Before Removing Manual Feed Pickup Unit ........................................................................................................................ 3- 120
3.5.7.4 Removing Manual Feed Pickup Unit.................................................................................................................................... 3- 121
3.5.8 Manual Pickup Roller ...........................................................................................................................................3- 122
3.5.8.1 Preparation for Removing the Manual Pickup Roller ........................................................................................................... 3- 122
3.5.8.2 Removing the Manual Pickup Roller.................................................................................................................................... 3- 122
3.5.8.3 Before Detaching Manual Feed Pickup Roller ..................................................................................................................... 3- 123
3.5.8.4 Detaching Manual Feed Pickup Roller................................................................................................................................. 3- 123
3.5.9 Manual Paper Sensor ..........................................................................................................................................3- 123
3.5.9.1 Removing the Manual Paper Sensor ................................................................................................................................... 3- 123
3.5.9.2 Before Removing Manual Feed Paper Sensor .................................................................................................................... 3- 123
3.5.9.3 Removing Manual Feed Paper Sensor................................................................................................................................ 3- 123
3.5.10 Multi-purpose Pickup Solenoid...........................................................................................................................3- 124
3.5.10.1 Preparation for Removing the Manual Pickup Solenoid..................................................................................................... 3- 124
3.5.10.2 Removing the Manual Pickup Solenoid ............................................................................................................................. 3- 124
3.5.10.3 Before Removing Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid............................................................................................................... 3- 127
3.5.10.4 Removing Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid .......................................................................................................................... 3- 127
3.5.11 Manual Separation Pad......................................................................................................................................3- 130
3.5.11.1 Preparation for Removing the Manual Separation Pad...................................................................................................... 3- 130
3.5.11.2 Removing the Manual Separation Pad .............................................................................................................................. 3- 130
3.5.11.3 Before Removing the Manual Feed Separation Pad.......................................................................................................... 3- 131
3.5.11.4 Removing the Manual Feed Separation Pad ..................................................................................................................... 3- 131
3.5.12 Pre-registration Sensor ......................................................................................................................................3- 132
3.5.12.1 Preparation for Removing the Sheet-to-sheet Sensor ....................................................................................................... 3- 132
3.5.12.2 Removing the Sheet-to-sheet Sensor ................................................................................................................................ 3- 132
3.5.12.3 Before Removing the Sheet-to-Sheet Sensor.................................................................................................................... 3- 134
3.5.12.4 Removing the Paper-To-Paper Sensor.............................................................................................................................. 3- 134
3.5.13 Registration Before Sensor ................................................................................................................................3- 136
3.5.13.1 Preparation for Removing the Registration Sensor............................................................................................................ 3- 136
3.5.13.2 Removing the Registration Sensor .................................................................................................................................... 3- 136
3.5.13.3 Before Removing the Registration Sensor......................................................................................................................... 3- 138
3.5.13.4 Removing the Registration Sensor .................................................................................................................................... 3- 138
3.5.14 Duplexing Motor .................................................................................................................................................3- 140
3.5.14.1 Preparation for Removing the Duplexing Motor ................................................................................................................. 3- 140
3.5.14.2 Removing the Duplexing Motor.......................................................................................................................................... 3- 140
3.5.14.3 Before Removing the Duplex Motor ................................................................................................................................... 3- 140
3.5.14.4 Removing the Duplex Motor............................................................................................................................................... 3- 141
3.5.15 Duplexing Sensor...............................................................................................................................................3- 141
3.5.15.1 Preparation for Removing the Duplexing Sheet Sensor .................................................................................................... 3- 141
3.5.15.2 Removing the Duplexing Sheet Sensor ............................................................................................................................. 3- 142
3.5.15.3 Before Removing the Duplex Paper Sensor ...................................................................................................................... 3- 142
3.5.15.4 Removing the Duplex Paper Sensor.................................................................................................................................. 3- 142
3.5.16 Delivery Sensor..................................................................................................................................................3- 142
3.5.16.1 Preparation for Removing the Delivery Sensor.................................................................................................................. 3- 142
3.5.16.2 Removing the Delivery Sensor........................................................................................................................................... 3- 143
3.5.16.3 Before Removing the Delivery Sensor ............................................................................................................................... 3- 143
3.5.16.4 Removing the Delivery Sensor........................................................................................................................................... 3- 143
3.5.17 Finisher ..............................................................................................................................................................3- 144
3.5.17.1 Removing the Finisher ...................................................................................................................................................... 3- 144
3.5.17.2 External Covers.................................................................................................................................................................. 3- 145
3.5.17.3 Staple Unit.......................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 145
3.5.17.4 Offset Unit .......................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 146
3.5.17.5 Process Tray Unit............................................................................................................................................................... 3- 147
3.5.17.6 Offset Motor ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 148
3.5.17.7 Feed Motor......................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 148
3.5.17.8 Gripper Solenoid ................................................................................................................................................................ 3- 149
3.5.17.9 Process Roller.................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 149
3.5.17.10 Finisher Controller PCB.................................................................................................................................................... 3- 149
 Contents

3.5.17.11 Power Supply PCB........................................................................................................................................................... 3- 150

3.5.17.12 Paper Full Sensor............................................................................................................................................................. 3- 150
3.5.17.13 Inlet Sensor ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3- 151
3.5.17.14 Stack Slide Sensor ........................................................................................................................................................... 3- 151
3.5.17.15 Exhasust Heat Fan........................................................................................................................................................... 3- 151
3.6 FIXING SYSTEM ....................................................................................................................................3- 152
3.6.1 Fixing Assembly .................................................................................................................................................. 3- 152
3.6.1.1 Removing the Fixing Assembly............................................................................................................................................ 3- 152
3.6.1.2 Removing the Fixing Assembly............................................................................................................................................ 3- 153
3.6.2 Fixing Sleeve Unit................................................................................................................................................ 3- 153
3.6.2.1 Removing the Fixing Sleeve Unit......................................................................................................................................... 3- 153
3.6.2.2 Before Removing the Fixing Sleeve Unit ............................................................................................................................. 3- 155
3.6.2.3 Removing the Fixing Sleeve Unit......................................................................................................................................... 3- 155
3.6.3 Fixing Pressure Roller ......................................................................................................................................... 3- 156
3.6.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller.......................................................................................................... 3- 156
3.6.3.2 Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller .................................................................................................................................. 3- 156
3.6.3.3 Before Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller....................................................................................................................... 3- 157
3.6.3.4 Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller .................................................................................................................................. 3- 157
3.6.4 Looping Sensor ................................................................................................................................................... 3- 157
3.6.4.1 Removing the Arching Sensor ............................................................................................................................................. 3- 157
3.6.4.2 Before Removing the Arch Level Sensor............................................................................................................................. 3- 158
3.6.4.3 Removing the Arch Level Sensor ........................................................................................................................................ 3- 158
3.6.5 Fixing Motor......................................................................................................................................................... 3- 158
3.6.5.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Motor ......................................................................................................................... 3- 158
3.6.5.2 Removing the Fixing Motor .................................................................................................................................................. 3- 159
3.6.5.3 Before Removing the Fixing Motor ...................................................................................................................................... 3- 159
3.6.5.4 Removing the Fixing Motor .................................................................................................................................................. 3- 159

Chapter 4 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

4.1 Periodically Replaced Parts........................................................................................................................4- 1
4.1.1 Periodically Replaced Parts..................................................................................................................................... 4- 1
4.1.2 Periodically Replaced Parts..................................................................................................................................... 4- 1
4.2 Consumables..............................................................................................................................................4- 1
4.2.1 Durables Replaced by the User............................................................................................................................... 4- 1
4.2.2 Durables Replaced by the Service Person.............................................................................................................. 4- 1
4.2.3 Durables Replaced by the User............................................................................................................................... 4- 1
4.2.4 Durables Replaced by the Service Person.............................................................................................................. 4- 2
4.3 Periodical Service .......................................................................................................................................4- 2
4.3.1 Scheduled Servicing................................................................................................................................................ 4- 2
4.3.2 Scheduled Servicing................................................................................................................................................ 4- 2
4.4 Cleaning .....................................................................................................................................................4- 2
4.4.1 Cleaning Items......................................................................................................................................................... 4- 2
4.4.2 Cleaning Items......................................................................................................................................................... 4- 3

Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING
5.1 MEASUREMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ......................................................................................................5- 1
5.1.1 Adjustment of Laser Exposure System .................................................................................................................. 5- 1
5.1.1.1 When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit (color correction)..................................................................................................... 5- 1
5.1.1.2 When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit (color correction)..................................................................................................... 5- 1
5.1.2 Adjustment of Image Formation System ................................................................................................................ 5- 2
5.1.2.1 When Replacing the Secondary Transfer Outside Roller ........................................................................................................ 5- 2
5.1.2.2 When Replacing the ITB .......................................................................................................................................................... 5- 2
5.1.2.3 When Replacing the Drum Cartridge ....................................................................................................................................... 5- 2
5.1.2.4 When Replacing the Secondary Transfer Outside Roller ........................................................................................................ 5- 2
5.1.2.5 When Replacing the ITB .......................................................................................................................................................... 5- 2
5.1.2.6 When Replacing the Toner Cartridge ...................................................................................................................................... 5- 2
5.1.2.7 When Replacing the ITB (color displacement correction)........................................................................................................ 5- 2
 Contents

5.1.2.8 When Replacing the Drum Cartridge ....................................................................................................................................... 5- 2

5.1.2.9 When Replacing the Toner Cartridge ...................................................................................................................................... 5- 2
5.1.2.10 When Replacing the ITB (color displacement correction) ...................................................................................................... 5- 2
5.1.2.11 When Photosensitive Drum Cleaner Shutter Phase is shifted ............................................................................................... 5- 3
5.1.3 Adjustment of Electrical Components .....................................................................................................................5- 4
5.1.3.1 When Replacing the DC Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................. 5- 4
5.1.3.2 When Replacing the Video Controller PCB ............................................................................................................................. 5- 4
5.1.3.3 When Replacing the DC Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................. 5- 5
5.1.3.4 When Replacing the HDD........................................................................................................................................................ 5- 5
5.1.3.5 When Replacing the Video Controller PCB ............................................................................................................................. 5- 5
5.1.3.6 When Replacing the HDD........................................................................................................................................................ 5- 5
5.1.4 Adjustment of Fixing System ..................................................................................................................................5- 5
5.1.4.1 Checking the Pressure (nip) of the Fixing Pressure Roller ...................................................................................................... 5- 5
5.1.4.2 When Replacing the Fixing Assembly ..................................................................................................................................... 5- 5
5.1.4.3 Checking the Pressure (nip) of the Fixing Pressure Roller ...................................................................................................... 5- 5
5.1.4.4 When Replacing the Fixing Assembly ..................................................................................................................................... 5- 6
5.1.5 Adjustment of Pickup/Feeding/Delivery System .....................................................................................................5- 6
5.1.5.1 When Replacing the Cassette Pickup Roller/Cassette Separation Pad (printer body)............................................................ 5- 6
5.1.5.2 When Replacing the Manual Pickup Roller/Manual Separation Pad (printer body)................................................................. 5- 6
5.1.5.3 When Replacing the Cassette Transport Roller/Cassette Separation Roller (paper feeder)................................................... 5- 6
5.1.5.4 When Replacing the Cassette Pickup Roller/Cassette Separation Pad (printer body)............................................................ 5- 7
5.1.5.5 When Replacing the Manual Pickup Roller/Manual Separation Pad (printer body)................................................................. 5- 7
5.1.5.6 When Replacing the Cassette Transport Roller/Cassette Separation Roller (paper feeder)................................................... 5- 7
5.2 SERVICE TOOLS ...................................................................................................................................... 5- 8
5.2.1 Standard Tools.........................................................................................................................................................5- 8
5.2.2 Solvents and Oils .....................................................................................................................................................5- 8
5.2.3 Standard Tools.........................................................................................................................................................5- 9
5.2.4 Solvents and Oils .....................................................................................................................................................5- 9
5.3 Location of Convectors............................................................................................................................. 5- 10
5.3.1 Connectors.............................................................................................................................................................5- 10
5.3.2 Connectors.............................................................................................................................................................5- 12
5.4 ERROR CODE ......................................................................................................................................... 5- 14
5.4.1 Error Code .............................................................................................................................................................5- 14
5.4.2 A4-XX_ERROR......................................................................................................................................................5- 19
5.4.3 A5-XX_ERROR......................................................................................................................................................5- 19
5.4.4 A7-XX_ERROR......................................................................................................................................................5- 19
5.4.5 D0-XX_ERROR .....................................................................................................................................................5- 20
5.4.6 D7-XX_ERROR .....................................................................................................................................................5- 20
5.4.7 D8-XX_ERROR .....................................................................................................................................................5- 20
5.4.8 D9-XX_ERROR .....................................................................................................................................................5- 20
5.4.9 Error Code .............................................................................................................................................................5- 20
5.4.10 A4-XX_ERROR....................................................................................................................................................5- 25
5.4.11 A5-XX_ERROR....................................................................................................................................................5- 25
5.4.12 A7-XX_ERROR....................................................................................................................................................5- 25
5.4.13 D0-XX_ERROR....................................................................................................................................................5- 26
5.4.14 D7-XX_ERROR....................................................................................................................................................5- 26
5.4.15 D8-XX_ERROR....................................................................................................................................................5- 26
5.4.16 D9-XX_ERROR....................................................................................................................................................5- 26
5.4.17 Jam Code.............................................................................................................................................................5- 26
5.5 Version Up................................................................................................................................................ 5- 27
5.5.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................................................5- 27
5.5.1.1 Overview of Upgrading Work ................................................................................................................................................. 5- 27
5.5.1.2 Construction of Firmware....................................................................................................................................................... 5- 27
5.5.1.3 Outline of the Service Support Tool ....................................................................................................................................... 5- 28
5.5.1.4 Overview of Upgrading Work ................................................................................................................................................. 5- 29
5.5.1.5 Construction of Firmware....................................................................................................................................................... 5- 29
5.5.1.6 Outline of the Service Support Tool ...................................................................................................................................... 5- 30
5.5.2 Making Preparations ..............................................................................................................................................5- 31
 Contents

5.5.2.1 Registering the Firmware....................................................................................................................................................... 5- 31

5.5.2.2 Making Connections .............................................................................................................................................................. 5- 33
5.5.2.3 Registering the Firmware...................................................................................................................................................... 5- 34
5.5.2.4 Making Connections .............................................................................................................................................................. 5- 36
5.5.3 Downloading the System Software........................................................................................................................ 5- 37
5.5.3.1 Downloading Procedure......................................................................................................................................................... 5- 37
5.5.3.2 Downloading Procedure......................................................................................................................................................... 5- 39
5.5.4 Version Upgrade using USB.................................................................................................................................. 5- 42
5.5.4.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................ 5- 42
5.5.4.2 Types of System Software ..................................................................................................................................................... 5- 42
5.5.4.3 System Downloading ............................................................................................................................................................. 5- 42
5.5.5 Other Upgrade Methods ........................................................................................................................................ 5- 44
5.5.5.1 Upgrading of Finisher............................................................................................................................................................. 5- 44
5.6 Service Mode............................................................................................................................................5- 53
5.6.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................................... 5- 53
5.6.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................ 5- 53
5.6.1.2 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................ 5- 53
5.6.2 Service Mode Table............................................................................................................................................... 5- 54
5.6.2.1 Service Mode ......................................................................................................................................................................... 5- 54
5.6.2.2 Service Mode ......................................................................................................................................................................... 5- 58

Chapter 6 APPENDIX
6.1 OUTLINE OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ............................................................................................6- 1
6.1.1 Clutch/Solenoid ....................................................................................................................................................... 6- 1
6.1.1.1 Clutches and Solenoids ........................................................................................................................................................... 6- 1
6.1.1.2 Clutches and Solenoids ........................................................................................................................................................... 6- 1
6.1.2 Motor ....................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 3
6.1.2.1 Motors ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 3
6.1.2.2 Motors ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 3
6.1.3 Fan .......................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 5
6.1.3.1 Fans ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 5
6.1.3.2 Fans ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 6
6.1.4 Sensor ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 7
6.1.4.1 Sensors.................................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 7
6.1.4.2 Sensors.................................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 8
6.1.5 Lamps, Heaters, and Others ................................................................................................................................... 6- 9
6.1.5.1 Heaters, Switches, and Others ................................................................................................................................................ 6- 9
6.1.5.2 Heaters, Switches, and Others .............................................................................................................................................. 6- 10
6.1.6 PCBs ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 11
6.1.6.1 PCBs...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 11
6.1.6.2 PCBs...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 12
Contents
Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
 Contents

Contents

1.1 Features ..........................................................................................................................................................................1-1

1.1.1 Features ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.1.2 Features ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 System construction .......................................................................................................................................................1-1
1.2.1 System Configuration .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2.2 System Configuration .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-2
1.3 Product Specifications....................................................................................................................................................1-2
1.3.1 Product Specifications ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-2
1.3.2 Product Specifications ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-3
1.3.3 Finisher Specifications................................................................................................................................................................. 1-4
1.4 Detailed Specifications ..................................................................................................................................................1-5
1.4.1 Printing Speed .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-5
1.4.2 Printing Speed .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-6
1.5 Name of Parts.................................................................................................................................................................1-7
1.5.1 External View .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-7
1.5.2 External View .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-8
1.5.3 Cross Sectional View ................................................................................................................................................................... 1-9
1.5.4 Cross Sectional View ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-10
1.6 Using the Machine .......................................................................................................................................................1-12
1.6.1 Control Panel ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-12
1.6.2 Control Panel ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-15
1.6.3 Job Menu.................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-17
1.6.4 Settings Menu (1)....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-18
1.6.5 Settings Menu (2)....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-19
1.6.6 Settings Menu (3)....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-20
1.6.7 Settings Menu (4)....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-22
1.6.8 Settings Menu (5)....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-22
1.6.9 Settings Menu (6)....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-23
1.6.10 Settings Menu (7)..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-24
1.6.11 Utility Menu............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-27
1.6.12 Reset Menu .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-28
1.6.13 Feeder Selection Menu ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-28
1.6.14 Job Menu.................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-30
1.6.15 Settings Menu (1)..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-30
1.6.16 Settings Menu (2)..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-33
1.6.17 Settings Menu (3)..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-34
1.6.18 Settings Menu (4)..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-39
1.6.19 Settings Menu (5)..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-40
1.6.20 Utility Menu............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-43
1.6.21 Reset Menu .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-44
1.6.22 Feeder Selection Menu ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-44
1.7 Safety ...........................................................................................................................................................................1-45
1.7.1 Safety of Toner .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-45
1.7.2 Points to Note When Replacing/Disposing of the Lithium Battery........................................................................................... 1-45
1.7.3 Safety of Laser Light ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-46
1.7.4 CDRH Regulations .................................................................................................................................................................... 1-46
1.7.5 Handling the Laser System ........................................................................................................................................................ 1-46
1.7.6 Safety of Toner .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-46
1.7.7 Points to Note When Replacing/Disposing of the Lithium Battery........................................................................................... 1-46
 Chapter 1

1.1 Features

1.1.1 Features
0008-9022

LBP5960

1.Compact Color Printer

The machine's image processing takes advantage of an intermediary transfer method, which enables a shorter transfer distance when compared with a direct transfer
method. In addition, its imaging unit (ITB, laser scanner) has been designed with size reduction in mind, resulting in a compact A3 color printer.

2.High-Speed A3 Color Printer

The machine is a full-color printer capable of high-speed printing at 15 pages/min max. on A3 paper for both full- and mono-color mode (in the case of A4, 30
pages/min max.).
The machine is also available as a CAPT model, which uses a CAPT controller (if A3, 15 pages/min max.; if A4, 22 pages/min max.).

3.Low Running Cost

The user can expect a low running cost. The machine's cartridge is used exclusively for toner, and its drum cartridge is fitted with a long-lasing drum. The user can
replenish its supply of toner by merely replacing the toner cartridge. Compared with an all-in-one cartridge (toner + drum), the machine requires replacement less
often, leading to a lower user cost.

4.Integrated Laser Scanner Unit

The machine uses a "1-polygon mirror/4-laser beam method," in which 4 laser beams are directed against a single polygon mirror. A 4-drum method inherently
requires the presence of a laser scanner unit for each color, making way for color displacement and an increase in size. The machine's 1-polygon mirror/4-laser
beam method, on the other hand, promises a reduction in both color displacement and machine size.

5.High-Resolution Images
The machine's printer engine is designed for high resolution, making possible faithful reproduction of text and photo images at 1200 dpi.

6.Various Supported Media

In addition to its standard manual feeder tray and 250-sheet cassette, the machine is capable of accommodating an optional paper feeder (up to 3 cassettes) so that
a maximum of 2150 sheets of paper and 5 types of paper may be fed to the machine without interruption.

7.Fixing Sleeve Method

The machine's fixing assembly is a sleeve type, enabling printing on heavy paper (220 g/m2 max.) and a shorter wait time.

1.1.2 Features
0016-5286

LBP5970 / LBP5975
1.Compact Color Printer
The machine's image processing takes advantage of an intermediary transfer method, which enables a shorter transfer distance when compared with a direct transfer
method. In addition, its imaging unit (ITB, laser scanner) has been designed with size reduction in mind, resulting in a compact A3 color printer.

2.High-Speed A3 Color Printer

The machine is a full-color printer capable of high-speed printing at 15 pages/min max. on A3 paper for both full- and mono-color mode (in the case of A4, 30
pages/min max.).
The machine is also available as a CAPT model, which uses a CAPT controller (if A3, 15 pages/min max.; if A4, 22 pages/min max.).

3.Low Running Cost

The user can expect a low running cost. The machine's cartridge is used exclusively for toner, and its drum cartridge is fitted with a long-lasing drum. The user can
replenish its supply of toner by merely replacing the toner cartridge. Compared with an all-in-one cartridge (toner + drum), the machine requires replacement less
often, leading to a lower user cost.

4.Integrated Laser Scanner Unit

The machine uses a "1-polygon mirror/4-laser beam method," in which 4 laser beams are directed against a single polygon mirror. A 4-drum method inherently
requires the presence of a laser scanner unit for each color, making way for color displacement and an increase in size. The machine's 1-polygon mirror/4-laser
beam method, on the other hand, promises a reduction in both color displacement and machine size.

5.High-Resolution Images
The machine's printer engine is designed for high resolution, making possible faithful reproduction of text and photo images at 1200 dpi.

6.Various Supported Media

In addition to its standard manual feeder tray and 250-sheet cassette, the machine is capable of accommodating an optional paper feeder (up to 3 cassettes) so that
a maximum of 2150 sheets of paper and 5 types of paper may be fed to the machine without interruption.

7.Fixing Sleeve Method

The machine's fixing assembly is a sleeve type, enabling printing on heavy paper (220 g/m2 max.) and a shorter wait time.

8.Introducing the top mount finisher (TMF)

LBP5975 equips the top mount finisher as standard that enables to staple up to 15 sheets.

1.2 System construction

1.2.1 System Configuration

0018-7385

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1-1
 Chapter 1

[5] [4]

[3]

[1]

[2]

F-1-1

[1] PAPER FEEDER PF-98B

[2] Hard Disk Kit HD-98B
[3] Wireless Network Interface Board NB-W2
[4] PS/Barcode ROM A-98B
[5] PS ROM A-98C

1.2.2 System Configuration

0013-3846

LBP5960

[2]

[1]
[3]

[4]

[6] [5]
F-1-2

[1] Paper Feeder PF-98

[2] Hard Disk HD-11V*
[3] Network Board NB-J1
[4] RAM
[5] Multi Emulation RCR-HIT*
[6] Cassette Heater CH-98

*The Hard Disk HD-11V and the Multi Emulation ROM CR-HIT cannot be used in combination.

1.3 Product Specifications

1.3.1 Product Specifications

0013-4207

LBP5960

1-2

Body installation method
Photosensitive medium
Charging method
Exposure method
Development method
Transfer method
Transfer method (Primary
transfer)
Transfer method (Secondary
transfer)
Separation method
Pickup method
Cassette pickup method
Multifeeder pickup method
Drum cleaning method
Transfer cleaning method
Fixing method
Delivery method
Contrast adjustment function
Toner level detection function
Toner type
Toner supply type
Warm-up time
Image margin (Leading edge)
Image margin (Trailing edge)
Image margin (Left/right)
Number of gradations
Printing resolution
First print time
Cassette paper size
Multifeeder paper size
Cassette paper type
Multifeeder tray paper type
Duplex paper type
Cassette capacity
Multifeeder tray capacity
Duplex method
Delivery tray stack
Memory
Hard disk
Auto gradation correction
Operating environment
(Temperature range)
Operating environment
(Humidity range)
Operating environment
(Atmospheric pressure)
Noise
Power supply rating
Power consumption (Maximum) 1300 W or less
Power consumption
Dimensions
Weight
1.3.2 Product Specifications
LBP5970 / LBP5975
Body installation method
Chapter 1
desktop page printer
OPC drum (4 pc.)
by roller
laser exposure (1 polygon mirror, 4 beams)
2-component toner projection
intermediary transfer belt
by transfer belt
by transfer roller
by curvature + static eliminator
cassette/manual feeder
by separation guide
by separation pad
by blade
by blade
on-demand
face-down
automatic
yes (piezoelectric)
non-magnetic negative toner
by toner cartridge (CMY: about 150 g; Bk: about 250 g)
30 sec or less at power-on (approx.; at 20 deg C)
5.0+1.5/-1.5 mm (2nd side:5.0+2.0/-2.0 mm)
5.0+1.5/-1.5 mm (2nd side:5.0+2.0/-2.0 mm)
5.0+1.0/-1.0 mm (2nd side:5.0+1.0/-1.0 mm)
16
600 dpi X 600 dpi, 1200 dpi X 1200 dpi
mono-color: 7.5 sec (approx.; A4, plain paper, 64 to 105 g/m2); full-
color: 9.0 sec (approx.; A4, plain paper, 64 to 105 g/m2)
A3, B4, A4 horizontal, B5 horizontal, A5 horizontal, LDG (11X17),
LGL, LTR horizontal, Executive horizontal
A3, B4, A4 horizontal, B5 horizontal, A5 horizontal, LDG (11X17),
LGL, LTR horizontal, Executive horizontal, 12X18 (305X457 mm), Jpn
postcard, envelope, user-defined paper (if vertical, 98 to 312 mm in
width, 148 to 457.2 mm in length; if horizontal, 210 to 297 mm in width,
148 to 297 mm in length), extra-long paper (210 to 297 mm in width,
457.3 to 1200 mm in length)
plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2), recycled paper (64 to 105 g/m2)
plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2), heavy paper (106 to 220 g/m2), recycled
paper (64 to 105 g/m2), Jpn postcard (gvn, 2-pane, 4-pane), envelope
(YOKEI No. 4, YOKEI No. 2, KAKUGATA No. 2), label sheet
plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2), recycled paper (64 to 105 g/m2)
250 sheets (64 g/m2)
100 sheets (64 g/m2)
through path
250 sheets (plain paper, 64 g/m2)
128 MB (384 MB max.)
20 GB (w/ optional memory)
yes
10 to 30 deg C
10 to 80 %RH
810.6 to 1013.3 hpa (0.8 to 1.0 atm)
standby: 25 dB or less; printing: 52 dB or less (sound power level)
100 VAC +/-10 % (50/60 Hz +/-2 Hz)
standby: 25 Wh or less (approx.; reference only); operating, average: 25
Wh or less (approx.; reference only); operating, average: 493 Wh or less
(approx.; reference only)
545 mm(W) X 607mm(D) X 380 mm(H)
52 kg (approx.; excluding cartridge)
0019-5110
desktop page printer
1-3
 Chapter 1
Photosensitive medium
Charging method
Exposure method
Development method
Transfer method
Transfer method (Primary
transfer)
Transfer method (Secondary
transfer)
Separation method
Pickup method
Cassette pickup method
Multifeeder pickup method
Drum cleaning method
Transfer cleaning method
Fixing method
Delivery method
Contrast adjustment function
Toner level detection function
Toner type
Toner supply type
Warm-up time
Image margin (Leading edge)
Image margin (Trailing edge)
Image margin (Left/right)
Number of gradations
Printing resolution
First print time
Cassette paper size
Multifeeder paper size
Cassette paper type
Multifeeder tray paper type
Duplex paper type
Cassette capacity
Multifeeder tray capacity
Duplex method
Delivery tray stack
Memory
Hard disk
Auto gradation correction
Operating environment
(Temperature range)
Operating environment
(Humidity range)
Operating environment
(Atmospheric pressure)
Noise
Power supply rating
Power consumption (Maximum) 1495 W or less
Power consumption
Dimensions
Weight
1.3.3 Finisher Specifications
LBP5970 / LBP5975
1-4
OPC drum (4 pc.)
by roller
laser exposure (1 polygon mirror, 4 beams)
2-component toner projection
intermediary transfer belt
by transfer belt
by transfer roller
by curvature + static eliminator
cassette/manual feeder
by separation guide
by separation pad
by blade
by blade
on-demand
face-down
automatic
yes (piezoelectric)
non-magnetic negative toner
by toner cartridge (CMY: about 150 g; Bk: about 250 g)
30 sec or less at power-on (approx.; at 20 deg C)
5.0+1.5/-1.5 mm (2nd side:5.0+2.0/-2.0 mm)
5.0+1.5/-1.5 mm (2nd side:5.0+2.0/-2.0 mm)
5.0+1.0/-1.0 mm (2nd side:5.0+1.0/-1.0 mm)
16
600 dpi X 600 dpi, 1200 dpi X 1200 dpi
mono-color: 7.5 sec (approx.; A4, plain paper, 64 to 105 g/m2); full-
color: 9.0 sec (approx.; A4, plain paper, 64 to 105 g/m2)
A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, Ledger (11 x 17), Legal, Letter, Executive
Standard sizes
A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, 12 x 18, Ledger (11 x 17), Legal, Statement, Letter,
Executive, 8K, 16K, Envelope DL, Envelope COM10, Envelope C5,
Envelope Monarch, Envelope B5
Custom sizes
When loading paper in portrait orientation: Width 98.0 to 320.0 mm;
Length 139.7 to 457.2 mm
When loading paper in landscape orientation (Only when UFR II Printer
Driver is used): Width 139.7 to 297.0 mm; Length 139.7 to 297.0 mm
Long size paper
Width 210.0 to 297.0 mm; Length 457.3 to 1,200.0 mm
plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2), recycled paper (64 to 105 g/m2)
plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2), heavy paper (106 to 220 g/m2), coated
paper, Labels, envelope
plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2), recycled paper (64 to 105 g/m2)
approx. 230 sheets (80 g/m2)
100 sheets (64 g/m2)
through path
250 sheets (plain paper, 64 g/m2)
256 MB (768 MB max.)
30 GB (w/ optional memory)
yes
10 to 30 deg C
10 to 80 %RH
810.6 to 1013.3 hpa (0.8 to 1.0 atm)
standby: Background noize level
operation: 53 dB or less (sound power level)
AC220 to 240 V (50/60 Hz)
average during standby: 36 W or less (approx.; reference only); average
during operation: 645 W or less (approx.; reference only)
545 mm(W) X 651 mm(D) X 380 mm(H)
LBP5970
48.5 kg (approx.; excluding cartridge)
LBP5975
52.5 kg (approx.; excluding cartridge)
0018-4129
 Chapter 1

T-1-1

Item Description Remarks

Stack tray A printer tray is used.
Stacking system Stacking in a fixed tray
Loading method Face-down loading
Loadable paper sizes Feed direction 139.7mm to 457.2mm
Width direction 98.0mm to 320mm
Loadable paper weight 64g/m2 to 220g/m2
Weight of paper that can be stapled 64g/m2 to 105g/m2
Types of paper that can be stapled Plain paper
Modes Staple loading A3, A4, B4, B5, 11X17, LTR, EXEC
Non-staple loading 12X18, SRA3, A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, 11X17, LGL, LTR, STMT, EXEC, Able to feed the paper
Post card, envelop, user-specified paper up to 1200mm.
Number of loadable sheets Process tray Max 15 sheets *When not stapled: 5 sheets Paper weight: 64g/m2
(One sheet when the duplex print mode is selected, the paper width is
less than LGL width, or thick/special paper is used)
Stack tray Height Less than 37/22 mm (S/L size)
Equivalent to 250/150 sheets (S/L size)
Stapled stack paper Number of copies is not detected. (Only height is detected.)

Width of paper that can be Staple loading Paper width 182.0 mm to 297.0 mm
aligned
Non-staple loading Paper width 182.0 mm to 297.0 mm
Paper detection Intermediate process tray None.
Stack tray Supported
Number of mixed size/staple/ Mixed size Not defined.
mode sheet
Mixed staple Not defined.
Mode mixed Not defined.
Number of stapled sheets 64 to 81.4 g/ m2: 15 sheets, 81.5 to 105g/ m2 : 10 sheets. - Paper thickness: 1.6
mm or less
- In front cover mode
two covers (paper
weight: 105g/m2 or
less) are included.
Staple cartridge capacity About 1000 staples
Detection of no staple Supported Number of remaining
staples: 0-70
Operation panel None.
Display panel None.
Installation method Mounting type: The unit is secured above the printer tray (delivery
section).
Outside dimensions 394mm(W) X 112mm(D) X 164mm(H)
Weight 2.5kg
Power supply Power is supplied from the host machine. (24 VDC)
Maximum power consumption About 28.8 W
Operating noise Compliant with the specs of the host machine.
Option None.

Staple position (parallel stapling at one position)

5.0 2mm

5.0 2mm

A3, B4, A4, B5, 11X17, LTR, EXEC

1.4 Detailed Specifications

1.4.1 Printing Speed

0018-7388

LBP5970 / LBP5975

T-1-2

Cassette, simplex Manual, simplex Cassette, duplex

Paper type Paper size
Color Mono Color Mono Color Mono

1-5
 Chapter 1

A3 15 15 15 15 5 5

11"×17"Åi279 mm×432 mmÅj 14 14 14 14 5 5

B4, LGL 17 17 17 17 5 5
Plain paper mode
(64 g/m2 to 105 g/m2) A4 horizontal 30 32 30 30 8 8

LTR horizontal 30 31 29 29 8 8
B5 horizontal, Exe horizontal,A5
horizontal, 8.5"X11"(216 mm X140 30 32 30 30 8 8
mm)
A3 --- --- 7 7 --- ---

11"×17"Åi279 mm×432 mmÅj --- --- 7 7 --- ---

B4, LGL --- --- 8 8 --- ---

Heavy paper mode
(106 g/m2 to 220 g/m2) A4 horizontal, LTR horizontal --- --- 15 15 --- ---

B5 horizontal, Exe horizontal --- --- 15 15 --- ---

A5 horizontal, 8.5"X11"(216 mm
--- --- 15 15 --- ---
X140 mm)

(unit: pages/min)

The values in the foregoing table are subject to change according to the site environment, paper type, paper size, and so forth.

1.4.2 Printing Speed

0013-3847

LBP5960

T-1-3

Cassette, simplex Manual, simplex Cassette, duplex

Paper type Paper size

Color Mono Color Mono Color Mono

A3 15 15 15 15 7 7

11"X17"(279 mm X432 mm) 14 14 14 14 7 7

B4, LGL 17 17 17 17 7 7

Plain paper mode

(64 g/m2 to 105 g/m2) A4 horizontal 30 30 30 30 7 7

LTR horizontal, B5 horizontal, Exe horizontal 30 30 29.3 29.3 7 7

A5 horizontal, 8.5"X11"(216 mm X140 mm) 30 30 29.3 29.3 7 7

A3 --- --- 7.5 7.5 --- ---

11"X17"(279 mm X432 mm) --- --- 7 7 --- ---

B4, LGL --- --- 8.5 8.5 --- ---

Heavy paper mode
(106 g/m2 to 220 g/m2)
A4 horizontal, LTR horizontal --- --- 15 15 --- ---

B5 horizontal, Exe horizontal --- --- 15 15 --- ---

A5 horizontal, 8.5"X11"(216 mm X140 mm) --- --- 15 15 --- ---

Jpn postcard Gvn postcard --- --- 15 15 --- ---

1-6
 Chapter 1

(unit: pages/min)

The values in the foregoing table are subject to change according to the site environment, paper type, paper size, and so forth.

1.5 Name of Parts

1.5.1 External View

0018-7389

LBP5970 / LBP5975

LBP5970

F-1-3

[1] Expansion Slot [8] Paper Cassette

[2] LAN Connector [9] Tray Extension

[3] Hard Disk Slot [10] Auxiliary Tray

[4] USB Connector [11] Multi-purpose Tray

[5] Toner Cover [12] Paper Guides

[6] Top Cover/Output Tray [13] Front Cover

[7] Power Switch [14] Control Panel

F-1-4

[1] Waste Toner Cover [3] Rear Cover

[2] Power Socket

LBP5975

1-7
 Chapter 1

F-1-5

[1] Expansion Slot [8] Paper Cassette

[2] LAN Connector [9] Tray Extension

[3] Hard Disk Slot [10] Auxiliary Tray

[4] USB Connector [11] Multi-purpose Tray

[5] Toner Cover [12] Paper Guides

[6] Top Cover/Output Tray [13] Front Cover

[7] Power Switch [14] Control Panel

F-1-6

[1] Waste Toner Cover [3] Rear Cover

[2] Power Socket

1.5.2 External View

0013-3848

LBP5960

1-8
 Chapter 1

[1]

[12] [2]

[11] [3]

[10]

[9] [4]

[8]
[5]
[7]

[6]
F-1-7

[1] Toner cartridge cover [7] Extension tray

[2] Delivery tray [8] Sub tray

[3] Expansion board slot [9] Manual feeder tray

[4] Power switch [10] Paper guide

[5] Right cover [11] Front cover

[6] Cassette [12] Control panel

[1]

[2]

[3]
[9]

[8]

[4]

[7] [5]

[6]
F-1-8

[1] USB connector [6] Rear cover

[2] LAN connector [7] Power supply receptacle

[3] IEEE1284 connector [8] Sub rear cover

[4] Waste toner cover [9] Sub delivery tray

[5] Left cover

1.5.3 Cross Sectional View

0008-1962

LBP5960

1-9
 Chapter 1

[8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14]

[15]

[16]
[7]

[6] [17]
[18]
[5]
[19]
[20]
[4]
[21]
[3]
[2]
[1] [22]
[23]

[24]

[27] [26] [25]

F-1-9

[1] Laser scanner assembly [15] Fixing sleeve

[2] Bk drum cartridge [16] Pressure roller
[3] C drum cartridge [17] Duplexing pull-out roller
[4] M drum cartridge [18] Duplexing feed roller
[5] Y drum cartridge [19] Secondary transfer roller
[6] ITB cleaning unit [20] Color displacement sensor
[7] ITB unit [21] Registration roller
[8] Y toner cartridge [22] Manual feeder pickup roller
[9] M toner cartridge [23] Manual feeder separation pad
[10] C toner cartridge [24] Manual feeder pull-out roller
[11] Bk toner cartridge [25] Cassette pull-out roller
[12] External delivery roller [26] Cassette separation pad
[13] Duplexing flapper [27] Cassettes pickup roller
[14] Inside delivery roller

1.5.4 Cross Sectional View

0016-5295

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1-10
 Chapter 1

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]

[9]

[10]

[11]

[12]

[13]

[14]

[24] [23] [22] [21] [20] [19] [18] [17] [16] [15]
F-1-10

[1] ITB cleaning unit [13] Manual feeder separation pad

[2] ITB unit [14] Manual feeder pull-out roller
[3] Process roller [15] Registration roller
[4] Flapper [16] Color displacement sensor
[5] External delivery roller [17] Cassette pull-out roller
[6] Inside delivery roller [18] Cassette separation pad
[7] Fixing sleeve [19] Cassettes pickup roller
[8] Duplexing pull-out roller [20] Bk drum cartridge
[9] Pressure roller [21] C drum cartridge
[10] Duplexing feed roller [22] M drum cartridge
[11] Secondary transfer roller [23] Y drum cartridge
[12] Manual feeder pickup roller [24] Laser scanner assembly

1-11
 Chapter 1

1.6 Using the Machine

1.6.1 Control Panel

0009-8558

LBP5960

The control panel consists of a status indication segment, control keys, and LEDs. The following shows the individual LEDs and the functions of the keys:

a b c d e f g

Cancel Job Job

Online Enter
Utility Settings

Feeder Selection

Ready Message HDD Job

Reset

n m l k j i h
F-1-11
Functions of the LEDs
T-1-4

Description
Ready to print (n) on absence of an error
flashing engine warm-up under way
off presence of an error or absence of power
Message (m) on presence of an error
off absence of an error
HDD (green; l) on HDD being accessed
Job (amber; k) on state of the job; warm-up for printing under way or printing under way
flashing state of the job; data being analyzed
off absence of a job
Online (a) on on-line state
flashing on-/off-line shift under way (bi-directional) or data being received from the resource port
off off-line state
Cassette 1 pickup (d) on cassette 1 selected as the current source of paper and, in addition, paper exists
flashing paper does not exist in cassette 1
off cassette 1 is not selected as the current source of paper
Cassette 2 pickup (d) on cassette 2 is selected as the source of paper and, in addition, paper exists
flashing paper does not exist in cassette 2
off cassette 2 is not selected as the source of paper
Cassette 3 pickup (d) on cassette 3 is selected as the source of paper and, in addition, paper exists
flashing paper does not exist in cassette 3
off cassette 3 is not selected as the source of paper
cassette 4 pickup (d) on cassette 4 is selected as the source of paper and, in addition, paper exists
flashing paper does not exist in cassette 4
on cassette 4 is not selected as the source of paper
Tray pickup (d) on the tray is selected as the source of paper and, in addition, paper exists
off the tray is not selected as the source of paper

Functions of the Control Panel Keys

T-1-5

Key State at press Response to press

Online (a) job on-/off-line switchover
on-line on-/off-line switchover
on-line on-/off-line switchover
error error skip operation
menu does not set the selected item, but leaves the menu state

Cancel job (c) job prints out residual data, and ends the job
Job (f) on-line shifts to a menu state (job menu)

1-12
 Chapter 1

Key State at press Response to press

Settings (h) on-line or off-line shifts to a menu state (setup menu)

Utility (j) on-line shifts to a menu state (utility menu)

Feeder Selection (b) off-line shifts to a menu state (pickup select menu)
error shifts to a menu state (pickup select menu)
Reset (i) shifts to a reset menu state
Enter (g) menu moves down through the menu; at the end, select the last item
up arrow (f) menu moves up the menu
down arrow (i) menu moves down through the menu; at the end, select the last item
left arrow (j) menu moves left through the menu, or moves through settings in positive direction
right arrow (h) menu moves right through the menu, or moves through settings in negative direction

T-1-6

a [Online] key/on-line lamp (green)

Turns on (on-line) or off (off-line) the connection to the PC.
Also, if an error stops the printer, cancels the error temporarily to continue printing (with the exception of some errors). The on-line lamp inside the key
goes on/off to indicate the following states:
on:
on-line state (ready to receive print data from a PC)
off:
off-line state (not ready to receive print data from a PC)
However, if the printer is in sleep mode, the on-line lamp remains off even in an on-line state.

b [Feeder Selection] key

off-line:
Shows the pickup selection menu.
on-line:
Shows the pickup selection menu.
with menu being operated:
Remains invalid.

c [Cancel job] key

on-line:
Executes a job cancel when the job lamp is on or flashing. Remains invalid when the lamp is off.

d source of paper indicator lamp (green)

on:
Indicates the currently selected source of paper.
flashing:
Indicates that the currently selected source of paper is out of paper, or the pickup cassette is not fitted in place.
off:
Indicates the absence of selection. (No cassette, whether optional or otherwise, or feeder is installed.)

e display
Indicates the printer status and items and settings of the menu functions.

f [Job] key
off-line:
Remains invalid in an off-line state.
on-line:
Shows the job menu.
with menu being operated:
Moves back to previous menu (upper level).

g [Enter] key

1-13
 Chapter 1

off-line:
Remains invalid in an off-line state.
on-line:
Remains invalid in an on-line state.
with menu being operated:
Moves to the next menu (lower level). If at the bottommost menu (with a setting being indicated), the setting will be accepted.

h [Settings] key
off-line:
Shows the setup menu.
on-line:
Shows the setup menu. However, some settings are not available in an on-line state.
with menu being operated:
Indicates the items on the right side of the menu. Increases the setting.

i [Reset] key
Shows the reset menu.
on-line:
Shows the reset menu.
with menu being operated:
Moves to the next (lower level) menu. If at the bottommost menu (with a setting indicated), the setting will be accepted.

j [Utility] key
off-line
Remains invalid in an off-line state.
on-line:
Shows the utility menu.
with menu being operated:
Shows the items on the left of the menu. Decreases the setting.

k Job lamp (green)

on:
Indicates that print data is being received or print data remains in printer memory.
flashing:
Indicates that print data is being processed.
off:
Indicates that no print data remains in printer memory.

l HDD lamp (green)

on:
Indicates that data is being written to the HDD.
off:
Indicates that write operation is not taking place.

m Message lamp (orange)

on:
Indicates that a fault in the printer prevents printing. (If sleep mode has been started off-line, the message lamp (orange) goes on, with other lamps
remaining off.)

n Ready lamp (green)

on:
Indicates that the printer is ready to print. (If sleep mode has been started on-line, only the print ready lamp (green) goes on, with all others remaining off.)
flashing:
Indicates that self-diagnosis is under way or warm-up is under way.
off:
Indicates that the printer is not ready to print.

The menus shown in the control panel contain items that are intended exclusively for the service person.
In this manual, such items are identified by *1.
To bring up this item, go through the following steps:
(Here, the steps used for Test Print B found on the Utilities menu are cited as a sample.)
1) While holding down the Online key (a) and the Cancel Job key (b), turn on the power.

a b

Cancel Job Job

Online Enter
Utility Settings

Feeder Selection

Ready Message HDD Job

Reset

F-1-12

1-14
 Chapter 1

2) Press the Utility key, and press the right arrow key several times to bring up test print B on the control panel.
3) Press the down arrow key to execute test print B.

1.6.2 Control Panel

0018-7399

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The control panel consists of a status indication segment, control keys, and LEDs. The following shows the individual LEDs and the functions of the keys:

[1] [2] [4] [5] [10] [11] [13][15]

Cancel Job Job

Online Power
Utility Settings

OK
Feeder Selection
Ready Message HDD Job Main Power
Reset

[3] [6] [7] [8] [9] [12] [14] [16]

F-1-13
Functions of the LEDs
T-1-7

Description
Ready to print [6] on absence of an error
flashing engine warm-up under way
off presence of an error or absence of power
Message [7] on presence of an error
off absence of an error
HDD (green; [8]) on HDD being accessed
Job (amber; [9]) on state of the job; warm-up for printing under way or printing under way
flashing state of the job; data being analyzed
off absence of a job
Online [1] on on-line state
flashing on-/off-line shift under way (bi-directional) or data being received from the resource port
off off-line state
Source of paper indicator [4] on cassette 1 selected as the current source of paper and, in addition, paper exists
flashing paper does not exist in cassette 1
off cassette 1 is not selected as the current source of paper
Main Power [16] on The printer is ON
off The printer is OFF

Functions of the Control Panel Keys

T-1-8

Key State at press Response to press

Online [1] job on-/off-line switchover
on-line on-/off-line switchover
on-line on-/off-line switchover
error error skip operation
menu does not set the selected item, but leaves the menu state

Cancel job [2] job prints out residual data, and ends the job
Job [11] on-line shifts to a menu state (job menu)
Settings [14] on-line or off-line shifts to a menu state (setup menu)

Utility [10] on-line shifts to a menu state (utility menu)

Feeder Selection [3] off-line shifts to a menu state (pickup select menu)
error shifts to a menu state (pickup select menu)
Reset [12] shifts to a reset menu state
OK [13] menu moves down through the menu; at the end, select the last item
up arrow [11] menu moves up the menu

1-15
 Chapter 1

Key State at press Response to press

down arrow [12] menu moves down through the menu; at the end, select the last item
left arrow [10] menu moves left through the menu, or moves through settings in positive direction
right arrow [14] menu moves right through the menu, or moves through settings in negative direction

T-1-9

[1] [Online] key/on-line lamp (green)

Turns on (on-line) or off (off-line) the connection to the PC.
Also, if an error stops the printer, cancels the error temporarily to continue printing (with the exception of some errors). The on-line lamp inside the key
goes on/off to indicate the following states:
on:
on-line state (ready to receive print data from a PC)
off:
off-line state (not ready to receive print data from a PC)
However, if the printer is in sleep mode, the on-line lamp remains off even in an on-line state.

[3] [Feeder Selection] key

off-line:
Shows the pickup selection menu.
on-line:
Shows the pickup selection menu.
with menu being operated:
Remains invalid.

[2] [Cancel job] key

on-line:
Executes a job cancel when the job lamp is on or flashing. Remains invalid when the lamp is off.

[4] source of paper indicator lamp (green)

on:
Indicates the currently selected source of paper.
flashing:
Indicates that the currently selected source of paper is out of paper, or the pickup cassette is not fitted in place.
off:
Indicates the absence of selection. (No cassette, whether optional or otherwise, or feeder is installed.)

[5] display
Indicates the printer status and items and settings of the menu functions.

[11] [Job] key

off-line:
Remains invalid in an off-line state.
on-line:
Shows the job menu.
with menu being operated:
Moves back to previous menu (upper level).

[13] [OK] key

off-line:
Remains invalid in an off-line state.
on-line:
Remains invalid in an on-line state.
with menu being operated:
Moves to the next menu (lower level). If at the bottommost menu (with a setting being indicated), the setting will be accepted.

[14] [Settings] key

off-line:
Shows the setup menu.
on-line:
Shows the setup menu. However, some settings are not available in an on-line state.
with menu being operated:
Indicates the items on the right side of the menu. Increases the setting.

[12] [Reset] key

1-16
 Chapter 1

Shows the reset menu.

on-line:
Shows the reset menu.
with menu being operated:
Moves to the next (lower level) menu. If at the bottommost menu (with a setting indicated), the setting will be accepted.

[10] [Utility] key

off-line
Remains invalid in an off-line state.
on-line:
Shows the utility menu.
with menu being operated:
Shows the items on the left of the menu. Decreases the setting.

[9] Job lamp (green)

on:
Indicates that print data is being received or print data remains in printer memory.
flashing:
Indicates that print data is being processed.
off:
Indicates that no print data remains in printer memory.

[8] HDD lamp (green)

on:
Indicates that data is being written to the HDD.
off:
Indicates that write operation is not taking place.

[7] Message lamp (orange)

on:
Indicates that a fault in the printer prevents printing. (If sleep mode has been started off-line, the message lamp (orange) goes on, with other lamps
remaining off.)

[6] Ready lamp (green)

on:
Indicates that the printer is ready to print. (If sleep mode has been started on-line, only the print ready lamp (green) goes on, with all others remaining off.)
flashing:
Indicates that self-diagnosis is under way or warm-up is under way.
off:
Indicates that the printer is not ready to print.

The menus shown in the control panel contain items that are intended exclusively for the service person.
In this manual, such items are identified by *1.
To bring up this item, go through the following steps:
(Here, the steps used for Test Print B found on the Utilities menu are cited as a sample.)
1) While holding down the Online key [1] and the Cancel Job key [2], turn on the power.

[1] [2]

Cancel Job Job

Online Power
Utility Settings

OK
Feeder Selection
Ready Message HDD Job Main Power
Reset

F-1-14
2) Press the Utility key, and press the right arrow key several times to bring up test print B on the control panel.
3) Press the down arrow key to execute test print B.

1.6.3 Job Menu

0018-7400

LBP5970 / LBP5975

T-1-10

Item Notes
ENCRYPTEDÅ@PRINT Indicated at the presence of a secured job.

SECURED PRINT Indicated at the presence of a secured job.

STOREJOB LIST Indicated at the presence of a stored job.

STOREJOB PRINT Indicated at the presence of a stored job.

1-17
 Chapter 1

Item Notes
JOB LOG LIST

STORE LOG LST Indicated when HDD is enabled.

REPORTLOG LST

E-MAIL PRT LOG

1.6.4 Settings Menu (1)

0018-7401

LBP5970 / LBP5975

CONTROL MENU
T-1-11

Item Setting
POWER SAVE MODE ON*, DEEP SLEEP, OFF, PANEL OFF
PWR SAVE IN ERR ON*, OFF
POWER SAVE TIME 10 minutes*, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 180 minutes, 5 minutes
WARNING STEP
CHECK TONER CONT.PRINTING*, STOP PRINTING
AUTO ERROR SKIP OFF*, ON
PANEL LANGUAGE ENGLISH*, FRENCH, GERMAN, ITALIAN, SPANISH
SHOW WARNINGS
CHECK TONER ON*, OFF
CHECK FIX.UNIT ON*, OFF
CHK WST TNR CTN ON*, OFF
CHECK DRUM ON*, OFF
CASSETTE EMPTY ON*, OFF
E-MAIL TRAN.ERR ON*, OFF
DATE AND TIME
DATE SETTING 01/01/2001 to 31/12/2089
TIME SETTING 00:00:00 to 23:59:59
DAYLIGHT SAVING
DST SETTINGS ON*, OFF
START DATE <MONTH>, <WEEK>, <DAY>, <TIME SETTING>
END DATE <MONTH>, <WEEK>, <DAY>, <TIME SETTING>
TIME ZONE
TIMER SETTINGS
WAKE UP TIMER OFF*, ON
WAKE UP TIME 00:00 to 23:59
POW. SAVE TIMER OFF*, ON
POWER SAVE TIME 00:00 to 23:59
CALIBRATE TIMER OFF*, ON
CALIBRATE TIME 00:00 to 23:59
HARD DISK ON*, OFF
INTERRUPT PRINT ON*, OFF

SECURING TIME 1 hour*, 2 hours, 3 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours

SECURED TYPE IMAGE*, PDL

RIP ONCE ON*, OFF

ASSURE JOB LOG OFF*, ON

QUIET MODE 0 to 10; 10* (sec.)
PDL SELECT(PnP) UFR II*, PCL5C, PCL6, PS3

FEEDER MENU

1-18
 Chapter 1

T-1-12

Item Setting
TRAY PAPER SIZE LTR*, LGL, LDR, EXEC, MIXED SIZES, CUSTOM SIZE, CUSTOM SIZE R, ENV.ISO-C5, ENV.
COM10, ENV. MONARCH, ENV. DL, ENV. ISO-B5, STMT, 8K, 16K, A5, B5, A4, B4, A3

CASSETTE 1 SIZE CUSTOM SIZE*, CUSTOM SIZE R, 8K, 16K, MIXED SIZES
CASSETTE 2 SIZE CUSTOM SIZE*, CUSTOM SIZE R, 8K, 16K, MIXED SIZES
CASSETTE 3 SIZE CUSTOM SIZE*, CUSTOM SIZE R, 8K, 16K, MIXED SIZES
CASSETTE 4 SIZE CUSTOM SIZE*, CUSTOM SIZE R, 8K, 16K, MIXED SIZES
STD PAPER SIZE LTR*, LGL, LDR, EXEC, ENV. ISO-C5, ENV. COM10, ENV. MONARCH, ENV. DL, ENV. ISO-B5,
STMT, 8K, 16K, A5, B5, A4, B4, A3
TRAY PRIORITY OFF*, ON
INVLDPAPER TRAY OFF*, ON
AUTO SELECTION
TRAY ON*, OFF
CASSETTE 1 ON*, OFF
CASSETTE 2 ON*, OFF
CASSETTE 3 ON*, OFF
CASSETTE 4 ON*, OFF
STD PAPER TYPE PLAIN PAPER*, PLAIN PAPER L, HEAVY PAPER 1, HEAVY PAPER 2, ENVELOPE, COATED
PAPER, LABEL
TRAY PAPER TYPE MIXED TYPES*, PLAIN PAPER, PLAIN PAPER L, HEAVY PAPER 1, HEAVY PAPER 2, ENVELOPE,
COATED PAPER, LABEL
CASSETTE1 TYPE MIXED TYPES*, PLAIN PAPER, PLAIN PAPER L, LABEL
CASSETTE2 TYPE MIXED TYPES*, PLAIN PAPER, PLAIN PAPER L, LABEL
CASSETTE3 TYPE MIXED TYPES*, PLAIN PAPER, PLAIN PAPER L, LABEL
CASSETTE4 TYPE MIXED TYPES*, PLAIN PAPER, PLAIN PAPER L, LABEL
MANUAL 2-SIDED 1ST SIDE*, 2ND SIDE
2-SIDED PRINT. OFF*, ON

1.6.5 Settings Menu (2)

0018-7402

LBP5970 / LBP5975
LAYOUT MENU
T-1-13

Item Setting
COPIES 1 to 9999; 1*
OFFSET Y -1.97 to 1.97; 0.00* (in.)
OFFSET X -1.97 to 1.97; 0.00* (in.)
BIND.LOCATION LONG EDGE*, SHORT EDGE
GUTTER -1.97 to 1.97; 0.00* (in.)
ALT.METHOD ON*, OFF

QUALITY MENU
T-1-14

Item Setting
RESOLUTION FINE*, SUPER FINE
GRADATION LEVEL HIGH 1*, HIGH 2, STANDARD
TONER SAVE OFF*, ON
DENSITY: CYAN 1 to 16; 9*
DENSITY: MAGENTA 1 to 16; 9*
DENSITY: YELLOW 1 to 16; 9*
DENSITY: BLACK 1 to 16; 9*
COLOR MODE AUTO*, COLOR, BLACK & WHITE
HALFTONES

1-19
 Chapter 1

Item Setting
B & W HALFTONES
TEXT RESOLUTION*, GRADATION, COLOR TONE, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION
GRAPHICS GRADATION*, COLOR TONE, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION, RESOLUTION
IMAGE COLOR TONE*, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION, RESOLUTION, GRADATION
COLOR HALFTONES
TEXT RESOLUTION*, GRADATION, COLOR TONE, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION
GRAPHICS GRADATION*, COLOR TONE, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION, RESOLUTION
IMAGE COLOR TONE*, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION, RESOLUTION, GRADATION
GRAY COMPENSATE
TEXT ON*, OFF
GRAPHICS ON*, OFF
IMAGE ON*, OFF
CMS
CMS SELECTION PRINTER*, HOST
CMS/GAMMA
TEXT CMS*, GAMMA
GRAPHICS CMS*, GAMMA
IMAGE CMS*, GAMMA
RGB SRCE PROF.
TEXT sRGB_v1.31*, HDTV_gamma_1.5, HDTV_gamma_1.8, HDTV_gamma_2.4, Download Profile
GRAPHICS sRGB_v1.31*, HDTV_gamma_1.5, HDTV_gamma_1.8, HDTV_gamma_2.4, Download
Profile*
IMAGE sRGB_v1.31*, HDTV_gamma_1.5, HDTV_gamma_1.8, HDTV_gamma_2.4, Download
Profile*
OUTPUT PROFILE
TEXT Normal*, Photo
GRAPHICS Normal*, Photo
IMAGE Photo*, Normal
MATCHING METHOD
TEXT SATURATION*, COLORIMETRIC, PERCEPTUAL
GRAPHICS PERCEPTUAL*, SATURATION, COLORIMETRIC
IMAGE PERCEPTUAL*, SATURATION, COLORIMETRIC
GAMMA
TEXT 1.4*, 1.8, 2.2, 1.0
GRAPHICS 1.4*, 1.8, 2.2, 1.0
IMAGE 1.4*, 1.8, 2.2, 1.0
GRADATION SET.
GRADATION OFF*, SMOOTH 1, SMOOTH 2
GRAPHICS ON*, OFF
IMAGE ON*, OFF
SMOOTHING (AST)
SMOOTHING (AST) SMOOTH 1*, SMOOTH 2, OFF
GRAPHICS OFF*, ON
IMAGE ON*, OFF
TONER VOLUME NORMAL*, GRADATION, TEXT
LINE CONTROL RESOLUTION*, GRADATION
QUALITY CHANGE CONT.PRINTING*, STOP PRINTING

1.6.6 Settings Menu (3)

0018-7403

LBP5970 / LBP5975

INTERFACE MENU
T-1-15

Item Setting
I/F CONNECTION
USB ON*, OFF
NETWORK ON*, OFF
MODE TIMEOUT OFF, 5 to 300 seconds; 15 seconds*
NETWORK MENU

1-20
 Chapter 1

Item Setting
TCP/IP SETTINGS
IP V. 4 SETTING
IP MODE MANUAL*, AUTO
PROTOCOL DHCP: OFF*, ON
BOOTP: OFF*, ON
RARP: OFF*, ON
IP SETTINGS IP ADDRESS: 0.0.0.0*
SUBNET MASK: 0.0.0.0*
GATEWAY ADDRESS: 0.0.0.0*
IP ADD.RANGE REJECT RX/PRT: OFF*, ON
REJECT ADD.SET.: REJ IP 1 to 8
PERMIT RX/PRT: OFF*, ON
PERMIT ADD.SET.: PER IP 1 to 8
REJ SET/BROWSE: OFF*, ON
REJECT ADD.SET.: REJ IP 1 to 8
PMT SET/BROWSE: OFF*, ON
PERMIT ADD.SET.: PER IP 1 to 8
DNS PRIMARY ADD: 0.0.0.0*
SECONDARY ADD.: 0.0.0.0*
IP V. 6 SETTING
IP V. 6 OFF*, ON
WINS OFF*, ON
ARP/PING ON*, OFF
FTP
FTP PRINT ON*, OFF
FTP SETTINGS ON*, OFF
LPD PRINT ON*, OFF
RAW PRINT ON*, OFF
IPP PRINT ON*, OFF
WSD
WSD PRINT ON*, OFF

WSD BROWSING ON*, OFF

MULTICAST DISC ON*, OFF

HTTP ON*, OFF

PROXY SETTINGS
PROXY OFF*, ON
SERVER ADDRESS -
PORT NUMBER 0 to 99999; 80*
SAME DOMAIN NO PROXY*, USE PROXY
PROXY AUTH. OFF*, ON
USER NAME -
PASSWORD -
SNTP OFF*, ON
RESPONSE ON*, OFF
MAC ADDRESS SET
PERMIT RECEIVE OFF*, ON
PERMIT ADD.SET. PER.MAC ADD.1 to 50
NETWARE SETTING
NETWARE OFF*, ON

FRAME TYPE AUTO DETECT*, ETHERNET 2, ETHERNET 802.2, ETHERNET 802.3, ETHERNET SNAP

PRINT SERVICE NDS PSERVER*, NPRINTER, BINDERYPSERVER, RPRINTER

APPLETALK OFF*, ON
SMB
SMB SERVER OFF*, ON
SMB OFF*, ON
SNMP V. 1 ON*, OFF
SNMP V. 3 SET. OFF*, ON
SPOOLER OFF*, ON
START WAIT TIME 0 to 300 seconds; 0 seconds*

1-21
 Chapter 1

Item Setting
EXTENSION CARD -
CONNECT.RECOG. ON*, OFF
EXT.RX BUFFER OFF*, ON

1.6.7 Settings Menu (4)

0018-7404

LBP5970 / LBP5975

PRINT MODE
T-1-16

Item Setting
MODE SELECTION AUTO SELECTION*, PCL, PS, IMAGING, PDF1.5
AUTO SWITCH
PCL ON*, OFF
PS ON*, OFF
IMAGING ON*, OFF
PDF1.5 ON*, OFF
MODE PRIORITY NONE*, PCL, PS, PDF1.5

USER MAIN.
T-1-17

Item Setting
ADJ.START POS.
OFFSET Y -0.2 to 0.2; 0.00* (in.)
OFFSET X (TRAY) -0.39 to 0.39; 0.00* (in.)
OFFSET X (CASS1) -0.39 to 0.39; 0.00* (in.)
OFFSET X (CASS2) -0.39 to 0.39; 0.00* (in.)
OFFSET X (CASS3) -0.39 to 0.39; 0.00* (in.)
OFFSET X (CASS4) -0.39 to 0.39; 0.00* (in.)
OFFSET X (DUP.) -0.39 to 0.39; 0.00* (in.)
RECVRY PRINTING ON*, OFF
INIT.COUNTER
FIXING UNIT -
CHK PAPER SIZE OFF*, ON
SPECIAL MODE Q OFF*, ON
SUBSTITUTE SIZE OFF*, ON
SP.IMAGE MODE OFF*, LEVEL1, LEVEL2
SP.S-SIZE MODE1 -2 to 2; 0*
SP.S-SIZE MODE2 -2 to 2; 0*
CLEANING -
HDD MAINTENANCE
HDD ALL ERASE OFF*, ON
QUICK FORMAT -
STD FORMAT -
SP.PRINT MODE
PLAIN PAPER OFF*, MODE 1, MODE 2, MODE 3
COATED PAPER OFF*, ON
UPDATE FIRMWARE
USB -
NETWORK -
LIMIT.FUNCTIONS
STAPLE DO NOT LIMIT*, LIMIT

1.6.8 Settings Menu (5)

0018-9606

LBP5970 / LBP5975

PCL SETUP

1-22
 Chapter 1

T-1-18

Item Setting
PAPER SAVE ON, OFF*

ORIENTATION PORTRAIT*, LANDSCAPE

FONT NUMBER 0 to 89; 0*

POINT SIZE 4.00 to 999.75 point; 12.00 point*

PITCH 0.44 to 99.99 cpi; 10.00 cpi*
FORM LINES 5 to 128 lines; 60 lines*

SYMBOL SET PC8*, ROMAN8, ROMAN9, ISOL1, ISOL2, ISOL5, ISOL6, ISOL9, PC775,PC8DN, PC850, PC852,
PC858, PC8TK, PC1004, WINL1, WINL2, WINL5,WINBALT, DESKTOP, PSTEXT, LEGAL, ISO4,
ISO6, ISO11, ISO15, ISO17,ISO21, ISO60, ISO69, WIN 30, MCTEXT
CUSTOM SIZE DO NOT SET*, SET

UNIT OF MEASURE Inches*, Millimeters

X DIMENSION 3.86 to 11.69 inches; 11.69 inches* (98.0 to 297.0 mm; 297.0 mm*)

Y DIMENSION 5.50 to 47.24 inches; 18.00 inches* (139.7 to 1200.0 mm; 457.2 mm*)

APPEND CR TO LF NO*, YES

ENLRG A4 WIDTH OFF*, ON

BARDIMM ENABLE, DISABLE*DISABLE*, ENABLE

FREESCAPE ~*, ", #, $, /, \, ?, {, }, |, OFF

UFR II SETUP
T-1-19

Item Setting Notes

PAPER SAVE ON*, OFF

1.6.9 Settings Menu (6)

0018-9609

LBP5970 / LBP5975

IMAGING SETUP
T-1-20

Item Setting
ORIENTATION AUTO*, VERTICAL, HORIZONTAL

ZOOM OFF*, AUTO

PRINT POSITION AUTO*, CENTER, TOP LEFT

PRINT GUARANTEE OFF*, ON

SHOW WARNINGS PRINT*, PANEL, OFF
PRINT EMAIL TXT ON*, OFF

LIMIT EMAIL PRT OFF*, ON

ENLRG PRT AREA OFF*, ON

EXIF ADJUSTMENT ON*, OFF

PDF1.5
T-1-21

Item Setting
RENDER CL SPACE AUTO*, CMYK

RGB SRCE PROF. sRGB*, GAMMA 1.5, GAMMA 1.8, GAMMA 2.4, NONE

1-23
 Chapter 1

Item Setting
CMYK PROFILE NONE*, JAPANCOLOR, US WEB COATED, EURO STANDARD

OUTPUT PROFILE NORMAL*, PHOTO

GRAY PROFILE OFF*, ON
MATCHING METHOD PERCEPTUAL*, SATURATION, COLORIMETRIC

PURE BLACK TEXT ON*, OFF

BLACK OVERPRINT ON*, OFF

CMYK OVERPRINT OFF*, ON

BRIGHTNESS 85 to 115 %; 100 %*

GRAY COMPENSATE ON*, OFF

FIT TO PAGE OFF*, ON

ENLRG PRT AREA OFF*, ON

N-UP PRINT OFF*, 2 ON 1, 4 ON 1, 6 ON 1, 8 ON 1, 9 ON 1, 16 ON 1

FINISHING OFF*, COLLATE, STAPLE+COLLATE

B & W HALFTONES

TEXT RESOLUTION*, GRADATION, COLOR TONE, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION

GRAPHICS GRADATION*, COLOR TONE, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION, RESOLUTION

IMAGE COLOR TONE*, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION, RESOLUTION, GRADATION

COLOR HALFTONES

TEXT RESOLUTION*, GRADATION, COLOR TONE, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION

GRAPHIC COLOR TONE*, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION*1, RESOLUTION, GRADATION

IMAGE COLOR TONE*, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION, RESOLUTION, GRADATION

COMMENT PRINT AUTO*, ON, OFF

SMOOTHING (AST)

SMOOTHING (AST) SMOOTH 1*, SMOOTH 2, OFF

GRAPHICS OFF*, ON

TEXT ON*, OFF

1.6.10 Settings Menu (7)

0018-7405

LBP5970 / LBP5975

PS
T-1-22

Item Setting
JOB TIMEOUT 0 to 3600 seconds; 0 seconds*

WAIT TIMEOUT 0 to 3600 seconds; 300 seconds*

PRINT PS ERRORS OFF*, ON

RGB SRCE PROF. sRGB*, GAMMA 1.5, GAMMA 1.8, GAMMA 2.4, NONE
GRAY PROFILE OFF*, ON
OUTPUT PROFILE TR Normal*, TR Photo, NORMAL, PHOTO

MATCHING METHOD PERCEPTUAL*, SATURATION, COLORIMETRIC

RGB PURE BLACK ON*, OFF

PURE BLACK TEXT ON*, OFF

BLACK OVERPRINT ON*, OFF

1-24
 Chapter 1

Item Setting
BRIGHTNESS 85 to 115 %; 100 %*

B & W HALFTONES

TEXT RESOLUTION*, GRADATION, COLOR TONE, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION

GRAPHICS GRADATION*, COLOR TONE, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION, RESOLUTION

IMAGE COLOR TONE*, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION, RESOLUTION, GRADATION

COLOR HALFTONES

TEXT RESOLUTION*, GRADATION, COLOR TONE, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION

GRAPHIC COLOR TONE*, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION*1, RESOLUTION, GRADATION

IMAGE COLOR TONE*, HIGH RESOL., ERR DIFFUSION, RESOLUTION, GRADATION

CMYK OVERPRINT OFF*, ON

SMOOTHING (AST)

SMOOTHING (AST) SMOOTH 1*, SMOOTH 2, OFF

GRAPHICS OFF*, ON

TEXT ON*, OFF

SERVICE MODE
T-1-23

Item Setting
PASSWORD -
COUNTER GR.
INIT.FIX.COUNT -
DV-UNT-C 0 to 45000 (0*)
INIT.DV-UNT-C -
DV-UNT-M DV-UNT-M
INIT.DV-UNT-M -
DV-UNT-Y DV-UNT-M
INIT.DV-UNT-Y -
DV-UNT-K DV-UNT-M
INIT.DV-UNT-K -
INIT.C1-PU-RL -
INIT.C2-PU-RL -
INIT.C3-PU-RL -
INIT.C4-PU-RL -
INIT.M-PU-RL -
INIT.2TR-ROLL -
INIT.ITB UNIT -
ADJUST GR.

1-25
 Chapter 1

Item Setting
CALIBRATION ON*, OFF
IMG-REG
REG-H-C -127 to 127 (0*)
REG-H-M -127 to 127 (0*)
REG-H-Y -127 to 127 (0*)
REG-H-K -127 to 127 (0*)
REG-V-C -127 to 127 (0*)
REG-V-M -127 to 127 (0*)
REG-V-Y -127 to 127 (0*)
REG-V-K -127 to 127 (0*)
VD-OFS-K -5 to 5 (0*)
VD-OFS-3 -5 to 5 (0*)
V-BACk-K -3 to 3 (0*)
V-BACk-3 -3 to 3 (0*)
P-TG-C -4 to 4 (0*)
P-TG-M -4 to 4 (0*)
P-TG-Y -4 to 4 (0*)
P-TG-K -4 to 4 (0*)
OFSTAC-C 0 to 3 (0*)
OFSTAC-M 0 to 3 (0*)
OFSTAC-Y 0 to 3 (0*)
OFSTAC-K 0 to 3 (0*)
T-SPLY-C -3 to 3 (0*)
T-SPLY-M -3 to 3 (0*)
T-SPLY-Y -3 to 3 (0*)
T-SPLY-K -3 to 3 (0*)
1TR-TGC -10 to 10 (0*)
1TR-TGM -10 to 10 (0*)
1TR-TGY -10 to 10 (0*)
1TR-TGK1 -10 to 10 (0*)
2TR-N1 -10 to 10 (0*)
2TR-N2 -10 to 10 (0*)
2TR-H1 -10 to 10 (0*)
2TR-H2 -10 to 10 (0*)
2TR-UH1 -10 to 10 (0*)
2TR-UH2 -10 to 10 (0*)
2TR-P1 -10 to 10 (0*)
2TR-P2 -10 to 10 (0*)
2TR-NH1 -10 to 10 (0*)
2TR-NH2 -10 to 10 (0*)
2TR-L1 -10 to 10 (0*)
2TR-SP1 -10 to 10 (0*)
option grOPTION GR.
DEVL-VTH -1 to 2 (0*)
DRM-RTIM -1 to 50 (0*)
FX-SPD 0 to 2 (0*)
ITBB-TMG -9 to 0 (0*)
INTPPR-1 -2 to 2 (0*)
FIX-TMP -2 to 2 (0*)
FX-S-TMP -5 to 5 (0*)
ADJ-LVL ON, OFF*
CONFIG 0*, 1
T-LW-LVL 0 to 3 (0*)
LONG SLEEP TIME 0 to 24 (8*)
OUT-TRY -
B4-L-CNT ON, OFF*
SCT-ALL-CLR ON, OFF*

SCT-IDV-CLR ON, OFF*

FUNCTION GR.

1-26
 Chapter 1

Item Setting
ECONF
EXPORT GENERAL, DEPEND, SECURITY, ALL
INPORT -
USB-H ON, OFF*
SUBLOG TO USB -
CLAW-UP -
CLEAR ERR -
SHIP CLR -
2TR-CLN -
DEVL-CLN -
COLOR MODE SLCT ON, OFF*
LOG GR.
SYSTEM LOG ON, OFF*
SUBLOG FTP GET -
LOGGING UTILITY ON, OFF*
FW UPDATE GR.
USB
NETWORK
NETWORK GR.
FTP SYSLOG ON, OFF*
JOB SERIALIZE ON, OFF*

1.6.11 Utility Menu

0018-7406

LBP5970 / LBP5975

T-1-24

Item Notes
CONFIG.PAGE

TEST PRINT B Use it to print the continuous test (grid pattern).

TEST PRINT C1 Use it to print the image quality test (engine test pattern).

TEST PRINT C2 Use it to print the image quality test (engine test pattern).

TEST PRINT D1 Use it to print the counter value / machine information for maintenance.

TEST PRINT D2 Use it to print the image quality test (gradation pattern (color)).

TEST PRINT E Use it to print the continuous test (colored grid pattern).

TEST PRINT N Use it to print the image quality test (patch pattern).

TEST PRINT AL Use it to print the faulty image diagnosis chart for checking cyan development.

TEST PRINT AM Use it to print the faulty image diagnosis chart for checking magenta development.

TEST PRINT AN Use it to print the faulty image diagnosis chart for checking yellow development.

TEST PRINT AO Use it to print the faulty image diagnosis chart for checking black development.

TEST PRINT AP Use it to print the faulty image diagnosis chart for checking gradation and registration displacement.

TEST PRINT AQ Use it to print the faulty image diagnosis chart for checking transfer.

TEST PRINT AR Use it to print the faulty image diagnosis chart for checking color displacement.

TEST PRINT AW A print for counter value / service

TEST PRINT AX A print for stapler operation check

PCL UTILITY

FONTS LIST Use it to print the fonts list.

PS UTILITY

CONFIG.PAGE Prints the content specified in the PS SETUP menu.

FONTS LIST Use it to print the fonts list.

NW STATUS PRINT Use it to print the standard network status list.

EXT.CARD LIST Use it to print the extension card status list.

E-MAIL UTILITY

RECEIVE E-MAILS Performs manual receiving of e-mails.

1-27
 Chapter 1

Item Notes
RX LOG RIST Use it to print the e-mail receive log list.

CALIBRATION Use it to execute calibration.

CALIBRATION LOG Use it to print the debug of calibration function.

HDD UTILITY

FILE LISTS Use it to print the file list in HDD.

LOGGING UTILITY

PRINT LOG Use it to print the system log list.

DELETE LOGS Use it to delete the system log.

PRNTPOSNPRINT Use it to print for printing position adjustment.

PAGE COUNT LIST Use it to print for page count list.

DEVICE LOG LIST Use it to print the error message log and service call log.

TEST CHART 1 Use it to print the faulty image diagnosis chart for PCRG factor diagnosis.

TEST CHART 2 Use it to print the faulty image diagnosis chart for image diagnosis.

1.6.12 Reset Menu

0018-7407

LBP5970 / LBP5975

T-1-25

Item Notes
SOFT RESET

HARD RESET Hold down [SOFT RESET].

FORM FEED

SHUT DOWN Indicate when using HDD.

CHANGE TONER

K TONER

C TONER

M TONER

Y TONER

1.6.13 Feeder Selection Menu

0018-7408

LBP5970 / LBP5975

T-1-26

Item Setting
PAPER SOURCE AUTO, CASSETTE 1, CASSETTE 2, CASSETTE 3, CASSETTE 4, TRAY

TRAY PAPER SIZE A5, B5, A4*, B4, A3, LTR, LGL, LDR, EXEC, 305X457 mm (12X18 inches), MIXED SIZES, CUSTOM SIZE, SUSTOM SIZER,
ENV. ISO-C5, ENV. COM10, ENV. MONARCH, ENV. DL, ENV. ISO-B5, STMT, 8K, 16K

CASSETTE1 SIZE MIXED SIZES, CUSTOM SIZE*, CUSTOM SIZER, 305X457 mm (12X18 inches), ENV. ISO-C5, ENV. COM10, ENV.
MONARCH, ENV. DL, ENV. ISO-B5, STMT, 8K, 16K

CASSETTE2 SIZE MIXED SIZES, CUSTOM SIZE*, CUSTOM SIZER, 305X457 mm (12X18 inches), ENV. ISO-C5, ENV. COM10, ENV.
MONARCH, ENV. DL, ENV. ISO-B5, STMT, 8K, 16K

CASSETTE3 SIZE MIXED SIZES, CUSTOM SIZE*, CUSTOM SIZER, 305X457 mm (12X18 inches), ENV. ISO-C5, ENV. COM10, ENV.
MONARCH, ENV. DL, ENV. ISO-B5, STMT, 8K, 16K

1-28
 Chapter 1

Item Setting
CASSETTE4 SIZE MIXED SIZES, CUSTOM SIZE*, CUSTOM SIZER, 305X457 mm (12X18 inches), ENV. ISO-C5, ENV. COM10, ENV.
MONARCH, ENV. DL, ENV. ISO-B5, STMT, 8K, 16K

TRAY PAPER TYPE PLAIN PAPER*, PLAIN PAPER L, HEAVY PAPER 1, HEAVY PAPER 2, ENVELOPE, COATED PAPER, LABEL, MIXED
TYPES

CASSETTE1 TYPE PLAIN PAPER*, PLAIN PAPER L, HEAVY PAPER 1, HEAVY PAPER 2, ENVELOPE, COATED PAPER, LABEL, MIXED
TYPES

CASSETTE2 TYPE PLAIN PAPER*, PLAIN PAPER L, HEAVY PAPER 1, HEAVY PAPER 2, ENVELOPE, COATED PAPER, LABEL, MIXED
TYPES

CASSETTE3 TYPE PLAIN PAPER*, PLAIN PAPER L, HEAVY PAPER 1, HEAVY PAPER 2, ENVELOPE, COATED PAPER, LABEL, MIXED
TYPES

CASSETTE4 TYPE PLAIN PAPER*, PLAIN PAPER L, HEAVY PAPER 1, HEAVY PAPER 2, ENVELOPE, COATED PAPER, LABEL, MIXED
TYPES

2-SIDED PRINT. ON, OFF*

1-29
 Chapter 1

1.6.14 Job Menu

0013-4621

LBP5960

T-1-27

Item Notes
ENCRYPTEDÅ@PRINT Indicated at the presence of a secured job.

SECURED PRINT Indicated at the presence of a secured job.

STOREJOB LIST Indicated at the presence of a stored job.

STOREJOB PRINT Indicated at the presence of a stored job.

BOX NO.1

BOX NO.2

JOB LOG LIST

STORE LOG LST Indicated when HDD is enabled.

REPORTLOG LST

1.6.15 Settings Menu (1)

0013-4624

LBP5960

CONTROL MENU
T-1-28

Item Setting Notes

POWER SAVE MODE OFF, PANEL OFF*, ON

PWR SAVE IN ERR ON*, OFF

POWER SAVE TIME 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes*, 60 minutes, 180 minutes

WARNING STEP

CHECK TONER CONT.PRINTING*, STOP PRINTING

AUTO ERROR SKIP ON, OFF*

PANEL LANGUAGE ENGLISH*, FRENCH, GERMAN, ITALIAN, SPANISH

SHOW WARNINGS
CHECK TONER ON*, OFF

CHECK FIX.UNIT ON*, OFF

CHK WST TNR CTN ON*, OFF

CHECK DRUM ON*, OFF

CASSETTE EMPTY ON*, OFF

DATE AND TIME

1-30
 Chapter 1

Item Setting Notes

DATE SETTING 01/01/2001 to 31/12/2089

TIME SETTING 00:00:00 to 23:59:59

DAYLIGHT SAVING

DST SETTINGS ON, OFF*

START DATE

MONTH JANUARY*, FEBRUARY, MARCH, APRIL, MAY, JUNE,

JULY, AUGUST, SEPTEMBER, OCTOBER, NOVEMBER,
DECEMBER

WEEK 1ST WEEK*, 2ND WEEK, 3RD WEEK, 4TH WEEK, LAST
WEEK

DAY SUNDAY*, MONDAY, TUESDAY, WEDNESDAY,

THURSDAY, FRIDAY, SATURDAY

TIME SETTING 0 to 23 (0*)

END DATE

MONTH JANUARY*, FEBRUARY, MARCH, APRIL, MAY, JUNE,

JULY, AUGUST, SEPTEMBER, OCTOBER, NOVEMBER,
DECEMBER

WEEK 1ST WEEK*, 2ND WEEK, 3RD WEEK, 4TH WEEK, LAST
WEEK

DAY SUNDAY*, MONDAY, TUESDAY, WEDNESDAY,

THURSDAY, FRIDAY, SATURDAY

TIME SETTING 0 to 23 (0*)

TIME ZONE GMT-12:00, GMT-11:00, GMT-10:00, GMT-09:00, GMT-8:00,

GMT-07:00, GMT-06:00, GMT-05:00, GMT-04:00, GMT-
03:30, GMT-03:00, GMT-02:00, GMT-01:00, GMT 00:00*,
GMT+01:00, GMT+02:00, GMT+03:00, GMT+03:30,
GMT+04:00, GMT+04:30, GMT+05:00, GMT+05:30,
GMT+06:00, GMT+07:00, GMT+08:00, GMT+09:00,
GMT+09:30, GMT+10:00, GMT+11:00, GMT+12:00

TIMER SETTINGS

WAKE UP TIMER ON, OFF*

WAKE UP TIME 00:00 to 23:59 (12:00*)

POW.SAVE TIMER ON, OFF*

POWER SAVE TIME 00:00 to 23:59 (12:00*)

CALIBRATE TIMER ON, OFF*

CALIBRATE TIME 00:00 to 23:59 (12:00*)

HARD DISK ON*, OFF Indicated when the hard disk is mounted.

INTERRUPT PRINT ON*, OFF Indicated when HDD is enabled.

SECURING TIME 1 hours*, 2 hours, 3 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours Indicated when HDD is enabled.

SECURED TYPE IMAGE*, PDL Indicated when HDD is enabled.

RIP ONCE ON*, OFF - Indicated when the hard disk is mounted.
- Indicated when a hard disk is set to use.

ASSURE JOB LOG ON, OFF* Indicated when HDD is enabled.

QUIET MODE 0 to 10 (10*)

DEBUG

1-31
 Chapter 1

Item Setting Notes

PASSWORD - Indicated when no password is set.

IMAGE CHECK ON, OFF*

NVRAM ALL INIT.

PASSWORD - Indicated when no password is set.

FEEDER MENU
T-1-29

Item Setting Note

TRAY PAPER SIZE A5, B5, A4*, B4, A3, LTR, LGL, LDR, EXEC, 305x457 mm
(12x18 inches), MIXED SIZES, CUSTOM SIZE, SUSTOM
SIZER, ENV. ISO-C5, ENV. COM10, ENV. MONARCH,
ENV. DL, ENV. ISO-B5, STMT, 8K, 16K

CASSETTE1 SIZE MIXED SIZES, CUSTOM SIZE*, CUSTOM SIZER, 305x457 Indicated in full when CNCL PAPER LMT is
mm (12x18 inches), ENV. ISO-C5, ENV. COM10, ENV. ON.
MONARCH, ENV. DL, ENV. ISO-B5, STMT, 8K, 16K

CASSETTE2 SIZE MIXED SIZES, CUSTOM SIZE*, CUSTOM SIZER, 305x457 Indicated in full when CNCL PAPER LMT is
mm (12x18 inches), ENV. ISO-C5, ENV. COM10, ENV. ON.
MONARCH, ENV. DL, ENV. ISO-B5, STMT, 8K, 16K

CASSETTE3 SIZE MIXED SIZES, CUSTOM SIZE*, CUSTOM SIZER, 305x457 Indicated in full when CNCL PAPER LMT is
mm (12x18 inches), ENV. ISO-C5, ENV. COM10, ENV. ON.
MONARCH, ENV. DL, ENV. ISO-B5, STMT, 8K, 16K

CASSETTE4 SIZE MIXED SIZES, CUSTOM SIZE*, CUSTOM SIZER, 305x457 Indicated in full when CNCL PAPER LMT is
mm (12x18 inches), ENV. ISO-C5, ENV. COM10, ENV. ON.
MONARCH, ENV. DL, ENV. ISO-B5, STMT, 8K, 16K

STD PAPER SIZE A5, B5, A4*, B4, A3, LTR, LGL, LDR, EXEC, 305x457 mm
(12x18 inches), ENV. ISO-C5, ENV. COM10, ENV.
MONARCH, ENV. DL, ENV. ISO-B5, STMT, 8K, 16K

TRAY PRIORITY ON, OFF*

INVLDPAPER TRAY ON, OFF*

AUTO SELECTION

TRAY ON*, OFF

CASSETTE 1 ON*, OFF

CASSETTE 2 ON*, OFF Indicated when the cassette is attached.

CASSETTE 3 ON*, OFF Indicated when the cassette is attached.

CASSETTE 4 ON*, OFF Indicated when the cassette is attached.

STD PAPER TYPE PLAIN PAPER*, PLAIN PAPER L, HEAVY PAPER 1,

HEAVY PAPER 2, ENVELOPE, COATED PAPER, LABEL

TRAY PAPER TYPE PLAIN PAPER*, PLAIN PAPER L, HEAVY PAPER 1,

HEAVY PAPER 2, ENVELOPE, COATED PAPER, LABEL,
MIXED TYPES

CASSETTE1 TYPE PLAIN PAPER*, PLAIN PAPER L, HEAVY PAPER 1, Indicated in full when CNCL PAPER LMT is
HEAVY PAPER 2, ENVELOPE, COATED PAPER, LABEL, ON.
MIXED TYPES

CASSETTE2 TYPE PLAIN PAPER*, PLAIN PAPER L, HEAVY PAPER 1, Indicated in full when CNCL PAPER LMT is
HEAVY PAPER 2, ENVELOPE, COATED PAPER, LABEL, ON.
MIXED TYPES

1-32
 Chapter 1

Item Setting Note

CASSETTE3 TYPE PLAIN PAPER*, PLAIN PAPER L, HEAVY PAPER 1, Indicated in full when CNCL PAPER LMT is
HEAVY PAPER 2, ENVELOPE, COATED PAPER, LABEL, ON.
MIXED TYPES

CASSETTE4 TYPE PLAIN PAPER*, PLAIN PAPER L, HEAVY PAPER 1, Indicated in full when CNCL PAPER LMT is
HEAVY PAPER 2, ENVELOPE, COATED PAPER, LABEL, ON.
MIXED TYPES

MANUAL 2-SIDED 1ST SIDE*, 2ND SIDE

2-SIDED PRINT. ON, OFF*

1.6.16 Settings Menu (2)

0013-4631

LBP5960

LAYOUT MENU
T-1-30

Item Setting Notes

COPIES 1 to 9999 (1*)

OFFSET Y -50.0 to 50.0 (0.0*)

OFFSET X -50.0 to 50.0 (0.0*)

BIND.LOCATION LONG EDGE*, SHORT EDGE

GUTTER -50.0 to 50.0 (0.0*)

ALT.METHOD ON*, OFF

QUALITY MENU
T-1-31

Item Setting Notes

RESOLUTION FINE*, SUPER FINE

GRADATION LEVEL STANDARD, HIGH 1*, HIGH 2 'HIGH 1' and 'HIGH 2' are indicated when the
'Resolution' setting is 'FINE'.
'STANDARD' is indicated when the 'Resolution'
setting is 'SUPER FINE'.

TONER SAVE ON, OFF*

DENSITY:CYAN 1 to 16 (9*)

DENSITY:MAGENTA 1 to 16 (9*)

DENSITY:YELLOW 1 to 16 (9*)

DENSITY:BLACK 1 to 16 (9*)

COLOR MODE AUTO*, COLOR, BLACK & WHITE

HALFTONES

B & W HALFTONES

TEXT RESOLUTION*, GRADATION, COLOR TONE, HIGH

RESOL.

GRAPHICS RESOLUTION, GRADATION*, COLOR TONE, HIGH

RESOL.

IMAGE RESOLUTION, GRADATION*, COLOR TONE, HIGH

RESOL.

COLOR HALFTONES

TEXT RESOLUTION*, GRADATION, COLOR TONE, HIGH

RESOL.

GRAPHICS RESOLUTION, GRADATION, COLOR TONE*, HIGH

RESOL.

IMAGE RESOLUTION, GRADATION, COLOR TONE*, HIGH

RESOL.

1-33
 Chapter 1

Item Setting Notes

GRAY COMPENSATE

TEXT ON*, OFF

GRAPHICS ON*, OFF

IMAGE ON*, OFF

CMS

CMS SELECTION PRINTER*, HOST

CMS/GAMMA

TEXT CMS*, GAMMA

GRAPHICS CMS*, GAMMA

IMAGE CMS*, GAMMA

RGB SRCE PROF.

TEXT sRGB_v1.31*, HDTV_gamma_1.5, HDTV_gamma_1.8, Indicated any character string obtained from
HDTV_gamma_2.4 CPCA.

GRAPHICS sRGB_v1.31*, HDTV_gamma_1.5, HDTV_gamma_1.8, Indicated any character string obtained from
HDTV_gamma_2.4 CPCA.

IMAGE sRGB_v1.31*, HDTV_gamma_1.5, HDTV_gamma_1.8, Indicated any character string obtained from
HDTV_gamma_2.4 CPCA.

OUTPUT PROFILE

TEXT Normal*, Photo

GRAPHICS Normal*, Photo Indicated any character string obtained from

CPCA.

IMAGE Normal, Photo* Indicated any character string obtained from

CPCA.

MATCHING METHOD Indicated any character string obtained from

CPCA.

TEXT PERCEPTUAL, SATURATION*, COLORIMETRIC

GRAPHICS PERCEPTUAL*, SATURATION, COLORIMETRIC

IMAGE PERCEPTUAL*, SATURATION, COLORIMETRIC

GAMMA

TEXT 1.0, 1.4*, 1.8, 2.2

GRAPHICS 1.0, 1.4*, 1.8, 2.2

IMAGE 1.0, 1.4*, 1.8, 2.2

QUALITY CHANGE CONT.PRINTING*, STOP PRINTING

1.6.17 Settings Menu (3)

0013-4634

LBP5960

INTERFACE MENU
T-1-32

Item Setting Notes

I/F CONNECTION

PARALLEL ON*, OFF

USB ON*, OFF

NETWORK ON*, OFF

EXT.INTERFACE ON*, OFF Indicated when extension is ON.

MODE TIMEOUT 5 to 300 seconds (15*), OFF

1-34
 Chapter 1

Item Setting Notes

NETWORK MENU Indicated when a built-in N/W is selected in I/F
CONNECTION.

1-35
 Chapter 1

Item Setting Notes

TCP/IP SETTINGS

IP MODE MANUAL*, AUTO

PROTOCOL - Indicated when IP MODE is AUTO.

- The last one set ON among the three options
becomes enabled.

DHCP ON, OFF*

BOOTP ON, OFF*

RARP ON, OFF*

IP SETTINGS

IP ADDRESS 0.0.0.0*

SUBNET MASK 0.0.0.0*

GATEWAY 0.0.0.0*
ADDRESS
DNS

PRIMARY ADD. 0.0.0.0*

SECONDARY ADD. 0.0.0.0*

WINS ON, OFF*

ARP/PING ON*, OFF

FTP

FTP PRINT ON*, OFF

FTP SETTINGS ON*, OFF

LPD PRINT ON*, OFF

RAW PRINT ON*, OFF

IPP PRINT ON*, OFF HTTP is automatically ON when setting IPP

PRINT as ON.

HTTP ON*, OFF IPP is automatically OFF when setting HTTP as

OFF.

SNTP ON, OFF*

RESPONSE ON*, OFF

IP ADD.RANGE

REJECT RX/PRT ON, OFF*

REJECT ADD.SET. REJ IP 1 START / REJ IP 1 END to REJ IP 8 START / REJ IP - Items that START is set are indicated.
8 END - Additional input is possible at the last item.

PERMIT RX/PRT ON, OFF*

PERMIT ADD.SET. PER IP 1 START / PER IP 1 END to PER IP 8 START / PER - Items that START is set are indicated.
IP 8 END - Additional input is possible at the last item.

REJ SET/BROWSE ON, OFF*

REJECT ADD.SET. REJ IP 1 START / REJ IP 1 END to REJ IP 8 START / REJ IP - Items that START is set are indicated.
8 END - Additional input is possible at the last item.

PMT SET/BROWSE ON, OFF*

PERMIT ADD.SET. PER IP 1 START / PER IP 1 END to PER IP 8 START / PER - Items that START is set are indicated.
IP 8 END - Additional input is possible at the last item.

MAC ADDRESS SET Not indicated when an extension card is the

primary I/F.

PERMIT RECEIVE ON, OFF*

PERMIT ADD.SET. PER.MAC ADD.1 to PER.MAC ADD.50 - Indicated the registered addresses.
- Additional input is possible at the last item.

1-36
 Chapter 1

Item Setting Notes

NETWORK MENU Indicated when a built-in N/W is selected in I/F
CONNECTION.
SMB

SMB SERVER ON, OFF*

SMB ON, OFF* SMB Server is ON.

SNMP ON*, OFF

SPOOLER ON, OFF* Indicated when HDD is enabled.

START WAIT TIME 0* to 300seconds

REMOTE UI SET.

REMOTE UI ON*, OFF HTTP is automatically ON when setting

REMOTE UI as ON.

SSL ON, OFF* - Indicated only when Remote UI is On and, in

addition, the HDD is being in use.
- Does not permit activation unless both control
key and certificate have been created and
registered as part of default settings.

ETHERNET DRIVER

AUTO DETECT ON*, OFF

COMM.MODE HALF DUPLEX*, FULL DUPLEX Indicated when AUTO DETECT is OFF.

ETHERNET TYPE 10 BASE-T*, 100 BASE-TX Indicated when AUTO DETECT is OFF.

MAC ADDRESS - Indication only.

INIT.N/W SET. -

EXT.I/F MENU - Indicated when EXT.INTERFACE is ON.

- Operation is possible for the following: when
extension is on, when it is in the offline state, and
when no job is processed.

TCP/IP SETTINGS

FRAME TYPE OFF, ETHERNET 2*

IP MODE AUTO*, MANUAL

PROTOCOL Indicated when IP MODE is AUTO.

DHCP ON, OFF* DHCP is ON when IP MODE is AUTO and other

protocol options are OFF.

BOOTP ON, OFF*

RARP ON, OFF*

IP SETTINGS

IP ADDRESS 192.168.0.215*

SUBNET MASK 0.0.0.0*

GATEWAY 0.0.0.0*
ADDRESS
STORE SETTING -

INIT.N/W SET. -

CONNECT.RECOG. ON*, OFF

EXT.RX BUFFER ON, OFF* Indicated when data amount is 256 MB or more.

USER MAIN
T-1-33

Item Setting Notes

ADJ.START POS.

1-37
 Chapter 1

Item Setting Notes

OFFSET Y -15.0 to 15.0 (0.0*)

OFFSET X(TRAY) -10.0 to 10.0 (0.0*)

OFFSET X(CASS1) -10.0 to 10.0 (0.0*)

OFFSET X(CASS2) -10.0 to 10.0 (0.0*) Indicated when the cassette is attached.

OFFSET X(CASS3) -10.0 to 10.0 (0.0*) Indicated when the cassette is attached.

OFFSET X(CASS4) -10.0 to 10.0 (0.0*) Indicated when the cassette is attached.

OFFSET X(DUP.) -10.0 to 10.0 (0.0*)

RECVRY PRINTING ON*, OFF

REWRTE PAPR ATT ON*, OFF

INIT.COUNTER

FIXING UNIT -

SPECIAL MODE J ON, OFF*

SUBSTITUTE SIZE ON, OFF*

SP.IMAGE MODE OFF*, LEVEL1, LEVEL2

SP.S-SIZE MODE1 -2 to 2 (0*)

SP.S-SIZE MODE2 -2 to 2 (0*)

CLEANING -

HDD MAINTENANCE Indicated when the hard disk is mounted.

HDD ALL ERASE ON, OFF*

QUICK FORMAT - - Indicated when HDD is not formatted

completely.
- Not indicated at the time of 55HDDErr.
STD FORMAT - Not indicated at the time of 55HDDErr.

SP.ADMIN.MODE

1-38
 Chapter 1

Item Setting Notes

MAINTENANCE C. - Indicated when no maintenance code is set.

CNCL PAPER LMT ON, OFF* Indicated when the maintenance code is
consistent.

DRUM PAUSE ON*, OFF Indicated when the maintenance code is

consistent.

REMAINING TONER - Indicated when the maintenance code is

consistent.

DOT COUNTER ON, OFF* Indicated when the maintenance code is

consistent.

1TR-TGC -10 to 10 (0*)

1TR-TGM -10 to 10 (0*)

1TR-TGY -10 to 10 (0*)

1TR-TGK1 -10 to 10 (0*)

2TR-N1 -10 to 10 (0*)

2TR-N2 -10 to 10 (0*)

2TR-H1 -10 to 10 (0*)

2TR-H2 -10 to 10 (0*)

2TR-UH1 -10 to 10 (0*)

2TR-UH2 -10 to 10 (0*)

2TR-P1 -10 to 10 (0*)

2TR-P2 -10 to 10 (0*)

2TR-NH1 -10 to 10 (0*)

2TR-NH2 -10 to 10 (0*)

2TR-L1 -10 to 10 (0*)

2TR-SP1 -10 to 10 (0*)

ITBB-TMG -9 to 0 (0*)

INTPPR-1 -2 to 2 (0*)

FIX-TEMP -2 to 2 (0*)

FX-S-TMP -2 to 2 (0*)

DEVL-CLN -

CUSTOM_S.VERT. ON, OFF* Indicated when the maintenance code is

consistent.

CNCL JOB SINGLY ON*, OFF Indicated when the maintenance code is
consistent.

SP.PRINT MODE

PLAIN PAPER OFF*, MODE 1, MODE 2, MODE 3

COATED PAPER ON, OFF*

1.6.18 Settings Menu (4)

0013-4644

LBP5960

PCL SETUP
T-1-34

Item Setting Notes

PAPER SAVE ON, OFF*

ORIENTATION PORTRAIT*, LANDSCAPE

FONT NUMBER 0 to 89 (0*)

POINT SIZE 4.0 to 999.75point (12.00*) Indicated when selecting 1 to 69 for FONT
NUMBER.

1-39
 Chapter 1

Item Setting Notes

PITCH 0.44 to 99.99cpi (10.00*) Indicated when selecting 70 to 89 for FONT
NUMBER.

FORM LINES 5 to 128lines (64*)

SYMBOL SET PC8*, ROMAN8, ROMAN9, ISOL1, ISOL2, ISOL5, ISOL6,

ISOL9, PC775, PC8DN, PC850, PC852, PC858, PC8TK,
PC1004, WINL1, WINL2, WINL5, WINBALT, DESKTOP,
PSTEXT, LEGAL, ISO4, ISO6, ISO11, ISO15, ISO17, ISO21,
ISO60, ISO69, WIN 30, MCTEXT

CUSTOM SIZE SET, DO NOT SET*

UNIT OF MEASURE Millimeters*, Inches

X DIMENSION 98.0 to 312.0 mm (312.0*) - The range from the min. supported paper width
3.86 to 12.28 inches (12.28*) to the max. supported paper width.
- Changes in keeping with 'UNIT OF
MEASURE'.

Y DIMENSION 139.7 to 1200.0 mm (457.7*) - The range from the min. supported paper width
5.50 to 47.24 inches (18.00*) to the max. supported paper width.
- Changes in keeping with 'UNIT OF
MEASURE'.

APPEND CR TO LF YES, NO*

ENLRG A4 WIDTH ON, OFF*

BARDIMM ENABLE, DISABLE* Indicated when BARDIMM is mounted.

FREESCAPE OFF, ~*, ", #, $, /, \, ?, {, }, | Indicated when BARDIMM is enabled.

UFR II SETUP
T-1-35

Item Setting Notes

PAPER SAVE ON*, OFF

1.6.19 Settings Menu (5)

0013-4671

LBP5960

SERVICE MODE

T-1-36

Item Setting Notes

PASSWORD -

COUNTER GR.

1-40
 Chapter 1

Item Setting Notes

INIT.FIX.COUNT -

DV-UNT-C 0 to 45000 (0*)

INIT.DV-UNT-C -

DV-UNT-M 0 to 45000 (0*)

INIT.DV-UNT-M -

DV-UNT-Y 0 to 45000 (0*)

INIT.DV-UNT-Y -

DV-UNT-K 0 to 45000 (0*)

INIT.DV-UNT-K -

INIT.C1-PU-RL -

INIT.C2-PU-RL -

INIT.C3-PU-RL -

INIT.C4-PU-RL -

INIT.M-PU-RL -

INIT.2TR-ROLL -

INIT.ITB UNIT -

ADJUST GR.

1-41
 Chapter 1

Item Setting Notes

CALIBRATION ON*, OFF

IMG-REG

REG-H-C -127 to 127 (0*)

REG-H-M -127 to 127 (0*)

REG-H-Y -127 to 127 (0*)

REG-H-K -127 to 127 (0*)

REG-V-C -127 to 127 (0*)

REG-V-M -127 to 127 (0*)

REG-V-Y -127 to 127 (0*)

REG-V-K -127 to 127 (0*)

VD-OFS-K -5 to 5 (0*)

VD-OFS-3 -5 to 5 (0*)

V-BACK-K -3 to 3 (0*)

V-BACK-3 -3 to 3 (0*)

P-TG-C -4 to 4 (0*)

P-TG-M -4 to 4 (0*)

P-TG-Y -4 to 4 (0*)

P-TG-K -4 to 4 (0*)

OFSTAC-C 0 to 3 (0*)

OFSTAC-M 0 to 3 (0*)

OFSTAC-Y 0 to 3 (0*)

OFSTAC-K 0 to 3 (0*)

T-SPLY-C -3 to 3 (0*)

T-SPLY-M -3 to 3 (0*)

T-SPLY-Y -3 to 3 (0*)

T-SPLY-K -3 to 3 (0*)

1TR-TGC -10 to 10 (0*)

1TR-TGM -10 to 10 (0*)

1TR-TGY -10 to 10 (0*)

1TR-TGK1 -10 to 10 (0*)

2TR-N1 -10 to 10 (0*)

2TR-N2 -10 to 10 (0*)

2TR-H1 -10 to 10 (0*)

2TR-H2 -10 to 10 (0*)

2TR-UH1 -10 to 10 (0*)

2TR-UH2 -10 to 10 (0*)

2TR-P1 -10 to 10 (0*)

2TR-P2 -10 to 10 (0*)

2TR-NH1 -10 to 10 (0*)

2TR-NH2 -10 to 10 (0*)

2TR-L1 -10 to 10 (0*)

2TR-SP1 -10 to 10 (0*)

OPTION GR.

1-42
 Chapter 1

Item Setting Notes

DEVL-VTH -1 to 2 (0*)

DRM-RTIM -1 to 50 (0*)

FX-SPD 0 to 2 (0*)

ITBB-TMG -9 to 0 (0*)

INTPPR-1 -2 to 2 (0*)

FIX-TEMP -2 to 2 (0*)

FX-S-TMP -5 to 5 (0*)

ADJ-LVL ON, OFF*

CONFIG 0*, 1

T-LW-LVL 0 to 3 (0*)

LONG SLEEP TIME 0 to 24 (8*)

FUNCTION GR.

CLEAR ERR -

SHIP-CLR -

2TR-CLN -

DEVL-CLN -

COLOR MODE SLCT ON, OFF*

LOG GR.

SYSTEM LOG ON*, OFF

SUBLOG FTP GET -

LOGGING UTILITY ON, OFF*

FW UPDATE GR. Enables while no job is processed.

PARALLEL -

USB -

NETWORK -

NETWORK GR.

FTP SYSLOG ON, OFF*

JOB SERIALIZE ON, OFF*

1.6.20 Utility Menu

0013-4672

LBP5960

T-1-37

Item Notes
CONFIG.PAGE

TEST PRINT B Use it to print the continuous test (grid pattern).

TEST PRINT C1 Use it to print the image quality test (engine test pattern).

TEST PRINT C2 Use it to print the image quality test (engine test pattern).

TEST PRINT D1 Use it to print the counter value / machine information for maintenance.

TEST PRINT D2 Use it to print the image quality test (gradation pattern (color)).

TEST PRINT E Use it to print the continuous test (colored grid pattern).

TEST PRINT N Use it to print the image quality test (patch pattern).

TEST PRINT AL Use it to print the faulty image diagnosis chart for checking cyan development.

TEST PRINT AM Use it to print the faulty image diagnosis chart for checking magenta development.

TEST PRINT AN Use it to print the faulty image diagnosis chart for checking yellow development.

TEST PRINT AO Use it to print the faulty image diagnosis chart for checking black development.

TEST PRINT AP Use it to print the faulty image diagnosis chart for checking gradation and registration displacement.

1-43
 Chapter 1

Item Notes
TEST PRINT AQ Use it to print the faulty image diagnosis chart for checking transfer.

TEST PRINT AR Use it to print the faulty image diagnosis chart for checking color displacement.

PCL UTILITY

FONTS LIST Use it to print the fonts list.

NW STATUS PRINT Use it to print the standard network status list.

EXT.I/F PRINT Use it to print the extension I/F status list.

CALIBRATION Use it to execute calibration.

CALIBRATION LOG Use it to print the debug of calibration function.

HDD UTILITY

FILE LISTS Use it to print the file list in HDD.

LOGGING UTILITY

PRINT LOG Use it to print the system log list.

DELETE LOGS Use it to delete the system log.

PRNTPOSNPRINT Use it to print for printing position adjustment.

TEST CHART 1 Use it to print the faulty image diagnosis chart for PCRG factor diagnosis.

TEST CHART 2 Use it to print the faulty image diagnosis chart for image diagnosis.

1.6.21 Reset Menu

0013-4673

LBP5960

T-1-38

Item Notes
SOFT RESET

HARD RESET Hold down [SOFT RESET].

FORM FEED

SHUT DOWN Indicate when using HDD.

CHANGE TONER

K TONER

C TONER

M TONER

Y TONER

1.6.22 Feeder Selection Menu

0013-4674

LBP5960

T-1-39

Item Setting
PAPER SOURCE AUTO, CASSETTE 1, CASSETTE 2, CASSETTE 3, CASSETTE 4, TRAY

TRAY PAPER SIZE A5, B5, A4*, B4, A3, LTR, LGL, LDR, EXEC, 305X457 mm (12X18 inches), MIXED SIZES, CUSTOM SIZE, SUSTOM SIZER,
ENV. ISO-C5, ENV. COM10, ENV. MONARCH, ENV. DL, ENV. ISO-B5, STMT, 8K, 16K

CASSETTE1 SIZE MIXED SIZES, CUSTOM SIZE*, CUSTOM SIZER, 305X457 mm (12X18 inches), ENV. ISO-C5, ENV. COM10, ENV.
MONARCH, ENV. DL, ENV. ISO-B5, STMT, 8K, 16K

CASSETTE2 SIZE MIXED SIZES, CUSTOM SIZE*, CUSTOM SIZER, 305X457 mm (12X18 inches), ENV. ISO-C5, ENV. COM10, ENV.
MONARCH, ENV. DL, ENV. ISO-B5, STMT, 8K, 16K

1-44
 Chapter 1

Item Setting
CASSETTE3 SIZE MIXED SIZES, CUSTOM SIZE*, CUSTOM SIZER, 305X457 mm (12X18 inches), ENV. ISO-C5, ENV. COM10, ENV.
MONARCH, ENV. DL, ENV. ISO-B5, STMT, 8K, 16K

CASSETTE4 SIZE MIXED SIZES, CUSTOM SIZE*, CUSTOM SIZER, 305X457 mm (12X18 inches), ENV. ISO-C5, ENV. COM10, ENV.
MONARCH, ENV. DL, ENV. ISO-B5, STMT, 8K, 16K

TRAY PAPER TYPE PLAIN PAPER*, PLAIN PAPER L, HEAVY PAPER 1, HEAVY PAPER 2, ENVELOPE, COATED PAPER, LABEL, MIXED
TYPES

CASSETTE1 TYPE PLAIN PAPER*, PLAIN PAPER L, HEAVY PAPER 1, HEAVY PAPER 2, ENVELOPE, COATED PAPER, LABEL, MIXED
TYPES

CASSETTE2 TYPE PLAIN PAPER*, PLAIN PAPER L, HEAVY PAPER 1, HEAVY PAPER 2, ENVELOPE, COATED PAPER, LABEL, MIXED
TYPES

CASSETTE3 TYPE PLAIN PAPER*, PLAIN PAPER L, HEAVY PAPER 1, HEAVY PAPER 2, ENVELOPE, COATED PAPER, LABEL, MIXED
TYPES

CASSETTE4 TYPE PLAIN PAPER*, PLAIN PAPER L, HEAVY PAPER 1, HEAVY PAPER 2, ENVELOPE, COATED PAPER, LABEL, MIXED
TYPES

2-SIDED PRINT. ON, OFF*

1.7 Safety

1.7.1 Safety of Toner

0008-1410

LBP5960

About Toner
The machine's toner is a non-toxic material composed of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye.

Do not throw away toner into fire. Otherwise, explosion can occur.

Upon Contact with Toner

- If your clothes or skin has come into contact with toner, wipe it using dry tissue, and rinse well with water.
- Do not use warm water, which will turn the toner into gel and cause it to fuse permanently with the fibers of the clothes.
- Do not bring toner into contact with vinyl material. It will readily react.

1.7.2 Points to Note When Replacing/Disposing of the Lithium Battery

0012-7602

LBP5960

The video controller PCB of the machine are equipped with a lithium battery (1 pc. each) serving as a backup source of power in the event of a power shortage or
when the power plug is removed.

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.

DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.

1-45
 Chapter 1

1.7.3 Safety of Laser Light

0016-5307

LBP5970 / LBP5975

Exposure to laser light can prove to be extremely hazardous. The machine's laser system is completely sealed by means of a protective housing and external covers
so that its light will not escape to the outside of the machine. In other words, there is no likelihood of the user being exposed to the machine's laser light as long as
it is used for its intended purpose.

1.7.4 CDRH Regulations

0016-5308

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the US Food and Drug Administration brought into effect regulations on laser products on August 2,
1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured on and after August 1, 1976, and prohibit sale of laser products without proof of compliance with the
regulations. The following shows the label attached to a product certified under the regulations:

F-1-15

1.7.5 Handling the Laser System

0016-5309

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine's laser/scanner system uses invisible laser light.

If exposed to a laser beam, the eye could well incur permanent damage. Be sure never to disassemble the machine's laser/scanner system. It is not designed to permit
adjustment in the field.
The following label is attached to the bottom of the machine's laser/scanner assembly:

F-1-16

1.7.6 Safety of Toner

0016-5310

LBP5970 / LBP5975

About Toner
The machine's toner is a non-toxic material composed of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye.

Do not throw away toner into fire. Otherwise, explosion can occur.

Upon Contact with Toner

- If your clothes or skin has come into contact with toner, wipe it using dry tissue, and rinse well with water.
- Do not use warm water, which will turn the toner into gel and cause it to fuse permanently with the fibers of the clothes.
- Do not bring toner into contact with vinyl material. It will readily react.

1.7.7 Points to Note When Replacing/Disposing of the Lithium Battery

0016-5312

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The video controller PCB of the machine are equipped with a lithium battery (1 pc. each) serving as a backup source of power in the event of a power shortage or
when the power plug is removed.

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.

DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.

1-46
Chapter 1

1-47
Chapter 2 TECHNICAL REFERENCE
 Contents

Contents

2.1 Functional Configuration ...............................................................................................................................................2-1

2.1.1 Functional Construction............................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Functional Construction............................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Basic Sequense...............................................................................................................................................................2-2
2.2.1 Power-On Sequence..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.2 Power-On Sequence..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM.....................................................................................................................................2-4
2.3.1 Overview/Configuration .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.3.1.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................................................................................2-4
2.3.1.2 Overview .........................................................................................................................................................................................................2-5
2.3.2 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing..................................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.3.2.1 Turning On and Off the Laser Light ...............................................................................................................................................................2-7
2.3.2.2 Controlling Synchronization in Main Scanning Direction..............................................................................................................................2-8
2.3.2.3 Turning On and Off the Laser Light ...............................................................................................................................................................2-9
2.3.2.4 Controlling Synchronization in Sub Scanning Direction..............................................................................................................................2-11
2.3.2.5 Controlling Synchronization in Main Scanning Direction............................................................................................................................2-13
2.3.2.6 Controlling Synchronization in Sub Scanning Direction..............................................................................................................................2-14
2.3.3 Laser Control ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-16
2.3.3.1 APC Control..................................................................................................................................................................................................2-16
2.3.3.2 APC Control..................................................................................................................................................................................................2-17
2.3.3.3 BD Correction ...............................................................................................................................................................................................2-17
2.3.3.4 BD Correction ...............................................................................................................................................................................................2-20
2.3.4 Laser Scanner Motor Control..................................................................................................................................................... 2-22
2.3.4.1 Controlling the Speed of the Laser Scanner Motor.......................................................................................................................................2-22
2.3.4.2 Controlling the Speed of the Laser Scanner Motor.......................................................................................................................................2-22
2.4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM ...............................................................................................................................2-24
2.4.1 Overview/Configuration ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-24
2.4.1.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................................................2-24
2.4.1.2 Printing Process.............................................................................................................................................................................................2-24
2.4.1.3 Static Image Formation Block ......................................................................................................................................................................2-25
2.4.1.4 Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................................................2-26
2.4.1.5 Developing Block..........................................................................................................................................................................................2-27
2.4.1.6 Printing Process.............................................................................................................................................................................................2-28
2.4.1.7 Transfer Block...............................................................................................................................................................................................2-29
2.4.1.8 Fixing Block..................................................................................................................................................................................................2-31
2.4.1.9 Static Image Formation Block ......................................................................................................................................................................2-31
2.4.1.10 ITB Cleaning Block ....................................................................................................................................................................................2-33
2.4.1.11 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Block .........................................................................................................................................................2-33
2.4.1.12 Developing Block........................................................................................................................................................................................2-34
2.4.1.13 Transfer Block.............................................................................................................................................................................................2-35
2.4.1.14 Fixing Block................................................................................................................................................................................................2-36
2.4.1.15 ITB Cleaning Block ....................................................................................................................................................................................2-37
2.4.1.16 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Block .........................................................................................................................................................2-37
2.4.2 High-Voltage Control ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-38
2.4.2.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................................................2-38
2.4.2.2 Generation of the Primary Charging Bias .....................................................................................................................................................2-39
2.4.2.3 Generation of the Developing Bias ...............................................................................................................................................................2-39
2.4.2.4 Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................................................2-40
2.4.2.5 Generation of the Primary Transfer Bias ......................................................................................................................................................2-40
2.4.2.6 Generation of the Secondary Transfer Bias ..................................................................................................................................................2-41
2.4.2.7 Generation of the Primary Charging Bias .....................................................................................................................................................2-41
2.4.2.8 Generation of the Developing Bias ...............................................................................................................................................................2-41
2.4.2.9 Generation of the Primary Transfer Bias ......................................................................................................................................................2-41
2.4.2.10 Generation of the Secondary Transfer Bias ................................................................................................................................................2-41
 Contents

2.4.3 Image Stabilizaton Control ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-42

2.4.3.1 Overview of Image Stabilization .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-42
2.4.3.2 Timing of Image Stabilization Control ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-42
2.4.3.3 Drum Film Thickness Detection................................................................................................................................................................... 2-43
2.4.3.4 ATR Control ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-44
2.4.3.5 D-max Control .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-45
2.4.3.6 D-half Control............................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-48
2.4.3.7 Overview of Image Stabilization .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-51
2.4.3.8 Abridged D-half Control............................................................................................................................................................................... 2-52
2.4.3.9 Color Displacement Correction Control ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-53
2.4.3.10 ATVC Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-57
2.4.3.11 Timing of Image Stabilization Control ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-59
2.4.3.12 Drum Film Thickness Detection................................................................................................................................................................. 2-59
2.4.3.13 ATR Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-60
2.4.3.14 D-max Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-61
2.4.3.15 D-half Control............................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-64
2.4.3.16 Abridged D-half Control............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-67
2.4.3.17 Color Displacement Correction Control ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-68
2.4.3.18 ATVC Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-72
2.4.4 Toner Cartridge.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-74
2.4.4.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-74
2.4.4.2 Detecting the Presence/Absence of the Toner Cartridge .............................................................................................................................. 2-74
2.4.4.3 Overview....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-75
2.4.4.4 Supplying Toner ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-76
2.4.4.5 Detecting the Presence/Absence of the Toner Cartridge .............................................................................................................................. 2-78
2.4.4.6 Supplying Toner ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-78
2.4.4.7 Detecting the Level of Toner ........................................................................................................................................................................ 2-80
2.4.4.8 Detecting the Level of Toner ........................................................................................................................................................................ 2-81
2.4.5 Drum Cartridge .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-82
2.4.5.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-82
2.4.5.2 Detecting the Presence/Absence of the Drum Cartridge .............................................................................................................................. 2-83
2.4.5.3 Overview....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-84
2.4.5.4 Identifying a New/Old Drum Cartridge........................................................................................................................................................ 2-84
2.4.5.5 Detecting the Presence/Absence of the Drum Cartridge .............................................................................................................................. 2-86
2.4.5.6 Detecting the Life of the Drum..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-87
2.4.5.7 Opening/Closing the Toner Shutter .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-88
2.4.5.8 Identifying a New/Old Drum Cartridge........................................................................................................................................................ 2-90
2.4.5.9 Detecting the Life of the Drum..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-91
2.4.5.10 Opening/Closing the Toner Shutter ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-92
2.4.6 Transfer Unit.............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-94
2.4.6.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-94
2.4.6.2 Primary Transfer Block ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-94
2.4.6.3 Overview....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-94
2.4.6.4 ITB Soiling Removal Sequence Control ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-95
2.4.6.5 Primary Transfer Block ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-96
2.4.6.6 ITB Soiling Removal Sequence Control ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-96
2.4.6.7 Secondary Transfer Block ............................................................................................................................................................................ 2-97
2.4.6.8 Secondary Transfer Block ............................................................................................................................................................................ 2-97
2.4.7 Waste Toner Collection ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-97
2.4.7.1 Collecting the Waste Toner .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-97
2.4.7.2 Collecting the Waste Toner .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-98
2.4.7.3 Detecting the Level of Waste Toner ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-99
2.4.7.4 Preventing Spilling of Waste Toner............................................................................................................................................................ 2-101
2.4.7.5 Detecting the Level of Waste Toner ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-102
2.4.7.6 Preventing Spilling of Waste Toner............................................................................................................................................................ 2-103
2.5 Pickup/Feeding/Delivery System .............................................................................................................................. 2-105
2.5.1 Overview/Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-105
2.5.1.1 Overview..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-105
2.5.1.2 Major Functional Areas .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-105
2.5.1.3 Paper Paths.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-105
2.5.1.4 Arrangement of Rollers .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-106
 Contents

2.5.1.5 Arrangement of Sensors..............................................................................................................................................................................2-107

2.5.1.6 Arrangement of Clutches and Solenoids.....................................................................................................................................................2-107
2.5.1.7 Overview .....................................................................................................................................................................................................2-108
2.5.1.8 Major Functional Areas...............................................................................................................................................................................2-108
2.5.1.9 Paper Paths ..................................................................................................................................................................................................2-109
2.5.1.10 Arrangement of Rollers.............................................................................................................................................................................2-110
2.5.1.11 Arrangement of Sensors............................................................................................................................................................................2-111
2.5.1.12 Arrangement of Clutches and Solenoids...................................................................................................................................................2-112
2.5.2 Other Control ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-113
2.5.2.1 Overview .....................................................................................................................................................................................................2-113
2.5.2.2 Pickup Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................2-114
2.5.2.3 Registration Control ....................................................................................................................................................................................2-115
2.5.2.4 Fixing Arch Control ....................................................................................................................................................................................2-117
2.5.2.5 Duplexing Control.......................................................................................................................................................................................2-118
2.5.2.6 Detecting Paper Size for Transport .............................................................................................................................................................2-118
2.5.2.7 Cassette Size Detection ...............................................................................................................................................................................2-119
2.5.2.8 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper...................................................................................................................................................2-119
2.5.2.9 Overview .....................................................................................................................................................................................................2-120
2.5.2.10 Pickup Control ..........................................................................................................................................................................................2-121
2.5.2.11 Registration Control ..................................................................................................................................................................................2-122
2.5.2.12 Fixing Arch Control ..................................................................................................................................................................................2-124
2.5.2.13 Duplexing Control.....................................................................................................................................................................................2-125
2.5.2.14 Detecting Paper Size for Transport ...........................................................................................................................................................2-125
2.5.2.15 Cassette Size Detection .............................................................................................................................................................................2-126
2.5.2.16 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper.................................................................................................................................................2-126
2.5.3 Detecting Jams ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-127
2.5.3.1 Jam Detection Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................2-127
2.5.3.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................................2-127
2.5.3.1.2 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................................2-128
2.5.3.2 Delay Jams ..................................................................................................................................................................................................2-129
2.5.3.2.1 Pickup Delay Jam................................................................................................................................................................................2-129
2.5.3.2.2 Delivery Delay Jam.............................................................................................................................................................................2-129
2.5.3.2.3 Duplexing Delivery Jam......................................................................................................................................................................2-130
2.5.3.2.4 Pickup Delay Jam................................................................................................................................................................................2-130
2.5.3.2.5 Delivery Delay Jam.............................................................................................................................................................................2-130
2.5.3.2.6 Duplexing Delivery Jam......................................................................................................................................................................2-130
2.5.3.3 Stationary Jams ...........................................................................................................................................................................................2-131
2.5.3.3.1 Pickup Stationary Jam.........................................................................................................................................................................2-131
2.5.3.3.2 Delivery Stationary Jam ......................................................................................................................................................................2-131
2.5.3.3.3 Duplexing Stationary Jam ...................................................................................................................................................................2-131
2.5.3.3.4 Pickup Stationary Jam.........................................................................................................................................................................2-131
2.5.3.3.5 Delivery Stationary Jam ......................................................................................................................................................................2-132
2.5.3.3.6 Duplexing Stationary Jam ...................................................................................................................................................................2-132
2.5.3.4 Other Jams...................................................................................................................................................................................................2-132
2.5.3.4.1 Door Open Jam....................................................................................................................................................................................2-132
2.5.3.4.2 Stationary Jam at Power-On................................................................................................................................................................2-132
2.5.3.4.3 Door Open Jam....................................................................................................................................................................................2-133
2.5.3.4.4 Stationary Jam at Power-On................................................................................................................................................................2-133
2.5.4 Finisher .................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-134
2.5.4.1 Basic Construction ......................................................................................................................................................................................2-134
2.5.4.1.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................................................................2-134
2.5.4.1.2 Paper Path Drawing.............................................................................................................................................................................2-135
2.5.4.1.3 Component Configuration Drawing....................................................................................................................................................2-136
2.5.4.1.4 Outline of Electric Circuit ...................................................................................................................................................................2-137
2.5.4.1.5 Electric Parts Layout Drawing ............................................................................................................................................................2-137
2.5.4.2 Basic Operation ...........................................................................................................................................................................................2-138
2.5.4.2.1 Basic Operation ...................................................................................................................................................................................2-138
2.5.4.3 Feed Drive System ......................................................................................................................................................................................2-142
2.5.4.3.1 Drive System Schematic Diagram ......................................................................................................................................................2-142
2.5.4.3.2 Process Roller Control ........................................................................................................................................................................2-143
2.5.4.3.3 Feed Roller Control.............................................................................................................................................................................2-145
 Contents

2.5.4.4 Process Tray Assembly............................................................................................................................................................................... 2-145

2.5.4.4.1 Stack Delivery .................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-145
2.5.4.5 Staple Operation ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-147
2.5.4.5.1 Functional Configuration .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-147
2.5.4.6 Detecting Jams ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-148
2.5.4.6.1 Jam Detection ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-148
2.5.4.7 Power Supply .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-148
2.5.4.7.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-148
2.5.4.7.2 Protective Function ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-148
2.6 FIXING UNIT SYSTEM .......................................................................................................................................... 2-149
2.6.1 Overview/Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-149
2.6.1.1 Major Components ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-149
2.6.1.2 Construction of the Control System............................................................................................................................................................ 2-149
2.6.1.3 Major Components ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-150
2.6.1.4 Construction of the Control System............................................................................................................................................................ 2-151
2.6.2 Various Control Mechanisms .................................................................................................................................................. 2-152
2.6.2.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Unit.................................................................................................................................................... 2-152
2.6.2.1.1 Controlling the Fixing Speed Used for Small-Size Paper (down sequence) ...................................................................................... 2-152
2.6.2.1.2 Controlling the Fixing Speed Used for Small-Size Paper (down sequence) ...................................................................................... 2-152
2.6.2.2 Fixing Temperature Control ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2-153
2.6.2.2.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-153
2.6.2.2.2 Controlling the Fixing Temperature ................................................................................................................................................... 2-153
2.6.2.2.3 Overview............................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-155
2.6.2.2.4 Controlling the Fixing Temperature ................................................................................................................................................... 2-155
2.6.3 Protective Functions................................................................................................................................................................. 2-157
2.6.3.1 Overview..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-157
2.6.3.2 Fixing System Error Code .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-158
2.6.3.3 Overview..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-159
2.6.3.4 Fixing System Error Code .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-160
2.7 EXTERNAL AND CONTROLS SYSTEM ............................................................................................................. 2-161
2.7.1 Fan............................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-161
2.7.1.1 Overview..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-161
2.7.1.2 Sequence of Operation................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-161
2.7.1.3 Overview..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-162
2.7.1.4 Sequence of Operation................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-162
2.7.2 Power Supply ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-163
2.7.2.1 Power Supply .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-163
2.7.2.1.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-163
2.7.2.1.2 Power Supply ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-163
2.7.2.2 Other Function ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-165
2.7.2.2.1 Protective Mechanisms ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2-165
2.8 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ............................................................................................................................... 2-165
2.8.1 Construction............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-165
2.8.1.1 Overview..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-165
2.8.1.2 Overview..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-165
2.8.2 DC Controller........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-165
2.8.2.1 Overview..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-165
2.8.2.2 Operation of Various Blocks ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-166
2.8.2.3 Controlling the Motors and Fans ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-167
2.8.2.4 Overview..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-168
2.8.2.5 Operation of Various Blocks ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-169
2.8.2.6 Controlling the Motors and Fans ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-170
2.8.3 Video Controller PCB.............................................................................................................................................................. 2-171
2.8.3.1 Overview..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-171
2.8.3.2 Overview..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-172
2.8.3.3 Outline of the Block (operation) ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-172
2.8.3.4 Outline of the Block (operation) ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-174
 Chapter 2

2.1 Functional Configuration

2.1.1 Functional Construction

0008-1412

LBP5960

The machine may be broadly divided into the following 6 functional blocks: engine drive control system, laser exposure system, image formation system, pickup/
transport/delivery system, fixing system, and externals/controls.

Laser exposure system

Image formation system

Pickup/transport/
Engine control delivery system
system

Fixing system

Externals/controls

To external equipment (e.g., PC)

F-2-1

2.1.2 Functional Construction

0016-5313

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine may be broadly divided into the following 6 functional blocks: engine drive control system, laser exposure system, image formation system, pickup/
transport/delivery system, fixing system, and externals/controls.

Laser exposure system

Image formation system

Pickup/transport/
Engine control delivery system
system

Fixing system

Externals/controls

To external equipment (e.g., PC)

F-2-2

2-1
 Chapter 2

2.2 Basic Sequense

2.2.1 Power-On Sequence

0009-4932

LBP5960

The following shows the machine's power-on sequence in the form of a flow chart, during which the various machine loads are initialized according to the instruc-
tions programmed in the machine firmware (from when the power switch is turned on to when the machine enters a standby state):

Power-on

CPU initialization

ASIC initialization

Printer ID check

Video interface communication preparation

Video interface communication start

Inside/outside machine temperature detection

Fan drive
Machine inside
Drum cartridge detection residual paper/ Fault CHK
Drum life detection door open check
1

Toner cartridge detection

Toner level detection
Image stabilization control

Waste toner case presence/ Drum film thickness detection

absence and state (full) detection
ATVC control
Waste toner supply shutter state
(open/closed) detection
ATR control
Motor drive
(drum/ITB motor, development motor,
Color displacement control
waste toner feed motor, fixing motor,
pickup motor, duplexing motor,
registration motor) D-max control

Scanner motor initial drive

check D-half control

BD correction control Abridged D-half control

1 Standby

If within dashed lines, only when necessary.

F-2-3

2.2.2 Power-On Sequence

0016-5314

LBP5970 / LBP5975
The following shows the machine's power-on sequence in the form of a flow chart, during which the various machine loads are initialized according to the instruc-
tions programmed in the machine firmware (from when the power switch is turned on to when the machine enters a standby state):

2-2
 Chapter 2

Power-on

CPU initialization

ASIC initialization

Printer ID check

Video interface communication preparation

Video interface communication start

Inside/outside machine temperature detection

Fan drive
Machine inside
Drum cartridge detection residual paper/ Fault CHK
Drum life detection door open check
1

Toner cartridge detection

Toner level detection
Image stabilization control

Waste toner case presence/ Drum film thickness detection

absence and state (full) detection
ATVC control
Waste toner supply shutter state
(open/closed) detection
ATR control
Motor drive
(drum/ITB motor, development motor,
Color displacement control
waste toner feed motor, fixing motor,
pickup motor, duplexing motor,
registration motor) D-max control

Scanner motor initial drive

check D-half control

BD correction control Abridged D-half control

1 Standby

If within dashed lines, only when necessary.

F-2-4

2-3
 Chapter 2

2.3 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM

2.3.1 Overview/Configuration

2.3.1.1 Overview
0008-3378

LBP5960

The machine's laser exposure system serves to form a static (latent) image on the surface of the photosensitive drum according to the video signals from the video
controller, and it consists of 2 laser driver PCBs, a BD circuit (Note 1), and a scanner motor among others.
These components are constructed as a single entity (scanner unit), and are controlled by the DC controller.

V-CON

D-CON

[5] [6] [7] [8]

[2] [3] [4] [9]

[10]

[1]

[10]

[11]
[12]

[13]

[11]

Drum Drum Drum Drum

Y M C Bk
[10] [12] [10]

[11] [11]
F-2-5
[1] Y/M laser driver
[2] Y/M video signal
[3] Y/M laser control signal
[4] Scanner motor control signal
[5] C/Bk video signal
[6] C/Bk laser control signal
[7] BD circuit
[8] BD signal
[9] C/Bk laser driver
[10] Imaging lens
[11] Reflecting mirror
[12] Polygon mirror
[13] Scanner motor
V-CON : video controller
D-CON : DC controller

2-4
 Chapter 2

The machine's laser scanner unit uses a single scanner motor (polygon mirror motor) to scan 4 laser beams across the surface of the photosensitive drum, thus saving
space (1-polygon mirror/4-laser beam method; Note 2).

The laser/scanner unit uses the following sequence when making a full-color print:
1) The print command arrives from the video controller. In response, the DC controller turns on the scanner motor to rotate the 6-facet mirror.
2) When the scanner motor starts to rotate, the DC controller uses the scanner motor control signal and the BD signal to make sure that the scanner motor rotates
at a specific speed.
3) When the revolution of the scanner motor has reached a specific speed, the DC controller sends video signals for individual colors (YMCBk) to the laser
driver PCB.
4) In response, the respective laser driver turns on the laser diode.
5) The resulting laser beam hits the 6-facet mirror, which is rotating at a specific speed.
6) The laser beam then is reflected by the 6-facet mirror, and is moved to the imaging lens and the reflecting mirror found in front of the mirror to reach the
surface of the photosensitive drum.
7) As the 6-facet mirror rotates at a specific speed, the laser beam scans the surface of the photosensitive drum accordingly.
8) As the 6-facet mirror rotates and, as a result, the laser beams scan the surface of the photosensitive drum at a specific speed, a static image of multiple colors
is formed on the drum surface.

1 : The machine's BD circuit is found on its CBk driver PCB, and the BD signal occurs in keeping with the activation of the laser diode of the Bk driver.
2 : 1-Polygon 4-Laser Method
The term refers to a method in which a single polygon mirror is used for 4 laser beams. There are 4 laser diodes, the beams of which are directed to a multiple-facet
mirror mounted on a single scanner motor. The method inherently brings about a reduction in space.

2.3.1.2 Overview
0016-5336

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine's laser exposure system serves to form a static (latent) image on the surface of the photosensitive drum according to the video signals from the video
controller, and it consists of 2 laser driver PCBs, a BD circuit (Note 1), and a scanner motor among others.
These components are constructed as a single entity (scanner unit), and are controlled by the DC controller.

2-5
 Chapter 2

V-CON

D-CON

[5] [6] [7] [8]

[2] [3] [4] [9]

[10]

[1]

[10]

[11]
[12]

[13]

[11]

Drum Drum Drum Drum

Y M C Bk
[10] [12] [10]

[11] [11]
F-2-6
[1] Y/M laser driver
[2] Y/M video signal
[3] Y/M laser control signal
[4] Scanner motor control signal
[5] C/Bk video signal
[6] C/Bk laser control signal
[7] BD circuit
[8] BD signal
[9] C/Bk laser driver
[10] Imaging lens
[11] Reflecting mirror
[12] Polygon mirror
[13] Scanner motor
V-CON : video controller
D-CON : DC controller

The machine's laser scanner unit uses a single scanner motor (polygon mirror motor) to scan 4 laser beams across the surface of the photosensitive drum, thus saving
space (1-polygon mirror/4-laser beam method; Note 2).

The laser/scanner unit uses the following sequence when making a full-color print:
1) The print command arrives from the video controller. In response, the DC controller turns on the scanner motor to rotate the 6-facet mirror.
2) When the scanner motor starts to rotate, the DC controller uses the scanner motor control signal and the BD signal to make sure that the scanner motor rotates
at a specific speed.
3) When the revolution of the scanner motor has reached a specific speed, the DC controller sends video signals for individual colors (YMCBk) to the laser
driver PCB.
4) In response, the respective laser driver turns on the laser diode.
5) The resulting laser beam hits the 6-facet mirror, which is rotating at a specific speed.
6) The laser beam then is reflected by the 6-facet mirror, and is moved to the imaging lens and the reflecting mirror found in front of the mirror to reach the
surface of the photosensitive drum.

2-6
 Chapter 2

7) As the 6-facet mirror rotates at a specific speed, the laser beam scans the surface of the photosensitive drum accordingly.
8) As the 6-facet mirror rotates and, as a result, the laser beams scan the surface of the photosensitive drum at a specific speed, a static image of multiple colors
is formed on the drum surface.

1 : The machine's BD circuit is found on its CBk driver PCB, and the BD signal occurs in keeping with the activation of the laser diode of the Bk driver.
2 : 1-Polygon 4-Laser Method
The term refers to a method in which a single polygon mirror is used for 4 laser beams. There are 4 laser diodes, the beams of which are directed to a multiple-facet
mirror mounted on a single scanner motor. The method inherently brings about a reduction in space.

2.3.2 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing

2.3.2.1 Turning On and Off the Laser Light

0008-3379

LBP5960

The laser light goes on and off when the laser diode of the laser driver PCB goes on and off at a specific intensity. The machine's laser driver PCB consists of 2
PCBs (Y/M laser driver PCB, C/Bk laser driver PCB), each with 2 systems of driver circuitry. The circuit turns on and off the laser light of individual colors ac-
cording to the combination of laser control signals (LC_CTL0/LC_CTL1) coming from the DC controller.
T-2-1

Laser control signal

Operation Laser state
LC_CTL0 LC_CTL1

0 0 forced off OFF

0 1 APC ON

printing video signal input permitted

1 0

1 1 standby OFF

D-CON

[4] [5]

[6]
[2] [3]

[1]

F-2-7
[1] Y/M laser driver
[2] Y laser control signal
[3] M laser control signal
[4] C laser control signal
[5] Bk laser control signal
[6] C/Bk laser driver

In a standby state, the intensity settings made through APC are cancelled.

Memo: Controlling Laser Activation for a Resolution of 1200 dpi

To enable highly detailed reproduction of images, the machine switches the resolution in main scanning direction and sub scanning direction from 600 to 1200 dpi.
At such times, the laser output (intensity) is reduced by 1/2 for main scanning direction, while the speed is reduced by 1/2 for sub scanning direction.

2-7
 Chapter 2

[1]

600DPI 1200DPI
1/2

1/2

1/2

Drum Laser Driver

F-2-8
[1] 1 pixel

2.3.2.2 Controlling Synchronization in Main Scanning Direction

0008-3401

LBP5960
The machine controls synchronization in main scanning direction to ensure the write start position of individual lines in main scanning direction.
Synchronization occurs for each line of each color, and is controlled by the DC controller.

The following is the sequence of operation:

1) The DC controller sets the Bk laser control signal to APC mode (LC_CTL0=0, LC_CTL1=1), thus forcing the laser diode of the Bk driver circuit to go on.
2) The laser beam path is equipped with a BD circuit used to receive the beam.
3) The BD circuit detects the laser beam, generates the reference BD signal (BD), and sends the result to the DC controller.
4) In response, the DC controller sends these reference BD signals to the video controller in the form of the main scanning sync signals (BD Y, BD M, BD C,
BD Bk).
5) When these signals arrive, the video controller sends video signals (VDO Y, VDO M, VDO C, VDO Bk) to the DC controller a specific period of time there-
after; as a result, the respective laser drivers go on to emit laser beams that will scan the surface of the photosensitive drum starting at a specific point of individual
lines. (See Notes.)

2-8
 Chapter 2

V-CON

VDO Bk
VDO M
VDO C

BD Bk
VDO Y

BD M
BD C
BD Y
D-CON

VDO Bk, VDO C

BD
VDO Y, VDO M [2]

[3]

[1]

F-2-9
[1] Y/M laser driver
[2] BD circuit
[3] C/Bk laser driver

1BD Control Method

Owing to the spatial relationship between the BD circuit and the laser diode, the machine is not capable of detecting the BD signal of each color individually. As
such, it uses the BD signal of Bk to serve as the reference BD signal when generating the BD signal for Y, M, and C.
The following is a timing chart depicting the relationship of the BD signals of individual colors and the video signals:

[1]

VDO (C,Bk)
T1
VDO

VDO (Y,M)
T2
VDO
F-2-10
[1] Reference BD

2.3.2.3 Turning On and Off the Laser Light

0016-5337

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The laser light goes on and off when the laser diode of the laser driver PCB goes on and off at a specific intensity. The machine's laser driver PCB consists of 2
PCBs (Y/M laser driver PCB, C/Bk laser driver PCB), each with 2 systems of driver circuitry. The circuit turns on and off the laser light of individual colors ac-
cording to the combination of laser control signals (LC_CTL0/LC_CTL1) coming from the DC controller.
T-2-2

Laser control signal

Operation Laser state
LC_CTL0 LC_CTL1

0 0 forced off OFF

2-9
 Chapter 2

Laser control signal

Operation Laser state
LC_CTL0 LC_CTL1

0 1 APC ON

printing video signal input permitted

1 0

1 1 standby OFF

D-CON

[4] [5]

[6]
[2] [3]

[1]

F-2-11
[1] Y/M laser driver
[2] Y laser control signal
[3] M laser control signal
[4] C laser control signal
[5] Bk laser control signal
[6] C/Bk laser driver

In a standby state, the intensity settings made through APC are cancelled.

Memo: Controlling Laser Activation for a Resolution of 1200 dpi

To enable highly detailed reproduction of images, the machine switches the resolution in main scanning direction and sub scanning direction from 600 to 1200 dpi.
At such times, the laser output (intensity) is reduced by 1/2 for main scanning direction, while the speed is reduced by 1/2 for sub scanning direction.

2-10
 Chapter 2

[1]

600DPI 1200DPI
1/2

1/2

1/2

Drum Laser Driver

F-2-12
[1] 1 pixel

2.3.2.4 Controlling Synchronization in Sub Scanning Direction

0008-3444

LBP5960
The machine executes synchronization in sub scanning direction so as to match the lead edge of an image and the lead edge of paper. This control is executed for
every color, and is controlled by the DC controller.

The following is the sequence of operation:

1) When the print command arrives, the DC controller generates the sub scanning sync signal (PTOP) with reference to its internal timer.
2) The DC controller generates the sub scanning sync signals (Y-TOP, M-TOP, C-TOP, Bk-TOP) of individual colors based on the PTOP signal, and sends them
to the video controller.
3) When these signals arrive, the video controller generates video signals (VDO Y, VDO M, VDO C, VDO Bk) a specific period of time thereafter, and sends
them to the DC controller. As a result, the laser drivers of individual colors go on to emit laser beams that scan the surface of the photosensitive drum starting
at a specific point.

2-11
 Chapter 2

V-CON

Print command

VDO Bk
Bk TOP

VDO M
VDO C
M TOP

VDO Y
C TOP
Y TOP
D-CON

VDO Bk, VDO C

VDO Y, VDO M

[2]

[1]

F-2-13
[1] Y/M laser driver
[2] C/Bk laser driver

The following is a timing chart depicting the relationship between the TOP signal of individual colors and video signals:

2-12
 Chapter 2

[1]

[2]

P TOP

Y TOP

M TOP

C TOP

Bk TOP

[3]
VDO Y

[3]
VDO M

[3]
VDO C

[3]
VDO Bk

F-2-14
[1] Print command
[2] Internal timer
[3] Video signal for a single page

2.3.2.5 Controlling Synchronization in Main Scanning Direction

0016-5338

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine controls synchronization in main scanning direction to ensure the write start position of individual lines in main scanning direction.
Synchronization occurs for each line of each color, and is controlled by the DC controller.

The following is the sequence of operation:

1) The DC controller sets the Bk laser control signal to APC mode (LC_CTL0=0, LC_CTL1=1), thus forcing the laser diode of the Bk driver circuit to go on.
2) The laser beam path is equipped with a BD circuit used to receive the beam.
3) The BD circuit detects the laser beam, generates the reference BD signal (BD), and sends the result to the DC controller.
4) In response, the DC controller sends these reference BD signals to the video controller in the form of the main scanning sync signals (BD Y, BD M, BD C,
BD Bk).
5) When these signals arrive, the video controller sends video signals (VDO Y, VDO M, VDO C, VDO Bk) to the DC controller a specific period of time there-
after; as a result, the respective laser drivers go on to emit laser beams that will scan the surface of the photosensitive drum starting at a specific point of individual
lines. (See Notes.)

2-13
 Chapter 2

V-CON

VDO Bk
VDO M
VDO C

BD Bk
VDO Y

BD M
BD C
BD Y
D-CON

VDO Bk, VDO C

BD
VDO Y, VDO M

[2]

[3]

[1]

F-2-15
[1] Y/M laser driver
[2] BD circuit
[3] C/Bk laser driver

1BD Control Method

Owing to the spatial relationship between the BD circuit and the laser diode, the machine is not capable of detecting the BD signal of each color individually. As
such, it uses the BD signal of Bk to serve as the reference BD signal when generating the BD signal for Y, M, and C.
The following is a timing chart depicting the relationship of the BD signals of individual colors and the video signals:

[1]

VDO (C,Bk)
T1
VDO

VDO (Y,M)
T2
VDO
F-2-16
[1] Reference BD

2.3.2.6 Controlling Synchronization in Sub Scanning Direction

0016-5339

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine executes synchronization in sub scanning direction so as to match the lead edge of an image and the lead edge of paper. This control is executed for
every color, and is controlled by the DC controller.

The following is the sequence of operation:

1) When the print command arrives, the DC controller generates the sub scanning sync signal (PTOP) with reference to its internal timer.
2) The DC controller generates the sub scanning sync signals (Y-TOP, M-TOP, C-TOP, Bk-TOP) of individual colors based on the PTOP signal, and sends them
to the video controller.
3) When these signals arrive, the video controller generates video signals (VDO Y, VDO M, VDO C, VDO Bk) a specific period of time thereafter, and sends
them to the DC controller. As a result, the laser drivers of individual colors go on to emit laser beams that scan the surface of the photosensitive drum starting
at a specific point.

2-14
 Chapter 2

V-CON

Print command

VDO Bk
Bk TOP

VDO M
VDO C
M TOP

VDO Y
C TOP
Y TOP
D-CON

VDO Bk, VDO C

VDO Y, VDO M

[2]

[1]

F-2-17
[1] Y/M laser driver
[2] C/Bk laser driver

The following is a timing chart depicting the relationship between the TOP signal of individual colors and video signals:

2-15
 Chapter 2

[1]

[2]

P TOP

Y TOP

M TOP

C TOP

Bk TOP

[3]
VDO Y

[3]
VDO M

[3]
VDO C

[3]
VDO Bk

F-2-18
[1] Print command
[2] Internal timer
[3] Video signal for a single page

2.3.3 Laser Control

2.3.3.1 APC Control

0008-3460

LBP5960
The machine uses APC control to make sure that the intensity of laser light remains at a specific level.
The machine uses 2 laser driver PCBs, each with a laser driver IC taking care of 2 colors and performing APC control for individual colors.

The following is an outline of APC control operation, executed each time the machine is turned on and for each print job:
1) The DC controller sends the laser control signal (LC_CTL0_X=0, LC_CTL1_X=1) to the laser driver IC on the laser driver PCB. (X differs depending on the
color.)
2) The laser driver IC is set to APC mode, thus forcing the laser diode (LD) to go on.
3) The laser driver IC monitors the laser diode (LD) by means of a photo diode (PD), adjusting the output of the laser diode until its light is a specific level of
intensity.
4) The laser driver IC stores the laser output in memory for use in the next print job.

2-16
 Chapter 2

CBk- Laser Driver

5V

PD
LC_CTL0_C

Laser Driver IC
LC_CTL1_C

LD

D-CON

5V

PD
LC_CTL0_Bk

Laser Driver IC
LC_CTL1_Bk

LD

F-2-19

2.3.3.2 APC Control

0016-5340

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine uses APC control to make sure that the intensity of laser light remains at a specific level.
The machine uses 2 laser driver PCBs, each with a laser driver IC taking care of 2 colors and performing APC control for individual colors.

The following is an outline of APC control operation, executed each time the machine is turned on and for each print job:
1) The DC controller sends the laser control signal (LC_CTL0_X=0, LC_CTL1_X=1) to the laser driver IC on the laser driver PCB. (X differs depending on the
color.)
2) The laser driver IC is set to APC mode, thus forcing the laser diode (LD) to go on.
3) The laser driver IC monitors the laser diode (LD) by means of a photo diode (PD), adjusting the output of the laser diode until its light is a specific level of
intensity.
4) The laser driver IC stores the laser output in memory for use in the next print job.

CBk- Laser Driver

5V

PD
LC_CTL0_C

Laser Driver IC
LC_CTL1_C

LD

D-CON

5V

PD
LC_CTL0_Bk

Laser Driver IC
LC_CTL1_Bk

LD

F-2-20

2.3.3.3 BD Correction
0008-4382

LBP5960

2-17
 Chapter 2

The difficulty involved in the production of the polygon mirror used in the machine's laser scanner has resulted in variation of its mirror surface angle. In other
words, the machine, which determines the start points of 4 main scanning lines using the Bk laser as the reference BD, is inherently subject to variation in the starting
points of Y and M main scanning lines.
To make up for the variation, the machine computes the variation among the angles of individual mirrors by measuring BD intervals, correcting the start points of
the Y and M main scanning lines based on the result of the computation.
The machine executes this correction each time it is turned on or for each print job.

- Ideal Polygon Mirror (equilateral hexahedron)

D-CON

Y/M laser driver C/Bk laser

driver
Write start position Reference BD

BD circuit

- Actual Polygon Mirror (non equilateral hexahedron)

D-CON

Y/M laser driver C/Bk laser

Design write driver
start position Reference BD

Actual write
start position BD circuit

F-2-21

2-18
 Chapter 2

- Ideal Polygon Mirror (equilateral hexahedron)

Write start position (Y, M)

BD

VDO
T1

- Actual Polygon Mirror (non equilateral hexahedron)

Design write start position (Y, M)

BD

VDO
T1

Actual write start position (Y, M)

BD

VDO
T1
F-2-22
The following diagram shows the flow of the control mechanism:

START

Scanner motor constant

speed of rotation detection

BD interval
measurement
Short interval Specific interval Specific interval Specific interval

BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

Write start correction
value computation

BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

Write start
position correction

VDO VDO VDO VDO

BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4
T1 T1 T1 T1

END
F-2-23

Bk is used to detect the reference BD signal and, as such, laser light is directed to the surface of the polygon mirror. In other words, the write start position in main
scanning direction for Bk is determined based on actual measurement and, for this reason, the possible presence of variation in the angle of the polygon mirror
surface will not lead to variation of Bk write start position.
The laser driver for C is found directly under the Bk laser driver and, for this reason, the C laser driver directs laser light against the same polygon mirror surface
as the Bk laser driver, eliminating the effects of variation in the angle of the polygon mirror surface. The write start position of C, for this reason, is also free of
variation as in the case of Bk.

2-19
 Chapter 2

2.3.3.4 BD Correction
0018-7916

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The difficulty involved in the production of the polygon mirror used in the machine's laser scanner has resulted in variation of its mirror surface angle. In other
words, the machine, which determines the start points of 4 main scanning lines using the Bk laser as the reference BD, is inherently subject to variation in the starting
points of Y and M main scanning lines.
To make up for the variation, the machine computes the variation among the angles of individual mirrors by measuring BD intervals, correcting the start points of
the Y and M main scanning lines based on the result of the computation.
The machine executes this correction each time it is turned on or for each print job.

- Ideal Polygon Mirror (equilateral hexahedron)

D-CON

Y/M laser driver C/Bk laser

driver
Write start position Reference BD

BD circuit

- Actual Polygon Mirror (non equilateral hexahedron)

D-CON

Y/M laser driver C/Bk laser

Design write driver
start position Reference BD

Actual write
start position BD circuit

F-2-24

2-20
 Chapter 2

- Ideal Polygon Mirror (equilateral hexahedron)

Write start position (Y, M)

BD

VDO
T1

- Actual Polygon Mirror (non equilateral hexahedron)

Design write start position (Y, M)

BD

VDO
T1

Actual write start position (Y, M)

BD

VDO
T1
F-2-25
The following diagram shows the flow of the control mechanism:

START

Scanner motor constant

speed of rotation detection

BD interval
measurement
Short interval Specific interval Specific interval Specific interval

BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

Write start correction
value computation

BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

Write start
position correction

VDO VDO VDO VDO

BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4
T1 T1 T1 T1

END
F-2-26

Bk is used to detect the reference BD signal and, as such, laser light is directed to the surface of the polygon mirror. In other words, the write start position in main
scanning direction for Bk is determined based on actual measurement and, for this reason, the possible presence of variation in the angle of the polygon mirror
surface will not lead to variation of Bk write start position.
The laser driver for C is found directly under the Bk laser driver and, for this reason, the C laser driver directs laser light against the same polygon mirror surface
as the Bk laser driver, eliminating the effects of variation in the angle of the polygon mirror surface. The write start position of C, for this reason, is also free of
variation as in the case of Bk.

2-21
 Chapter 2

2.3.4 Laser Scanner Motor Control

2.3.4.1 Controlling the Speed of the Laser Scanner Motor

0008-4070

LBP5960

The machine controls the laser scanner motor so that it rotates at a specific speed.
The control mechanism is governed by the motor speed control block and the reference signal generation block of ASIC2 (IC13) according to the instructions from
the CPU (IC9) of the DC controller.
The motor speed control block compares the speed detection signal (FG, BD) against the reference signal generated by the reference signal generation block to
control the acceleration signal (ACC) and the deceleration signal (DEC) so that the scanner motor rotates at a specific speed.
The machine uses 2 speed detection signals with the aim of helping the laser scanner unit last longer (Notes). The FG signal is a detection signal for coarse adjust-
ment used at time of motor start-up, while the BD signal is a detection signal used to fine-adjust the motor to the target speed.

The motor control mechanism operates as follows:

1) The DC controller turns on the ACC signal, thus causing the scanner motor to rotate.
2) The DC controller uses the result of FG signal detection to control the ACC signal and the DEC signal so that the motor will rotate at a specific speed.
3) The DC controller switches from the FG signal to the BD signal; then, using the result of BD signal detection, controls the ACC signal and the DEC signal
so that the motor will continuously rotate at the target speed.

D-CON

CPU (IC9)

[1] [2]

ASIC2 (IC13)

[4] [5]
BD
DEC
ACC

FG

[3]

F-2-27
[1] Reference signal generation block
[2] Motor speed control block
[3] Scanner motor
[4] C/Bk laser driver
[5] BD circuit

Memo:
The life of the laser scanner unit is dependent on the length of time during which the laser light is emitted.
To reduce the need for the detection of the BD signal associated with the emission of laser light, the machine also uses the FG signal for speed detection.

Scanner Motor-Related Error Code

The following error codes are associated with the scanner motor:
- E0100-0000 : BD error
Indicates that the interval of the BD signal at time of constant speed rotation has deviated from a specific interval for 1 sec or more.
- E0110-0000 : scanner motor error
Indicates that the scanner motor has failed to reach a specific revolution within 5 sec at start-up (BD control).
- E0110-0001 : scanner motor error
Indicates that the scanner motor has failed to reach a specific revolution within 5 sec at start-up (FG control).

2.3.4.2 Controlling the Speed of the Laser Scanner Motor

0016-5341

LBP5970 / LBP5975

2-22
 Chapter 2

The machine controls the laser scanner motor so that it rotates at a specific speed.
The control mechanism is governed by the motor speed control block and the reference signal generation block of ASIC2 (IC13) according to the instructions from
the CPU (IC9) of the DC controller.
The motor speed control block compares the speed detection signal (FG, BD) against the reference signal generated by the reference signal generation block to
control the acceleration signal (ACC) and the deceleration signal (DEC) so that the scanner motor rotates at a specific speed.
The machine uses 2 speed detection signals with the aim of helping the laser scanner unit last longer (Notes). The FG signal is a detection signal for coarse adjust-
ment used at time of motor start-up, while the BD signal is a detection signal used to fine-adjust the motor to the target speed.

The motor control mechanism operates as follows:

1) The DC controller turns on the ACC signal, thus causing the scanner motor to rotate.
2) The DC controller uses the result of FG signal detection to control the ACC signal and the DEC signal so that the motor will rotate at a specific speed.
3) The DC controller switches from the FG signal to the BD signal; then, using the result of BD signal detection, controls the ACC signal and the DEC signal
so that the motor will continuously rotate at the target speed.

D-CON

CPU (IC9)

[1] [2]

ASIC2 (IC13)

[4] [5]

BD
DEC
ACC

FG

[3]

F-2-28
[1] Reference signal generation block
[2] Motor speed control block
[3] Scanner motor
[4] C/Bk laser driver
[5] BD circuit

Memo:
The life of the laser scanner unit is dependent on the length of time during which the laser light is emitted.
To reduce the need for the detection of the BD signal associated with the emission of laser light, the machine also uses the FG signal for speed detection.

Scanner Motor-Related Error Code

The following error codes are associated with the scanner motor:
- E0100-0000 : BD error
Indicates that the interval of the BD signal at time of constant speed rotation has deviated from a specific interval for 1 sec or more.
- E0110-0000 : scanner motor error
Indicates that the scanner motor has failed to reach a specific revolution within 5 sec at start-up (BD control).
- E0110-0001 : scanner motor error
Indicates that the scanner motor has failed to reach a specific revolution within 5 sec at start-up (FG control).

2-23
 Chapter 2

2.4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

2.4.1 Overview/Configuration

2.4.1.1 Overview
0008-1435

LBP5960

The image formation system is the core of the machine, ultimately forming toner images on paper.
The machine's imaging system consists of a photosensitive drum, developing cylinder, 4 drum cartridges containing carrier, 4 toner cartridges, ITB unit, fixing
assembly, and secondary transfer outside roller, all controlled by the DC controller.
When the print command arrives from the video controller, the DC controller controls the laser/scanner unit and HVT1/2 (high-voltage PCB) to form images on
paper according to the instructions arriving in the form of a video signal.

[4]

[5]

[3]
[6]

[2] Y
M
C
BK

[1]
VDO

DEV
PR1

TR2

TR1

HVT1 HVT2

D-CON

[8] [7]

V-CON

F-2-29
[1] Laser scanner unit
[2] Drum cartridge
[3] ITB unit
[4] Toner cartridge
[5] Fixing assembly
[6] Secondary transfer outside roller
[7] Video signal
[8] Print command

2.4.1.2 Printing Process

0008-1436

LBP5960

The machine's printing process may broadly be divided into 6 blocks, which are made up of a total of 10 steps. The machine forms images on print paper by exe-
cuting the functions assigned to these blocks.
The following is a block diagram of the printing process, followed by an outline of the steps:

2-24
 Chapter 2

Delivery

Fixing block

7.fixing
ITB cleaning block

8.ITB cleaning
Transfer block
ITB 6.separation
4.primar
y trans
fer
4.primar
y trans
fer
3.Development 4.primar
Development
y trans
fer 5.secondary
block Y 4.primar transfer
9.Drum cleaning y trans
fer
photosensitive
2.laser beam drum 10.post
exposure -exposure
M
photosensitive drum C
photosensitive drum Bk
1.primary charging
photosensitive drum
Static image formati Drum
on block cleaning
block

Pickup

flow of paper

rotation of ITB/photosensitive drum

F-2-30
A. Static Image Formation Block
Forms a static image on the surface of the photosensitive drum.
step 1: primary charging (charges the surface of the drum to an even negative potential)
step 2: laser beam exposure (forms a static image on the surface of the photosensitive drum)

B. Developing Block
Deposits toner over the static image on the surface of the photosensitive drum, thus turning it into a visible image.
step 3: development
C. Transfer Block
Moves the toner image from the surface of the photosensitive drum to print paper.
step 4: primary transfer (moves toner from the surface of the photosensitive drum to the ITB)
step 5: secondary transfer (moves toner from the ITB to paper)
step 6: separation (separates paper from the ITB)
D. Fixing Block
Fuses the toner image to the paper.
step 7: fixing

E. ITB Cleaning Block

Cleans the ITB by removing residual toner.
step 8: ITB cleaning (removes residual toner from the ITB)

F. Drum Cleaning Block

Removes residual toner from the surface of the photosensitive drum to prepare for the next print job.
step 9: drum cleaning (removes residual toner from the surface of the photosensitive drum)
step 10: post-exposure (prevents uneven density by evening out the surface of the photosensitive drum)

2.4.1.3 Static Image Formation Block

0008-1437

LBP5960

This block consists of 2 steps, at the end of which a static image is formed on the surface of the photosensitive drum.
At the end, those areas of the surface of the photosensitive drum that have not been exposed by the laser beam (dark area) retain negative charges, while those
exposed by the beam are free of negative charges. The resulting static image is not visible to the human eye and, thus, is called a static "latent" image.

Time (t)
0

-100
Photosensitive drum surface potential (V)

Light area

-500

Dark area

laser beam
Primary charging Laser exposure Primary transfer Primary charging
(step 1) (step 2) (step 4) (step 1)

F-2-31

2-25
 Chapter 2

Step 1: primary charging

In this step, the surface of the photosensitive drum is charged to an even negative potential to prepare for the formation of an image. The machine uses a roller
charging method, in which charges are directly applied to the surface of the photosensitive drum.
The machine's primary charging roller is made from conducting rubber, and is given both AC and DC biases to keep the surface potential of the photosensitive drum
even.

Photosensitive drum

AC bias

Primary charging roller DC bias

F-2-32
Step 2: laser beam exposure
In this step, a static image is formed on the surface of the photosensitive drum.
The negatively charged surface of the photosensitive drum is exposed by a laser beam. As a result, those areas hit by the beam are neutralized (light area), thus
eliminating negative charges and consequently forming a static image on the surface.

Laser beam

Dark area Light area

F-2-33

2.4.1.4 Overview
0016-5342

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The image formation system is the core of the machine, ultimately forming toner images on paper.
The machine's imaging system consists of a photosensitive drum, developing cylinder, 4 drum cartridges containing carrier, 4 toner cartridges, ITB unit, fixing
assembly, and secondary transfer outside roller, all controlled by the DC controller.
When the print command arrives from the video controller, the DC controller controls the laser/scanner unit and HVT1/2 (high-voltage PCB) to form images on
paper according to the instructions arriving in the form of a video signal.

2-26
 Chapter 2

[4]

[5]

[3]
[6]

[2] Y
M
C
BK

VDO [1]

DEV
PR1

TR2

TR1
HVT1 HVT2

D-CON

[8] [7]

V-CON

F-2-34
[1] Laser scanner unit
[2] Drum cartridge
[3] ITB unit
[4] Toner cartridge
[5] Fixing assembly
[6] Secondary transfer outside roller
[7] Video signal
[8] Print command

2.4.1.5 Developing Block

0008-1438

LBP5960

In this block, the machine uses a toner projection method in which it deposits toner over the surface of the photosensitive drum, thus turning the static image into
a visible image. The developer used here is a 2-component developer, composed of non-magnetic toner and carrier.

2-27
 Chapter 2

Toner
Photosensitive drum

Carrier

Developing cylinder

AC bias

DC bias

Blade

Toner feedscrew A

Toner feedscrew B
F-2-35
Step 3: development
The drum cartridge consists of a photosensitive drum, developing cylinder, and a blade.
The developer is composed of toner (mainly of resin and dye) and carrier (iron powder) mixed in a specific ratio. The friction occurring between toner and carrier
causes the toner to become negatively charged and carrier to become positively charged.
The developer adheres to the surface of the developing cylinder by the work of a fixed magnet, and a blade is used to form a uniform layer of developer.
At this time, the areas of the photosensitive drum exposed by the laser beam will have a positive potential in relation to the developing cylinder.
As a result, the toner charged to a more or less identical potential as the developing cylinder will move to and stick to the areas of the photosensitive drum exposed
by the laser beam. This phenomenon is referred to as "toner projection," and is used to turn the image on the surface of the photosensitive drum into a visible image.

The "light area" of the photosensitive drum is charged to a negative potential; however, the diagram below shows it as being charged to a positive potential, indi-
cating that its potential is higher than that of the developing cylinder when the cylinder is used as the reference.

+V
Drum surface potential (light area)
0
Potential (V)

Toner potential

-V Developing cylinder surface potential

Time (t)
Drum surface potential (dark area)
F-2-36

2.4.1.6 Printing Process

0016-5343

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine's printing process may broadly be divided into 6 blocks, which are made up of a total of 10 steps. The machine forms images on print paper by exe-
cuting the functions assigned to these blocks.
The following is a block diagram of the printing process, followed by an outline of the steps:

2-28
 Chapter 2

Delivery

Fixing block

7.fixing
ITB cleaning block

8.ITB cleaning
Transfer block
ITB 6.separation
4.primar
y trans
fer
4.primar
y trans
fer
3.Development 4.primar
Development
y trans
fer 5.secondary
block Y 4.primar transfer
9.Drum cleaning y trans
fer
photosensitive
2.laser beam drum 10.post
exposure -exposure
M
photosensitive drum C
photosensitive drum Bk
1.primary charging
photosensitive drum
Static image formati Drum
on block cleaning
block

Pickup

flow of paper

rotation of ITB/photosensitive drum

F-2-37
A. Static Image Formation Block
Forms a static image on the surface of the photosensitive drum.
step 1: primary charging (charges the surface of the drum to an even negative potential)
step 2: laser beam exposure (forms a static image on the surface of the photosensitive drum)

B. Developing Block
Deposits toner over the static image on the surface of the photosensitive drum, thus turning it into a visible image.
step 3: development
C. Transfer Block
Moves the toner image from the surface of the photosensitive drum to print paper.
step 4: primary transfer (moves toner from the surface of the photosensitive drum to the ITB)
step 5: secondary transfer (moves toner from the ITB to paper)
step 6: separation (separates paper from the ITB)
D. Fixing Block
Fuses the toner image to the paper.
step 7: fixing

E. ITB Cleaning Block

Cleans the ITB by removing residual toner.
step 8: ITB cleaning (removes residual toner from the ITB)

F. Drum Cleaning Block

Removes residual toner from the surface of the photosensitive drum to prepare for the next print job.
step 9: drum cleaning (removes residual toner from the surface of the photosensitive drum)
step 10: post-exposure (prevents uneven density by evening out the surface of the photosensitive drum)

2.4.1.7 Transfer Block

0008-1439

LBP5960

This block consists of 3 steps, in which the toner image is moved from the photosensitive drum surface to paper.

step 4: primary transfer

In this step, toner is moved from the photosensitive drum to the ITB.
A positive bias is applied to the primary transfer roller found on the inner side of the machine, thus charging the ITB to a positive potential. As a result, the negatively
charged toner on the surface of the photosensitive drum moves to the positively charged ITB. This whole process is performed for all colors (Y, M, C, Bk).

2-29
 Chapter 2

Primary transfer roller

ITB
DC bias

photosensitive drum

F-2-38

step 5: secondary transfer

In this step, the toner on the ITB is moved to paper.
A positive bias is applied to the secondary transfer outside roller to charge the back of paper to a positive potential. As a result, the toner on the ITB moves to the
paper.
To prevent soiling of the back of paper, the secondary transfer outside roller is given a positive and then a negative bias in turns at the end of secondary transfer,
thus returning the residual toner on the secondary transfer outside roller to the ITB.
Thereafter, the residual toner returned to the ITB is collected to the waste toner case in the ITB cleaning block.

ITB

Secondary transfer inside roller

Paper

Secondary transfer outside roller

DC bias

F-2-39

step 6: separation
In this step, the rigidity of paper is used to separate paper from the ITB.
Thin paper has little body. The static eliminator decreases the charges on paper, thus weakening the static bonding and, consequently, facilitating separation.

2-30
 Chapter 2

ITB

Secondary transfer inside roller

Paper

Static
eliminator

Secondary transfer outside roller

F-2-40

2.4.1.8 Fixing Block

0008-1440

LBP5960

The machine uses an on-demand method, which tends to require less heat than other methods. The machine's heater heats up fast and does not require power in a
standby state, with the ultimate result that the machine is characterized by a short wait time and high energy efficiency.
The machine's pressure roller has a higher potential than the fixing sleeve, thus enabling the full retention of the negatively charged toner on paper and, at the same
time, preventing adhesion of toner to the fixing sleeve.

step 7: fixing
In this step, the toner on the paper is subjected to heat and pressure so that it will melt (while mixing colors) to create a permanent image.

Fixing sleeve
Fixing heater Pressure roller

Paper
F-2-41

2.4.1.9 Static Image Formation Block

0016-5344

LBP5970 / LBP5975

This block consists of 2 steps, at the end of which a static image is formed on the surface of the photosensitive drum.
At the end, those areas of the surface of the photosensitive drum that have not been exposed by the laser beam (dark area) retain negative charges, while those
exposed by the beam are free of negative charges. The resulting static image is not visible to the human eye and, thus, is called a static "latent" image.

2-31
 Chapter 2

Time (t)
0

-100

Photosensitive drum surface potential (V)

Light area

-500

Dark area

laser beam
Primary charging Laser exposure Primary transfer Primary charging
(step 1) (step 2) (step 4) (step 1)

F-2-42
Step 1: primary charging
In this step, the surface of the photosensitive drum is charged to an even negative potential to prepare for the formation of an image. The machine uses a roller
charging method, in which charges are directly applied to the surface of the photosensitive drum.
The machine's primary charging roller is made from conducting rubber, and is given both AC and DC biases to keep the surface potential of the photosensitive drum
even.

Photosensitive drum

AC bias

Primary charging roller DC bias

F-2-43
Step 2: laser beam exposure
In this step, a static image is formed on the surface of the photosensitive drum.
The negatively charged surface of the photosensitive drum is exposed by a laser beam. As a result, those areas hit by the beam are neutralized (light area), thus
eliminating negative charges and consequently forming a static image on the surface.

Laser beam

Dark area Light area

F-2-44

2-32
 Chapter 2

2.4.1.10 ITB Cleaning Block

0008-1441

LBP5960

In this block, the ITB is cleaned to prevent image faults that otherwise could occur because of soiling on the ITB.

step 8: ITB cleaning

In this step, the residual toner on the ITB is scraped by the cleaning blade of the ITB cleaning unit. The toner that has been scraped off by the blade is collected in
the waste toner case found at the front left of the machine.

Residual toner

ITB

Tension roller

IITB cleaning blade

F-2-45

2.4.1.11 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Block

0008-1442

LBP5960

In this block, the photosensitive drum is both physically and electrostatically cleaned (by removing residual charges) to prevent image faults otherwise caused by
soiling on the photosensitive drum or uneven charges remaining on the surface of the drum.

step 9: photosensitive drum cleaning

In this step, the toner remaining on the surface of the photosensitive drum is scraped off by the cleaning blade. The toner that has been scraped from the drum is
collected in the waste toner case found at the left front of the machine.

Primary transfer roller

ITB

Residual toner

Drum cleaning blade

Photosensitive drum

F-2-46

step 10: post-exposure

In this step, the laser light from the laser/scanner unit is directed to the surface of the photosensitive drum to free the surface from residual charges in preparation
for the next print job, thus preventing uneven density.
This mechanism is executed for every post rotation at the end of a job.

2-33
 Chapter 2

Photosensitive drum

Primary charging roller

Laser beam
F-2-47

2.4.1.12 Developing Block

0016-5345

LBP5970 / LBP5975

In this block, the machine uses a toner projection method in which it deposits toner over the surface of the photosensitive drum, thus turning the static image into
a visible image. The developer used here is a 2-component developer, composed of non-magnetic toner and carrier.

Toner
Photosensitive drum

Carrier

Developing cylinder

AC bias

DC bias

Blade

Toner feedscrew A

Toner feedscrew B
F-2-48
Step 3: development
The drum cartridge consists of a photosensitive drum, developing cylinder, and a blade.
The developer is composed of toner (mainly of resin and dye) and carrier (iron powder) mixed in a specific ratio. The friction occurring between toner and carrier
causes the toner to become negatively charged and carrier to become positively charged.
The developer adheres to the surface of the developing cylinder by the work of a fixed magnet, and a blade is used to form a uniform layer of developer.
At this time, the areas of the photosensitive drum exposed by the laser beam will have a positive potential in relation to the developing cylinder.
As a result, the toner charged to a more or less identical potential as the developing cylinder will move to and stick to the areas of the photosensitive drum exposed
by the laser beam. This phenomenon is referred to as "toner projection," and is used to turn the image on the surface of the photosensitive drum into a visible image.

2-34
 Chapter 2

The "light area" of the photosensitive drum is charged to a negative potential; however, the diagram below shows it as being charged to a positive potential, indi-
cating that its potential is higher than that of the developing cylinder when the cylinder is used as the reference.

+V
Drum surface potential (light area)
0

Potential (V)
Toner potential

-V Developing cylinder surface potential

Time (t)
Drum surface potential (dark area)
F-2-49

2.4.1.13 Transfer Block

0016-5346

LBP5970 / LBP5975

This block consists of 3 steps, in which the toner image is moved from the photosensitive drum surface to paper.

step 4: primary transfer

In this step, toner is moved from the photosensitive drum to the ITB.
A positive bias is applied to the primary transfer roller found on the inner side of the machine, thus charging the ITB to a positive potential. As a result, the negatively
charged toner on the surface of the photosensitive drum moves to the positively charged ITB. This whole process is performed for all colors (Y, M, C, Bk).

Primary transfer roller

ITB
DC bias

photosensitive drum

F-2-50

step 5: secondary transfer

In this step, the toner on the ITB is moved to paper.
A positive bias is applied to the secondary transfer outside roller to charge the back of paper to a positive potential. As a result, the toner on the ITB moves to the
paper.
To prevent soiling of the back of paper, the secondary transfer outside roller is given a positive and then a negative bias in turns at the end of secondary transfer,
thus returning the residual toner on the secondary transfer outside roller to the ITB.
Thereafter, the residual toner returned to the ITB is collected to the waste toner case in the ITB cleaning block.

2-35
 Chapter 2

ITB

Secondary transfer inside roller

Paper

Secondary transfer outside roller

DC bias

F-2-51

step 6: separation
In this step, the rigidity of paper is used to separate paper from the ITB.
Thin paper has little body. The static eliminator decreases the charges on paper, thus weakening the static bonding and, consequently, facilitating separation.

ITB

Secondary transfer inside roller

Paper

Static
eliminator

Secondary transfer outside roller

F-2-52

2.4.1.14 Fixing Block

0016-5347

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine uses an on-demand method, which tends to require less heat than other methods. The machine's heater heats up fast and does not require power in a
standby state, with the ultimate result that the machine is characterized by a short wait time and high energy efficiency.
The machine's pressure roller has a higher potential than the fixing sleeve, thus enabling the full retention of the negatively charged toner on paper and, at the same
time, preventing adhesion of toner to the fixing sleeve.

step 7: fixing
In this step, the toner on the paper is subjected to heat and pressure so that it will melt (while mixing colors) to create a permanent image.

2-36
 Chapter 2

Fixing sleeve
Fixing heater Pressure roller

Paper
F-2-53

2.4.1.15 ITB Cleaning Block

0016-5348

LBP5970 / LBP5975

In this block, the ITB is cleaned to prevent image faults that otherwise could occur because of soiling on the ITB.

step 8: ITB cleaning

In this step, the residual toner on the ITB is scraped by the cleaning blade of the ITB cleaning unit. The toner that has been scraped off by the blade is collected in
the waste toner case found at the front left of the machine.

Residual toner

ITB

Tension roller

IITB cleaning blade

F-2-54

2.4.1.16 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Block

0016-5349

LBP5970 / LBP5975

In this block, the photosensitive drum is both physically and electrostatically cleaned (by removing residual charges) to prevent image faults otherwise caused by
soiling on the photosensitive drum or uneven charges remaining on the surface of the drum.

step 9: photosensitive drum cleaning

In this step, the toner remaining on the surface of the photosensitive drum is scraped off by the cleaning blade. The toner that has been scraped from the drum is
collected in the waste toner case found at the left front of the machine.

2-37
 Chapter 2

Primary transfer roller

ITB

Residual toner

Drum cleaning blade

Photosensitive drum

F-2-55

step 10: post-exposure

In this step, the laser light from the laser/scanner unit is directed to the surface of the photosensitive drum to free the surface from residual charges in preparation
for the next print job, thus preventing uneven density.
This mechanism is executed for every post rotation at the end of a job.

Photosensitive drum

Primary charging roller

Laser beam
F-2-56

2.4.2 High-Voltage Control

2.4.2.1 Overview
0008-1818

LBP5960

The high-voltage control circuit is used for the application of a bias to the primary charging roller, developing cylinder, primary transfer roller, and secondary trans-
fer roller. These biases are generated by HVT1 and HVT2, which in turn are controlled by the CPU (IC9) of the DC controller through the ASIC1 (IC4).
The following is a block diagram of this circuit:

2-38
 Chapter 2

[3]

[2]

[1] [3]

[4]

TR1S_Y, TR1S_M, TR1S_C, TR1S_Bk

DEV_DC_YMC
DEV_AC_YMC

PRI_DC_YMC
DEV_DC_Bk
DEV_AC_Bk

PRI_DC_Bk
PRI_AC_Bk
PRI_AC_M
PRI_AC_C
PRI_AC_Y

TRI_Bk

TRI_M
TRI_C

TRI_Y
TR2S
TR2
[6] [7] [10]

[8] [9] [11]

HVT1 HVT2

ASIC1(IC4 ) CPU(IC9)
D-CON
F-2-57
[1] Developing cylinder
[2] Photosensitive drum
[3] Primary transfer roller
[4] Primary charging roller
[5] Secondary transfer roller
[6] Primary charging AC high-voltage generation circuit
[7] Primary charging high-voltage generation circuit
[8] Developing AC high-voltage generation circuit
[9] Developing DC high-voltage generation circuit
[10] Primary transfer DC high-voltage generation circuit
[11] Secondary transfer DC high-voltage generation circuit

2.4.2.2 Generation of the Primary Charging Bias

0008-1819

LBP5960

The primary charging bias is generated to charge the surface of the photosensitive drum to an even negative potential as preparatory work for image formation.
The bias is generated by the primary charging AC high-voltage generation circuit and the primary charging DC high-voltage generation circuit of HVT1.
The primary charging AC high-voltage generation circuit is used to generate the AC bias applied to the primary charging roller. It generates 4 types of biases
(PRI_AC_Y, PRI_AC_MJ, PRI_AC_C, PRI_AC_Bk), independent among individual colors.
The primary charging DC high-voltage generation circuit is used to generate the DC bias applied to the primary charging roller. It generates 2 types of biases
(PRI_DC_YMC, PRI_DC_Bk) for color and Bk.
The AC and DC biases that have been generated by these circuits are combined at such times as specified for application to the primary charging roller of the drum
cartridge.
The level of the primary charging bias varies in keeping with the instructions from the DC controller.

2.4.2.3 Generation of the Developing Bias

0008-1820

LBP5960

The developing bias is used to retain toner over the static image formed on the surface of the photosensitive drum.
The bias is generated by the 2 circuits of HVT1: developing AC high-voltage generation circuit and DC high-voltage generation circuit.
The developing AC high-voltage generation circuit is used to generate the AC bias applied to the developing cylinder, producing 2 types of biases for color and Bk
(DEV_AC_YMC, DEV_AC_Bk).
The developing DC high-voltage generation circuit is used to generate the DC bias applied to the developing cylinder, producing 2 types of biases for color and Bk

2-39
 Chapter 2

(DEV_DC_YMC, DEV_DC_Bk).
The AC and DC biases thus generated are combined at such times as specified for application to the developing cylinder.
The level of the developing bias varies in keeping with the instructions from the DC controller.

2.4.2.4 Overview
0016-5350

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The high-voltage control circuit is used for the application of a bias to the primary charging roller, developing cylinder, primary transfer roller, and secondary trans-
fer roller. These biases are generated by HVT1 and HVT2, which in turn are controlled by the CPU (IC9) of the DC controller through the ASIC1 (IC4).
The following is a block diagram of this circuit:

[3]

[2]

[1] [3]

[4]

TR1S_Y, TR1S_M, TR1S_C, TR1S_Bk

DEV_DC_YMC
DEV_AC_YMC

PRI_DC_YMC
DEV_DC_Bk
DEV_AC_Bk

PRI_DC_Bk
PRI_AC_Bk
PRI_AC_M
PRI_AC_C
PRI_AC_Y

TRI_Bk

TRI_M
TRI_C

TRI_Y
TR2S
TR2

[6] [7] [10]

[8] [9] [11]

HVT1 HVT2

ASIC1(IC4 ) CPU(IC9)
D-CON
F-2-58
[1] Developing cylinder
[2] Photosensitive drum
[3] Primary transfer roller
[4] Primary charging roller
[5] Secondary transfer roller
[6] Primary charging AC high-voltage generation circuit
[7] Primary charging high-voltage generation circuit
[8] Developing AC high-voltage generation circuit
[9] Developing DC high-voltage generation circuit
[10] Primary transfer DC high-voltage generation circuit
[11] Secondary transfer DC high-voltage generation circuit

2.4.2.5 Generation of the Primary Transfer Bias

0008-1821

LBP5960

The primary transfer bias is used to transfer toner from the surface of the photosensitive drum to the ITB.
The bias is generated by the primary transfer DC high-voltage generation circuit of HVT2. The circuit is used to provide a DC bias for application to the primary
transfer roller, producing 4 independent biases for individual colors (TR1_Y, TR1_M, TR1_C, TR1_Bk). These DC biases are applied to the primary transfer roller
at such times as specified.
The level of the primary transfer bias varies according to the instructions from the DC controller.
The DC controller, on the other hand, switches the voltage level of the primary transfer bias for constant voltage control according to the primary transfer current
feedback signal (TR1S) arriving from the primary transfer high-voltage generation circuit.

2-40
 Chapter 2

2.4.2.6 Generation of the Secondary Transfer Bias

0008-1822

LBP5960

The secondary transfer bias is used to transfer toner from the ITB to paper.
The bias may be either DC positive bias or DC negative bias generated by the DC high-voltage generation circuit of HVT2. The DC positive bias is applied to the
secondary transfer roller at time of toner transfer, while the DC negative bias is applied to the secondary transfer roller at time of cleaning.
The high-voltage power supply circuit applies these secondary transfer biases (TR2) to the secondary transfer roller in keeping with a specific printing sequence as
follows:

- Print Bias (DC positive bias)

It is a bias used to transfer toner from the ITB to paper as part of printing sequence. It is a DC positive bias and is applied to the secondary transfer roller.
- Sheet-to-Sheet Bias (DC negative bias)
It is a bias used to return the residual toner from the secondary transfer roller to the ITB after forming a patch image or between sheets during continuous printing.
The machine applies both DC positive and negative biases to the secondary transfer roller in turns.
- Cleaning bias (DC positive /DC negative bias):
It is a bias used to return the toner sticking to the secondary transfer roller after the formation of a patch image or at power-on. It actually consists of a DC positive
bias and a DC negative bias applied alternately to the secondary transfer roller.

The level of the secondary transfer bias varies in keeping with the instructions from the DC controller.
The DC controller, on the other hand, switches the level of the secondary transfer bias in keeping with the secondary transfer current feedback signal (TR2S) arriving
from the secondary transfer DC high-voltage generation circuit for constant voltage control.

2.4.2.7 Generation of the Primary Charging Bias

0016-5351

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The primary charging bias is generated to charge the surface of the photosensitive drum to an even negative potential as preparatory work for image formation.
The bias is generated by the primary charging AC high-voltage generation circuit and the primary charging DC high-voltage generation circuit of HVT1.
The primary charging AC high-voltage generation circuit is used to generate the AC bias applied to the primary charging roller. It generates 4 types of biases
(PRI_AC_Y, PRI_AC_MJ, PRI_AC_C, PRI_AC_Bk), independent among individual colors.
The primary charging DC high-voltage generation circuit is used to generate the DC bias applied to the primary charging roller. It generates 2 types of biases
(PRI_DC_YMC, PRI_DC_Bk) for color and Bk.
The AC and DC biases that have been generated by these circuits are combined at such times as specified for application to the primary charging roller of the drum
cartridge.
The level of the primary charging bias varies in keeping with the instructions from the DC controller.

2.4.2.8 Generation of the Developing Bias

0016-5352

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The developing bias is used to retain toner over the static image formed on the surface of the photosensitive drum.
The bias is generated by the 2 circuits of HVT1: developing AC high-voltage generation circuit and DC high-voltage generation circuit.
The developing AC high-voltage generation circuit is used to generate the AC bias applied to the developing cylinder, producing 2 types of biases for color and Bk
(DEV_AC_YMC, DEV_AC_Bk).
The developing DC high-voltage generation circuit is used to generate the DC bias applied to the developing cylinder, producing 2 types of biases for color and Bk
(DEV_DC_YMC, DEV_DC_Bk).
The AC and DC biases thus generated are combined at such times as specified for application to the developing cylinder.
The level of the developing bias varies in keeping with the instructions from the DC controller.

2.4.2.9 Generation of the Primary Transfer Bias

0016-5353

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The primary transfer bias is used to transfer toner from the surface of the photosensitive drum to the ITB.
The bias is generated by the primary transfer DC high-voltage generation circuit of HVT2. The circuit is used to provide a DC bias for application to the primary
transfer roller, producing 4 independent biases for individual colors (TR1_Y, TR1_M, TR1_C, TR1_Bk). These DC biases are applied to the primary transfer roller
at such times as specified.
The level of the primary transfer bias varies according to the instructions from the DC controller.
The DC controller, on the other hand, switches the voltage level of the primary transfer bias for constant voltage control according to the primary transfer current
feedback signal (TR1S) arriving from the primary transfer high-voltage generation circuit.

2.4.2.10 Generation of the Secondary Transfer Bias

0016-5354

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The secondary transfer bias is used to transfer toner from the ITB to paper.
The bias may be either DC positive bias or DC negative bias generated by the DC high-voltage generation circuit of HVT2. The DC positive bias is applied to the
secondary transfer roller at time of toner transfer, while the DC negative bias is applied to the secondary transfer roller at time of cleaning.
The high-voltage power supply circuit applies these secondary transfer biases (TR2) to the secondary transfer roller in keeping with a specific printing sequence as
follows:

- Print Bias (DC positive bias)

It is a bias used to transfer toner from the ITB to paper as part of printing sequence. It is a DC positive bias and is applied to the secondary transfer roller.
- Sheet-to-Sheet Bias (DC negative bias)
It is a bias used to return the residual toner from the secondary transfer roller to the ITB after forming a patch image or between sheets during continuous printing.
The machine applies both DC positive and negative biases to the secondary transfer roller in turns.
- Cleaning bias (DC positive /DC negative bias):
It is a bias used to return the toner sticking to the secondary transfer roller after the formation of a patch image or at power-on. It actually consists of a DC positive
bias and a DC negative bias applied alternately to the secondary transfer roller.

The level of the secondary transfer bias varies in keeping with the instructions from the DC controller.
The DC controller, on the other hand, switches the level of the secondary transfer bias in keeping with the secondary transfer current feedback signal (TR2S) arriving
from the secondary transfer DC high-voltage generation circuit for constant voltage control.

2-41
 Chapter 2

2.4.3 Image Stabilizaton Control

2.4.3.1 Overview of Image Stabilization

0008-1956

LBP5960

To ensure an ideal image against the deterioration of parts associated with imaging otherwise occurring as a result of changes in the environment or in the machine,
the following mechanisms are used:

Y
M
C
BK UN14
UN15

Laser
Scanner
Unit

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

D-CON

[7] [8]
V-CON
F-2-59
T-2-3

Item Description
[1]Drum film thickness detection computes the film thickness of the photosensitive drum
[2]ATR control determines the amount of toner to supply
[3]Color Dmax control determines the best level of laser power
[4]Black Dmax control determines the best level of developing bias
[5]Color displacement correction control determines the correction value of color displacement
[6]ATVC control determines the best level of transfer bias
[7]Dhalf control determines the best gradation table
[8]Abridged Dhalf control determines the best gradation table (abridged)

UN14: color displacement sensor A (also serves as patch image sensor)

UN15: color displacement sensor B

2.4.3.2 Timing of Image Stabilization Control

0009-6778

LBP5960

The items that are executed as part of image stabilization control differ depending on the condition of the machine (environment or deterioration of parts associated
with the image formation system). The following table shows the items:
T-2-4

Items

Down-time Drum film ATR control Color D-max Black D-max D-half Abridged D- Color ATVC
Condition (Max) thickness control control control half control displacemen control
detection t control

Power-on 26 sec
(approx.) Yes Yes Yes Yes

2-42
 Chapter 2

Items

Down-time Drum film ATR control Color D-max Black D-max D-half Abridged D- Color ATVC
Condition (Max) thickness control control control half control displacemen control
detection t control

Drum cartridge 220 sec

replacement (w/ new) (approx.) *1
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Return from sleep state 26 sec

Yes Yes Yes Yes
*2 (approx.)
Initial rotation 12 sec
(approx.) Yes Yes Yes

Printing 14 sec
(approx.) Yes Yes Yes

Post-rotation 56 sec
(approx.) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Calibration for user 68 sec

(approx.)
Yes Yes Yes Yes

*1: The down-time interval includes the time during which the drum cartridge rotates idly (10 sec).
*2: This item is executed when the ongoing sleep state lasts more than 8 hr (otherwise, nothing will take place).
*3: At times, ATR control and color displacement may be executed by interrupting the ongoing print job.

2.4.3.3 Drum Film Thickness Detection

0008-2948

LBP5960

To form an optimum image against the possible wear on the photosensitive drum, the machine checks the thickness of the drum film. The check is made for every
drum (color), and the result is recorded in EEPROM of the DC controller.
The DC controller refers to the data when determining the primary charging AC bias.

[1]

M1

[2]

[3] Y
M
C
BK

HVT1

[4]

D-CON
EEPROM

[6] [5] [7]

Y Y
M M
C C
BK BK

F-2-60
[1] Drum/ITB motor drive signal
[2] Photosensitive drum
[3] Primary charging roller
[4] Primary charging AC bias drive signal

2-43
 Chapter 2

[5] Internal data

[6] Drum count
[7] Drum film thickness detection data

Start-Up Timing
at power-on, when closing/opening the front cover, at time of printing

Particulars of Control
The DC controller goes through the following to detect the thickness of the drum film:
1) computes the drum count based on "length of time during which the photosensitive drum has rotated" and "length of time during which the primary charging AC
bias is applied."
2) adds the count obtained in 1 above to the count stored in EEPROM.
3) identifies the count as indicating any of the following 3 in terms of the drum film thickness detection data based on the latest count obtained in 2 above: initial
condition, normal condition, final condition.
4) in the event of there being a difference as the result of comparison of the latest drum film thickness data against the stored drum film thickness data, the new
data is written over the existing data; in the absence of a difference, on the other hand, no write operation will take place and the new data will be discarded.

The drum film thickness-related data stored in EEPROM may be either drum count or drum film thickness detection data, the drum film thickness count being
internal data and used when determining bias levels.

2.4.3.4 ATR Control

0008-2925

LBP5960

The machine executes ATR control to supply toner so that the ratio between toner and carrier inside the drum cartridge may remain ideal.

Particulars of Control
The machine computes the amount of toner to supply for each color, and supplies it to the drum cartridge.
The machine uses the following 2 types of data to compute toner amounts:
- Video Count (for each print)
The machine uses the video data arriving from the video controller to compute the amount of toner consumed, and makes up for it by supplying the drum cartridge
with the same amount.
- Result of Detection by the Patch Image Read Sensor
The machine measures the toner image formed on the ITB using the patch image read sensor, and supplies the drum cartridge so that the density will be identical
to the target density.
*1: The condition of execution is based on printing an original with an image ratio of 25%.

ITB

Y
M
C
BK

UN14

[2]

D-CON

[1]

V-CON
F-2-61
[1] Video data
[2] Result of detection by the patch image read sensor
UN14: patch image read sensor (also serves as color displacement sensor A)

ATR-Related Error Code

- E020-001x: outside correction range (upper limit) error 1
At time of installation or during replacement of a drum cartridge, the patch density data of the color in question as determined by ATR control is outside the range
of correction (upper limit).
- E020-002x: outside correction range (lower limit) error 1
At time of installation or during replacement of a drum cartridge, the patch density data of the color in question as determined by ATR control is outside the range
of correction (lower limit).
- E020-010x: outside correction range (upper limit) error 2
At time of printing, the patch density data of the color in question as determined by ATR control is outside the range of correction (upper limit).
- E020-020x: outside correction range (lower limit) error 2
At time of printing, the patch density data of the color in question as determined by ATR control is outside the range of correction (lower limit).

2-44
 Chapter 2

Detail Code (rightmost 4 characters, the 1st representing the color in question)
0: Y
1: M
2: C
3: Bk

2.4.3.5 D-max Control

0009-3469

LBP5960

The machine uses D-max control to limit changes in the image density possibly occurring as the result of deterioration of the photosensitive drum or toner. The
image density is corrected on the printer side.
This control consists of 2 types: color D-max and black D-max.
Color D-max is density correction of colors (Y, M, C), while black D-max is density correction of Bk.
The details of these control mechanisms are as follows:

ITB

[1]

UN14
[2]

Laser Scanner
unirt
HVT1

[3]
[4] [5]

[6] [7]
D-CON
F-2-62
[1] Photosensitive drum
[2] Developing cylinder
[3] Path image data
[4] Laser output
[5] Developing bias
[6] Color D-max control
[7] Black D-max control
UN14: patch image sensor

A. Color D-max Control

1. Start-Up Timing
when a color (Y, M, C) drum cartridge is replaced with a new cartridge.

2. Particulars of Control
In the presence of a specific condition, the DC controller forms a patch pattern of the color in question on the ITB. Thereafter, it uses the patch image sensor to
measure the density of the patch, and corrects the output of the laser light of the color in question so that the density will be identical to the target density.
The machine executes this control only for the color of the drum cartridge that has been replaced.

2-45
 Chapter 2

ITB

M
Y Y
M C

C
Laser Scanner
unit UN14
[3]

[2] [1]

D-CON
F-2-63
[1] Patch image data
[2] Laser output
[3] Photosensitive drum
UN14: patch image sensor

Memo:
In previous machines, density is corrected by varying the developing bias of individual colors. The machine uses the same developing bias for all colors (a design
consideration made to facilitate work at the factory), not being able to vary the developing bias for individual colors. To work around the fact, the machine corrects
the density of individual colors (Y, M, C). It, however, varies the developing bias for Bk as in previous machines.

3. Flow of Operation

Start-up

DC controller

Patch pattern formation

UN14

EX: D-max correction table for Y Patch reading

Density

Y8 DC controller
Y3
D-max correction table creation
Y2 (Y, M, C)
Y1

DC controller
0 Laser output
Laser output determination

F-2-64

B. Black D-max Control

1. Start-Up Timing
- when the Bk drum cartridge is replaced with a new one
- during post-rotation executed every 1000 prints
- during execution of calibration (user mode)

2. Particulars of Control
In the presence of a specific condition, the DC controller forms a patch pattern (Notes) of Bk on the ITB.
Thereafter, the DC controller uses the patch image sensor (UN14) to measure the patch density, thereby correcting the developing bias of Bk so that the density will
be identical to the target density.

2-46
 Chapter 2

ITB

Bk
[3]
UN14

[1]
HVT1

[2]

D-CON
F-2-65
[1] Patch image data
[2] Laser output
[3] Developing cylinder
UN14: patch image sensor

Memo:
To reduce down-time, the machine forms only one patch on the ITB. If, however, the measured patch density is outside the range of correction, it forms an additional
patch. If the density is still outside the range of correction for a second time, the machine continues until it has formed as many as 4 patches.

3. Flow of Operation
The following shows the flow of operation (assuming the correction ends with the 2nd patch):

2-47
 Chapter 2

Start-up

DC controller

Patch pattern formation

UN14

Patch reading

1st patch
DC controller
Density
Black D-max correction
Target
table formation
Correction
range
Bk1

0 Vdc

2nd patch
Density
Bk2
Target

Bk1

0 Vdc
No
Within correction range?

Yes
4 patches max.
DC controller

Developing bias determination

(VDC)
F-2-66

2.4.3.6 D-half Control

0009-3472

LBP5960
The machine uses the video controller to execute gradation correction to enable ideal gradation characteristics.

Start-Up Timing
- when the drum cartridge is replaced with a new one
- during post-rotation executed every 1000 prints
- during execution of calibration (user mode)

Particulars of Control
In the presence of a specific condition, the video controller sends the patch data of individual colors (Y, M, C, Bk) to the DC controller, which in turn forms a patch
pattern of each color (Y, M, C, Bk) on the ITB. Thereafter, the DC controller uses the patch image sensor (UN14) to measure the patch pattern, and sends the result
back to the video controller, which executes gradation correction based on the data so that ideal halftone images may be obtained.
In this control, the machine also forms a reference patch for use by abridged D-half control, and stores the reference data for abridged D-half control collected from
UN14. (See Notes.)
The machine executes gradation correction for all colors, regardless of which drum cartridge may have been replaced.

2-48
 Chapter 2

ITB

UN14

Laser Scanner
unirt

[4] [1]

D-CON

[2]

[3]
V-CON
F-2-67
[1] Patch image data
[2] Density data
[3] D-half control
[4] Video data
UN14: patch image sensor

Flow of Operation

2-49
 Chapter 2

Start-up

Video controller

Patch pattern data output

DC controller

Patch pattern formation

EX: D-half correction table for Y

UN14
Actual gradation
characteristics Patch reading
Y6
100 Y5
DC controller
Y4
Density data(D-CON)

Density data output

Y3

Y2 Ideal gradation Video controller

characteristics
Y1 D-half correction table creation
0 100 (Y, M, C, Bk)

Data output(V-CON)

100
Ideal gradation
characteristics
Density data(D-CON)

Gradation characteristics
after correction
0 100

Data output(V-CON)

F-2-68

Memo:
The patch pattern formed in the course of this control may be either of the following 3 types:
- pattern with priority on characters (6 patches in total for each color)
- pattern with priority on photo (6 patches in total for each color)
- reference pattern for abridged D-half (1 patch for each color)

Flow of Computing the Correction Value for Abridged D-half

2-50
 Chapter 2

Start-up

DC controller
Reference patch pattern
creation for abridged D-half

UN14

Patch reading

Density data(D-CON) 100

DC controller

Density data (INT) output

40 INT

20

10 40 100 Video controller

Data storage
Data output(D-CON)
(as reference data for
abridged D-half)
F-2-69

2.4.3.7 Overview of Image Stabilization

0016-5355

LBP5970 / LBP5975

To ensure an ideal image against the deterioration of parts associated with imaging otherwise occurring as a result of changes in the environment or in the machine,
the following mechanisms are used:

Y
M
C
BK UN14
UN15

Laser
Scanner
Unit

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

D-CON

[7] [8]
V-CON
F-2-70
T-2-5

Item Description
[1]Drum film thickness detection computes the film thickness of the photosensitive drum
[2]ATR control determines the amount of toner to supply
[3]Color Dmax control determines the best level of laser power
[4]Black Dmax control determines the best level of developing bias
[5]Color displacement correction control determines the correction value of color displacement
[6]ATVC control determines the best level of transfer bias

2-51
 Chapter 2

Item Description
[7]Dhalf control determines the best gradation table
[8]Abridged Dhalf control determines the best gradation table (abridged)

UN14: color displacement sensor A (also serves as patch image sensor)

UN15: color displacement sensor B

2.4.3.8 Abridged D-half Control

0009-3478

LBP5960

The machine performs abridged D-half control to attain ideal gradation characteristics and to reduce downtime (by the video controller).

Start-Up Timing
- when the power is turned on
- during post-rotation executed every 25 prints (*1)
- during return from sleep

*1: When printing an original with an image ratio of 25% or less.

Particulars of Control
In the presence of a specific condition, the DC controller forms a patch pattern of each color (Y, M, C, Bk) on the ITB (a single pattern for each color, a total of 4
patterns). Thereafter, the DC controller measures the patch pattern using the patch image sensor (UN14), and sends the result back to the video controller, which
in turn compares it against the abridged D-half reference data backed up in memory and uses the difference as the offset value for D-half.

ITB

Y
M
C k
B

UN14

Laser Scanner
unirt

[4] [1]

D-CON

[2]

[3]
V-CON
F-2-71
[1] Patch image data
[2] Density data
[3] Abridged D-half control
[4] Video data
UN14: patch image sensor

Flow of Operation

2-52
 Chapter 2

Start-up

DC controller

Patch pattern formation

UN14

Patch reading

DC controller

Measurement data (SIN) transmission

Video controller
Comparison of measurement data (SIN)
Density data(D-CON)

and reference data (INT)

INT
40

20 SIN

10 40 Video controller
Data output(D-CON)
Offset value (alpha) determination
(i.e., difference between SIN and INT)

Video controller

Inclusion of result in
D-half correction table
Density data(D-CON)

100 Current gradation

characteristics

60 Gradation characteristics
after correction

40

20

40
Data output(V-CON)

F-2-72

2.4.3.9 Color Displacement Correction Control

0009-1297

LBP5960

The machine performs the following 3 types of control to correct displacement of color possibly caused by differences among components of its laser scanner unit
and drum cartridge:
- main scanning write start correction
- sub scanning write start correction
- main scanning magnification correction control

The DC controller forms patterns for detection of color displacement for individual colors, and uses the color displacement sensor to detect the position of the pat-
terns.
The DC controller computes the degree of displacement with reference to the position of the pattern detected; based on the result, the DC controller or the video
controller corrects the displacement for individual colors.

2-53
 Chapter 2

ITB

Y
M
C
BK
Y
M
C
BK
UN15

UN14

Laser Scanner Unit

[1] [1]

VDO
D-CON
VDO

V-CON
F-2-73
[1] Color displacement detection signal
UN14: color displacement sensor A
UN15: color displacement sensor B
D-CON: DC controller
V-CON: video controller

A.Start-Up Timing
- at power-on
- when the upper cover is opened/closed
- during initial rotation upon detection of a change in the environment (condition 1)
- between sheets upon detection of a change in the environment (condition 2)
- upon execution of calibration (user mode)
Condition 1:
as a result of comparison against the previously detected machine inside temperature, a change of 4 deg C or more exists
Condition 2:
- the standby time has lasted 10 min or more and the machine inside temperature has changed 1 deg C or more
- during continuous printing, the machine inside temperature is different from the previously detected temperature by 4 deg C or more

B. Main Scanning Write Start Correction

1. Particulars of Control
The machine writes a main scanning position detection pattern of each color on the ITB, and compares the measurement value (A) and the reference value (B) stored
in the DC controller to find out the degree of color displacement (C). If displacement is detected in main scanning direction, the machine changes the timing at
which writing starts in main scanning direction.

2-54
 Chapter 2

ITB ITB

A B

C
[1] [1] [3] [2]
[4] [5]
F-2-74
[1] Color displacement sensor A
[2] Detection pattern position before correction
[3] Detection pattern position after correction
[4] Before correction
[5] After correction

2. Sample
The following is a timing chart depicting a delay in the writing of an image in main scanning direction:

BD signal VDO signal

[1]

[3]

[2]
F-2-75
[1] Before correctionAfter correction
[2] After correction
[3] advances timing (specifically, the interval between the output of the BD signal and that of the video signal is reduced)

C. Sub Scanning Write Start Correction

1. Particulars of Control
The machine forms a sub scanning position detection pattern of each color on the ITB, and compares the measurement (A) against the reference value (B) stored
in the DC controller to detect the displacement (C) of each color. If the result indicates the presence of color displacement in sub scanning direction, the machine
varies the timing at which writing starts in sub scanning direction.

2-55
 Chapter 2

ITB ITB

B
A
[2] C

[3]
[1] [4] [1] [5]
F-2-76
[1] Color displacement sensor A
[2] Detection pattern position after correction
[3] Detection pattern position before correction
[4] Before correction
[5] After correction

2. Specific Example
The following is a timing chart depicting a delay in image writing in sub scanning direction:

TOP signal VDO signal

[1]

[3]

[2]
F-2-77
[1] Before correction
[2] After correction
[3] Advances the timing (specifically, the interval between the output of the TOP signal and that of the video signal is reduced)

The machine uses Y as the reference when measuring color displacement and, therefore, does not make correction for the reference color.

D. Main Scanning Magnification Correction

1. Particulars of Control
The machine forms a main scanning magnification detection pattern of each color on the left and right edges of the ITB. Thereafter, it uses the difference between
the measurement (A) taken at the left edge and the measurement (B) taken at the right edge to detect the degree of magnification (C) of each color. If there is a
difference in main scanning direction, the machine increases the number of pixels in main scanning direction.

2-56
 Chapter 2

ITB ITB

A B A

[3] [4]
[1] [5] [2] [1] [6] [2]

F-2-78
[1] Color displacement sensor A
[2] Color displacement sensor B
[3] Detection pattern position before correction
[4] Detection pattern position after correction
[5] Before correction
[6] After correction

2. Specific Example
The following is the flow of operation used in the event that the magnification in main scanning direction is 10 dots fewer than specified for an A4 vertical print
(210 mm). Specifically, the machine adds 160 image units (each being a 1/16 of a dot) to the image data representing a single line.

1 line
about 5000 reference pixels

A4 (vertical)

Short by
10 dots
Result of measurement
4990 dots

Before correction

1 pixel (= 1 dot)
1/16-of-a-dot
pixels

After correction

Insert 160 1/16-of-a-dot pixels

F-2-79

2.4.3.10 ATVC Control

0008-2977

LBP5960

The machine executes ATVC control to determine the best transfer bias for use when moving toner from the photosensitive drum to the ITB and then from the ITB
to paper. This control may be either of the following 2: primary transfer ATVC and secondary transfer ATVC.

2-57
 Chapter 2

[1]

[2]

Laser Scanner Unit

[4] [3]

HVT2
ROOM_TEMP2

ROOM_TEMP1

TR1S_BK
TR1S_M
TR1S_C
TR1S_Y

TR2S
D-CON
F-2-80
[1] Primary transfer roller
[2] Secondary transfer outside roller
[3] Machine inside environment sensor
[4] Machine outside environment sensor

A. Primary Transfer ATVC

The machine executes primary transfer ATVC when determining the primary transfer bias used to ensure the target transfer current level for transfer.

1. Start-Up Conditions
- at power-on
- when the drum cartridge is replaced with a new one
- during initial rotation
- during post-rotation executed every 1000 prints
- during recovery from a sleep state
- during execution of calibration

2. Particulars of Control
T-2-6

Sequence Item Description

Applying the primary transfer bias A specific bias is applied to the primary transfer roller, and HVT2 is used to detect the
1 level of current for feedback to the DC controller.

Monitoring the machine inside environment sensor The DC controller monitors the output of the machine inside environment sensor.
2

Determining the primary transfer bias The DC controller determines the best primary transfer bias for individual colors based
on the foregoing 3 sets of data.
3

B. Secondary Transfer ATVC

The machine executes secondary transfer ATVC when determining the secondary transfer bias so that the target transfer current may be obtained for transfer.

1. Start-Up Conditions
- at power-on
- when the drum cartridge is replaced with a new one
- during initial rotation
- during post-rotation executed every 1000 prints
- during recovery from sleep
- during execution of calibration

2. Particulars of Control
T-2-7

Sequence Item Description

Applying the secondary transfer bias A specific bias is applied to the secondary transfer roller, and HVT2 is used to detect
the level of current for feedback to the DC controller.
1

2-58
 Chapter 2

Sequence Item Description

Monitoring the machine outside environment sensor The DC controller computes the secondary transfer bias correction value with
reference to the output of the compensatory environment sensor (i.e., the degree of
2
moisture in paper) and print job information (i.e., paper type, 1st/2nd side).

Determining the secondary transfer bias The DC controller determines the best secondary transfer bias with reference to the
3 secondary transfer current feedback and the secondary transfer bias correction value.

2.4.3.11 Timing of Image Stabilization Control

0016-5356

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The items that are executed as part of image stabilization control differ depending on the condition of the machine (environment or deterioration of parts associated
with the image formation system). The following table shows the items:
T-2-8

Items

Down-time Drum film ATR control Color D-max Black D-max D-half Abridged D- Color ATVC
Condition (Max) thickness control control control half control displacemen control
detection t control

Power-on 26 sec
(approx.) Yes Yes Yes Yes

Drum cartridge 220 sec

replacement (w/ new) (approx.) *1
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Return from sleep state 26 sec

Yes Yes Yes Yes
*2 (approx.)
Initial rotation 12 sec
(approx.) Yes Yes Yes

Printing 14 sec
(approx.) Yes Yes Yes

Post-rotation 56 sec
(approx.) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Calibration for user 68 sec

(approx.)
Yes Yes Yes Yes

*1: The down-time interval includes the time during which the drum cartridge rotates idly (10 sec).
*2: This item is executed when the ongoing sleep state lasts more than 8 hr (otherwise, nothing will take place).
*3: At times, ATR control and color displacement may be executed by interrupting the ongoing print job.

2.4.3.12 Drum Film Thickness Detection

0016-5357

LBP5970 / LBP5975

To form an optimum image against the possible wear on the photosensitive drum, the machine checks the thickness of the drum film. The check is made for every
drum (color), and the result is recorded in EEPROM of the DC controller.
The DC controller refers to the data when determining the primary charging AC bias.

2-59
 Chapter 2

[1]

M1

[2]

[3] Y
M
C
BK

HVT1

[4]

D-CON
EEPROM

[6] [5] [7]

Y Y
M M
C C
BK BK

F-2-81
[1] Drum/ITB motor drive signal
[2] Photosensitive drum
[3] Primary charging roller
[4] Primary charging AC bias drive signal
[5] Internal data
[6] Drum count
[7] Drum film thickness detection data

Start-Up Timing
at power-on, when closing/opening the front cover, at time of printing

Particulars of Control
The DC controller goes through the following to detect the thickness of the drum film:
1) computes the drum count based on "length of time during which the photosensitive drum has rotated" and "length of time during which the primary charging AC
bias is applied."
2) adds the count obtained in 1 above to the count stored in EEPROM.
3) identifies the count as indicating any of the following 3 in terms of the drum film thickness detection data based on the latest count obtained in 2 above: initial
condition, normal condition, final condition.
4) in the event of there being a difference as the result of comparison of the latest drum film thickness data against the stored drum film thickness data, the new
data is written over the existing data; in the absence of a difference, on the other hand, no write operation will take place and the new data will be discarded.

The drum film thickness-related data stored in EEPROM may be either drum count or drum film thickness detection data, the drum film thickness count being
internal data and used when determining bias levels.

2.4.3.13 ATR Control

0016-5358

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine executes ATR control to supply toner so that the ratio between toner and carrier inside the drum cartridge may remain ideal.

Particulars of Control
The machine computes the amount of toner to supply for each color, and supplies it to the drum cartridge.
The machine uses the following 2 types of data to compute toner amounts:
- Video Count (for each print)
The machine uses the video data arriving from the video controller to compute the amount of toner consumed, and makes up for it by supplying the drum cartridge
with the same amount.
- Result of Detection by the Patch Image Read Sensor
The machine measures the toner image formed on the ITB using the patch image read sensor, and supplies the drum cartridge so that the density will be identical
to the target density.

*1: The condition of execution is based on printing an original with an image ratio of 25%.

2-60
 Chapter 2

ITB

Y
M
C
BK

UN14

[2]

D-CON

[1]

V-CON
F-2-82
[1] Video data
[2] Result of detection by the patch image read sensor
UN14: patch image read sensor (also serves as color displacement sensor A)

ATR-Related Error Code

- E020-001x: outside correction range (upper limit) error 1
At time of installation or during replacement of a drum cartridge, the patch density data of the color in question as determined by ATR control is outside the range
of correction (upper limit).
- E020-002x: outside correction range (lower limit) error 1
At time of installation or during replacement of a drum cartridge, the patch density data of the color in question as determined by ATR control is outside the range
of correction (lower limit).
- E020-010x: outside correction range (upper limit) error 2
At time of printing, the patch density data of the color in question as determined by ATR control is outside the range of correction (upper limit).
- E020-020x: outside correction range (lower limit) error 2
At time of printing, the patch density data of the color in question as determined by ATR control is outside the range of correction (lower limit).

Detail Code (rightmost 4 characters, the 1st representing the color in question)
0: Y
1: M
2: C
3: Bk

2.4.3.14 D-max Control

0016-5360

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine uses D-max control to limit changes in the image density possibly occurring as the result of deterioration of the photosensitive drum or toner. The
image density is corrected on the printer side.
This control consists of 2 types: color D-max and black D-max.
Color D-max is density correction of colors (Y, M, C), while black D-max is density correction of Bk.
The details of these control mechanisms are as follows:

2-61
 Chapter 2

ITB

[1]

UN14
[2]

Laser Scanner
unirt
HVT1

[3]
[4] [5]

[6] [7]
D-CON
F-2-83
[1] Photosensitive drum
[2] Developing cylinder
[3] Path image data
[4] Laser output
[5] Developing bias
[6] Color D-max control
[7] Black D-max control
UN14: patch image sensor

A. Color D-max Control

1. Start-Up Timing
when a color (Y, M, C) drum cartridge is replaced with a new cartridge.

2. Particulars of Control
In the presence of a specific condition, the DC controller forms a patch pattern of the color in question on the ITB. Thereafter, it uses the patch image sensor to
measure the density of the patch, and corrects the output of the laser light of the color in question so that the density will be identical to the target density.
The machine executes this control only for the color of the drum cartridge that has been replaced.

ITB

M
Y Y
M C

C
Laser Scanner
unit UN14
[3]

[2] [1]

D-CON
F-2-84
[1] Patch image data
[2] Laser output
[3] Photosensitive drum
UN14: patch image sensor

Memo:
In previous machines, density is corrected by varying the developing bias of individual colors. The machine uses the same developing bias for all colors (a design
consideration made to facilitate work at the factory), not being able to vary the developing bias for individual colors. To work around the fact, the machine corrects
the density of individual colors (Y, M, C). It, however, varies the developing bias for Bk as in previous machines.

2-62
 Chapter 2

3. Flow of Operation

Start-up

DC controller

Patch pattern formation

UN14

EX: D-max correction table for Y Patch reading

Density

Y8 DC controller
Y3
D-max correction table creation
Y2 (Y, M, C)
Y1

DC controller
0 Laser output
Laser output determination

F-2-85

B. Black D-max Control

1. Start-Up Timing
- when the Bk drum cartridge is replaced with a new one
- during post-rotation executed every 1000 prints
- during execution of calibration (user mode)

2. Particulars of Control
In the presence of a specific condition, the DC controller forms a patch pattern (Notes) of Bk on the ITB.
Thereafter, the DC controller uses the patch image sensor (UN14) to measure the patch density, thereby correcting the developing bias of Bk so that the density will
be identical to the target density.

ITB

Bk
[3]
UN14

[1]
HVT1

[2]

D-CON
F-2-86
[1] Patch image data
[2] Laser output
[3] Developing cylinder
UN14: patch image sensor

Memo:
To reduce down-time, the machine forms only one patch on the ITB. If, however, the measured patch density is outside the range of correction, it forms an additional

2-63
 Chapter 2

patch. If the density is still outside the range of correction for a second time, the machine continues until it has formed as many as 4 patches.

3. Flow of Operation
The following shows the flow of operation (assuming the correction ends with the 2nd patch):

Start-up

DC controller

Patch pattern formation

UN14

Patch reading

1st patch
DC controller
Density
Black D-max correction
Target
table formation
Correction
range
Bk1

0 Vdc

2nd patch
Density
Bk2
Target

Bk1

0 Vdc
No
Within correction range?

Yes
4 patches max.
DC controller

Developing bias determination

(VDC)
F-2-87

2.4.3.15 D-half Control

0016-5361

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine uses the video controller to execute gradation correction to enable ideal gradation characteristics.
Start-Up Timing
- when the drum cartridge is replaced with a new one
- during post-rotation executed every 1000 prints
- during execution of calibration (user mode)

Particulars of Control
In the presence of a specific condition, the video controller sends the patch data of individual colors (Y, M, C, Bk) to the DC controller, which in turn forms a patch
pattern of each color (Y, M, C, Bk) on the ITB. Thereafter, the DC controller uses the patch image sensor (UN14) to measure the patch pattern, and sends the result
back to the video controller, which executes gradation correction based on the data so that ideal halftone images may be obtained.
In this control, the machine also forms a reference patch for use by abridged D-half control, and stores the reference data for abridged D-half control collected from
UN14. (See Notes.)
The machine executes gradation correction for all colors, regardless of which drum cartridge may have been replaced.

2-64
 Chapter 2

ITB

UN14

Laser Scanner
unirt

[4] [1]

D-CON

[2]

[3]
V-CON
F-2-88
[1] Patch image data
[2] Density data
[3] D-half control
[4] Video data
UN14: patch image sensor

Flow of Operation

2-65
 Chapter 2

Start-up

Video controller

Patch pattern data output

DC controller

Patch pattern formation

EX: D-half correction table for Y

UN14
Actual gradation
characteristics Patch reading
Y6
100 Y5
DC controller
Y4
Density data(D-CON)

Density data output

Y3

Y2 Ideal gradation Video controller

characteristics
Y1 D-half correction table creation
0 100 (Y, M, C, Bk)

Data output(V-CON)

100
Ideal gradation
characteristics
Density data(D-CON)

Gradation characteristics
after correction
0 100

Data output(V-CON)

F-2-89

Memo:
The patch pattern formed in the course of this control may be either of the following 3 types:
- pattern with priority on characters (6 patches in total for each color)
- pattern with priority on photo (6 patches in total for each color)
- reference pattern for abridged D-half (1 patch for each color)

Flow of Computing the Correction Value for Abridged D-half

2-66
 Chapter 2

Start-up

DC controller
Reference patch pattern
creation for abridged D-half

UN14

Patch reading

Density data(D-CON) 100

DC controller

Density data (INT) output

40 INT

20

10 40 100 Video controller

Data storage
Data output(D-CON)
(as reference data for
abridged D-half)
F-2-90

2.4.3.16 Abridged D-half Control

0016-5363

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine performs abridged D-half control to attain ideal gradation characteristics and to reduce downtime (by the video controller).
Start-Up Timing
- when the power is turned on
- during post-rotation executed every 25 prints (*1)
- during return from sleep

*1: When printing an original with an image ratio of 25% or less.

Particulars of Control
In the presence of a specific condition, the DC controller forms a patch pattern of each color (Y, M, C, Bk) on the ITB (a single pattern for each color, a total of 4
patterns). Thereafter, the DC controller measures the patch pattern using the patch image sensor (UN14), and sends the result back to the video controller, which
in turn compares it against the abridged D-half reference data backed up in memory and uses the difference as the offset value for D-half.

ITB

Y
M
C k
B

UN14

Laser Scanner
unirt

[4] [1]

D-CON

[2]

[3]
V-CON
F-2-91

2-67
 Chapter 2

[1] Patch image data

[2] Density data
[3] Abridged D-half control
[4] Video data
UN14: patch image sensor

Flow of Operation

Start-up

DC controller

Patch pattern formation

UN14

Patch reading

DC controller

Measurement data (SIN) transmission

Video controller
Comparison of measurement data (SIN)
Density data(D-CON)

and reference data (INT)

INT
40

20 SIN

10 40 Video controller
Data output(D-CON)
Offset value (alpha) determination
(i.e., difference between SIN and INT)

Video controller

Inclusion of result in
D-half correction table
Density data(D-CON)

100 Current gradation

characteristics

60 Gradation characteristics
after correction

40

20

40
Data output(V-CON)

F-2-92

2.4.3.17 Color Displacement Correction Control

0016-5364

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine performs the following 3 types of control to correct displacement of color possibly caused by differences among components of its laser scanner unit
and drum cartridge:
- main scanning write start correction
- sub scanning write start correction
- main scanning magnification correction control

The DC controller forms patterns for detection of color displacement for individual colors, and uses the color displacement sensor to detect the position of the pat-
terns.
The DC controller computes the degree of displacement with reference to the position of the pattern detected; based on the result, the DC controller or the video
controller corrects the displacement for individual colors.

2-68
 Chapter 2

ITB

Y
M
C
BK
Y
M
C
BK
UN15

UN14

Laser Scanner Unit

[1] [1]

VDO
D-CON
VDO

V-CON
F-2-93
[1] Color displacement detection signal
UN14: color displacement sensor A
UN15: color displacement sensor B
D-CON: DC controller
V-CON: video controller

A.Start-Up Timing
- at power-on
- when the upper cover is opened/closed
- during initial rotation upon detection of a change in the environment (condition 1)
- between sheets upon detection of a change in the environment (condition 2)
- upon execution of calibration (user mode)
Condition 1:
as a result of comparison against the previously detected machine inside temperature, a change of 4 deg C or more exists
Condition 2:
- the standby time has lasted 10 min or more and the machine inside temperature has changed 1 deg C or more
- during continuous printing, the machine inside temperature is different from the previously detected temperature by 4 deg C or more

B. Main Scanning Write Start Correction

1. Particulars of Control
The machine writes a main scanning position detection pattern of each color on the ITB, and compares the measurement value (A) and the reference value (B) stored
in the DC controller to find out the degree of color displacement (C). If displacement is detected in main scanning direction, the machine changes the timing at
which writing starts in main scanning direction.

2-69
 Chapter 2

ITB ITB

A B

C
[1] [1] [3] [2]
[4] [5]
F-2-94
[1] Color displacement sensor A
[2] Detection pattern position before correction
[3] Detection pattern position after correction
[4] Before correction
[5] After correction

2. Sample
The following is a timing chart depicting a delay in the writing of an image in main scanning direction:

BD signal VDO signal

[1]

[3]

[2]
F-2-95
[1] Before correctionAfter correction
[2] After correction
[3] advances timing (specifically, the interval between the output of the BD signal and that of the video signal is reduced)

C. Sub Scanning Write Start Correction

1. Particulars of Control
The machine forms a sub scanning position detection pattern of each color on the ITB, and compares the measurement (A) against the reference value (B) stored
in the DC controller to detect the displacement (C) of each color. If the result indicates the presence of color displacement in sub scanning direction, the machine
varies the timing at which writing starts in sub scanning direction.

2-70
 Chapter 2

ITB ITB

B
A
[2] C

[3]
[1] [4] [1] [5]
F-2-96
[1] Color displacement sensor A
[2] Detection pattern position after correction
[3] Detection pattern position before correction
[4] Before correction
[5] After correction

2. Specific Example
The following is a timing chart depicting a delay in image writing in sub scanning direction:

TOP signal VDO signal

[1]

[3]

[2]
F-2-97
[1] Before correction
[2] After correction
[3] Advances the timing (specifically, the interval between the output of the TOP signal and that of the video signal is reduced)

The machine uses Y as the reference when measuring color displacement and, therefore, does not make correction for the reference color.

D. Main Scanning Magnification Correction

1. Particulars of Control
The machine forms a main scanning magnification detection pattern of each color on the left and right edges of the ITB. Thereafter, it uses the difference between
the measurement (A) taken at the left edge and the measurement (B) taken at the right edge to detect the degree of magnification (C) of each color. If there is a
difference in main scanning direction, the machine increases the number of pixels in main scanning direction.

2-71
 Chapter 2

ITB ITB

A B A

[3] [4]
[1] [5] [2] [1] [6] [2]

F-2-98
[1] Color displacement sensor A
[2] Color displacement sensor B
[3] Detection pattern position before correction
[4] Detection pattern position after correction
[5] Before correction
[6] After correction

2. Specific Example
The following is the flow of operation used in the event that the magnification in main scanning direction is 10 dots fewer than specified for an A4 vertical print
(210 mm). Specifically, the machine adds 160 image units (each being a 1/16 of a dot) to the image data representing a single line.

1 line
about 5000 reference pixels

A4 (vertical)

Short by
10 dots
Result of measurement
4990 dots

Before correction

1 pixel (= 1 dot)
1/16-of-a-dot
pixels

After correction

Insert 160 1/16-of-a-dot pixels

F-2-99

2.4.3.18 ATVC Control

0016-5365

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine executes ATVC control to determine the best transfer bias for use when moving toner from the photosensitive drum to the ITB and then from the ITB
to paper. This control may be either of the following 2: primary transfer ATVC and secondary transfer ATVC.

2-72
 Chapter 2

[1]

[2]

Laser Scanner Unit

[4] [3]

HVT2
ROOM_TEMP2

ROOM_TEMP1

TR1S_BK
TR1S_M
TR1S_C
TR1S_Y

TR2S
D-CON
F-2-100
[1] Primary transfer roller
[2] Secondary transfer outside roller
[3] Machine inside environment sensor
[4] Machine outside environment sensor

A. Primary Transfer ATVC

The machine executes primary transfer ATVC when determining the primary transfer bias used to ensure the target transfer current level for transfer.

1. Start-Up Conditions
- at power-on
- when the drum cartridge is replaced with a new one
- during initial rotation
- during post-rotation executed every 1000 prints
- during recovery from a sleep state
- during execution of calibration

2. Particulars of Control
T-2-9

Sequence Item Description

Applying the primary transfer bias A specific bias is applied to the primary transfer roller, and HVT2 is used to detect the
1 level of current for feedback to the DC controller.

Monitoring the machine inside environment sensor The DC controller monitors the output of the machine inside environment sensor.
2

Determining the primary transfer bias The DC controller determines the best primary transfer bias for individual colors based
on the foregoing 3 sets of data.
3

B. Secondary Transfer ATVC

The machine executes secondary transfer ATVC when determining the secondary transfer bias so that the target transfer current may be obtained for transfer.

1. Start-Up Conditions
- at power-on
- when the drum cartridge is replaced with a new one
- during initial rotation
- during post-rotation executed every 1000 prints
- during recovery from sleep
- during execution of calibration

2. Particulars of Control
T-2-10

Sequence Item Description

Applying the secondary transfer bias A specific bias is applied to the secondary transfer roller, and HVT2 is used to detect
the level of current for feedback to the DC controller.
1

2-73
 Chapter 2

Sequence Item Description

Monitoring the machine outside environment sensor The DC controller computes the secondary transfer bias correction value with
reference to the output of the compensatory environment sensor (i.e., the degree of
2
moisture in paper) and print job information (i.e., paper type, 1st/2nd side).

Determining the secondary transfer bias The DC controller determines the best secondary transfer bias with reference to the
3 secondary transfer current feedback and the secondary transfer bias correction value.

2.4.4 Toner Cartridge

2.4.4.1 Overview
0008-7160

LBP5960

The machine uses 4 toner cartridges (Y, M, C, Bk), each consisting of toner and a stirring plate and fitted under the cartridge cover.

The hopper assembly is found under the toner cartridge, and it is made up of a mixing plate, toner supply feedscrew, and toner transport feedscrew.
The following is the path used to supply toner:
When a toner cartridge is fitted in the machine, the toner is moved to the hopper assembly, which supplies the drum cartridge with toner at such times as needed.
The following 6 electrical loads are associated with the toner path:

- motor: 2 types (toner supply motor, development motor)

- sensor: 3 types (toner supply amount sensor, toner cartridge cover sensor, toner level sensor)
- clutch: 1 type (developing cylinder clutch)

V-CON

D-CON

T-CRG

PS11

[1]
M8 11
M2 3
[2]

TS1 TS4 CL1 4

[4]

PS3 PS6

[3]
D-CRG

F-2-101
[1] Stirring plate
[2] Mixing plate
[3] Toner supply feedscrew
[4] Toner transport feedscrew
M2 through M3: development motor
M8 through M11: toner supply motor
CL1 through CL4: developing cylinder clutch
PS3 through PS6: toner supply amount sensor
PS11: toner cartridge cover sensor
TS1 through TS4: toner level sensor (piezoelectric sensor)
T-CRG: toner cartridge
D-CRG: drum cartridge

2.4.4.2 Detecting the Presence/Absence of the Toner Cartridge

0008-2828

LBP5960

The presence/absence of the toner cartridge is detected by the DC controller with reference to the toner cartridge cover sensor (PS11).
The DC controller monitors the sensor flag mounted behind the toner cartridge cover using PS11 for detection of the toner cartridge.
A storage space is found on the bottom surface of the toner cartridge cover, housing individual toner cartridges. In the absence of a toner cartridge in the space, the

2-74
 Chapter 2

bar is lifted, preventing the toner cartridge cover from closing.

When the following conditions exist, all bars will be inside the machine, thus permitting the toner cartridge cover to be closed. When the cover is closed, the sensor
flag behind the cover blocks the light of PS11 to change the output of PS11. As a result, the DC controller will assume the presence of the toner cartridge. (See Note.)
The machine executes this sequence of detection when it is turned on or when the toner cartridge cover is opened/closed.

Conditions Used to Indicate the Presence of the Toner Cartridge

- all toner cartridges are fitted in place.
- the set levers of all toner cartridges are closed.
(The following shows the set lever of the C toner cartridge being open.)

[2]
Lever Open Lever Close
[3]
PS11

Y [1] [3] [2] [1] [3]

M [2]
[4] [4]
C
BK
[1]
PS11 PS11
T-CRG T-CRG
H L
[4]

F-2-102
[1] Toner cartridge cover
[2] Sensor flag
[3] Set lever
[4] Bar
T-CRG: toner cartridge
PS11: toner cartridge cover sensor

There is only 1 toner cartridge cover sensor. As such, the detection will be limited to whether all cartridges are in place, not detecting the presence/absence of in-
dividual cartridges.

2.4.4.3 Overview
0016-5367

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine uses 4 toner cartridges (Y, M, C, Bk), each consisting of toner and a stirring plate and fitted under the cartridge cover.
The hopper assembly is found under the toner cartridge, and it is made up of a mixing plate, toner supply feedscrew, and toner transport feedscrew.
The following is the path used to supply toner:
When a toner cartridge is fitted in the machine, the toner is moved to the hopper assembly, which supplies the drum cartridge with toner at such times as needed.
The following 6 electrical loads are associated with the toner path:

- motor: 2 types (toner supply motor, development motor)

- sensor: 3 types (toner supply amount sensor, toner cartridge cover sensor, toner level sensor)
- clutch: 1 type (developing cylinder clutch)

2-75
 Chapter 2

V-CON

D-CON

T-CRG

PS11

[1]
M8 11
M2 3
[2]

TS1 TS4 CL1 4

[4]

PS3 PS6

[3]
D-CRG

F-2-103
[1] Stirring plate
[2] Mixing plate
[3] Toner supply feedscrew
[4] Toner transport feedscrew
M2 through M3: development motor
M8 through M11: toner supply motor
CL1 through CL4: developing cylinder clutch
PS3 through PS6: toner supply amount sensor
PS11: toner cartridge cover sensor
TS1 through TS4: toner level sensor (piezoelectric sensor)
T-CRG: toner cartridge
D-CRG: drum cartridge

2.4.4.4 Supplying Toner

0008-5612

LBP5960
The machine forwards toner of individual colors to the drum cartridge by way of the hopper assembly.
The supply path may be from the toner cartridge to the hopper assembly ("hopper supply") or from the hopper assembly to the drum cartridge ("drum supply").

In the first step, i.e., "hopper supply," toner inside the cartridge drops into the hopper assembly because of its own weight when the toner cartridge is fitted in the
machine.
To make sure the toner remaining inside the cartridge also drops into the hopper assembly, the machine rotates the toner supply motor (M8 through M11) clockwise
(CW) after "drum supply," thus rotating the stirring plate to scrape off the toner sticking to the inner side of the cartridge.

In the next step, i.e., "drum supply," the toner supply motor (M8 through M11), development motor (M2 and M3), and developing cylinder clutch (CL1 through
CL4) are brought into play: the toner supply motor (M8 through M11) is rotated counterclockwise (CCW) so as to drive the mixing plate and the toner supply
feedscrew, thus moving the toner from the hopper assembly to the toner transport feedscrew. At this time, the developing cylinder clutch (CL1 through CL4) goes
on, and the development motor (M2 and M3) rotates clockwise. As a result, the toner transport feedscrew rotates to move the toner to the drum cartridge.
The operation of all these electrical loads is controlled by the DC controller. The DC controller uses the result of ATR control to compute the amount of toner for
individual colors. The DC controller then identifies specific amounts of toner for individual colors, and supplies the amounts to their respective drum cartridges.

2-76
 Chapter 2

V-CON

D-CON

T-CRG [6] [7] [8] [9]

[1]
CW

M8 11
M2 3
[2]
CCW [5]
CL1 4
CCW

[3] CW

PS3 PS6
D-CRG
[4]

F-2-104
[1] Stirring plate
[2] Mixing plate
[3] Sensor flag
[4] Toner supply feedscrew
[5] Toner transport feedscrew
[6] Toner supply motor drive signal
[7] Toner supply motor error detection signal
[8] Development motor drive signal
[9] Development motor error detection signal
M2 and M3: development motor
M8 through M11: toner supply motor
CL1 through CL4: developing cylinder clutch
PS3 through PS6: toner supply amount sensor
PS3 through PS6: toner supply amount sensor
T-CRG: toner cartridge
D-CRG: drum cartridge

The machine is equipped with toner supply amount sensors (PS3 through PS6) to make sure the correct amounts of toner are supplied at all times.
A sensor flag is mounted to the shaft of the supply feedscrew and is used in combination with a sensor; the flag is made to move back and forth by the drive of the
toner supply motor. While the flag makes a round trip, the DC controller monitors the output of the sensor while driving the toner supply motor, stopping it when
a specific amount has been supplied, thereby ensuring that the exact amount of toner is supplied.
While toner is being supplied, the DC controller monitors the output of the sensor while driving the toner supply motor, stopping it when the exact amount has been
supplied.

The following is a timing chart depicting when 4 A4 full-color prints are made (with an image ratio of 40%):

[1] [2]

PS3 PS6
CCW CW
M8 M11

M2 M3

CL1 CL4

250ms 250ms 250ms 250ms 100ms 500ms

F-2-105
[1] Drum supply
[2] Hopper supply
PS3 through PS6: toner supply amount sensor
M8 through M6: toner supply amount motor
M2 and M3: developing motor
CL1 through CL4: developing cylinder clutch

E025-0000: Y developing assembly supply error

E025-0001: M developing assembly supply error
E025-0002: C developing assembly supply error
E025-0003: Bk developing assembly supply error
Any of the foregoing errors is identified when there is no change in the output of a specific sensor (PS3 through PS6) used for a particular developing assembly.

Reference:
While toner is being supplied, the toner supply motor (M8 through M11) is rotating counterclockwise (CCW). In other words, if all is normal, the toner supply
feedscrew will rotate, thus causing the output of PS3 through PS6 to change.

2-77
 Chapter 2

E025-0000: Y hopper supply error

E025-0001: M hopper supply error
E025-0002: C hopper supply error
E025-0003: Bk hopper supply error
Any of the foregoing errors will be identified in response to a change in the output of a specific sensor (PS3 through PS6) of a specific developing assembly.

Reference:
If all is normal, the toner supply motor (M8 through M11) rotates clockwise (CW). If something goes wrong and the motor rotates counterclockwise (CCW), how-
ever, the toner supply feedscrew will rotate to cause a change in the output of PS3 through (with the machine assuming malfunction of the toner supply motor).

E021-0000: Y/M development motor error

E021-0001: C/Bk development motor error
Any of the foregoing errors will be identified if a motor ready state fails to occur 3 sec or more after the start of the development motor.

E021-0100: Y/M development motor error

E021-0101: C/Bk development motor error
Any of the foregoing errors will be identified if a motor ready state remains for 3 sec or more while the development motor is at rest.

2.4.4.5 Detecting the Presence/Absence of the Toner Cartridge

0016-5368

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The presence/absence of the toner cartridge is detected by the DC controller with reference to the toner cartridge cover sensor (PS11).
The DC controller monitors the sensor flag mounted behind the toner cartridge cover using PS11 for detection of the toner cartridge.
A storage space is found on the bottom surface of the toner cartridge cover, housing individual toner cartridges. In the absence of a toner cartridge in the space, the
bar is lifted, preventing the toner cartridge cover from closing.
When the following conditions exist, all bars will be inside the machine, thus permitting the toner cartridge cover to be closed. When the cover is closed, the sensor
flag behind the cover blocks the light of PS11 to change the output of PS11. As a result, the DC controller will assume the presence of the toner cartridge. (See Note.)
The machine executes this sequence of detection when it is turned on or when the toner cartridge cover is opened/closed.

Conditions Used to Indicate the Presence of the Toner Cartridge

- all toner cartridges are fitted in place.
- the set levers of all toner cartridges are closed.
(The following shows the set lever of the C toner cartridge being open.)

[2]
Lever Open Lever Close
[3]
PS11

Y [1] [3] [2] [1] [3]

M [2]
[4] [4]
C
BK
[1]
PS11 PS11
T-CRG T-CRG
H L
[4]

F-2-106
[1] Toner cartridge cover
[2] Sensor flag
[3] Set lever
[4] Bar
T-CRG: toner cartridge
PS11: toner cartridge cover sensor

There is only 1 toner cartridge cover sensor. As such, the detection will be limited to whether all cartridges are in place, not detecting the presence/absence of in-
dividual cartridges.

2.4.4.6 Supplying Toner

0016-5369

LBP5970 / LBP5975
The machine forwards toner of individual colors to the drum cartridge by way of the hopper assembly.
The supply path may be from the toner cartridge to the hopper assembly ("hopper supply") or from the hopper assembly to the drum cartridge ("drum supply").

In the first step, i.e., "hopper supply," toner inside the cartridge drops into the hopper assembly because of its own weight when the toner cartridge is fitted in the
machine.

2-78
 Chapter 2

To make sure the toner remaining inside the cartridge also drops into the hopper assembly, the machine rotates the toner supply motor (M8 through M11) clockwise
(CW) after "drum supply," thus rotating the stirring plate to scrape off the toner sticking to the inner side of the cartridge.

In the next step, i.e., "drum supply," the toner supply motor (M8 through M11), development motor (M2 and M3), and developing cylinder clutch (CL1 through
CL4) are brought into play: the toner supply motor (M8 through M11) is rotated counterclockwise (CCW) so as to drive the mixing plate and the toner supply
feedscrew, thus moving the toner from the hopper assembly to the toner transport feedscrew. At this time, the developing cylinder clutch (CL1 through CL4) goes
on, and the development motor (M2 and M3) rotates clockwise. As a result, the toner transport feedscrew rotates to move the toner to the drum cartridge.
The operation of all these electrical loads is controlled by the DC controller. The DC controller uses the result of ATR control to compute the amount of toner for
individual colors. The DC controller then identifies specific amounts of toner for individual colors, and supplies the amounts to their respective drum cartridges.

V-CON

D-CON

T-CRG [6] [7] [8] [9]

[1]
CW

M8 11
M2 3
[2]
CCW [5]
CL1 4
CCW

[3] CW

PS3 PS6
D-CRG
[4]

F-2-107
[1] Stirring plate
[2] Mixing plate
[3] Sensor flag
[4] Toner supply feedscrew
[5] Toner transport feedscrew
[6] Toner supply motor drive signal
[7] Toner supply motor error detection signal
[8] Development motor drive signal
[9] Development motor error detection signal
M2 and M3: development motor
M8 through M11: toner supply motor
CL1 through CL4: developing cylinder clutch
PS3 through PS6: toner supply amount sensor
PS3 through PS6: toner supply amount sensor
T-CRG: toner cartridge
D-CRG: drum cartridge

The machine is equipped with toner supply amount sensors (PS3 through PS6) to make sure the correct amounts of toner are supplied at all times.
A sensor flag is mounted to the shaft of the supply feedscrew and is used in combination with a sensor; the flag is made to move back and forth by the drive of the
toner supply motor. While the flag makes a round trip, the DC controller monitors the output of the sensor while driving the toner supply motor, stopping it when
a specific amount has been supplied, thereby ensuring that the exact amount of toner is supplied.
While toner is being supplied, the DC controller monitors the output of the sensor while driving the toner supply motor, stopping it when the exact amount has been
supplied.

The following is a timing chart depicting when 4 A4 full-color prints are made (with an image ratio of 40%):

[1] [2]

PS3 PS6
CCW CW
M8 M11

M2 M3

CL1 CL4

250ms 250ms 250ms 250ms 100ms 500ms

F-2-108
[1] Drum supply
[2] Hopper supply
PS3 through PS6: toner supply amount sensor
M8 through M6: toner supply amount motor
M2 and M3: developing motor
CL1 through CL4: developing cylinder clutch

E025-0000: Y developing assembly supply error

2-79
 Chapter 2

E025-0001: M developing assembly supply error

E025-0002: C developing assembly supply error
E025-0003: Bk developing assembly supply error
Any of the foregoing errors is identified when there is no change in the output of a specific sensor (PS3 through PS6) used for a particular developing assembly.

Reference:
While toner is being supplied, the toner supply motor (M8 through M11) is rotating counterclockwise (CCW). In other words, if all is normal, the toner supply
feedscrew will rotate, thus causing the output of PS3 through PS6 to change.

E025-0000: Y hopper supply error

E025-0001: M hopper supply error
E025-0002: C hopper supply error
E025-0003: Bk hopper supply error
Any of the foregoing errors will be identified in response to a change in the output of a specific sensor (PS3 through PS6) of a specific developing assembly.

Reference:
If all is normal, the toner supply motor (M8 through M11) rotates clockwise (CW). If something goes wrong and the motor rotates counterclockwise (CCW), how-
ever, the toner supply feedscrew will rotate to cause a change in the output of PS3 through (with the machine assuming malfunction of the toner supply motor).

E021-0000: Y/M development motor error

E021-0001: C/Bk development motor error
Any of the foregoing errors will be identified if a motor ready state fails to occur 3 sec or more after the start of the development motor.

E021-0100: Y/M development motor error

E021-0101: C/Bk development motor error
Any of the foregoing errors will be identified if a motor ready state remains for 3 sec or more while the development motor is at rest.

2.4.4.7 Detecting the Level of Toner

0013-4211

LBP5960

The machine is designed to detect the level of toner inside the individual assemblies (colors) with reference to the following:
- video count
- piezoelectric sensor

When the power is turned on, toner cartridge cover is opened/closed, or during printing operation, the DC controller checks the level of toner; if, as a result, the
level is below a specific value, the controller issues any of the 2 types of messages (no-toner alert, no-toner) to the video controller. The following shows the rela-
tionship between levels and messages:
T-2-11

Message Description Level Reference

No-toner alert 5% video count

16X Have Toner Ready

No-toner 0% piezoelectric sensor

16X Replace Toner

2-80
 Chapter 2

V-CON

D-CON

T-CRG

[2]

[1]

TS1 TS4

D-CRG
F-2-109
[1] Hopper assembly
[2] Toner detection signal
TS1 through TS4: toner sensor (piezoelectric sensor)
D-CRG: drum cartridge
T-CRG: toner cartridge

Detection with Reference to the Video Count

The machine detects the level of toner inside the hopper by computing the amount of toner consumed for individual colors with reference to the video data arriving
from the video controller. The machine executes the detection when the level of remaining toner is between 100% and 5%, and the result is sent to the DC controller,
which in turn issues a no-toner alert to the video controller when the level falls to 5%.

The printer remains ready to make prints in a no-toner alert state.

Detection with Reference to the Piezoelectric Sensor

The machine uses a piezoelectric sensor (vibration type; TS1 through 4) arranged at the bottom of the hopper assembly to detect the presence/presence of toner
inside the hopper assembly. The machine executes the detection when the level of toner is 5% or less, and its result is sent to the DC controller, which in turn com-
municates to the video controller when the level of remaining toner reaches 0%.

The machine stops operation when the absence of toner is identified.

The timing at which a no-toner alert is issued may be varied over 4 levels in service mode (level of remaining toner between 5% and 20%; at time of shipment, 5%).
SERVICE MODE>OPTION GR.>T-LW-LVL (settings: 0=toner level 5%, 1=toner level 10%, 2=toner level 15%, 3=toner level 20%)

When a no-toner alert is issued, the machine may still be used to make as many as 300 color prints (or about 5000 mono prints) before it stops. (A4, image ratio of
5%)
These values, however, are for reference only, and vary depending on how the machine is used.

2.4.4.8 Detecting the Level of Toner

0016-5370

LBP5970 / LBP5975
The machine is designed to detect the level of toner inside the individual assemblies (colors) with reference to the following:
- video count
- piezoelectric sensor

When the power is turned on, toner cartridge cover is opened/closed, or during printing operation, the DC controller checks the level of toner; if, as a result, the
level is below a specific value, the controller issues any of the 2 types of messages (no-toner alert, no-toner) to the video controller. The following shows the rela-
tionship between levels and messages:
T-2-12

Message Description Level Reference

No-toner alert 5% video count

16X Have Toner Ready

No-toner 0% piezoelectric sensor

16X Replace Toner

2-81
 Chapter 2

V-CON

D-CON

T-CRG

[2]

[1]

TS1 TS4

D-CRG
F-2-110
[1] Hopper assembly
[2] Toner detection signal
TS1 through TS4: toner sensor (piezoelectric sensor)
D-CRG: drum cartridge
T-CRG: toner cartridge

Detection with Reference to the Video Count

The machine detects the level of toner inside the hopper by computing the amount of toner consumed for individual colors with reference to the video data arriving
from the video controller. The machine executes the detection when the level of remaining toner is between 100% and 5%, and the result is sent to the DC controller,
which in turn issues a no-toner alert to the video controller when the level falls to 5%.

The printer remains ready to make prints in a no-toner alert state.

Detection with Reference to the Piezoelectric Sensor

The machine uses a piezoelectric sensor (vibration type; TS1 through 4) arranged at the bottom of the hopper assembly to detect the presence/presence of toner
inside the hopper assembly. The machine executes the detection when the level of toner is 5% or less, and its result is sent to the DC controller, which in turn com-
municates to the video controller when the level of remaining toner reaches 0%.

The machine stops operation when the absence of toner is identified.

The timing at which a no-toner alert is issued may be varied over 4 levels in service mode (level of remaining toner between 5% and 20%; at time of shipment, 5%).
SERVICE MODE>OPTION GR.>T-LW-LVL (settings: 0=toner level 5%, 1=toner level 10%, 2=toner level 15%, 3=toner level 20%)

When a no-toner alert is issued, the machine may still be used to make as many as 300 color prints (or about 5000 mono prints) before it stops. (A4, image ratio of
5%)
These values, however, are for reference only, and vary depending on how the machine is used.

2.4.5 Drum Cartridge

2.4.5.1 Overview
0009-1303

LBP5960

The machine uses 4 drum cartridges (Y, M, C, Bk), each consisting of a drum, developing cylinder, primary charging roller, and carrier and housed under the ITB.

The machine supplies toner as follows:

The toner coming from the hopper assembly is moved to the toner transport feedscrew A of the drum cartridge; then, it is moved farther by the toner transport
feedscrew B while being mixed with carrier to reach the developing cylinder. During printing, a layer of toner is formed on top of the layer of carrier deposited on
the developing cylinder; the toner then jumps (toner projection) to the photosensitive drum for development.
The residual toner on the developing assembly after development is scraped off by the cleaning blade, and is moved by the waste toner feedscrew for collection
inside the waste toner case.

The following 3 types of electrical loads are associated with the supply path:
- motor: 2 types (development motor, drum/ITB motor)
- clutch: 1 type (developing sleeve clutch)

2-82
 Chapter 2

D-CON

[2]

M2 3
[1]

CL1 4

M1
Toner

[3]

[5] [4]

[6]
[7]
F-2-111
[1] Developing cylinder
[2] Photosensitive drum
[3] Waste toner feedscrew
[4] Primary charging roller
[5] Carrier
[6] Toner transport feedscrew A
[7] Toner transport feedscrew B
M1: drum/ITB motor
M2 and M3: development motor
CL1 through CL4: developing sleeve clutch

2.4.5.2 Detecting the Presence/Absence of the Drum Cartridge

0008-3892

LBP5960
The machine uses its DC controller to detect the presence/absence of a drum cartridge with reference to the primary charging AC bias detection signal (ANO_1).
The machine executes the detection when the power is turned on or when the front cover is closed, causing the DC controller to check the level of current of ANO_1
for individual drum cartridges.
If the result of detection indicates a level of the ANO_1 signal above a specific value, the DC controller will assume the absence of the cartridge in question, stopping
the machine operation and communicating a "no drum cartridge" state to the video controller.

[2]

[1]
Y
M
C
BK
ANO_1

PRI_AC

HVT1
ANO_1

PRI_AC

D-CON

F-2-112
[1] Primary charging roller
[2] Drum cartridge

2-83
 Chapter 2

2.4.5.3 Overview
0016-5371

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine uses 4 drum cartridges (Y, M, C, Bk), each consisting of a drum, developing cylinder, primary charging roller, and carrier and housed under the ITB.

The machine supplies toner as follows:

The toner coming from the hopper assembly is moved to the toner transport feedscrew A of the drum cartridge; then, it is moved farther by the toner transport
feedscrew B while being mixed with carrier to reach the developing cylinder. During printing, a layer of toner is formed on top of the layer of carrier deposited on
the developing cylinder; the toner then jumps (toner projection) to the photosensitive drum for development.
The residual toner on the developing assembly after development is scraped off by the cleaning blade, and is moved by the waste toner feedscrew for collection
inside the waste toner case.

The following 3 types of electrical loads are associated with the supply path:
- motor: 2 types (development motor, drum/ITB motor)
- clutch: 1 type (developing sleeve clutch)

D-CON

[2]

M2 3
[1]

CL1 4

M1
Toner

[3]

[5] [4]

[6]
[7]
F-2-113
[1] Developing cylinder
[2] Photosensitive drum
[3] Waste toner feedscrew
[4] Primary charging roller
[5] Carrier
[6] Toner transport feedscrew A
[7] Toner transport feedscrew B
M1: drum/ITB motor
M2 and M3: development motor
CL1 through CL4: developing sleeve clutch

2.4.5.4 Identifying a New/Old Drum Cartridge

0008-4561

LBP5960

The machine checks the drum cartridge to see if it is new or old, thus finding out how much it has been used.
The machine's cartridge is not equipped with a memory, thus requiring the drum counter reading retained by the printer side to be reset. If not reset, the memory
will cause the machine to wrongly identify the cartridge as being old.
In other words, the machine is likely to indicate the end of drum life even when it is new. To prevent such wrong identification, the machine relies on a fuse mounted
to the bottom of each drum cartridge. The CPU of the DC controller monitors the fuse detection signal (PCRG_NEW): if the signal is High, it will assume the
presence of a new drum, while assuming the presence of an old cartridge if the signal is Low.

If the CPU identifies the presence of a new cartridge, it will set up a new drum counter reading in EEPROM; at the same time, the old drum counter reading will
be stored in EEPROM for a backup.
When the newly replaced cartridge has made 100 prints, the CPU will assume that the cartridge is no longer new, and cause the output of the fuse cut signal
(PLS6_OUT) to go Low, thus cutting off the fuse of the new cartridge. The old drum counter reading will then be removed from EEPROM, with the machine in-
creasing the new drum counter reading for each print it makes.

2-84
 Chapter 2

D-CON +24V

IC9 +24V

IC4 CPU
Y D-CRG
ASIC1 PCRG_NEW_Y IC10 Fuse

+24V

M D-CRG
IC10 Fuse
PCRG_NEW_M
+24V

C D-CRG
PCRG_NEW_C IC10 Fuse
+24V

Bk D-CRG
IC10 Fuse
PCRG_NEW_K

+3.3V
PLS6_
OUT Q100

Q20

IC21
EEPROM

F-2-114
PCRG_NEW_X: X fuse detection signal (X indicating the color of the cartridge in question)
PLS6_OUT: fuse cut signal
X D-CRG: X drum cartridge (X indicating the color of the cartridge in question)
The following shows the timing at which the machine executes the detection and the flow of detection:

Timing of Detection
at power-on, after the front cover is opened/closed

Flow of Operation

2-85
 Chapter 2

Start

Detects presence/absence of
drum cartridge

No
Drum cartridges present? Indicates new drum cartridge message

Yes

Detects presence/absence of fuse

absent
Fuse of individual
drum cartridges present? Selects old drum counter

present End

Assumes presence of
new drum cartridge

Cuts fuse

Executes print job

Detects presence/absence of fuse

Increases new drum counter reading

No
Fuse cut?
No
Drum counter reading at 100?
Yes

Yes Resets old drum counter

End

F-2-115

2.4.5.5 Detecting the Presence/Absence of the Drum Cartridge

0016-5372

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine uses its DC controller to detect the presence/absence of a drum cartridge with reference to the primary charging AC bias detection signal (ANO_1).
The machine executes the detection when the power is turned on or when the front cover is closed, causing the DC controller to check the level of current of ANO_1
for individual drum cartridges.
If the result of detection indicates a level of the ANO_1 signal above a specific value, the DC controller will assume the absence of the cartridge in question, stopping
the machine operation and communicating a "no drum cartridge" state to the video controller.

2-86
 Chapter 2

[2]

[1]
Y
M
C
BK

ANO_1

PRI_AC
HVT1
ANO_1

PRI_AC
D-CON

F-2-116
[1] Primary charging roller
[2] Drum cartridge

2.4.5.6 Detecting the Life of the Drum

0013-4212

LBP5960
The machine checks the following 2 types of data to detect the life of the drum:
- time length of drum rotation + time length of primary charging
- number of prints

The DC controller refers to the foregoing data when the power is turned on or when the front door is opened/closed; as a result, if any of them is above a specific
value, the DC controller communicates to the video controller any of the following 3 messages: drum life alert, drum life 1, drum life 2.
The following shows the relationship between drum life and message:
T-2-13

Message Description Life

Drum life alert 98 X Have Drum Ready 95 %
Drum life 1 E0 X Replace Drum 100 %
Drum life 2 EF X Replace Drum 110 %

2-87
 Chapter 2

V-CON

[1]

D-CON

[2] [4] [3]

HVT1

M1

[5]
F-2-117
[1] Number of prints
[2] Primary charging time length
[3] Drum rotation time length
[4] Photosensitive drum
[5] Primary charging roller
M1: drum/ITB motor

In the case of a drum life alert or drum life 1, the machine remains ready for print jobs.
In the case of drum life 2, the machine stops operation.
The machine may still be able to make as many as 4000 prints from when drum life 1 occurs to when it stops operation (A4, image ratio of 5%). (The value, however,
is an estimate only, and is subject to change depending on how it is used.)
The drum life counter will automatically be reset when the drum cartridge is replaced with a new one.

2.4.5.7 Opening/Closing the Toner Shutter

0009-8856

LBP5960
The machine is fitted with 2 toner shutters (toner supply shutter, waste toner discharge shutter) to prevent spilling of toner from the toner supply inlet or the toner
discharge outlet otherwise possibly occurring when the drum cartridge is removed/fitted.
These shutters operate 2 ways (opening and closing): they open when the front cover is closed, and the operation is automatic, with the DC controller rotating the
pickup motor counterclockwise (CCW); or they close when operated manually.
To detect the position of these 2 shutters, the machine uses a shutter open/closed sensor (PS13, 14) for the individual shutters. The DC controller checks the outputs
of these 2 sensors when the shutters open; if the shutters are found to be closed, the DC controller drives the pickup motor counterclockwise (CCW) to open them.

2-88
 Chapter 2

D-CON

[1] T-CRG [2] [3]

M5

PS14

D-CRG

PS13

[4]
F-2-118
[1] Pickup motor drive signal
[2] Toner supply shutter open/closed detection signal
[3] Waste toner discharge shutter open/closed detection signal
[4] Waste toner case
T-CRG: toner cartridge
D-CRG: drum cartridge
PS13: waste toner discharge shutter open/closed sensor
PS14: toner supply shutter open/closed sensor
M5: pickup motor

The following shows the relationship between the state (open/closed) of the shutter and the outputs of the shutter open/closed sensors:

relationship between shutter and opening/closing operation

T-2-14

Opening Closing

Toner supply shutter auto manual *1

Waste toner discharge shutter auto manual *2

*1: The toner supply shutter closes when the drum cartridge lock releasing lever is in lock position.
*2: The waste toner discharge shutter closes when the front cover is opened.

relationship between shutter and shutter open/closed sensor

T-2-15

Waste toner shutter open/closed sensor

Toner shutter open/closed sensor (PS14)
(PS13)

Toner supply shutter ----- on *1

Waste toner discharge shutter detected *1 -----

*1: When the shutter is open, the sensor output is High.

- E990-0000 (waste toner transport shutter error)

Occurs if the output of PS13 (waste toner shutter open/closed sensor) does not go Low even when the pickup motor has been operated for 5 sec.
- E990-0001 (toner supply shutter error)
Occurs if the output of PS14 (toner supply shutter open/closed sensor) does not go Low even when the pickup motor has been operated for 7.5 sec.

2-89
 Chapter 2

2.4.5.8 Identifying a New/Old Drum Cartridge

0016-5374

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine checks the drum cartridge to see if it is new or old, thus finding out how much it has been used.
The machine's cartridge is not equipped with a memory, thus requiring the drum counter reading retained by the printer side to be reset. If not reset, the memory
will cause the machine to wrongly identify the cartridge as being old.
In other words, the machine is likely to indicate the end of drum life even when it is new. To prevent such wrong identification, the machine relies on a fuse mounted
to the bottom of each drum cartridge. The CPU of the DC controller monitors the fuse detection signal (PCRG_NEW): if the signal is High, it will assume the
presence of a new drum, while assuming the presence of an old cartridge if the signal is Low.

If the CPU identifies the presence of a new cartridge, it will set up a new drum counter reading in EEPROM; at the same time, the old drum counter reading will
be stored in EEPROM for a backup.
When the newly replaced cartridge has made 100 prints, the CPU will assume that the cartridge is no longer new, and cause the output of the fuse cut signal
(PLS6_OUT) to go Low, thus cutting off the fuse of the new cartridge. The old drum counter reading will then be removed from EEPROM, with the machine in-
creasing the new drum counter reading for each print it makes.

D-CON +24V

IC9 +24V

IC4 CPU
Y D-CRG
ASIC1 PCRG_NEW_Y IC10 Fuse

+24V

M D-CRG
IC10 Fuse
PCRG_NEW_M
+24V

C D-CRG
PCRG_NEW_C IC10 Fuse
+24V

Bk D-CRG
IC10 Fuse
PCRG_NEW_K

+3.3V
PLS6_
OUT Q100

Q20

IC21
EEPROM

F-2-119
PCRG_NEW_X: X fuse detection signal (X indicating the color of the cartridge in question)
PLS6_OUT: fuse cut signal
X D-CRG: X drum cartridge (X indicating the color of the cartridge in question)
The following shows the timing at which the machine executes the detection and the flow of detection:

Timing of Detection
at power-on, after the front cover is opened/closed

Flow of Operation

2-90
 Chapter 2

Start

Detects presence/absence of
drum cartridge

No
Drum cartridges present? Indicates new drum cartridge message

Yes

Detects presence/absence of fuse

absent
Fuse of individual
drum cartridges present? Selects old drum counter

present End

Assumes presence of
new drum cartridge

Cuts fuse

Executes print job

Detects presence/absence of fuse

Increases new drum counter reading

No
Fuse cut?
No
Drum counter reading at 100?
Yes

Yes Resets old drum counter

End

F-2-120

2.4.5.9 Detecting the Life of the Drum

0016-5375

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine checks the following 2 types of data to detect the life of the drum:
- time length of drum rotation + time length of primary charging
- number of prints

The DC controller refers to the foregoing data when the power is turned on or when the front door is opened/closed; as a result, if any of them is above a specific
value, the DC controller communicates to the video controller any of the following 3 messages: drum life alert, drum life 1, drum life 2.
The following shows the relationship between drum life and message:
T-2-16

Message Description Life

Drum life alert 98 X Have Drum Ready 95 %
Drum life 1 E0 X Replace Drum 100 %
Drum life 2 EF X Replace Drum 110 %

2-91
 Chapter 2

V-CON

[1]

D-CON

[2] [4] [3]

HVT1

M1

[5]
F-2-121
[1] Number of prints
[2] Primary charging time length
[3] Drum rotation time length
[4] Photosensitive drum
[5] Primary charging roller
M1: drum/ITB motor

In the case of a drum life alert or drum life 1, the machine remains ready for print jobs.
In the case of drum life 2, the machine stops operation.
The machine may still be able to make as many as 4000 prints from when drum life 1 occurs to when it stops operation (A4, image ratio of 5%). (The value, however,
is an estimate only, and is subject to change depending on how it is used.)
The drum life counter will automatically be reset when the drum cartridge is replaced with a new one.

2.4.5.10 Opening/Closing the Toner Shutter

0016-5376

LBP5970 / LBP5975
The machine is fitted with 2 toner shutters (toner supply shutter, waste toner discharge shutter) to prevent spilling of toner from the toner supply inlet or the toner
discharge outlet otherwise possibly occurring when the drum cartridge is removed/fitted.
These shutters operate 2 ways (opening and closing): they open when the front cover is closed, and the operation is automatic, with the DC controller rotating the
pickup motor counterclockwise (CCW); or they close when operated manually.
To detect the position of these 2 shutters, the machine uses a shutter open/closed sensor (PS13, 14) for the individual shutters. The DC controller checks the outputs
of these 2 sensors when the shutters open; if the shutters are found to be closed, the DC controller drives the pickup motor counterclockwise (CCW) to open them.

2-92
 Chapter 2

D-CON

[1] T-CRG [2] [3]

M5

PS14

D-CRG

PS13

[4]
F-2-122
[1] Pickup motor drive signal
[2] Toner supply shutter open/closed detection signal
[3] Waste toner discharge shutter open/closed detection signal
[4] Waste toner case
T-CRG: toner cartridge
D-CRG: drum cartridge
PS13: waste toner discharge shutter open/closed sensor
PS14: toner supply shutter open/closed sensor
M5: pickup motor

The following shows the relationship between the state (open/closed) of the shutter and the outputs of the shutter open/closed sensors:

relationship between shutter and opening/closing operation

T-2-17

Opening Closing

Toner supply shutter auto manual *1

Waste toner discharge shutter auto manual *2

*1: The toner supply shutter closes when the drum cartridge lock releasing lever is in lock position.
*2: The waste toner discharge shutter closes when the front cover is opened.

relationship between shutter and shutter open/closed sensor

T-2-18

Waste toner shutter open/closed sensor

Toner shutter open/closed sensor (PS14)
(PS13)

Toner supply shutter ----- on *1

Waste toner discharge shutter detected *1 -----

*1: When the shutter is open, the sensor output is High.

- E990-0000 (waste toner transport shutter error)

Occurs if the output of PS13 (waste toner shutter open/closed sensor) does not go Low even when the pickup motor has been operated for 5 sec.
- E990-0001 (toner supply shutter error)
Occurs if the output of PS14 (toner supply shutter open/closed sensor) does not go Low even when the pickup motor has been operated for 7.5 sec.

2-93
 Chapter 2

2.4.6 Transfer Unit

2.4.6.1 Overview
0008-5043

LBP5960

The transfer assembly is divided into the primary transfer block and the secondary transfer block.
The primary transfer block serves to move toner from the photosensitive drum to the ITB, while the secondary transfer block functions to move toner from the ITB
to print paper.
The transfer assembly consists of the following components: ITB cleaning unit, ITB, primary transfer roller, primary transfer roller, secondary toner inside roller,
tension roller, secondary transfer outside roller.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10]

[11] [12]
F-2-123
[1] ITB cleaning unit
[2] ITB cleaning feedscrew
[3] ITB cleaning blade
[4] Tension roller
[5] Primary transfer roller
[6] ITB
[7] Idler roller
[8] Secondary transfer inside roller
[9] Secondary transfer outside roller
[10] Secondary transfer static eliminator
[11] Primary transfer block
[12] Secondary transfer block

2.4.6.2 Primary Transfer Block

0008-5160

LBP5960

The primary transfer block uses the drum/ITB motor (M1) to rotate the secondary transfer roller and the ITB cleaning feedscrew. The drive of M1 is controlled by
the DC controller.
The following describes the major control mechanism associated with the primary transfer block:

D-CON
[4]

M1
[1]

[2]
[3]

F-2-124
[1] ITB cleaning feedscrew
[2] ITB
[3] Secondary transfer inside roller
[4] Drum/ITB motor drive signal
M1: drum/ITB motor

2.4.6.3 Overview
0016-5377

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The transfer assembly is divided into the primary transfer block and the secondary transfer block.
The primary transfer block serves to move toner from the photosensitive drum to the ITB, while the secondary transfer block functions to move toner from the ITB
to print paper.
The transfer assembly consists of the following components: ITB cleaning unit, ITB, primary transfer roller, primary transfer roller, secondary toner inside roller,
tension roller, secondary transfer outside roller.

2-94
 Chapter 2

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10]

[11] [12]
F-2-125
[1] ITB cleaning unit
[2] ITB cleaning feedscrew
[3] ITB cleaning blade
[4] Tension roller
[5] Primary transfer roller
[6] ITB
[7] Idler roller
[8] Secondary transfer inside roller
[9] Secondary transfer outside roller
[10] Secondary transfer static eliminator
[11] Primary transfer block
[12] Secondary transfer block

2.4.6.4 ITB Soiling Removal Sequence Control

0008-5045

LBP5960

The machine uses this mechanism to remove fingerprints left on the ITB by the user while removing a jam. The mechanism is controlled by the DC controller,
which removes the fingerprints from the ITB in response to a command initiated by the user:

[1] [2]

ITB
TR2

Laser Scanner Unit

HVT2
VDO

D-CON

V-CON
F-2-126
[1] ITB cleaning blade
[2] Black belt

Particulars of Operation
1) The machine forms a Bk halftone pattern on the ITB over the length of the belt.
2) The machine executes ITB idle rotation. (about 45 sec)
As a result, the ITB cleaning blade removes the Bk band together with the fingerprints from the ITB. (The waste toner is collected in the cleaning unit.)
3) The machine repeats the foregoing steps (1 and 2) 3times.
4) The machine executes secondary transfer outside roller cleaning (Notes).

2-95
 Chapter 2

To prevent soiling of the back of print paper, the machine applies a negative bias (TR2 signal) to the secondary transfer outside roller, thus creating a potential
between ITB and roller; as a result, the negatively charged residual toner and the secondary transfer outside roller is drawn back to the ITB, where it is scraped off
by the cleaning blade for collection in the ITB cleaning unit.

2.4.6.5 Primary Transfer Block

0016-5378

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The primary transfer block uses the drum/ITB motor (M1) to rotate the secondary transfer roller and the ITB cleaning feedscrew. The drive of M1 is controlled by
the DC controller.
The following describes the major control mechanism associated with the primary transfer block:

D-CON
[4]

M1
[1]

[2]
[3]

F-2-127
[1] ITB cleaning feedscrew
[2] ITB
[3] Secondary transfer inside roller
[4] Drum/ITB motor drive signal
M1: drum/ITB motor

2.4.6.6 ITB Soiling Removal Sequence Control

0016-5379

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine uses this mechanism to remove fingerprints left on the ITB by the user while removing a jam. The mechanism is controlled by the DC controller,
which removes the fingerprints from the ITB in response to a command initiated by the user:

[1] [2]

ITB
TR2

Laser Scanner Unit

HVT2
VDO

D-CON

V-CON
F-2-128

2-96
 Chapter 2

[1] ITB cleaning blade

[2] Black belt

Particulars of Operation
1) The machine forms a Bk halftone pattern on the ITB over the length of the belt.
2) The machine executes ITB idle rotation. (about 45 sec)
As a result, the ITB cleaning blade removes the Bk band together with the fingerprints from the ITB. (The waste toner is collected in the cleaning unit.)
3) The machine repeats the foregoing steps (1 and 2) 3times.
4) The machine executes secondary transfer outside roller cleaning (Notes).

To prevent soiling of the back of print paper, the machine applies a negative bias (TR2 signal) to the secondary transfer outside roller, thus creating a potential
between ITB and roller; as a result, the negatively charged residual toner and the secondary transfer outside roller is drawn back to the ITB, where it is scraped off
by the cleaning blade for collection in the ITB cleaning unit.

2.4.6.7 Secondary Transfer Block

0008-5170

LBP5960

The secondary transfer block uses the drum/ITB motor (M1) as the source of drive to operate the secondary transfer roller. (M1 is controlled by the DC controller.)

D-CON
[2]

M1

[1]
F-2-129
[1] Secondary transfer outside roller
[2] Drum/ITB motor drive signal
M1: drum/ITB motor

2.4.6.8 Secondary Transfer Block

0016-5380

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The secondary transfer block uses the drum/ITB motor (M1) as the source of drive to operate the secondary transfer roller. (M1 is controlled by the DC controller.)

D-CON
[2]

M1

[1]
F-2-130
[1] Secondary transfer outside roller
[2] Drum/ITB motor drive signal
M1: drum/ITB motor

2.4.7 Waste Toner Collection

2.4.7.1 Collecting the Waste Toner

0008-5609

LBP5960

The machine collects waste toner discharged from the 2 types of cleaning units (ITB cleaning unit, drum cleaning units of individual colors) for collection in the
waste toner case.
When the power is turned on or for each print job, the DC controller drives the waste toner transport motor (M12) to rotate the feedscrew inside the waste toner
pipe, thereby moving the waste toner.
The waste toner pipe is connected to the discharge outlet of the cleaning unit. When M12 goes on, the waste toner collecting at the discharge outlets is moved
through the waste toner pipe for collection in the waste toner case.

2-97
 Chapter 2

D-CON

WASTETNR_MTR_ON
[1] [2]

WASTETNR_MTR_ERR
[3]

[5] [6]

M12

[7]

[4]

[8]
F-2-131
[1] ITB cleaning unit
[2] Waste toner discharge outlet
[3] Drum cleaning unit
[4] Waste toner discharge outlet
[5] Screw
[6] Waste toner pipe
[7] Waste toner case
[8] Waste toner
M12: waste toner transport motor

Waste Toner-Related Error Code

- E013-0000 (waste toner transport motor fault)
Occurs when an over-current (350 mA or more) has been detected about 0.1 sec after the motor is driven.
- E013-0001 (waste toner transport motor open circuit)
Occurs when an open circuit has been detected about 0.1 sec after the motor is driven.

2.4.7.2 Collecting the Waste Toner

0016-5381

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine collects waste toner discharged from the 2 types of cleaning units (ITB cleaning unit, drum cleaning units of individual colors) for collection in the
waste toner case.
When the power is turned on or for each print job, the DC controller drives the waste toner transport motor (M12) to rotate the feedscrew inside the waste toner
pipe, thereby moving the waste toner.
The waste toner pipe is connected to the discharge outlet of the cleaning unit. When M12 goes on, the waste toner collecting at the discharge outlets is moved
through the waste toner pipe for collection in the waste toner case.

2-98
 Chapter 2

D-CON

WASTETNR_MTR_ON
[1] [2]

WASTETNR_MTR_ERR
[3]

[5] [6]

M12

[7]

[4]

[8]
F-2-132
[1] ITB cleaning unit
[2] Waste toner discharge outlet
[3] Drum cleaning unit
[4] Waste toner discharge outlet
[5] Screw
[6] Waste toner pipe
[7] Waste toner case
[8] Waste toner
M12: waste toner transport motor

Waste Toner-Related Error Code

- E013-0000 (waste toner transport motor fault)
Occurs when an over-current (350 mA or more) has been detected about 0.1 sec after the motor is driven.
- E013-0001 (waste toner transport motor open circuit)
Occurs when an open circuit has been detected about 0.1 sec after the motor is driven.

2.4.7.3 Detecting the Level of Waste Toner

0013-4213

LBP5960

The machine executes the following 2 types of detection to find out the level of waste toner collected inside the waste toner case:
- detection by an optical sensor
- detection with reference to the waste toner count

The DC controller checks the result of these detection mechanisms when the power is turned on, when the front door is opened/closed, and for each print job. If it
finds that the level of waste toner is above a specific value, the DC controller issues to the video controller either of 2 messages (waste toner case full alert, waste
toner case full).
The following shows the relationship between messages and waste toner levels:
T-2-19

Message Description Waste toner level Reference

Waste toner case full alert Waste Toner Case Must Be Replaced Soon 80 % optical sensor

Waste toner case full E1 Replace Waste Toner Case 100 % Waste toner count

2-99
 Chapter 2

V-CON

[1]

D-CON

[2]

[3]

[4] UN6
F-2-133
[1] Waste toner count
[2] Waste toner case full alert detection signal
[3] Waste toner case
[4] Waste toner
UN6: waste toner sensor (optical sensor)

The following is a brief description of the foregoing types of detection:

detection by an optical sensor
The machine uses an optical sensor (UN6) mounted behind the waste toner case to check the amount of waste toner. The detection takes place when the level of
waste toner is between 0% and 80%, and the result is sent to the DC controller, which will issue a waste toner case full alert to the video controller when the result
indicates the level to be 80%.

Memo:
The sensor consists of a light-emitting segment (LED) and a light-receiving segment (PD).
When the level of waste toner is low, the light from the LED is received by the photodiode. When the level increases, on the other hand, the presence of waste toner
blocks the light from the LED, thus preventing reception of light by the photodiode, thus causing the output of the sensor to change from High to Low. The change
in the sensor output causes the DC controller to assume that the waste toner case is 80% full with waste toner.

[2] PD

LED
[1]

[3] [4] PD

LED

F-2-134
[1] Waste toner sensor (optical sensor)
[2] Small amount of waste toner
[3] Large amount of waste toner

2-100
 Chapter 2

[4] Waste toner

The machine remains ready to make prints even when a waste toner case full alert has been issued.

detection based on a waste toner counter reading

The machine refers to the image data from the video controller to compute the amount of waste toner collected in the waste toner case.
The machine executes detection when the waste toner case is 80% full (after a case full alert); the result is sent to the DC controller, which in turn communicates
to the video controller if the result of detection indicates that the case is 100% full.

The machine stops operation when the waste toner case becomes full.
The machine can make about 500 color prints (or about 1500 mono prints) from when a waste toner case full alert has been issued to when it stops operation. (A4,
image ratio of 5%)
These values, however, are for reference only and subject to change depending on how the machine is used.
The waste toner counter reading is automatically reset when the waste toner case is replaced.

Memo:
The machine has a mechanism to check the presence/absence of the waste toner case.
The machine makes a check using the waste toner case sensor (PS12) mounted to the side of the waste toner sensor.
The machine tires to find out if the toner case has been fitted in the machine by checking PS12 when the front cover is closed.

2.4.7.4 Preventing Spilling of Waste Toner

0013-0116

LBP5960
There has been a risk that the waste toner, collected and accumulated like a mountain in the container, may spill out of the container. In this machine, rotate the
screw inside the waste toner container periodically to level off the waste toner.

Startup timing
- At the last rotation/50 prints (Note: At continuous printing, stop the job at the 100th prints and perform the operation)
- At every last rotation after the waste toner full notice is given.
- At the last rotation/15 prints after the replacement of the waste toner box (until 5th operations) (Note: At continuous printing, stop the job at the 50th prints and
perform the operation)
- After the 1st job is completed at power-on

Operation
1) The registration motor drive signal is output for 2 sec from the DC controller.
2) The screw inside the waste toner container starts to rotate after the registration motor (M6) rotates in reverse for 2 sec.
3) With the rotation of the screw, the waste toner accumulated like a mountain in the container is leveled off.

D-CON

[1]

M6

[4]

[2]

[3]

[5]

[6] [7]
[3]

F-2-135
[1] Registration motor drive signal
[2] Waste toner container
[3] Waste toner
[4] Waste toner vibrating lever
[5] Protrusion
[6] Before leveling off
[7] After leveling off

2-101
 Chapter 2

2.4.7.5 Detecting the Level of Waste Toner

0016-5382

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine executes the following 2 types of detection to find out the level of waste toner collected inside the waste toner case:
- detection by an optical sensor
- detection with reference to the waste toner count

The DC controller checks the result of these detection mechanisms when the power is turned on, when the front door is opened/closed, and for each print job. If it
finds that the level of waste toner is above a specific value, the DC controller issues to the video controller either of 2 messages (waste toner case full alert, waste
toner case full).
The following shows the relationship between messages and waste toner levels:
T-2-20

Message Description Waste toner level Reference

Waste toner case full alert Waste Toner Case Must Be Replaced Soon 80 % optical sensor

Waste toner case full E1 Replace Waste Toner Case 100 % Waste toner count

V-CON

[1]

D-CON

[2]

[3]

[4] UN6
F-2-136
[1] Waste toner count
[2] Waste toner case full alert detection signal
[3] Waste toner case
[4] Waste toner
UN6: waste toner sensor (optical sensor)

The following is a brief description of the foregoing types of detection:

detection by an optical sensor
The machine uses an optical sensor (UN6) mounted behind the waste toner case to check the amount of waste toner. The detection takes place when the level of
waste toner is between 0% and 80%, and the result is sent to the DC controller, which will issue a waste toner case full alert to the video controller when the result
indicates the level to be 80%.

Memo:
The sensor consists of a light-emitting segment (LED) and a light-receiving segment (PD).
When the level of waste toner is low, the light from the LED is received by the photodiode. When the level increases, on the other hand, the presence of waste toner
blocks the light from the LED, thus preventing reception of light by the photodiode, thus causing the output of the sensor to change from High to Low. The change
in the sensor output causes the DC controller to assume that the waste toner case is 80% full with waste toner.

2-102
 Chapter 2

[2] PD

LED
[1]

[3] [4] PD

LED

F-2-137
[1] Waste toner sensor (optical sensor)
[2] Small amount of waste toner
[3] Large amount of waste toner
[4] Waste toner

The machine remains ready to make prints even when a waste toner case full alert has been issued.

detection based on a waste toner counter reading

The machine refers to the image data from the video controller to compute the amount of waste toner collected in the waste toner case.
The machine executes detection when the waste toner case is 80% full (after a case full alert); the result is sent to the DC controller, which in turn communicates
to the video controller if the result of detection indicates that the case is 100% full.

The machine stops operation when the waste toner case becomes full.
The machine can make about 500 color prints (or about 1500 mono prints) from when a waste toner case full alert has been issued to when it stops operation. (A4,
image ratio of 5%)
These values, however, are for reference only and subject to change depending on how the machine is used.
The waste toner counter reading is automatically reset when the waste toner case is replaced.

Memo:
The machine has a mechanism to check the presence/absence of the waste toner case.
The machine makes a check using the waste toner case sensor (PS12) mounted to the side of the waste toner sensor.
The machine tires to find out if the toner case has been fitted in the machine by checking PS12 when the front cover is closed.

2.4.7.6 Preventing Spilling of Waste Toner

0016-5383

LBP5970 / LBP5975

There has been a risk that the waste toner, collected and accumulated like a mountain in the container, may spill out of the container. In this machine, rotate the
screw inside the waste toner container periodically to level off the waste toner.

Startup timing
- At the last rotation/50 prints (Note: At continuous printing, stop the job at the 100th prints and perform the operation)
- At every last rotation after the waste toner full notice is given.
- At the last rotation/15 prints after the replacement of the waste toner box (until 5th operations) (Note: At continuous printing, stop the job at the 50th prints and
perform the operation)
- After the 1st job is completed at power-on

Operation
1) The registration motor drive signal is output for 2 sec from the DC controller.
2) The screw inside the waste toner container starts to rotate after the registration motor (M6) rotates in reverse for 2 sec.
3) With the rotation of the screw, the waste toner accumulated like a mountain in the container is leveled off.

2-103
 Chapter 2

D-CON

[1]

M6

[4]

[2]

[3]

[5]

[6] [7]
[3]

F-2-138
[1] Registration motor drive signal
[2] Waste toner container
[3] Waste toner
[4] Waste toner vibrating lever
[5] Protrusion
[6] Before leveling off
[7] After leveling off

2-104
 Chapter 2

2.5 Pickup/Feeding/Delivery System

2.5.1 Overview/Configuration

2.5.1.1 Overview
0008-7266

LBP5960

The pickup/transport/delivery system serves to pick up, move, and discharge print paper, and contains a variety of transport rollers.
The machine's point of pickup may be the cassette or the multifeeder tray, and its discharge slot is the face-down tray.

2.5.1.2 Major Functional Areas

0008-8153

LBP5960

[1]

[2]
[7]

[3]

[4]

[5] [6]

F-2-139
[1] Delivery assembly
[2] Fixing assembly
[3] Secondary transfer block
[4] Registration roller block
[5] Cassette pickup block
[6] Manual feeder pickup block
[7] Duplexing transport block

2.5.1.3 Paper Paths

0008-8209

LBP5960

2-105
 Chapter 2

[3]

[2]

[1]

F-2-140
[1] Cassette pickup
[2] Manual feeder pickup
[3] Copy tray discharge

2.5.1.4 Arrangement of Rollers

0008-8202

LBP5960

[1] [19] [18]

[2]

[3]

[4] [16]
[17]
[5]

[6]

[7] [15]

[8]

[9]
[10]
[11]

[12] [13] [14]

F-2-141

[1] Outside delivery roller [11] Cassette pull-off roller

[2] Outside delivery roll [12] Cassette pickup roller

2-106
 Chapter 2

[3] Inside delivery roll [13] Manual feeder pull-off roller

[4] Inside delivery roller [14] Manual feeder pull-off roll

[5] Pressure roller [15] Manual feeder pickup roller

[6] Primary transfer inside roller [16] Duplexing roller

[7] Secondary transfer outside roller [17] Duplexing roll

[8] Registration roll [18] Duplexing pull-off roll

[9] Registration roller [19] Duplexing pull-off roller

[10] Cassette pull-off roll

2.5.1.5 Arrangement of Sensors

0008-8214

LBP5960

[1]

[2] [7]

[3]

[4]

[6]

[5]
F-2-142
[1] Delivery sensor (PS1)
[2] Arching sensor (PS2)
[3] Pre-registration sensor (PS7)
[4] Sheet-to-sheet sensor (PS15)
[5] Cassette paper sensor (PS8)
[6] Manual feeder paper sensor (PS9)
[7] Duplexing paper sensor (PS10)

2.5.1.6 Arrangement of Clutches and Solenoids

0008-8215

LBP5960

2-107
 Chapter 2

[2]

[1] SL1

CL5

F-2-143
[1] Manual feeder pickup solenoid (SL1)
[2] Cassette pickup clutch (CL5)

2.5.1.7 Overview
0016-5384

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The pickup/transport/delivery system serves to pick up, move, and discharge print paper, and contains a variety of transport rollers.
The machine's point of pickup may be the cassette or the multifeeder tray, and its discharge slot is the face-down tray.

2.5.1.8 Major Functional Areas

0016-5385

LBP5970 / LBP5975

2-108
 Chapter 2

[1]

[8] [7]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[6]

[5]
F-2-144
[1] Delivery assembly
[2] Fixing assembly
[3] Secondary transfer block
[4] Registration roller block
[5] Cassette pickup block
[6] Manual feeder pickup block
[7] Duplexing transport block
[8] Finisher block

2.5.1.9 Paper Paths

0016-5386

LBP5970 / LBP5975

2-109
 Chapter 2

[3]

[2]

[1]

F-2-145

[1] Cassette pickup

[2] Manual feeder pickup
[3] Copy tray discharge

2.5.1.10 Arrangement of Rollers

0016-5387

LBP5970 / LBP5975

2-110
 Chapter 2

[21] [20] [2] [1] [4] [3] [19] [18]

[16]

[5]
[17]

[6]

[15]
[7]

[8]

[9] [14]

[13]

[12] [10] [11]

F-2-146

[1] Outside delivery roller [12] Cassette pickup roller

[2] Outside delivery roll [13] Manual feeder pull-off roller

[3] Inside delivery roll [14] Manual feeder pull-off roll

[4] Inside delivery roller [15] Manual feeder pickup roller

[5] Pressure roller [16] Duplexing roller

[6] Primary transfer inside roller [17] Duplexing roll

[7] Secondary transfer outside roller [18] Duplexing pull-off roll

[8] Registration roll [19] Duplexing pull-off roller

[9] Registration roller [20] Feed roller

[10] Cassette pull-off roll [21] Process roller

[11] Cassette pull-off roller

2.5.1.11 Arrangement of Sensors

0016-5388

LBP5970 / LBP5975

2-111
 Chapter 2

[1]

[7]
[2]

[3]

[4]

[6]

[5]
F-2-147
[1] Offset HP sensor (PI1)
[2] Stack slide HP sensor (PI2)
[3] Inlet sensor (PI3)
[4] Paper full sensor (PI4)
[5] Pre-registration sensor (PS7)
[6] Sheet-to-sheet sensor (PS15)
[7] Cassette paper sensor (PS8)
[8] Manual feeder paper sensor (PS9)
[9] Arching sensor (PS2)
[10] Duplexing paper sensor (PS10)
[11] Delivery sensor (PS1)

2.5.1.12 Arrangement of Clutches and Solenoids

0016-5390

LBP5970 / LBP5975

2-112
 Chapter 2

[3]

SL2

[2]

SL1

CL5

[1]
F-2-148

[1] Manual feeder pickup solenoid (SL1)

[2] Cassette pickup clutch (CL5)
[3] Gripper solenoid

2.5.2 Other Control

2.5.2.1 Overview
0009-3401

LBP5960

Pickup from the Cassette

The machine's cassette pickup mechanism is designed to pickup up sheets of paper, one at a time as follows:
1) When the print command arrives from the video controller, the DC controller turns on the pickup motor (M5).
2) A specific period of time after the pickup motor (M5) starts to rotate, the cassette pickup clutch (CL5) goes on.
3) The cassette pickup roller rotates, causing pickup of paper for the cassette.
4) The separation pad makes sure that only a single sheet of paper is picked up and moved to the registration roller.
5) When the paper reaches the registration roller, the pickup motor stops to stop the paper; at this time, the paper is butted against the registration roller so that
it arches to be free of any skew.
6) The registration is released at specific timing, and the machine moves the paper to suit its type as instructed by the video controller.

Pickup from the Manual Feeder

The machine's manual feeder mechanism serves to move paper placed in the multifeeder tray into the machine as follows:
1) when the print command arrives from the video controller, the DC controller turns on the pickup motor (M5).
2) A specific period of time after the pickup motor (M5) starts to rotate, the manual feeder pickup solenoid (SL5) goes on.
3) The cassette pickup roller starts to rotate, picking up paper from the manual feeder tray.
4) The separation pad makes sure that only a single sheet of paper is picked up and moved to the registration roller.
5) When the paper reaches the registration roller, the machine stops the pickup motor to stop the movement of the paper; at this time, the paper is butted against
the registration roller so that it arches, thus being freed of any skew.
6) The registration is released, and the machine moves the paper at a speed suited to its type as instructed by the video controller.

The following is a diagram of the machine's pickup/transport drive mechanisms:

2-113
 Chapter 2

DC controller PCB

cassette paper detection signal

fixing motor drive signal

pre-registration paper detection signal

sheet-to-sheet detection signal

pickup motor drive signal

duplexing motor drive signal

inside delivery paper detection signal

manual feeder pickup solenoid drive signal

registration motor drive signal

cassette pickup clutch drive signal

MLT_PAPER_DET

LOOP1_SNS

DUPPASS_SNS

REG1_BEFORE_SNS

PRE_REG1_SNS

CST_PAPER_DET
INNERDEL_SNS
manual feeder paper detection signal

duplexing paper detection signal

fixing arch paper detection signal
M7

PS1
PS10

PS2

M4

M6
PS7

PS15
PS9

PS8

SL1
CL5
M5

F-2-149
T-2-21

PS1: delivery sensor

M4: fixing motor
PS2: arching sensor
M5: pickup motor
PS7: pre-registration sensor
M6: registration motor
PS8: cassette paper sensor
M7: duplexing motor
PS9: manual feeder paper sensor
SL1: manual feeder pickup solenoid
PS10: duplexing paper sensor
CL5: cassette pickup clutch
PS15: sheet-to-sheet sensor

2.5.2.2 Pickup Control

0008-8440

LBP5960

Small Sheet-to-Sheet Distance Control

The machine uses this control mechanism to suit the source of paper and the output of the sheet-to-sheet sensor, thus making sure there is a specific distance between
sheets to prevent double feeding.
Distance to the Preceding Sheet
- In the case of the 1st sheet
There will be no preceding sheet, and the machine will not perform a sheet-to-sheet check, always permitting pickup.
- In the case of the 2nd and subsequent sheets
The machine will check the distance to the preceding sheet, permitting pickup only if the distance is adequate. Otherwise, it will issue a pickup wait request.
A "necessary distance" refers to a distance between the trail edge of the preceding sheet and the lead edge of the following sheet, where machine operation is
concerned; physically, however, the distance refers to the lead edge of the preceding sheet and that of the following sheet.

2-114
 Chapter 2

Distance
between
Length of sheet sheets

Preceding sheet Following sheet

F-2-150

Flow of Control
When the lead edge of the following sheet turns on the pickup sensor, the machine identifies the distance [A] to the preceding sheet.

- If distance [A] to the preceding sheet is less than 23 mm, the machine stops the pickup motor to stop the following sheet.
- If distance [A] to the following sheet is 23 mm or more, the machine permits the movement of the following sheet.

Paper movement

Pickup sensor
[A] Preceding sheet
Pickup roller

Pull-off roller

Following sheet
F-2-151

2.5.2.3 Registration Control

0008-8448

LBP5960

Registration Control
The machine uses this mechanism to control the relationship between the image and paper movement for secondary transfer:
Flow of Control
1) The machine stops the sheet in the registration roller assembly.
2) The machine computes the registration timing in relation to the K-ITOP timing (Bk laser exposure timing).
3) The machine releases the registration in keeping with the registration timing (with the registration clutch going on).

* The stopping of the sheet for imaging 1) and K-ITOP timing of 2) may take place in reverse sequence.

2-115
 Chapter 2

Secondary transfer

Registration

K-ITOP

F-2-152

1. Pre-Registration Stop
As soon as the lead edge of the sheet reaches the nip segment of the registration roller, the machine stops the duplexing motor (if paper exists in the duplexing path)
to stop the paper. At this time, the paper is stopped while being arched against the registration roller for skew removal.

2. Registration ON Timing
The machine determines when to release registration in relation to K-ITOP (Bk laser exposure timing) for secondary transfer using the image laser BD signal.

2-116
 Chapter 2

<Relationship Between BD Count and Distance>

If 600 x 600 dpi
1 inch
(25.4mm)

1 inch
600 x 600dot If 00 dpi, 600 dots per inch
(25.4mm)

The machine's imaging mechanisms are as follows:

The BD sensor goes on for every line in main scanning direction.

Drum
The machine needs to make 600 scans for depositing
600 dots per line in sub scanning direction.

BD count of 60

BD circuit 25.4 mm: 600 (BD count) = Xmm = YBD count

X [A]+[B]-[C]

The machine converts the remaining distance (for paper transport)

into BD count Y; then, by checking the BD count,
it computes the timing of releasing the registration.

[A]

[B]
[C]

F-2-153

3. Registration clutch ON
A specific length of time after K-ITOP, the machine resumes movement of the sheet as follows:
1) from K-ITOP, the accessories pickup motor is turned on 110 mm in front of a point of registration release.
2) the duplexing motor is started 55 msec from point 1 above; then, the pickup motor and the registration motor are started.
3) the registration clutch is turned on 55 msec after point 2 above; then, the pickup motor and the registration motor are started.

2.5.2.4 Fixing Arch Control

0009-7344

LBP5960

A. Fixing Arch Control

Between secondary transfer and fixing, the pressure roller used for fixing expands thermally; although the roller revolution remains specific, the movement of the
sheet will increase because of the increase in the circumference of the roller (faster than the sheet moved for secondary transfer). If this happens, the sheet will be
pulled toward the fixing assembly [C]. If the speed of fixing is made lower than secondary transfer to make the sheet slack, the sheet can get pushed toward the
fixing side [B]. The machine executes fixing arch control so as to move sheets at the best speed [A] to the fixing assembly.

B. Flow of Control
1. Arch Control Monitor
The machine starts to monitor the movement of the sheet as soon as its lead edge reaches the fixing block and a point +10 mm of the fixing nip.

2. Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Motor

The machine moves the sheet to the fixing assembly at 95% of the process speed, switching the speed under the following conditions:
- if the fixing arch sensor goes on ([B]) : the fixing motor speed is increased (105% of the process speed)
- if the fixing arch sensor goes off ([C]) : the fixing motor speed is decreased (95% of the process speed)

2-117
 Chapter 2

3. The machine stops to monitor the arching of the sheet as soon as its trail edge leaves the secondary transfer roller.

[C]

[A]

[B]

[A] [A]
[B] [B]

F-2-154

2.5.2.5 Duplexing Control

0008-8462

LBP5960

Duplexing Transport Control

The machine turns over sheets outside it for duplexing.
The machine stops a sheet while its trail edge is at the point of reversal (5 mm from the delivery roller) with its remaining portion outside the machine. No more
than a single sheet of paper is moving in the paper path at a time.
Duplexing is possible only when plain paper is being used, its size being 148 mm long in main scanning direction (A5) and 457 mm long in sub scanning direction.

Control with the Duplexing Path in Use

1) The machine stops the duplexing motor as soon as the trail edge reaches a point +10 mm of the fixing nip.
2) After stopping the duplexing motor (100 msec), the machine rotates in reverse direction.
3) The machine moves the sheet as far as the registration assembly.

2.5.2.6 Detecting Paper Size for Transport

0008-8615

LBP5960

The machine indicates 'faulty print' if the selected size fails to match the size of the sheet being picked up. The detection is executed by the pre-registration sensor.
The machine's sensor control mechanism does not check the sensors for a specific period of time for noise prevention; it makes a check when the sheet reaches a
specific point. If the sensor is off at time of such a check, the machine will assume that the sheet is shorter than a specific length and indicate 'faulty print'.
When the machine identifies a faulty print, it will discharge the sheet to the delivery tray and stop ongoing operation.
"Misprint" is displayed when the paper is 20 mm or more shorter than the specified length. Therefore, if the difference is less than 20 mm in the vertical scanning
direction, "Misprint" is not detected.
For instance, the following will be true in connection with the detection of a 'faulty print' while A4R/LTR is in use:
(If the sheet is longer by 20 mm or more, the machine will assume a jam and stop the movement of paper.)
T-2-22

Length (mm) Difference (mm) Detention

LTR selected

LTR
215.9 - -

A4
210.0 5.9 no

2-118
 Chapter 2

Length (mm) Difference (mm) Detention

B5
182.0 33.9 yes

LTR selected

A4R
297.0 - -

LTRR
279.4 17.6 no

B5R
241.3 55.7 yes

2.5.2.7 Cassette Size Detection

0009-9419

LBP5960

The machine checks the size of paper in the cassette with surface to a press on the switch of the cassette size sensor by the size lever.
The 4 switches of the cassette size sensor found on the machine go on or off depending on the position of the size levers, and the machine uses the resulting com-
bination of sensor states (on/off) to identify as many as 15 cassette paper sizes.
If no cassette is set, all 4 switches will be off, causing the machine to assume the absence of the cassette.
The following shows the relationship between the state of the switches and paper sizes:

1001 9 LTR 279.0 216.0

1010 10 B4 257.0 364.0
1011 11 A4 297.0 210.0
1100 12 - - -
1101 13 B5 257.0 182.0

SW2
1 0 1 1

A4 B4 LTR
A3 B5
F-2-155
T-2-23

Dial setting Type HSIZE VSIZE

0000 0 - - -
0001 1 - - -
0010 2 U1 - -
0011 3 11X17 279.0 432.0
0100 4 EXEC 266.7 184.1
0101 5 A5 210.0 148.0
0110 6 LGL 216.0 356.0
0111 7 A3 297.0 420.0
1000 8 - - -
1001 9 LTR 279.0 216.0
1010 10 B4 257.0 364.0
1011 11 A4 297.0 210.0
1100 12 - - -
1101 13 B5 257.0 182.0
1110 14 - - -
1111 15 - 0 0

* facing the sensor, the bit found rightmost is bit0.

* when the switch is on, '0'.

2.5.2.8 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper

0009-9425

LBP5960
Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper
The machine uses the cassette paper sensor [1] to find out if there is paper inside the cassette.
When there is paper on the lifter plate [2], the flag [3] will be pushed by the paper to cause the sensor to go off.

2-119
 Chapter 2

[1]

[3]

[2]

[1]

[3]

[2]

F-2-156
Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper in the Manual Feed Tray
The machine uses the manual feeder sensor [1] to find out if there is paper in the manual feeder tray.
When paper is placed, the flag will be pushed to turn off the sensor.

[1]

[1]
[3]

[2]

F-2-157

2.5.2.9 Overview
0016-5391

LBP5970 / LBP5975

Pickup from the Cassette

The machine's cassette pickup mechanism is designed to pickup up sheets of paper, one at a time as follows:
1) When the print command arrives from the video controller, the DC controller turns on the pickup motor (M5).
2) A specific period of time after the pickup motor (M5) starts to rotate, the cassette pickup clutch (CL5) goes on.
3) The cassette pickup roller rotates, causing pickup of paper for the cassette.
4) The separation pad makes sure that only a single sheet of paper is picked up and moved to the registration roller.
5) When the paper reaches the registration roller, the pickup motor stops to stop the paper; at this time, the paper is butted against the registration roller so that
it arches to be free of any skew.
6) The registration is released at specific timing, and the machine moves the paper to suit its type as instructed by the video controller.

Pickup from the Manual Feeder

The machine's manual feeder mechanism serves to move paper placed in the multifeeder tray into the machine as follows:
1) when the print command arrives from the video controller, the DC controller turns on the pickup motor (M5).
2) A specific period of time after the pickup motor (M5) starts to rotate, the manual feeder pickup solenoid (SL5) goes on.
3) The cassette pickup roller starts to rotate, picking up paper from the manual feeder tray.
4) The separation pad makes sure that only a single sheet of paper is picked up and moved to the registration roller.
5) When the paper reaches the registration roller, the machine stops the pickup motor to stop the movement of the paper; at this time, the paper is butted against
the registration roller so that it arches, thus being freed of any skew.
6) The registration is released, and the machine moves the paper at a speed suited to its type as instructed by the video controller.

The following is a diagram of the machine's pickup/transport drive mechanisms:

2-120
 Chapter 2

DC controller PCB

cassette paper detection signal

fixing motor drive signal

pre-registration paper detection signal

sheet-to-sheet detection signal

pickup motor drive signal

duplexing motor drive signal

inside delivery paper detection signal

manual feeder pickup solenoid drive signal

registration motor drive signal

cassette pickup clutch drive signal

MLT_PAPER_DET

LOOP1_SNS

DUPPASS_SNS

REG1_BEFORE_SNS

PRE_REG1_SNS

CST_PAPER_DET
INNERDEL_SNS
manual feeder paper detection signal

duplexing paper detection signal

fixing arch paper detection signal
M7

PS1
PS10

PS2

M4

M6
PS7

PS15
PS9

PS8

SL1
CL5
M5

F-2-158
T-2-24

PS1: delivery sensor

M4: fixing motor
PS2: arching sensor
M5: pickup motor
PS7: pre-registration sensor
M6: registration motor
PS8: cassette paper sensor
M7: duplexing motor
PS9: manual feeder paper sensor
SL1: manual feeder pickup solenoid
PS10: duplexing paper sensor
CL5: cassette pickup clutch
PS15: sheet-to-sheet sensor

2.5.2.10 Pickup Control

0016-5392

LBP5970 / LBP5975

Small Sheet-to-Sheet Distance Control

The machine uses this control mechanism to suit the source of paper and the output of the sheet-to-sheet sensor, thus making sure there is a specific distance between
sheets to prevent double feeding.
Distance to the Preceding Sheet
- In the case of the 1st sheet
There will be no preceding sheet, and the machine will not perform a sheet-to-sheet check, always permitting pickup.
- In the case of the 2nd and subsequent sheets
The machine will check the distance to the preceding sheet, permitting pickup only if the distance is adequate. Otherwise, it will issue a pickup wait request.
A "necessary distance" refers to a distance between the trail edge of the preceding sheet and the lead edge of the following sheet, where machine operation is
concerned; physically, however, the distance refers to the lead edge of the preceding sheet and that of the following sheet.

2-121
 Chapter 2

Distance
between
Length of sheet sheets

Preceding sheet Following sheet

F-2-159

Flow of Control
When the lead edge of the following sheet turns on the pickup sensor, the machine identifies the distance [A] to the preceding sheet.

- If distance [A] to the preceding sheet is less than 23 mm, the machine stops the pickup motor to stop the following sheet.
- If distance [A] to the following sheet is 23 mm or more, the machine permits the movement of the following sheet.

Paper movement

Pickup sensor
[A] Preceding sheet
Pickup roller

Pull-off roller

Following sheet
F-2-160

2.5.2.11 Registration Control

0016-5393

LBP5970 / LBP5975

Registration Control
The machine uses this mechanism to control the relationship between the image and paper movement for secondary transfer:
Flow of Control
1) The machine stops the sheet in the registration roller assembly.
2) The machine computes the registration timing in relation to the K-ITOP timing (Bk laser exposure timing).
3) The machine releases the registration in keeping with the registration timing (with the registration clutch going on).

* The stopping of the sheet for imaging 1) and K-ITOP timing of 2) may take place in reverse sequence.

2-122
 Chapter 2

Secondary transfer

Registration

K-ITOP

F-2-161

1. Pre-Registration Stop
As soon as the lead edge of the sheet reaches the nip segment of the registration roller, the machine stops the duplexing motor (if paper exists in the duplexing path)
to stop the paper. At this time, the paper is stopped while being arched against the registration roller for skew removal.

2. Registration ON Timing
The machine determines when to release registration in relation to K-ITOP (Bk laser exposure timing) for secondary transfer using the image laser BD signal.

2-123
 Chapter 2

<Relationship Between BD Count and Distance>

If 600 x 600 dpi
1 inch
(25.4mm)

1 inch
600 x 600dot If 00 dpi, 600 dots per inch
(25.4mm)

The machine's imaging mechanisms are as follows:

The BD sensor goes on for every line in main scanning direction.

Drum
The machine needs to make 600 scans for depositing
600 dots per line in sub scanning direction.

BD count of 60

BD circuit 25.4 mm: 600 (BD count) = Xmm = YBD count

X [A]+[B]-[C]

The machine converts the remaining distance (for paper transport)

into BD count Y; then, by checking the BD count,
it computes the timing of releasing the registration.

[A]

[B]
[C]

F-2-162

3. Registration clutch ON
A specific length of time after K-ITOP, the machine resumes movement of the sheet as follows:
1) from K-ITOP, the accessories pickup motor is turned on 110 mm in front of a point of registration release.
2) the duplexing motor is started 55 msec from point 1 above; then, the pickup motor and the registration motor are started.
3) the registration clutch is turned on 55 msec after point 2 above; then, the pickup motor and the registration motor are started.

2.5.2.12 Fixing Arch Control

0016-5394

LBP5970 / LBP5975

A. Fixing Arch Control

Between secondary transfer and fixing, the pressure roller used for fixing expands thermally; although the roller revolution remains specific, the movement of the
sheet will increase because of the increase in the circumference of the roller (faster than the sheet moved for secondary transfer). If this happens, the sheet will be
pulled toward the fixing assembly [C]. If the speed of fixing is made lower than secondary transfer to make the sheet slack, the sheet can get pushed toward the
fixing side [B]. The machine executes fixing arch control so as to move sheets at the best speed [A] to the fixing assembly.

B. Flow of Control
1. Arch Control Monitor
The machine starts to monitor the movement of the sheet as soon as its lead edge reaches the fixing block and a point +10 mm of the fixing nip.

2. Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Motor

The machine moves the sheet to the fixing assembly at 95% of the process speed, switching the speed under the following conditions:
- if the fixing arch sensor goes on ([B]) : the fixing motor speed is increased (105% of the process speed)
- if the fixing arch sensor goes off ([C]) : the fixing motor speed is decreased (95% of the process speed)

2-124
 Chapter 2

3. The machine stops to monitor the arching of the sheet as soon as its trail edge leaves the secondary transfer roller.

[C]

[A]

[B]

[A] [A]
[B] [B]

F-2-163

2.5.2.13 Duplexing Control

0016-5395

LBP5970 / LBP5975

Duplexing Transport Control

The machine turns over sheets outside it for duplexing.
The machine stops a sheet while its trail edge is at the point of reversal (5 mm from the delivery roller) with its remaining portion outside the machine. No more
than a single sheet of paper is moving in the paper path at a time.
Duplexing is possible only when plain paper is being used, its size being 148 mm long in main scanning direction (A5) and 457 mm long in sub scanning direction.

Control with the Duplexing Path in Use

1) The machine stops the duplexing motor as soon as the trail edge reaches a point +10 mm of the fixing nip.
2) After stopping the duplexing motor (100 msec), the machine rotates in reverse direction.
3) The machine moves the sheet as far as the registration assembly.

2.5.2.14 Detecting Paper Size for Transport

0016-5396

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine indicates 'faulty print' if the selected size fails to match the size of the sheet being picked up. The detection is executed by the pre-registration sensor.
The machine's sensor control mechanism does not check the sensors for a specific period of time for noise prevention; it makes a check when the sheet reaches a
specific point. If the sensor is off at time of such a check, the machine will assume that the sheet is shorter than a specific length and indicate 'faulty print'.
When the machine identifies a faulty print, it will discharge the sheet to the delivery tray and stop ongoing operation.
"Misprint" is displayed when the paper is 20 mm or more shorter than the specified length. Therefore, if the difference is less than 20 mm in the vertical scanning
direction, "Misprint" is not detected.
For instance, the following will be true in connection with the detection of a 'faulty print' while A4R/LTR is in use:
(If the sheet is longer by 20 mm or more, the machine will assume a jam and stop the movement of paper.)
T-2-25

Length (mm) Difference (mm) Detention

LTR selected

LTR
215.9 - -

A4
210.0 5.9 no

2-125
 Chapter 2

Length (mm) Difference (mm) Detention

B5
182.0 33.9 yes

LTR selected

A4R
297.0 - -

LTRR
279.4 17.6 no

B5R
241.3 55.7 yes

2.5.2.15 Cassette Size Detection

0016-5397

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine checks the size of paper in the cassette with surface to a press on the switch of the cassette size sensor by the size lever.
The 4 switches of the cassette size sensor found on the machine go on or off depending on the position of the size levers, and the machine uses the resulting com-
bination of sensor states (on/off) to identify as many as 15 cassette paper sizes.
If no cassette is set, all 4 switches will be off, causing the machine to assume the absence of the cassette.
The following shows the relationship between the state of the switches and paper sizes:

1001 9 LTR 279.0 216.0

1010 10 B4 257.0 364.0
1011 11 A4 297.0 210.0
1100 12 - - -
1101 13 B5 257.0 182.0

SW2
1 0 1 1

A4 B4 LTR
A3 B5
F-2-164
T-2-26

Dial setting Type HSIZE VSIZE

0000 0 - - -
0001 1 - - -
0010 2 U1 - -
0011 3 11X17 279.0 432.0
0100 4 EXEC 266.7 184.1
0101 5 A5 210.0 148.0
0110 6 LGL 216.0 356.0
0111 7 A3 297.0 420.0
1000 8 - - -
1001 9 LTR 279.0 216.0
1010 10 B4 257.0 364.0
1011 11 A4 297.0 210.0
1100 12 - - -
1101 13 B5 257.0 182.0
1110 14 - - -
1111 15 - 0 0

* facing the sensor, the bit found rightmost is bit0.

* when the switch is on, '0'.

2.5.2.16 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper

0016-5398

LBP5970 / LBP5975
Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper
The machine uses the cassette paper sensor [1] to find out if there is paper inside the cassette.
When there is paper on the lifter plate [2], the flag [3] will be pushed by the paper to cause the sensor to go off.

2-126
 Chapter 2

[1]

[3]

[2]

[1]

[3]

[2]

F-2-165
Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper in the Manual Feed Tray
The machine uses the manual feeder sensor [1] to find out if there is paper in the manual feeder tray.
When paper is placed, the flag will be pushed to turn off the sensor.

[1]

[1]
[3]

[2]

F-2-166

2.5.3 Detecting Jams

2.5.3.1 Jam Detection Outline
2.5.3.1.1 Outline
0008-8234
LBP5960

The machine uses the following paper sensors to check the presence/absence of paper and to see, if any, it is being moved properly.

2-127
 Chapter 2

[1]

[2] [7]

[3]

[4]

[6]

[5]
F-2-167
[1] Delivery sensor (PS1)
[2] Arch sensor (PS2)
[3] Pre-registration sensor (PS7)
[4] Sheet-to-sheet sensor (PS15)
[5] Cassette paper sensor (PS8)
[6] Manual feed paper sensor (PS9)
[7] Duplexing paper sensor (PS10)

The machine checks for a jam with reference to the presence/absence of paper over a specific sensor at such times as programmed in the CPU of the DC controller.
If a jam is found, the CPU will stop the ongoing print job, and communicate to the presence of a jam to the video controller.
2.5.3.1.2 Outline
0016-5399
LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine uses the following paper sensors to check the presence/absence of paper and to see, if any, it is being moved properly.

2-128
 Chapter 2

[1]

[2] [7]

[3]

[4]

[6]

[5]
F-2-168
[1] Delivery sensor (PS1)
[2] Arch sensor (PS2)
[3] Pre-registration sensor (PS7)
[4] Sheet-to-sheet sensor (PS15)
[5] Cassette paper sensor (PS8)
[6] Manual feed paper sensor (PS9)
[7] Duplexing paper sensor (PS10)

The machine checks for a jam with reference to the presence/absence of paper over a specific sensor at such times as programmed in the CPU of the DC controller.
If a jam is found, the CPU will stop the ongoing print job, and communicate to the presence of a jam to the video controller.
2.5.3.2 Delay Jams
2.5.3.2.1 Pickup Delay Jam
0008-8238
LBP5960
The CPU will identify a pickup delay jam if, in the pickup assembly, the lead edge of print paper does not reach the pre-registration sensor (PS7) a specific period
of time after the start of pickup (i.e., when the clutch or the solenoid of the pickup slot has gone on).
T-2-27

Source of paper Start point End point Nature of delay jam at end point (msec)

Machine cassette pickup (cassette pickup clutch ON) sheet-to-sheet sensor The sheet does not reach the end point within a specific time.

sheet-to-sheet sensor pre-registration sensor The sheet does not reach the end point within a specific time.

Manual feeder tray manual feeder pickup pre-registration sensor The sheet does not reach the end point within a specific time.
(manual feeder pickup solenoid ON)

2.5.3.2.2 Delivery Delay Jam

0008-8244
LBP5960

The CPU will identify a delivery delay jam if, in the delivery assembly, the lead edge of print paper does not reach the delivery sensor (PS1) within a specific period
of time after the registration motor has gone on.
T-2-28

Source of paper Start point End point Nature of delay jam at end point (msec)

2-129
 Chapter 2

Manual feeder tray registration roller (registration motor ON) delivery sensor The sheet does not reach the end point within a specific time.

2.5.3.2.3 Duplexing Delivery Jam

0008-8246
LBP5960

The CPU will identify a duplexing delay jam if, in the duplexing transport assembly, the lead edge of print paper does not reach the duplexing sensor (PS10) or the
pre-registration sensor (PS7) after the sensors have gone on respectively.
T-2-29

Source of paper Start point End point Nature of delay jam at end point (msec)

Duplexing delivery sensor duplexing sensor The paper does not reach the end point within a specific time.

duplexing sensor pre-registration sensor The paper does not reach the end point within a specific period
of time.

2.5.3.2.4 Pickup Delay Jam

0016-5400
LBP5970 / LBP5975

The CPU will identify a pickup delay jam if, in the pickup assembly, the lead edge of print paper does not reach the pre-registration sensor (PS7) a specific period
of time after the start of pickup (i.e., when the clutch or the solenoid of the pickup slot has gone on).
T-2-30

Source of paper Start point End point Nature of delay jam at end point (msec)

Machine cassette pickup (cassette pickup clutch ON) sheet-to-sheet sensor The sheet does not reach the end point within a specific time.

sheet-to-sheet sensor pre-registration sensor The sheet does not reach the end point within a specific time.

Manual feeder tray manual feeder pickup pre-registration sensor The sheet does not reach the end point within a specific time.
(manual feeder pickup solenoid ON)

2.5.3.2.5 Delivery Delay Jam

0016-5401
LBP5970 / LBP5975

The CPU will identify a delivery delay jam if, in the delivery assembly, the lead edge of print paper does not reach the delivery sensor (PS1) within a specific period
of time after the registration motor has gone on.
T-2-31

Source of paper Start point End point Nature of delay jam at end point (msec)

Manual feeder tray registration roller (registration motor ON) delivery sensor The sheet does not reach the end point within a specific time.

2.5.3.2.6 Duplexing Delivery Jam

0016-5402
LBP5970 / LBP5975

The CPU will identify a duplexing delay jam if, in the duplexing transport assembly, the lead edge of print paper does not reach the duplexing sensor (PS10) or the
pre-registration sensor (PS7) after the sensors have gone on respectively.

2-130
 Chapter 2

T-2-32

Source of paper Start point End point Nature of delay jam at end point (msec)

Duplexing delivery sensor duplexing sensor The paper does not reach the end point within a specific time.

duplexing sensor pre-registration sensor The paper does not reach the end point within a specific period
of time.

2.5.3.3 Stationary Jams

2.5.3.3.1 Pickup Stationary Jam
0008-8247
LBP5960

T-2-33

Source of paper Start point End point Nature of jam at end point (msec)

Source of paper sheet-to-sheet sensor pre-registration sensor The paper does not leave the end point (OFF) within a specific
time.

2.5.3.3.2 Delivery Stationary Jam

0008-8249
LBP5960

The CPU will identify a delivery stationary jam if, in the delivery assembly, the trail edge of paper does not turn off the inside delivery sensor (PS1) within a specific
time after the delivery sensor (PS1) has gone on.
T-2-34

Start point End point Nature of stationary jam at start point (A4)

Simplexing registration roller (registration motor ON) delivery sensor After reaching the start point, the paper does not leave the end
point (OFF) within a specific time.

elivery sensor After reaching the start point, the paper does not leave (OFF)
the start point.

2.5.3.3.3 Duplexing Stationary Jam

0008-8253
LBP5960

The CPU will identify a duplexing stationary jam if, in the duplexing transport assembly, the paper does not turn off the start point sensor within a specific time
after it has turned it on.
T-2-35

Start point End point Nature of stationary jam at start point

Duplexing duplexing sensor pre-registration sensor The paper does not leave (OFF) the start point within a specific
time.

2.5.3.3.4 Pickup Stationary Jam

0016-5403
LBP5970 / LBP5975

2-131
 Chapter 2

T-2-36

Source of paper Start point End point Nature of jam at end point (msec)

Source of paper sheet-to-sheet sensor pre-registration sensor The paper does not leave the end point (OFF) within a specific
time.

2.5.3.3.5 Delivery Stationary Jam

0016-5404
LBP5970 / LBP5975

The CPU will identify a delivery stationary jam if, in the delivery assembly, the trail edge of paper does not turn off the inside delivery sensor (PS1) within a specific
time after the delivery sensor (PS1) has gone on.
T-2-37

Start point End point Nature of stationary jam at start point (A4)

Simplexing registration roller (registration motor ON) delivery sensor After reaching the start point, the paper does not leave the end
point (OFF) within a specific time.

elivery sensor After reaching the start point, the paper does not leave (OFF)
the start point.

2.5.3.3.6 Duplexing Stationary Jam

0016-5405
LBP5970 / LBP5975
The CPU will identify a duplexing stationary jam if, in the duplexing transport assembly, the paper does not turn off the start point sensor within a specific time
after it has turned it on.
T-2-38

Start point End point Nature of stationary jam at start point

Duplexing duplexing sensor pre-registration sensor The paper does not leave (OFF) the start point within a specific
time.

2.5.3.4 Other Jams

2.5.3.4.1 Door Open Jam
0008-8259
LBP5960

The CPU will identify a door open jam if it identifies the upper cover as having been opened while printing is under way.
2.5.3.4.2 Stationary Jam at Power-On
0008-8278
LBP5960

The CPU will identify a power-on jam if there is residual paper inside the machine immediately after the power has been turned on, immediately after a jam has
been removed, or immediately after the door has been opened/closed upon removal of a jam.
T-2-39

Sensor

pickup sensor (PS15)

pre-registration sensor (PS7)

delivery sensor (PS1)

duplexing sensor (PS10)

2-132
 Chapter 2

2.5.3.4.3 Door Open Jam

0016-5407
LBP5970 / LBP5975

The CPU will identify a door open jam if it identifies the upper cover as having been opened while printing is under way.
2.5.3.4.4 Stationary Jam at Power-On
0016-5408
LBP5970 / LBP5975

The CPU will identify a power-on jam if there is residual paper inside the machine immediately after the power has been turned on, immediately after a jam has
been removed, or immediately after the door has been opened/closed upon removal of a jam.
T-2-40

Sensor

pickup sensor (PS15)

pre-registration sensor (PS7)

delivery sensor (PS1)

duplexing sensor (PS10)

2-133
 Chapter 2

2.5.4 Finisher
2.5.4.1 Basic Construction
2.5.4.1.1 Overview
0018-3449
LBP5975

The finisher consists of four blocks: feed block, offset block, stapler block, and intermediate process tray block.
Locations of these blocks are shown below.

Offset block

Feed
Intermediate block
process tray
block
Stapler block

Finisher controller PCB

F-2-169

2-134
 Chapter 2

2.5.4.1.2 Paper Path Drawing

0018-3521
LBP5975

The finisher has two paper paths: a paper path for duplex print paper inversion and a paper path for stapling. A flapper is used to switch between these paper paths.
When the finisher controller PCB receives a Duplex Print Path command form the host machine, the feed motor (M2) turns in the reverse direction to move the
flapper to select the paper path for duplex print paper inversion.

Paper path for duplex

print paper inversion

Paper path for

alignment/stapling

Flapper

F-2-170

2-135
 Chapter 2

2.5.4.1.3 Component Configuration Drawing

0018-3520
LBP5975

Locations of components are shown below.

[1] [2] [3] [4]

[8] [7] [6] [5]

F-2-171

[1] Offset unit [5] Trailing edge holding claw

[2] Process roller [6] Stack delivery claw
[3] Feed roller [7] Intermediate process tray unit
[4] Flapper [8] Tray paper holder (full stack detection lever)

2-136
 Chapter 2

2.5.4.1.4 Outline of Electric Circuit

0018-3450
LBP5975

The operation sequence of the finisher is controlled by the finisher controller PCB. The CPU on the finisher controller PCB incorporates the ROM that contains the
operation sequence program. The finisher controller PCB drives the motor and solenoid in response to various commands received through the serial communication
line. In addition, the finisher controller PCB notifies the host machine of various sensor information through the serial communication line.

Motor
Finisher controller PCB

Sensor

CPU Host machine

Solenoid

Motor driver
Fan

F-2-172

2.5.4.1.5 Electric Parts Layout Drawing

0018-3514
LBP5975

PI3

M1

FM1
PI1

[2]
SL1

PI4

PI2

[1]
M2
F-2-173
T-2-41

Symbol Part name

PI1 Offset HP sensor
PI2 Stack slide HP sensor
PI3 Inlet sensor
PI4 Paper full sensor
SL1 Gripper solenoid
FM1 Exhaust heat fan
M1 Offset motor
M2 Feed motor
[1] Finisher controller PCB
[2] Power supply PCB

2-137
 Chapter 2

2.5.4.2 Basic Operation

2.5.4.2.1 Basic Operation
0018-3452
LBP5970 / LBP5975

Basic Operation for Alignment/Stapling

1) The offset motor (M1) turns in the normal direction to return the process roller unit to its home position. The process roller is held raised.

M1

Process roller Process roller unit

F-2-174
2) The feed motor (M2) turns in the normal direction to move the feed roller. The feed roller feeds paper onto the process tray.

M2

Feed roller

Paper

Intermediate process
tray unit

F-2-175

2-138
 Chapter 2

3) When the inlet sensor (PI3) detects the trailing edge of the paper, the offset motor (M1) turns in the normal direction. The process roller unit lowers to hold paper.

M1

Paper

F-2-176
4) The process roller unit moves from the paper delivery direction to the paper feed direction. While holding the paper, the process roller feeds back the paper by
the specified distance to press the paper against the tailing edge alignment plate, aligning the trailing edge of the paper. The trailing edge holding claw opens
before it is pulled back by the paper.

Process roller
Process roller unit

Trailing edge holding claw

Paper

Trailing edge
alignment plate
F-2-177

2-139
 Chapter 2

5) While holding the paper, the process roller moves toward the rear to align the paper widthwise. After completion of alignment, the trailing edge holding claw
holds the paper to be ready for arrival of the next sheet.

Process roller
Process roller unit

Trailing edge holding claw

Paper

F-2-178
6) Stapling is performed when required.
7) The process roller returns to the home position and then held raised. The trailing edge holding claw that has been holding the paper opens.

Process roller
Process roller unit

Trailing edge holding claw

Paper

F-2-179

2-140
 Chapter 2

8) The stack delivery claw holds the paper, and the delivery slider moves forward to delivery the paper. The tray paper holder is held raised. Evacuate the tray paper
holder to the upper side.

Paper

Tray paper holder

Stack delivery claw

Delivery slider
F-2-180
9) The taper that has fallen onto the tray is held by the tray paper holder. The delivery slider returns to the home position.

Paper

Tray paper holder

Delivery slider
F-2-181

2-141
 Chapter 2

2.5.4.3 Feed Drive System

2.5.4.3.1 Drive System Schematic Diagram
0018-3453
LBP5975

M1 M2

PI1

SL1
PI3
PI4
PI2

M3
F-2-182
T-2-42

Symbol Part name

PI1 Offset HP sensor
PI2 Stack slide HP sensor
PI3 Inlet sensor
PI4 Paper full sensor
SL1 Gripper solenoid
M1 Offset motor
M2 Feed motor
M3 Stapler motor

2-142
 Chapter 2

2.5.4.3.2 Process Roller Control

0018-3454
LBP5975

The process roller mounted in the process roller unit holds down on the paper for alignment. The process roller itself does not rotate. The front, rear, left, and right
edges of the paper are sequentially aligned in this order.
1) When the paper is fed to turn off the inlet sensor, the offset motor (M1) turns in the normal direction.
2) When the elevation gear cam is released, the process roller unit (the offset HP sensor (PI1) is off at the home position) falls by its own weight to hold the paper.

Process roller Process roller unit Cam

F-2-183

3) The roller holder guide moves back and forth owing to the drive gear boss, and the process roller unit also moves back and forth. The paper is pressed against
the trailing edge alignment plate, where the trailing edge of the paper is aligned.

Process roller unit

Boss

Roller holder guide

Trailing edge alignment plate

F-2-184

2-143
 Chapter 2

4) The slide guide moves horizontally and the process roller unit also moves horizontally. The paper is pressed against the side alignment plate, where the left edge
of the paper is aligned.

Slide guide Boss

Process roller unit

Side alignment plate

F-2-185

2-144
 Chapter 2

2.5.4.3.3 Feed Roller Control

0018-3455
LBP5975

The feed roller is driven by the feed motor (M2). When the motor turns in the normal direction, the feed roller feeds paper to the delivery tray. When the motor
turns in the reverse direction, the feed roller feeds paper to the host machine.

Feed roller

Feed motor (M2)

F-2-186

2.5.4.4 Process Tray Assembly

2.5.4.4.1 Stack Delivery
0018-3456
LBP5970 / LBP5975

Stack delivery takes place when the number of sheets offset on the process tray reaches 5*1 in the non-staple mode.
*1: Max. 15 sheets in the staple mode. (One sheet when the duplex print mode is selected, the paper width is less than LGL width, or thick/special paper is used)
1) When alignment or stapling is completed, the offset motor (M1) turns in the reverse direction. The slider moves from the rear (the stack slide HP sensor (PI2) is
off at the home position) to the front owing to the drive gear boss.
2) The stack delivery claw holds the stack and feeds it toward the tray.

Offset motor (M1)

Stack delivery claw

Boss

Slider

F-2-187

2-145
 Chapter 2

3) When the stack has been delivered, the drive gear cam moves the slider, allowing the tray paper holders to hold the paper.
4) The paper full stack is detected by the tray paper holders. When the stack thickness exceeds the specified value, the paper full sensor (PI4) turns on and the
relevant alarm message is displayed on the LCD.

Paper full sensor (PI4)

Tray paper holder

Slider

F-2-188

2-146
 Chapter 2

2.5.4.5 Staple Operation

2.5.4.5.1 Functional Configuration
0018-3457
LBP5975

The stapler of this finisher is of the fixed type. It staples printed sheets when the staple mode is selected using the printer driver. Since it is of the fixed type, the
stapling position is fixed regardless of the paper size. On this finisher, staples are put in from under the paper. Stapler-related parts are shown below.
T-2-43

Symbol Part name Function

M3 Stapler motor Puts in staples.

- Staple/cartridge sensor Detects whether a cartridge is loaded in the stapler unit and also detects
whether staples remain.

- Stapling HP sensor Detects the home position for stapling.

Staple/cartridge sensor

Stapler motor Stapling HP sensor

F-2-189

2-147
 Chapter 2

2.5.4.6 Detecting Jams

2.5.4.6.1 Jam Detection
0018-3460
LBP5975

T-2-44

Jam Types Jam code Sensor Detection timing

Early arrival jam 05 A Delivery signal has arrived 100 ms earlier than the sheet processing time reported to the host
machine.
Staple jam 06 Stapling HP The stapling home position was not been reached within 500 ms since the stapling home position
sensor sensor had been turned off.
After this, the stapling home position has been reached within 500 mm through reverse rotation.

Power-off jam 07 PI3 The inlet sensor has detected paper at power-on.
Emergency stop jam 09 An emergency stop command has been received from the host machine.

Feed delay jam 11 PI3 Presence of paper has not been detected within the specified time since reception of a Delivery signal
from the host machine.
Feed dtationary jam 21 PI1, PI3 The inlet sensor has not detected absence of paper within the specified feed distance since it detected
presence of paper.
The offset HP sensor has not turn on during the 1000-ms offset operation.

Stack delivery jam 81 PI2 The stack slide HP sensor has not turn on during the 2000-ms stack delivery operation.

2.5.4.7 Power Supply

2.5.4.7.1 Overview
0018-3459
LBP5975

When the host machine is turned on, 24 VDC is supplied to the power supply PCB in the finisher.
The power supply PCB internally generates 5 VDC and 3.3 VDC.
The 5 VDC and 24 VDC are supplied to the finisher controller PCB.

+24V is supplied from the DC controller PCB

of the host machine.

Power supply PCB

+24V +24V
M1 Offset motor

+24V
M2 Feed motor
+5V generator +5V
circuit +24V M3 Staple motor

+24V
+3.3V generator FM1 Exhaust heat fan
circuit Finisher
controller PCB +24V
SL1 Gripper solenoid

+5V Offset HP sensor

PI1
+5V
Stack slide HP sensor
PI2
+5V
Inlet sensor
PI3
+5V
Paper full sensor
PI4

F-2-190

2.5.4.7.2 Protective Function

0018-3461
LBP5975

The electric circuit board has is provided with two fuses for protection against overcurrent. The fuses blow when excess current flows.

2-148
 Chapter 2

2.6 FIXING UNIT SYSTEM

2.6.1 Overview/Configuration

2.6.1.1 Major Components

0013-4215

LBP5960

T-2-45

Notation
Component Description

Fixing sleep sleep

Fixing heater T1 for heating the fixing film (ceramic heater)

Main thermistor TH1 heater contact type (temperature control, overheating detection, fixing assembly detection*1)

Sub thermistor TH2 film contact type (temperature control, overheating detection)

Thermal switch TP1 overheating detection

Arch sensor PS2 fixing arching detection, fixing assembly detection*1

Fixing motor M4 DC brush motor

Fixing sleeve
TH1

TH2

T1

TP1
PS2

M4
F-2-191
*1: detects the presence/absence of the fixing assembly.
The DC controller checks the presence/absence of the fixing assembly before supplying the heater with power at time of power-on with reference to the following
2 sets of detection data, indicating the following message in the absence of the assembly:
The machine also will stop its start-up operation.
E7 Check Fixing Assembly
T-2-46

Result
Source of reference
fixing assembly absent fixing assembly present

Main thermistor output voltage (MAIN_THRM) 5V 4.98 V or less

Arching sensor output (LOOP1_SNS) L H

2.6.1.2 Construction of the Control System

0008-9178

LBP5960

2-149
 Chapter 2

DC controller PCB J107-8 ZEROX_IN1 J16-8 Low-voltage

J107-6 DDIP_POWER_ROY J16-6 power supply PCB
J107-5 HEAT_ON2/ J16-5
J107-4 HEAT_ON1/ J16-4

J109-1-4
J109-5-8
J108-11
J107-2 SOFT_RELAY_ON J16-2

J108-8
J108-6
J107-1 HARD_RELAY_ON J16-1

FUSE_M_A/B, /FUSE_M_A/B
STM7_PM_A/XA/B/XB
LOOP1_SNS
SUB1_THRM
MAIN_THRM
3 2 1

J1001

TH1

TH2

M7
TP1
PS2

M4

F-2-192

2.6.1.3 Major Components

0016-5409

LBP5970 / LBP5975

T-2-47

Notation
Component Description

Fixing sleep sleep

Fixing heater T1 for heating the fixing film (ceramic heater)

Main thermistor TH1 heater contact type (temperature control, overheating detection, fixing assembly detection*1)

Sub thermistor TH2 film contact type (temperature control, overheating detection)

Thermal switch TP1 overheating detection

Arch sensor PS2 fixing arching detection, fixing assembly detection*1

Fixing motor M4 DC brush motor

2-150
 Chapter 2

Fixing sleeve
TH1

TH2

T1

TP1
PS2

M4
F-2-193
*1: detects the presence/absence of the fixing assembly.
The DC controller checks the presence/absence of the fixing assembly before supplying the heater with power at time of power-on with reference to the following
2 sets of detection data, indicating the following message in the absence of the assembly:
The machine also will stop its start-up operation.
E7 Check Fixing Assembly
T-2-48

Result
Source of reference
fixing assembly absent fixing assembly present

Main thermistor output voltage (MAIN_THRM) 5V 4.98 V or less

Arching sensor output (LOOP1_SNS) L H

2.6.1.4 Construction of the Control System

0016-5410

LBP5970 / LBP5975

DC controller PCB J107-8 ZEROX_IN1 J16-8 Low-voltage

J107-6 DDIP_POWER_ROY J16-6 power supply PCB
J107-5 HEAT_ON2/ J16-5
J107-4 HEAT_ON1/ J16-4
J109-1-4
J109-5-8
J108-11

J107-2 SOFT_RELAY_ON J16-2

J108-8
J108-6

J107-1 HARD_RELAY_ON J16-1

FUSE_M_A/B, /FUSE_M_A/B
STM7_PM_A/XA/B/XB
LOOP1_SNS
SUB1_THRM
MAIN_THRM

3 2 1

J1001

TH1

TH2

M7
TP1
PS2

M4

F-2-194

2-151
 Chapter 2

2.6.2 Various Control Mechanisms

2.6.2.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Unit
2.6.2.1.1 Controlling the Fixing Speed Used for Small-Size Paper (down sequence)
0013-4218
LBP5960

When the thermistor reading of the fixing roller reaches a specific temperature while printing on small-size sheets (A4 or shorter in length) in continuous mode, the
machine is designed to increase the distance between sheets to decrease the speed of paper movement (down sequence control), thereby preventing deterioration of
the roller otherwise caused by overheating of the edges of the roller when small-size paper is being used.
The following is a down sequence table showing the relationship between down sequence and paper types:
T-2-49

Sub thermistor
Process speed Paper type Driver settings Printing speed (ppm)
reading (deg C)

Normal speed plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2) plain paper 30 to 2

200

thin paper (less than 64 g/m2) plain paper L

220

special fixing mode 2 *3 process option

>special fixing mode
>mode 2 205

half-speed plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2) plain paper 15 to 2

175

thin paper (less than 64 g/m2) plain paper L

180

rough paper *1 heavy paper 1

190

rough paper (strong) *2 heavy paper 2

200

special fixing mode 2 *3 processing option

>special fixing mode
>mode 2
205

*1 rough paper: heavy paper (106 to 169 g/m2), bond paper (64 to 105 g/m2), coated paper (106 to 169 g/m2), label paper.
*2 extra heavy paper (170 to 220 g/m2), extra heavy coated paper (170 to 20 g/m2), Jpn postcard, 2-pane Jpn postcard, 4-pane Japan postcard, envelope.
*3 For settings and details of special fixing mode 2, see the User's Guide.
2.6.2.1.2 Controlling the Fixing Speed Used for Small-Size Paper (down sequence)
0016-5411
LBP5970 / LBP5975

When the thermistor reading of the fixing roller reaches a specific temperature while printing on small-size sheets (A4 or shorter in length) in continuous mode, the
machine is designed to increase the distance between sheets to decrease the speed of paper movement (down sequence control), thereby preventing deterioration of
the roller otherwise caused by overheating of the edges of the roller when small-size paper is being used.
The following is a down sequence table showing the relationship between down sequence and paper types:
T-2-50

Sub thermistor
Process speed Paper type Driver settings Printing speed (ppm)
reading (deg C)

Normal speed plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2) plain paper 30 to 2

200

thin paper (less than 64 g/m2) plain paper L

220

special fixing mode 2 *3 process option

>special fixing mode
>mode 2 205

2-152
 Chapter 2

Sub thermistor
Process speed Paper type Driver settings Printing speed (ppm)
reading (deg C)

half-speed plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2) plain paper 15 to 2

175

thin paper (less than 64 g/m2) plain paper L

180

rough paper *1 heavy paper 1

190

rough paper (strong) *2 heavy paper 2

200

special fixing mode 2 *3 processing option

>special fixing mode
>mode 2
205

*1 rough paper: heavy paper (106 to 169 g/m2), bond paper (64 to 105 g/m2), coated paper (106 to 169 g/m2), label paper.
*2 extra heavy paper (170 to 220 g/m2), extra heavy coated paper (170 to 20 g/m2), Jpn postcard, 2-pane Jpn postcard, 4-pane Japan postcard, envelope.
*3 For settings and details of special fixing mode 2, see the User's Guide.
2.6.2.2 Fixing Temperature Control
2.6.2.2.1 Overview
0009-1390
LBP5960

The machine uses the reading of the main thermistor found in contact with the middle of the heater to control the fixing assembly heater. The sub thermistor found
in contact with the edge of the film is used to check for a rise in the temperature at the edge of the roller possibly occurring when small-side paper (e.g., A4R) is
used continuously.
2.6.2.2.2 Controlling the Fixing Temperature
0013-4220
LBP5960

The machine uses temperature control sequence only while printing is under way (on-demand fixing). The sequence lasts between the start and the end of printing,
and the target temperature is determined based on the length of time passing after the start of printing and the type of medium being used. While the sequence is
under way, the fixing roller is driven at full/half speed.

The temperature sequence is divided into the following 3 intervals:

- start-up (initial rotation) temperature control
- printing temperature control
- sheet-to-sheet temperature control

Thermistor
reading [deg C]

Time [ t ]

Initial rotation Printing Sheet-to-sheet

F-2-195

A. Start-Up (initial rotation) Temperature Controller

The machine executes start-up temperature control to make sure of good fixing while reducing the start-up time. It selects the best power supply rate that enables
a quick start-up of the fixing assembly without using power in excess of the maximum power consumption level.

B. Printing Temperature Control

The machine uses any of 5 settings to suit the number of prints being made in continuous mode and the type of paper being used.

1. AB Paper Series
If the paper is A4 or larger

2-153
 Chapter 2

T-2-51

Driver setting

Speed Paper type No. 1 through No. 5 temperature control

Normal speed plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2) plain paper 220 to 200

thin paper (less than 64 g/m2) plain paper L 210 to 185

special fixing mode 2 *3 process option 235 to 210

>specific fixing mode
>mode 2

Half speed plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2) plain paper 190 to 165

thin paper (less than 64 g/m2) plain paper L 180 to 155

rough paper *1 heavy paper 1 205 to 185

rough paper (strong) *2 heavy paper 2 225 to 205

special fixing mode 2 *3 process position 200 to 175

>special fixing mode
>mode 2

*1 rough paper: heavy paper (106 to 169 g/m2), bond paper (64 to 105 g/m2), coated paper (106 to 169 g/m2), label sheet.
*2 rough paper (strong): extra heavy paper (170 to 220 g/m2), extra heavy coated paper (170 to 220 g/m2), Jpn postcard, 2-pane Jpn postcard, 4-pane postcard,
envelope.
*3 For settings and details of special fixing mode 2, set the User's Guide.
2. Inch
If the paper is LTR or larger
T-2-52

Speed Paper type Driver settings No. 1 through No. 5 temperature control
Normal speed plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2) plain paper 220 to 195

thin paper (less than 64 g/m2) plain paper L 210 to 180

special fixing mode 2 *3 process option 235 to 200

>specific fixing mode
>mode 2

2-154
 Chapter 2

Speed Paper type Driver settings No. 1 through No. 5 temperature control
Half speed plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2) plain paper 190 to 165

thin paper (less than 64 g/m2) plain paper L 180 to 150

rough paper *1 heavy paper 1 205 to 180

rough paper (strong) *2 heavy paper 2 220 to 195

special fixing mode 2 *3 process option 200 to 170

>specific fixing mode
>mode 2

*1 rough paper: heavy paper (106 to 169 g/m2), bond paper (64 to 105 g/m2), coated paper (106 to 169 g/m2), label paper.
*2 rough paper (strong): extra heavy paper (170 to 220 g/2m), extra heavy coated paper (170 to 220 g/m2), Jpn postcard, 2-pane Jpn postcard, 4-pane Jpn postcard,
envelope.
*3 For settings and details of special fixing mode 2, set the User's Guide.

C. Sheet-to-Sheet Temperature Control

If the distance between sheets for fixing is greater than indicated*, the machine executes sheet-to-sheet temperature control using a temperature lower than that used
for printing temperature control. It also uses this mechanism if no paper arrives for a specific period of time after start-up. The target temperature used for sheet-to-
sheet printing control is -30 to -50 C deg of the temperature used for printing temperature control.

* When the following is true:

- small paper size down sequence
- between 1st side and 2nd side of a double-sided print
- when a command arrives (ATR control, registration control, ATVC control)
2.6.2.2.3 Overview
0016-5412
LBP5970 / LBP5975
The machine uses the reading of the main thermistor found in contact with the middle of the heater to control the fixing assembly heater. The sub thermistor found
in contact with the edge of the film is used to check for a rise in the temperature at the edge of the roller possibly occurring when small-side paper (e.g., A4R) is
used continuously.
2.6.2.2.4 Controlling the Fixing Temperature
0016-5413
LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine uses temperature control sequence only while printing is under way (on-demand fixing). The sequence lasts between the start and the end of printing,
and the target temperature is determined based on the length of time passing after the start of printing and the type of medium being used. While the sequence is
under way, the fixing roller is driven at full/half speed.

The temperature sequence is divided into the following 3 intervals:

- start-up (initial rotation) temperature control
- printing temperature control
- sheet-to-sheet temperature control

Thermistor
reading [deg C]

Time [ t ]

Initial rotation Printing Sheet-to-sheet

F-2-196

A. Start-Up (initial rotation) Temperature Controller

The machine executes start-up temperature control to make sure of good fixing while reducing the start-up time. It selects the best power supply rate that enables

2-155
 Chapter 2

a quick start-up of the fixing assembly without using power in excess of the maximum power consumption level.

B. Printing Temperature Control

The machine uses any of 5 settings to suit the number of prints being made in continuous mode and the type of paper being used.

1. AB Paper Series
If the paper is A4 or larger
T-2-53

Driver setting

Speed Paper type No. 1 through No. 5 temperature control

Normal speed plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2) plain paper 220 to 200

thin paper (less than 64 g/m2) plain paper L 210 to 185

special fixing mode 2 *3 process option 235 to 210

>specific fixing mode
>mode 2

Half speed plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2) plain paper 190 to 165

thin paper (less than 64 g/m2) plain paper L 180 to 155

rough paper *1 heavy paper 1 205 to 185

rough paper (strong) *2 heavy paper 2 225 to 205

special fixing mode 2 *3 process position 200 to 175

>special fixing mode
>mode 2

*1 rough paper: heavy paper (106 to 169 g/m2), bond paper (64 to 105 g/m2), coated paper (106 to 169 g/m2), label sheet.
*2 rough paper (strong): extra heavy paper (170 to 220 g/m2), extra heavy coated paper (170 to 220 g/m2), Jpn postcard, 2-pane Jpn postcard, 4-pane postcard,
envelope.
*3 For settings and details of special fixing mode 2, set the User's Guide.

2. Inch
If the paper is LTR or larger

2-156
 Chapter 2

T-2-54

Speed Paper type Driver settings No. 1 through No. 5 temperature control
Normal speed plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2) plain paper 220 to 195

thin paper (less than 64 g/m2) plain paper L 210 to 180

special fixing mode 2 *3 process option 235 to 200

>specific fixing mode
>mode 2

Half speed plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2) plain paper 190 to 165

thin paper (less than 64 g/m2) plain paper L 180 to 150

rough paper *1 heavy paper 1 205 to 180

rough paper (strong) *2 heavy paper 2 220 to 195

special fixing mode 2 *3 process option 200 to 170

>specific fixing mode
>mode 2

*1 rough paper: heavy paper (106 to 169 g/m2), bond paper (64 to 105 g/m2), coated paper (106 to 169 g/m2), label paper.
*2 rough paper (strong): extra heavy paper (170 to 220 g/2m), extra heavy coated paper (170 to 220 g/m2), Jpn postcard, 2-pane Jpn postcard, 4-pane Jpn postcard,
envelope.
*3 For settings and details of special fixing mode 2, set the User's Guide.

C. Sheet-to-Sheet Temperature Control

If the distance between sheets for fixing is greater than indicated*, the machine executes sheet-to-sheet temperature control using a temperature lower than that used
for printing temperature control. It also uses this mechanism if no paper arrives for a specific period of time after start-up. The target temperature used for sheet-to-
sheet printing control is -30 to -50 C deg of the temperature used for printing temperature control.

* When the following is true:

- small paper size down sequence
- between 1st side and 2nd side of a double-sided print
- when a command arrives (ATR control, registration control, ATVC control)

2.6.3 Protective Functions

2.6.3.1 Overview
0009-1392

LBP5960

It is a function that detects overheating of the fixing assembly to cut off the power to the heater.
The machine is equipped with the following mechanisms that detect overheating of the fixing assembly to cut the power to the heater:
- cutting off the power using the DC controller (CPU)
- cutting off the power using a safety circuit
- cutting off the power using a thermal switch

2-157
 Chapter 2

Power supply

Fixing assembly
Zero-cross
Thermal switch detection
circuit
Sub thermistor

Main thermistor Relay drive SOFT_RELAY_ON

Safety circuit
circuit HARD_RELAY_ON

Fixing heater HEAT_ON1 IC4

drive circuit (triac) HEAT_ON2 ASIC

Low-temperature PCB
IC9
SUB1_THRM CPU
MAIN_THRM

+3.3V

DC controller PCB
F-2-197

Cutting Off the Power (thermistor) Using the DC Controller (CPU)

The CPU monitors the output voltage (MAIN_THRM, SUB1_THRM) of the main/sub thermistor; when the voltage of MAIN_THRM is about 0.41 V or lower
(equivalent of 255 deg C or more), or that of SUB1_THRM is about 0.77 V or less (equivalent of 250 deg C or more), the machine assumes a fault in the fixing
assembly and executes the following:
- Uses ASIC (IC4) to cause the fixing heater drive signal (HEAT_ON1, HEAT_ON2) to go Low, thus turning off the heater.
As a result, the heater drive circuit (of the low-voltage power supply circuit) goes off to cut the power to the heater.
- Uses ASIC (IC4) to cause the relay drive signal (SOFT_RELAY_ON) to go Low.
As a result, the relay drive circuit (of the low-voltage power supply circuit) turns off the relay to cut off the power to the heater.

Cutting Off the Power Using the Safety Circuit

The machine monitors the output voltage (FSRTH1, FSRTH2) of the main/sub thermistor. If the output of FSRTH1 is about 0.38 V or less (equivalent of 258 deg
C or more), or that of FSRTH2 is about 0.7 V or less (equivalent of 255 deg C or more), the error detection circuit communicates ASIC (IC4) and, at the same time,
turns off the heater drive circuit (of the low-voltage power supply circuit) to cut off the power to the heater. In addition, the machine will cause HARD_RELAY_ON
to go Low to turn off the relay, thus cutting the power to the heater.

Cutting Off the Power Using a Thermal Switch

If the fixing heater overheats and the reading of the thermal switch exceeds about 270 deg C, the thermal switch (TP1) goes off to cut the power to the fixing heater.

2.6.3.2 Fixing System Error Code

0009-1395

LBP5960

T-2-55

Code Description Corrective action

E001
Fixing high temperature error
0000 Condition - Replace the fixing sleeve unit (main thermistor).
The reading of the main thermistor is 255 deg C or more. - Replace the DC controller PCB. *1
Cause
The main thermistor is faulty. The DC PCB is faulty.
0001 Condition - Replace the fixing sleeve unit (sub thermistor).
The reading of the sub thermistor is 290 deg C or more. - Replace the DC controller PCB. *1
Cause
The sub main thermistor is faulty. The DC PCB is faulty.
0002 Condition Replace the DC controller PCB. *1
The safety circuit (of the DC controller) has detected a high temperature
error (about 260 deg C or more).
Cause
The thermal switch is faulty. The low-temperature power supply PCB is
faulty. The DC PCB is faulty.
E003
Fixing low temperature error
0000 Condition - Replace the fixing sleeve unit (main thermistor).
In 20 sec after the fixing heater has gone on, the reading of the main - Replace the DC controller PCB. *1
thermistor is 120 deg C or less.
Cause
The main thermistor is faulty. The DC controller is faulty. The connector
has poor contact, or the harness is faulty.

2-158
 Chapter 2

Code Description Corrective action

0001 Condition - Replace the fixing sleeve unit (sub thermistor).

In the course of printing temperature control, the reading of the sub - Replace the DC controller PCB. *1
thermistor is 90 deg C or less for 1 sec or more.
Cause
The sub thermistor is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. The
connector has poor contact, or the harness is faulty.
0002 Condition - Replace the fixing sleeve unit (main thermistor).
During initial rotation, the reading of the main thermistor is 50 deg C or less - Replace the DC controller PCB. *1
0.2 sec after the start of temperature control.
Cause
The DC controller PCB is faulty. The connector has poor contact, or the
harness is faulty.
E805 Fixing fan error
0000 Fixing fan error - Replace the fixing fan.
Cause - Replace the DC controller PCB.
The fixing fan is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
0003 Controller fan - Replace the controller fan.
Cause - Replace the video controller PCB.
The fixing fan is faulty. The video controller PCB is faulty.
E808 Low-voltage power supply circuit fault (zero-cross error)

0000 The low-voltage power supply circuit fault (zero-cross error) - Replace the low-voltage power supply PCB.
Cause - Replace the DC control PCB.
The low-voltage power supply PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is
faulty.

2.6.3.3 Overview
0016-5414

LBP5970 / LBP5975

It is a function that detects overheating of the fixing assembly to cut off the power to the heater.
The machine is equipped with the following mechanisms that detect overheating of the fixing assembly to cut the power to the heater:
- cutting off the power using the DC controller (CPU)
- cutting off the power using a safety circuit
- cutting off the power using a thermal switch

Power supply

Fixing assembly
Zero-cross
Thermal switch detection
circuit
Sub thermistor

Main thermistor Relay drive SOFT_RELAY_ON

Safety circuit
circuit HARD_RELAY_ON

Fixing heater HEAT_ON1 IC4

drive circuit (triac) HEAT_ON2 ASIC

Low-temperature PCB
IC9
SUB1_THRM CPU
MAIN_THRM

+3.3V

DC controller PCB
F-2-198

Cutting Off the Power (thermistor) Using the DC Controller (CPU)

The CPU monitors the output voltage (MAIN_THRM, SUB1_THRM) of the main/sub thermistor; when the voltage of MAIN_THRM is about 0.41 V or lower
(equivalent of 255 deg C or more), or that of SUB1_THRM is about 0.77 V or less (equivalent of 250 deg C or more), the machine assumes a fault in the fixing
assembly and executes the following:
- Uses ASIC (IC4) to cause the fixing heater drive signal (HEAT_ON1, HEAT_ON2) to go Low, thus turning off the heater.
As a result, the heater drive circuit (of the low-voltage power supply circuit) goes off to cut the power to the heater.
- Uses ASIC (IC4) to cause the relay drive signal (SOFT_RELAY_ON) to go Low.
As a result, the relay drive circuit (of the low-voltage power supply circuit) turns off the relay to cut off the power to the heater.

Cutting Off the Power Using the Safety Circuit

The machine monitors the output voltage (FSRTH1, FSRTH2) of the main/sub thermistor. If the output of FSRTH1 is about 0.38 V or less (equivalent of 258 deg
C or more), or that of FSRTH2 is about 0.7 V or less (equivalent of 255 deg C or more), the error detection circuit communicates ASIC (IC4) and, at the same time,
turns off the heater drive circuit (of the low-voltage power supply circuit) to cut off the power to the heater. In addition, the machine will cause HARD_RELAY_ON
to go Low to turn off the relay, thus cutting the power to the heater.

2-159
 Chapter 2

Cutting Off the Power Using a Thermal Switch

If the fixing heater overheats and the reading of the thermal switch exceeds about 270 deg C, the thermal switch (TP1) goes off to cut the power to the fixing heater.

2.6.3.4 Fixing System Error Code

0016-5415

LBP5970 / LBP5975

T-2-56

Code Description Corrective action

E001
Fixing high temperature error
0000 Condition - Replace the fixing sleeve unit (main thermistor).
The reading of the main thermistor is 255 deg C or more. - Replace the DC controller PCB. *1
Cause
The main thermistor is faulty. The DC PCB is faulty.
0001 Condition - Replace the fixing sleeve unit (sub thermistor).
The reading of the sub thermistor is 290 deg C or more. - Replace the DC controller PCB. *1
Cause
The sub main thermistor is faulty. The DC PCB is faulty.
0002 Condition Replace the DC controller PCB. *1
The safety circuit (of the DC controller) has detected a high temperature
error (about 260 deg C or more).
Cause
The thermal switch is faulty. The low-temperature power supply PCB is
faulty. The DC PCB is faulty.
E003
Fixing low temperature error
0000 Condition - Replace the fixing sleeve unit (main thermistor).
In 20 sec after the fixing heater has gone on, the reading of the main - Replace the DC controller PCB. *1
thermistor is 120 deg C or less.
Cause
The main thermistor is faulty. The DC controller is faulty. The connector
has poor contact, or the harness is faulty.
0001 Condition - Replace the fixing sleeve unit (sub thermistor).
In the course of printing temperature control, the reading of the sub - Replace the DC controller PCB. *1
thermistor is 90 deg C or less for 1 sec or more.
Cause
The sub thermistor is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. The
connector has poor contact, or the harness is faulty.
0002 Condition - Replace the fixing sleeve unit (main thermistor).
During initial rotation, the reading of the main thermistor is 50 deg C or less - Replace the DC controller PCB. *1
0.2 sec after the start of temperature control.
Cause
The DC controller PCB is faulty. The connector has poor contact, or the
harness is faulty.
E805 Fixing fan error
0000 Fixing fan error - Replace the fixing fan.
Cause - Replace the DC controller PCB.
The fixing fan is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
0003 Controller fan - Replace the controller fan.
Cause - Replace the video controller PCB.
The fixing fan is faulty. The video controller PCB is faulty.
E808 Low-voltage power supply circuit fault (zero-cross error)

0000 The low-voltage power supply circuit fault (zero-cross error) - Replace the low-voltage power supply PCB.
Cause - Replace the DC control PCB.
The low-voltage power supply PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is
faulty.

2-160
 Chapter 2

2.7 EXTERNAL AND CONTROLS SYSTEM

2.7.1 Fan

2.7.1.1 Overview
0008-9228

LBP5960

The following shows the names and functions of the fans used in the machine:
T-2-57

Notation Name Description Error

fixing fan 1 Prevents condensation on the fixing guide. Lowers the temperature of paper to prevent adhesion at time of delivery. E805-0000
FM1

fixing fan 2 Prevents condensation on the fixing guide. Lowers the temperature of paper to prevent adhesion at time of delivery. E805-0000
FM2

cartridge fan Cools the drum cartridge.

FM3

power supply fan Cools the power supply PCB. E804-0000

FM4

Drive fan Cools the drive assembly on the right side of the machine.
FM5

controller fan Cools the inside of the controller box. E805-0003

FM6

FM5

FM6
FM2

FM1
FM3

FM4

F-2-199

2.7.1.2 Sequence of Operation

0013-4224

LBP5960

T-2-58

Notation Name Power-on Printing start Job end

during wait during standby during printing * wait (post rotation) during standby during sleep
(initial multiple
rotation)

fixing fan 1
FM1 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF

fixing fan 2
FM2 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF

cartridge fan
FM3 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF

power supply fan

FM4 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF

FM5 drive fan ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF

2-161
 Chapter 2

Notation Name Power-on Printing start Job end

controller fan
FM6 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF

The machine fan control consists in normal speed control only.

* If the inside temperature drops to 35 deg C or less, the machine turns off the fans for 60 sec, with the exception of the controller fan (which remains on).

2.7.1.3 Overview
0016-5416

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The following shows the names and functions of the fans used in the machine:
T-2-59

Notation Name Description Error

fixing fan 1 Prevents condensation on the fixing guide. Lowers the temperature of paper to prevent adhesion at time of delivery. E805-0000
FM1

fixing fan 2 Prevents condensation on the fixing guide. Lowers the temperature of paper to prevent adhesion at time of delivery. E805-0000
FM2

cartridge fan Cools the drum cartridge.

FM3

power supply fan Cools the power supply PCB. E804-0000

FM4

Drive fan Cools the drive assembly on the right side of the machine.
FM5

controller fan Cools the inside of the controller box. E805-0003

FM6

FM5

FM6
FM2

FM1
FM3

FM4

F-2-200

2.7.1.4 Sequence of Operation

0016-5417

LBP5970 / LBP5975

T-2-60

Notation Name Power-on Printing start Job end

during wait during standby during printing * wait (post rotation) during standby during sleep
(initial multiple
rotation)

fixing fan 1
FM1 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF

fixing fan 2
FM2 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF

cartridge fan
FM3 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF

2-162
 Chapter 2

Notation Name Power-on Printing start Job end

power supply fan

FM4 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF

FM5 drive fan ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF

controller fan
FM6 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF

The machine fan control consists in normal speed control only.

* If the inside temperature drops to 35 deg C or less, the machine turns off the fans for 60 sec, with the exception of the controller fan (which remains on).

2.7.2 Power Supply

2.7.2.1 Power Supply
2.7.2.1.1 Overview
0009-4992
LBP5960

The power supply block consists of the fixing control circuit and the low-voltage power supply circuit.
The fixing control circuit primarily controls the temperature of the fixing heater.
The low-voltage power supply circuit serves to generate DC power and supplies AC power to the fixing control circuit needed for printing.

Power supply block

Fixing assembly Fixing control

circuit

DC controller PCB

Low-voltage
AC input power supply
circuit

F-2-201

2.7.2.1.2 Power Supply

0013-4227
LBP5960

DC Power Supply
The machine uses the low-voltage power supply PCB to supply DC power. It also uses the PCB to supply power to accessories. The following table shows the
functions of PCBs and describes power distribution:
T-2-61

Name Description
Low-voltage power supply PCB Generates DC power (24 V, 5 V, 3.3 V). Supplies power to the controller power supply PCB and fixing assembly.

HVT1 Supplies AC and DC power to the drum cartridge.

HVT2 Supplies DC power to the ITB unit.
Fuse contact PCB Supplies DC power to the DC controller PCB.
Power switch Turns on/off the AC power to the low-voltage power supply PCB.
Interlock switch Turns on/off +24 V.

2-163
 Chapter 2

Fixing assembly

Power supply switch

+24R
Toner supply motor

Fuse
+24R
Scanner motor

Fuse Noise filter +24R

Cassette pickup clutch

Noise filter +24R Manual feed

pickup solenoid
Rectification circuit Fixing control
circuit +24V Y developing
sleeve clutch

+24V M developing
Switching circuit Switching circuit sleeve clutch

Interlock switch +24V C developing

(SW1) sleeve clutch

+24V Bk developing
Rectification +24V sleeve clutch
Transformer smoothing
circuit +6V +24V Fuse PCB

Rectification Regulator +5V +24V

smoothing IC Drum/ITB motor
circuit +5V
+3.3V
Transformer +24R
Rectification
+3.3R +5V YM development motor
smoothing
circuit +24R
+5V CBk development motor

+24V
Over-current/over-voltage +12R HVT1
detection circuit
+24V
HVT2

Low-voltage power supply PCB Regulator IC

+24V
+3.3V +3.3V
Sensor Optional feeder
+5V

Video controller PCB +3.3R +5V

Laser driver

+6V
Regulator IC +5V Waste toner case full
detection sensor PCB

+5V +5V Color displacement

Control panel +3.3R sensor PCB A

DC controller PCB +5V Color displacement

sensor PCB

F-2-202

The low-voltage power supply circuit serves to convert AC power into DC power for supply to various loads.
The low-voltage power supply circuit is supplied with AC power when the power switch is turned on.
The AC power is then converted into +24V, +5V, and +3.3V, needed for the operation of the printer as a whole. The +24V power is used to drive such loads as
motors, solenoids, and clutches, and is also sent to HVT1 and HVT2; +5V is sent to the video controller, sensors, and ICs on the DC controller PCB.
The +24V power is supplied to various motors and accessories; it is sent by way of the interlock switch (SW1) to reach HVT1, HVT2, drum/ITB motor, Y/
M_development motor, C/Bk_development motor, and various solenoids/clutches; it is stopped when the front cover is opened (i.e., when the interlock switch
(SW1) goes off to stop the power supply).
Sleep Mode
When the printer is not operating or not in use, the machine may remain in sleep mode to save on power consumption.
Sleep mode may be either of the following 2:
- sleep mode 1 (panel off mode)
- sleep mode 2 (printer sleep mode)

Sleep mode settings may be made by making the following selections:

Settings Menu>CONTROL MENU>POWER SAVE MODE
settings
OFF
PANEL OFF*
ON (length to shift: 5 min, 15 min, 30 min, 60 min, 180 min (default: 30 min))
*: default

Sleep Mode 1 (panel off mode)

When no panel operation is made and, no data arrives from the PC, the video controller PCB sends a signal (DDIP_POWER_READY) to the DC controller PCB
(ultimately reaching the low-voltage power supply PCB) after a time interval set in 'POWER SAVE TIME' or in 'POWER SAVE TIME' of 'TIMER SETTINGS'.
In response, the low-voltage power supply PCB turns off the continuous power supply, and the machine enters sleep mode 1, in which only the +5V (+6V) of the
control panel is stopped and a 0-sec warm-up is still possible.

Sleep Mode 2 (printer sleep mode)

2-164
 Chapter 2

When the machine remains ready for printing for 15 min or more after power-on or after the end of sleep mode 1, the video controller PCB sends a signal
(DDIP_POWER_READY) to the DC controller PCB (ultimately reaching the low-voltage power supply PCB) so that the low-voltage power supply PCB turns off
the continuous power supply to shift to sleep mode 1 (only in the absence of a service call).
In this mode, warm-up time will be about 30 sec; the rate of saving, on the other hand, is high, as the continuous power supply (24V, 5V, 3.3V) is left without power.
2.7.2.2 Other Function
2.7.2.2.1 Protective Mechanisms
0008-9226
LBP5960

The low-voltage power supply circuit is equipped with a mechanism (overcurrent protection function, over-voltage protection function) that automatically shuts off
the output voltage in response to an over-current or error voltage caused by a fault (e.g., short circuit) on the load side.
If the DC voltage is absent from the low-voltage power supply, the over-current or over-voltage protection function is likely to have gone on. Turn off the power
switch (SW1), and correct the fault on the load side; thereafter, turn the power back on. (Be sure to wait for 3 min or more before turning the power back on.)
In addition to these, the circuit is equipped with 2 fuses (FU1, FU2) that cut off the power in response to an over-current on the AC line.

2.8 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

2.8.1 Construction

2.8.1.1 Overview
0008-9312

LBP5960

The engine control system is the core of the machine, governing the mechanisms associated with its laser exposure system, image formation system, pickup/trans-
port/delivery system, fixing system, and externals/controls.
The engine control system consists of the DC controller PCB and the video controller PCB. The following is a block diagram of the engine control system, serving
the functions that follow:

Engine control system Laser exposure system

DC controller PCB
Image formation system

Pickup/transport/
delivery system

Video controller PCB Fixing system

Externals/controls

F-2-203

2.8.1.2 Overview
0016-5421

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The engine control system is the core of the machine, governing the mechanisms associated with its laser exposure system, image formation system, pickup/trans-
port/delivery system, fixing system, and externals/controls.
The engine control system consists of the DC controller PCB and the video controller PCB. The following is a block diagram of the engine control system, serving
the functions that follow:

Engine control system Laser exposure system

DC controller PCB
Image formation system

Pickup/transport/
delivery system

Video controller PCB Fixing system

Externals/controls

F-2-204

2.8.2 DC Controller

2.8.2.1 Overview
0008-9313

LBP5960

The DC controller serves to control the sequence of various operations of the machine, and is controlled by the CPU of the DC controller.
When the power is turned on, the DC controller is provided with DC power by the power supply, thus starting control of printer operation. Thereafter, when the
machine enters a standby state, the CPU starts to drive various loads (e.g., laser diode, motors, solenoids) according to the print commands and image data arriving
from the video controller.

2-165
 Chapter 2

DC controller PCB

Solenoid (x5)
Fixing fan 1 Clutch (x2)

Switch
Fixing fan 2 Switch (x1)
Sensor (x20)

CK development
motor Fuse contact PCB

YM development
Cartridge fan
motor

Drum/
Power supply fan
ITB motor

Toner supply
Drive fan
motor

IC18/IC20/IC22/IC23 IC4
Toner supply
Toner supply motor RUSTY2 HVT1 Drum cartridge (x4)
motor YMCK
driver IC

IC16
Registration
Registration motor HVT2 ITB unit
motor
driver IC

IC17 Waste toner case full sensor

Pickup motor
Pickup motor driver IC PCB

Color displacement sensor

PCB A
Laser/scanner block

IC1 Color displacement sensor

Reset IC PCB B
Scanner motor

IC2
Laser driver CK Fixing motor Fixing motor
driver IC

IC5
Laser driver YM Duplexing motor Duplexing motor
driver IC

IC13 IC9
MAVIS CPU
BD PCB Optional feeder

+3.3V
Video controller
+5V Low-voltage power
+24V supply PCB

: AC line
IC21
: multiple control line
EEPROM
Machine outside Fixing assembly
: single control line environment sensor

F-2-205

2.8.2.2 Operation of Various Blocks

0008-9315

LBP5960

CPU (IC9)
The machine's CPU (IC9) is a 16-bit single-chip computer, possessing a built-in ROM and RAM. It primarily performs the following according to the programs
stored in the ROM:
- controls the sequence of operation of the printer engine.
- controls the drive of the fixing motor and the duplexing motor.
- controls writing to/reading from EEPROM.
- controls the machine outside environment sensor.
- controls the drive of the optional feeder.

ASIC (IC4)
ASIC (IC4) serves to control the operation of the printer according to the instructions from the CPU:
- controls the drive of various motors.
- controls the various sensors/switches.
- controls the clutches/solenoids.
- controls HVT1/HVT2.

ASIC (IC13)
ASIC (IC4) controls the operation of the printer according to the instructions from the CPU and the drive of the laser scanner motor and the laser driver of the laser/
scanner block:
- controls the laser/scanner.
- controls the communication with the video controller.

Reset IC (IC1)
IC1 monitors the +3.3V voltage, resetting CPU and ASIC at power-on.

2-166
 Chapter 2

EEPROM (IC18 (IC21))

It serves to store various backup data.

Fixing Motor Driver IC (IC2)

It serves to control the fixing motor.
Duplexing Motor Driver IC (IC5)
It serves to control the duplexing motor.

Registration Motor Driver IC (IC16)

It serves to control the registration motor.

Pickup Motor Driver IC (IC17)

It controls the pickup motor.

Toner Supply Motor Control Circuit (IC18, IC20, IC22, IC23 )

It controls the toner supply motor.

J115 J123 J114 J113 J112 J111 J108

J126
J130
IC23

IC22 IC20 IC18

J129 J110

IC16
J121 J109
J125 IC4
IC5
J122
J116
IC17 IC9
J118 IC2

J107
J105 J104 IC13 IC1
J117 J128 J127
ICS18
(IC21) J124
J119 J106 J102

J101 J103
F-2-206

2.8.2.3 Controlling the Motors and Fans

0013-4252

LBP5960

The machine uses 9 DC motors and 8 stepping motors.

The following shows the specifications of various motors:
T-2-62

Name Description Type Direction Speed Fault detection

Drives the following: photosensitive drum, waste DC motor CW full, 1/2 yes
toner feedscrew, primary charging roller, secondary
transfer roller, ITB cleaning feedscrew.
Drum/ITB motor(M1)

Drives the following: developing cylinder, toner DC motor CW 1 speed yes

feedscrew.
Y/M_development motor(M2)

Drives the following: developing cylinder, toner DC motor CW 1 speed yes

feedscrew.
C/Bk_development motor(M3)

Drives the following: pressure roller, primary transfer stepping motor CW full speed, 1/2 speed no
outside roller.
Fixing motor(M4)

Drives the following: cassette pull-off roller, cassette stepping motor CW full speed, 1/2 speed no
pickup roller, manual feeder pull-off roller, manual
Pickup motor(M5) feeder pickup roller.

drives the following: registration roller. stepping motor CW/CCW full speed, 1/2 speed no
Registration motor(M6)

Drives the outside delivery roller, inside delivery stepping motor CW/CCW full speed, 1/2 speed no
roller, duplexing pull-off roller, duplexing roller.
Duplexing motor(M7)

2-167
 Chapter 2

Name Description Type Direction Speed Fault detection

Drives the following: stirring plate, mixing plate. stepping motor CW/CCW 1 speed no
Y toner supply motor(M8)

Drives the following: stirring plate, mixing plate. stepping motor CW/CCW 1 speed no
M toner supply motor(M9)

Drives the following: stirring plate, mixing plate. stepping motor CW/CCW 1 speed no
C toner supply motor(M10)

Drives the following: stirring plate, mixing plate. stepping motor CW/CCW 1 speed no
Bk toner supply motor(M11)

Drives the following: waste toner feedscrew, case DC motor CW 1 speed yes
Waste toner motor(M12) vibrating lever.

Prevents condensation on the fixing guide. Lowers the DC motor CW 1 speed yes
Fixing fan(FM1) paper temperature to prevent adhesion of paper at time
of delivery.

Prevents condensation on the fixing guide. Lowers DC motor CW 1 speed yes

paper temperature to prevent adhesion of paper at time
Fixing fan(FM2) of delivery.

Cools the drum cartridge. DC motor CW 1 speed yes

Cartridge fan(FM3)

Cools the power supply PCB. DC motor CW 1 speed yes

Power supply fan(FM4)

Drive fan(FM5) Cools the drive assembly on the right side of the DC motor CW 1 speed yes
machine.

Cools the inside of the controller box. DC motor CW 1 speed yes

Controller fan(FM6)

2.8.2.4 Overview
0016-5422

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The DC controller serves to control the sequence of various operations of the machine, and is controlled by the CPU of the DC controller.
When the power is turned on, the DC controller is provided with DC power by the power supply, thus starting control of printer operation. Thereafter, when the
machine enters a standby state, the CPU starts to drive various loads (e.g., laser diode, motors, solenoids) according to the print commands and image data arriving
from the video controller.

2-168
 Chapter 2

DC controller PCB

Solenoid (x5)
Fixing fan 1 Clutch (x2)

Switch
Fixing fan 2 Switch (x1)
Sensor (x20)

CK development
motor Fuse contact PCB

YM development
Cartridge fan
motor

Drum/
Power supply fan
ITB motor

Toner supply
Drive fan
motor

IC18/IC20/IC22/IC23 IC4
Toner supply
Toner supply motor RUSTY2 HVT1 Drum cartridge (x4)
motor YMCK
driver IC

IC16
Registration
Registration motor HVT2 ITB unit
motor
driver IC

IC17 Waste toner case full sensor

Pickup motor
Pickup motor driver IC PCB

Color displacement sensor

PCB A
Laser/scanner block

IC1 Color displacement sensor

Reset IC PCB B
Scanner motor

IC2
Laser driver CK Fixing motor Fixing motor
driver IC

IC5
Laser driver YM Duplexing motor Duplexing motor
driver IC

IC13 IC9
MAVIS CPU
BD PCB Optional feeder

+3.3V
Video controller
+5V Low-voltage power
+24V supply PCB

: AC line
IC21
: multiple control line
EEPROM
Machine outside Fixing assembly
: single control line environment sensor

F-2-207

2.8.2.5 Operation of Various Blocks

0016-5423

LBP5970 / LBP5975

CPU (IC9)
The machine's CPU (IC9) is a 16-bit single-chip computer, possessing a built-in ROM and RAM. It primarily performs the following according to the programs
stored in the ROM:
- controls the sequence of operation of the printer engine.
- controls the drive of the fixing motor and the duplexing motor.
- controls writing to/reading from EEPROM.
- controls the machine outside environment sensor.
- controls the drive of the optional feeder.

ASIC (IC4)
ASIC (IC4) serves to control the operation of the printer according to the instructions from the CPU:
- controls the drive of various motors.
- controls the various sensors/switches.
- controls the clutches/solenoids.
- controls HVT1/HVT2.

ASIC (IC13)
ASIC (IC4) controls the operation of the printer according to the instructions from the CPU and the drive of the laser scanner motor and the laser driver of the laser/
scanner block:
- controls the laser/scanner.
- controls the communication with the video controller.

Reset IC (IC1)
IC1 monitors the +3.3V voltage, resetting CPU and ASIC at power-on.

2-169
 Chapter 2

EEPROM (IC18 (IC21))

It serves to store various backup data.

Fixing Motor Driver IC (IC2)

It serves to control the fixing motor.
Duplexing Motor Driver IC (IC5)
It serves to control the duplexing motor.

Registration Motor Driver IC (IC16)

It serves to control the registration motor.

Pickup Motor Driver IC (IC17)

It controls the pickup motor.

Toner Supply Motor Control Circuit (IC18, IC20, IC22, IC23 )

It controls the toner supply motor.

J115 J123 J114 J113 J112 J111 J108

J126
J130
IC23

IC22 IC20 IC18

J129 J110

IC16
J121 J109
J125 IC4
IC5
J122
J116
IC17 IC9
J118 IC2

J107
J105 J104 IC13 IC1
J117 J128 J127
ICS19 J124
J119 J106 J102

J101 J103
F-2-208

2.8.2.6 Controlling the Motors and Fans

0016-5424

LBP5970 / LBP5975

ñ{ã@Ç™égópǵǃǢÇÈÉÇÅ[É^ÇÕÅADCÉÇÅ[É^9å¬ÅAÉXÉeÉbÉsÉìÉOÉÇÅ[É^8å¬ÇÝdžÇÈÅB
ñ{ã@ÇÝégópǵǃǢÇÈäeÉÇÅ[É^ÇÃédólÇšé¶Ç²ÅB
The machine uses 9 DC motors and 8 stepping motors.
The following shows the specifications of various motors:
T-2-63

Name Description Type Direction Speed Fault detection

Drives the following: photosensitive drum, waste DC motor CW full, 1/2 yes
toner feedscrew, primary charging roller, secondary
transfer roller, ITB cleaning feedscrew.
Drum/ITB motor(M1)

Drives the following: developing cylinder, toner DC motor CW 1 speed yes

feedscrew.
Y/M_development motor(M2)

Drives the following: developing cylinder, toner DC motor CW 1 speed yes

feedscrew.
C/Bk_development motor(M3)

Drives the following: pressure roller, primary transfer stepping motor CW full speed, 1/2 speed no
outside roller.
Fixing motor(M4)

Drives the following: cassette pull-off roller, cassette stepping motor CW full speed, 1/2 speed no
pickup roller, manual feeder pull-off roller, manual
Pickup motor(M5) feeder pickup roller.

drives the following: registration roller. stepping motor CW/CCW full speed, 1/2 speed no
Registration motor(M6)

2-170
 Chapter 2

Name Description Type Direction Speed Fault detection

Drives the outside delivery roller, inside delivery stepping motor CW/CCW full speed, 1/2 speed no
roller, duplexing pull-off roller, duplexing roller.
Duplexing motor(M7)

Drives the following: stirring plate, mixing plate. stepping motor CW/CCW 1 speed no
Y toner supply motor(M8)

Drives the following: stirring plate, mixing plate. stepping motor CW/CCW 1 speed no
M toner supply motor(M9)

Drives the following: stirring plate, mixing plate. stepping motor CW/CCW 1 speed no
C toner supply motor(M10)

Drives the following: stirring plate, mixing plate. stepping motor CW/CCW 1 speed no
Bk toner supply motor(M11)

Drives the following: waste toner feedscrew, case DC motor CW 1 speed yes
Waste toner motor(M12) vibrating lever.

Prevents condensation on the fixing guide. Lowers the DC motor CW 1 speed yes
Fixing fan(FM1) paper temperature to prevent adhesion of paper at time
of delivery.

Prevents condensation on the fixing guide. Lowers DC motor CW 1 speed yes

paper temperature to prevent adhesion of paper at time
Fixing fan(FM2) of delivery.

Cools the drum cartridge. DC motor CW 1 speed yes

Cartridge fan(FM3)

Cools the power supply PCB. DC motor CW 1 speed yes

Power supply fan(FM4)

Drive fan(FM5) Cools the drive assembly on the right side of the DC motor CW 1 speed yes
machine.

Cools the inside of the controller box. DC motor CW 1 speed yes

Controller fan(FM6)

2.8.3 Video Controller PCB

2.8.3.1 Overview
0009-5034

LBP5960

The video controller receives print information from external devices (e.g., host computer) through interface cables.
Such print information contains commands used to exchange printer status and unique information as well as PDL data.
The PDL data is converted into a display list by the display list generation circuit, and turned into bitmap data for output to the DC controller. A check may be made
on the printer status using an external device.

2-171
 Chapter 2

PDL data
LIPS printer
driver
Video controller PCB
Color image
processing
circuit

DC controller PCB Display list

generation
circui
Bitmap
Display List

Compression/ Bitmap
decompression Bit map conversion
circuit

Compression data

HDD (optional)
F-2-209

2.8.3.2 Overview
0018-7425

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The video controller receives print information from external devices (e.g., host computer) through interface cables.
Such print information contains commands used to exchange printer status and unique information as well as PDL data.
The PDL data is converted into a display list by the display list generation circuit, and turned into bitmap data for output to the DC controller. A check may be made
on the printer status using an external device.

PDL data
LIPS printer
driver
Video controller PCB
Color image
processing
circuit

DC controller PCB Display list

generation
circui
Bitmap
Display List

Compression/ Bitmap
decompression Bit map conversion
circuit

Compression data

HDD (optional)
F-2-210

2.8.3.3 Outline of the Block (operation)

0009-5035

LBP5960

2-172
 Chapter 2

External device

Network USB interface

Network USB Controller

ROM(IC2) Chip(IC7)
interface(IC3)
Clock(IC25)

ROM(IC21) ASIC (IC19) Centronics interface

buffer(IC29)

Connection
interface
EEPROM(IC11) CPU(IC29)

F-2-211

T-2-64

No. Name Description

IC2 Flash ROM ROM for storage of programs
IC3 transceiver IC drive for Ethernet signal
IC6 reset IC system reset
IC7 USB controller USB interface control
IC9 power supply IC CPU, DC-DC converter for ASIC core power supply
IC11S EEPROM EEPROM for storage of panel settings
IC19 ASIC system control
IC21 mask ROM mask ROM for fonts
IC24 EEPROM EEPROM for MAC address
IC25 RTC circuit for clock
IC28 voltage regulator CPU, ASIC I/O power supply
IC29 CPU system control
IC40 voltage regulator power supply for Centronics
J1 slot for DC controller connection -
J2 connector for Centronics (IEEE1284) -
J3 RJ-45k connector (100/10Base-T) -
J4 USB connector -
J5 connector for optional HDD -
J6 slot for LIO2 slot (network board) -
J7 slot 1 for RAM DIMM standard 64SDRAM connection
J8 slot 1 for expansion RAM DIMM slot for expansion RAM 128/256MB
J9 slot 2 for RAM DIMM standard 64SDERAM connection
J10 slot for expansion ROM connection for control ROM/hard disk expansion
J11 - not used
J101 - not used

2-173
 Chapter 2

IC28 J4
J5 IC7
J7
IC24
IC6
IC11S
IC9
J3

IC29 IC3
J6

IC19
J13
BAT1 J2
IC30
J11

J10 J9
J101 IC25

J8

IC2 IC21

J1
F-2-212

2.8.3.4 Outline of the Block (operation)

0018-7427

LBP5970 / LBP5975

External
Network
device

ROMDIMM Network USB

(J2000) I/F(IC58) interface

Clock(IC60) ASIC(IC2)

EEPROM(IC47) CPU(IC1) ASIC(IC39)

F-2-213

T-2-65

No. Name Description

IC1 CPU system control
IC2 ASIC system control
IC6 reset IC system reset
IC21 power supply IC CPU, DC-DC converter for ASIC core power supply
IC39 ASIC system control
IC47S EEPROM EEPROM for storage of panel settings
IC57 EEPROM EEPROM for MAC address
IC58 transceiver IC drive for Ethernet signal
IC60 RTC circuit for clock
J1 slot for DC controller connection -
J2 connector for optional HDD -
J4 USB connector USB memory connection for version up
J5 USB connector -
J6 slot 1 for expansion RAM DIMM slot for expansion RAM 64/128/256MB
J7 slot 1 for RAM DIMM standard 64SDERAM connection
J11 RJ-45k connector (100/10Base-T) -
J13 connector for optional network board -
J2000 slot for ROM DIMM ROMDIMM for program storage
J2001 slot for expansion ROM connection for control ROM

2-174
 Chapter 2

J7
IC47S

J11
IC57 J6
J13
IC58

IC2
IC1

J2000

IC39
J4
J2
J2001
IC60
J5
IC6
IC21
BAT1

F-2-214

2-175
Chapter 3 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
 Contents

Contents

3.1 Before Parts Replacement ..............................................................................................................................................3-1

3.1.1 General ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Arrangement of the External Covers ........................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.3 Points to Note About the Optional HDD ..................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.4 Removing the Toner Cartridge .................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.5 Removing the Drum Cartridge..................................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.6 General ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.1.7 Arrangement of the External Covers ........................................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.1.8 Points to Note About the Optional HDD ..................................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.1.9 Removing the Toner Cartridge .................................................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.1.10 Removing the Drum Cartridge................................................................................................................................................... 3-8
3.2 EXTERNAL AND CONTROLS SYSTEM ................................................................................................................3-10
3.2.1 Rear Cover ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-10
3.2.1.1 Removing the Rear Cover .............................................................................................................................................................................3-10
3.2.1.2 Detaching Rear Cover ...................................................................................................................................................................................3-10
3.2.2 Right Cover ................................................................................................................................................................................ 3-10
3.2.2.1 Preparation for Removing the Right Cover ..................................................................................................................................................3-10
3.2.2.2 Removing the Right Cover............................................................................................................................................................................3-10
3.2.2.3 Before Detaching Right Cover......................................................................................................................................................................3-11
3.2.2.4 Detaching Right Cover..................................................................................................................................................................................3-11
3.2.3 Inside Right Cover ..................................................................................................................................................................... 3-11
3.2.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Inside Right Cover........................................................................................................................................3-11
3.2.3.2 Removing the Inside Right Cover.................................................................................................................................................................3-11
3.2.3.3 Before Detaching Inner Right Cover ............................................................................................................................................................3-11
3.2.3.4 Detaching Inner Right Cover ........................................................................................................................................................................3-12
3.2.4 Left Cover .................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-12
3.2.4.1 Before Detaching Left Cover ........................................................................................................................................................................3-12
3.2.4.2 Detaching Left Cover ....................................................................................................................................................................................3-12
3.2.4.3 Removing the Left Cover..............................................................................................................................................................................3-13
3.2.5 Inside Left Cover ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-14
3.2.5.1 Before Detaching Inner Left Cover...............................................................................................................................................................3-14
3.2.5.2 Preparation for Removing the Inside Left Cover ..........................................................................................................................................3-14
3.2.5.3 Detaching Inner Left Cover ..........................................................................................................................................................................3-14
3.2.5.4 Removing the Inside Left Cover ...................................................................................................................................................................3-14
3.2.6 Upper Cover............................................................................................................................................................................... 3-14
3.2.6.1 Before Detaching Upper Cover.....................................................................................................................................................................3-14
3.2.6.2 Detaching Upper Cover.................................................................................................................................................................................3-15
3.2.6.3 Preparation for Removing the Upper Cover .................................................................................................................................................3-16
3.2.6.4 Removing the Upper Cover ..........................................................................................................................................................................3-16
3.2.7 Front Cover ................................................................................................................................................................................ 3-17
3.2.7.1 Before Detaching Front Cover ......................................................................................................................................................................3-17
3.2.7.2 Detaching Front Cover ..................................................................................................................................................................................3-17
3.2.7.3 Preparation for Removing the Front Cover...................................................................................................................................................3-18
3.2.7.4 Removing the Front Cover............................................................................................................................................................................3-18
3.2.8 Front Cover (left) ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-19
3.2.8.1 Before Detaching Front Cover (Left)............................................................................................................................................................3-19
3.2.8.2 Detaching Front Cover (Left)........................................................................................................................................................................3-19
3.2.8.3 Preparation for Removing the Front Cover (left)..........................................................................................................................................3-19
3.2.8.4 Removing the Front Cover (left)...................................................................................................................................................................3-20
3.2.9 Front Cover (right) ..................................................................................................................................................................... 3-20
3.2.9.1 Before Detaching Front Cover (Right) .........................................................................................................................................................3-20
3.2.9.2 Detaching Front Cover (Right) .....................................................................................................................................................................3-20
3.2.9.3 Preparation for Removing the Front Cover (right) .......................................................................................................................................3-21
Contents

3.2.9.4 Removing the Front Cover (right) ................................................................................................................................................................ 3-21

3.2.10 Inside Front Cover (right) ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-21
3.2.10.1 Before Detaching Inner Front Cover (Right).............................................................................................................................................. 3-21
3.2.10.2 Preparation for Removing the Inside Front Cover (right) .......................................................................................................................... 3-22
3.2.10.3 Removing the Inside Front Cover (right) ................................................................................................................................................... 3-22
3.2.10.4 Detaching Inner Front Cover (Right).......................................................................................................................................................... 3-22
3.2.11 Inside Front Cover (left) .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-22
3.2.11.1 Removing the Inside Front Cover (left)...................................................................................................................................................... 3-22
3.2.11.2 Before Detaching Inner Front Cover (Left) ................................................................................................................................................ 3-23
3.2.11.3 Detaching Inner Front Cover (Left)............................................................................................................................................................ 3-23
3.2.12 Waste Toner Cover .................................................................................................................................................................. 3-23
3.2.12.1 Removing the Waste Toner Cover.............................................................................................................................................................. 3-23
3.2.12.2 Detaching Waste Toner Cover.................................................................................................................................................................... 3-23
3.2.13 Controller Box ......................................................................................................................................................................... 3-24
3.2.13.1 Before Removing Controller Box............................................................................................................................................................... 3-24
3.2.13.2 Removing the Controller Box..................................................................................................................................................................... 3-25
3.2.13.3 Removing Controller Box........................................................................................................................................................................... 3-25
3.2.14 DC Controller PCB .................................................................................................................................................................. 3-26
3.2.14.1 Preparation for Removing the DC Controller PCB .................................................................................................................................... 3-26
3.2.14.2 Removing the DC Controller PCB ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-26
3.2.14.3 Before Removing DC Controller PCB ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-26
3.2.14.4 Removing DC Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................................................... 3-27
3.2.15 Video Controller PCB.............................................................................................................................................................. 3-27
3.2.15.1 Preparation for Removing the Video Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................ 3-27
3.2.15.2 Before Removing Video Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................................... 3-27
3.2.15.3 Removing the Video Controller PCB ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-27
3.2.15.4 Removing Video Controller PCB ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-28
3.2.16 HDD......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-28
3.2.16.1 Removing the HDD .................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-28
3.2.17 Low-Voltage Power Supply Assembly.................................................................................................................................... 3-29
3.2.17.1 Preparation for Removing the Low-Voltage Power Supply Unit............................................................................................................... 3-29
3.2.17.2 Removing the Low-Voltage Power Supply Unit ........................................................................................................................................ 3-29
3.2.17.3 Before Removing Low-Voltage Power Unit .............................................................................................................................................. 3-29
3.2.17.4 Removing Low-Voltage Power Unit .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-29
3.2.18 All Night Power Supply PCB .................................................................................................................................................. 3-30
3.2.18.1 Before Removing All-Night Power Supply PCB ....................................................................................................................................... 3-30
3.2.18.2 Removing All-Night Power Supply PCB ................................................................................................................................................... 3-30
3.2.19 HVT1 ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-30
3.2.19.1 Preparation for Removing the HVT1.......................................................................................................................................................... 3-30
3.2.19.2 Removing the HVT1................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-30
3.2.19.3 Before Removing HVT1............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-32
3.2.19.4 Removing HVT1......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-32
3.2.20 HVT2 ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-33
3.2.20.1 Before Removing HVT2............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-33
3.2.20.2 Preparation for Removing the HVT2.......................................................................................................................................................... 3-33
3.2.20.3 Removing HVT2......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-33
3.2.20.4 Removing the HVT2................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-34
3.2.21 Fuse Contact PCB .................................................................................................................................................................... 3-34
3.2.21.1 Preparation for Removing the Fuse Contact PCB ...................................................................................................................................... 3-34
3.2.21.2 Removing the Fuse Contact PCB ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-35
3.2.21.3 Before Removing Fuse Contact PCB ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-36
3.2.21.4 Removing Fuse Contact PCB ..................................................................................................................................................................... 3-36
3.2.22 Color Displacement Sensor PCB A ......................................................................................................................................... 3-37
3.2.22.1 Removing the Color Displacement Sensor PCB A .................................................................................................................................... 3-37
3.2.22.2 Before Removing Color Displacement Sensor PCB A .............................................................................................................................. 3-38
3.2.22.3 Removing Color Displacement Sensor PCB A .......................................................................................................................................... 3-38
3.2.23 Color Displacement Sensor PCB B ......................................................................................................................................... 3-39
3.2.23.1 Before Removing Color Displacement Sensor PCB B............................................................................................................................... 3-39
3.2.23.2 Removing Color Displacement Sensor PCB B........................................................................................................................................... 3-39
3.2.23.3 Removing the Color Displacement Sensor PCB B..................................................................................................................................... 3-40
 Contents

3.2.24 Machine Outside Environment Sensor .................................................................................................................................... 3-41

3.2.24.1 Preparation for Removing the Machine Outside Environment Sensor .......................................................................................................3-41
3.2.24.2 Removing the Machine Outside Environment Sensor ................................................................................................................................3-41
3.2.24.3 Before Removing External Environment Sensor ........................................................................................................................................3-41
3.2.24.4 Removing External Environment Sensor....................................................................................................................................................3-41
3.2.25 Interlock Switch ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-42
3.2.25.1 Preparation for Removing the Interlock Switch..........................................................................................................................................3-42
3.2.25.2 Removing the Interlock Switch...................................................................................................................................................................3-42
3.2.25.3 Before Removing Inter Lock Switch ..........................................................................................................................................................3-42
3.2.25.4 Removing Inter Lock Switch ......................................................................................................................................................................3-42
3.2.26 Cartridge Fan ........................................................................................................................................................................... 3-43
3.2.26.1 Removing the Cartridge Fan .......................................................................................................................................................................3-43
3.2.26.2 Before Removing Cartridge Fan .................................................................................................................................................................3-43
3.2.26.3 Removing Cartridge Fan .............................................................................................................................................................................3-43
3.2.27 Power Supply Fan .................................................................................................................................................................... 3-44
3.2.27.1 Removing the Power Supply Fan................................................................................................................................................................3-44
3.2.27.2 Before Removing Power Supply Fan..........................................................................................................................................................3-44
3.2.27.3 Removing Power Supply Fan......................................................................................................................................................................3-44
3.2.28 Drive Fan ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-44
3.2.28.1 Before Removing Drive Fan .......................................................................................................................................................................3-44
3.2.28.2 Preparation for Removing the Drive Fan ....................................................................................................................................................3-44
3.2.28.3 Removing Drive Fan ...................................................................................................................................................................................3-44
3.2.28.4 Removing the Drive Fan .............................................................................................................................................................................3-45
3.2.29 Fixing Fan 1 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-45
3.2.29.1 Before Removing Fixing Fan 1...................................................................................................................................................................3-45
3.2.29.2 Removing Fixing Fan 1...............................................................................................................................................................................3-45
3.2.29.3 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Fan 1................................................................................................................................................3-46
3.2.29.4 Removing the Fixing Fan 1.........................................................................................................................................................................3-46
3.2.30 Fixing Fan 2 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-46
3.2.30.1 Before Removing Fixing Fan 2...................................................................................................................................................................3-46
3.2.30.2 Removing Fixing Fan 2...............................................................................................................................................................................3-47
3.2.30.3 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Fan 2................................................................................................................................................3-47
3.2.30.4 Removing the Fixing Fan 2.........................................................................................................................................................................3-47
3.2.31 Controller Fan .......................................................................................................................................................................... 3-47
3.2.31.1 Preparation for Removing the Controller Fan.............................................................................................................................................3-47
3.2.31.2 Removing the Controller Fan......................................................................................................................................................................3-47
3.2.31.3 Before Removing Controller Fan................................................................................................................................................................3-48
3.2.31.4 Removing Controller Fan............................................................................................................................................................................3-48
3.2.32 Color Displacement Sensor Shutter Solenoid.......................................................................................................................... 3-48
3.2.32.1 Removing the Color Displacement Sensor Solenoid ..................................................................................................................................3-48
3.2.32.2 Before Removing Color Displacement Sensor Shutter Solenoid ...............................................................................................................3-50
3.2.32.3 Removing Color Displacement Sensor Shutter Solenoid ...........................................................................................................................3-50
3.3 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM...................................................................................................................................3-50
3.3.1 Laser Scanner Unit..................................................................................................................................................................... 3-50
3.3.1.1 Preparation for Removing the Laser Scanner Unit .......................................................................................................................................3-50
3.3.1.2 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit ................................................................................................................................................................3-51
3.3.1.3 After Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit .......................................................................................................................................................3-54
3.3.1.4 Before Removing Laser Scanner Unit ..........................................................................................................................................................3-54
3.3.1.5 Removing Laser Scanner Unit ......................................................................................................................................................................3-54
3.3.1.6 Points to Note When Replacing Laser Scanner Unit ....................................................................................................................................3-58
3.4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM ...............................................................................................................................3-59
3.4.1 Drum/ITB Motor........................................................................................................................................................................ 3-59
3.4.1.1 Preparation for Removing the Drum/ITB Motor ..........................................................................................................................................3-59
3.4.1.2 Removing the Drum/ITB Motor ...................................................................................................................................................................3-59
3.4.1.3 Before Removing Drum/ITB Motor .............................................................................................................................................................3-59
3.4.1.4 Removing Drum/ITB Motor .........................................................................................................................................................................3-59
3.4.2 Hopper Drive Unit (Y)............................................................................................................................................................... 3-60
3.4.2.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Drive Unit (Y) .................................................................................................................................3-60
3.4.2.2 Removing the Hopper Drive Unit (Y) ..........................................................................................................................................................3-60
3.4.2.3 Before Removing Hopper Drive Unit (Y) ....................................................................................................................................................3-60
Contents

3.4.2.4 Removing Hopper Drive Unit (Y) ................................................................................................................................................................ 3-61

3.4.3 Hopper Drive Unit (M) .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-61
3.4.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Drive Unit (M) ................................................................................................................................ 3-61
3.4.3.2 Removing the Hopper Drive Unit (M) ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-61
3.4.3.3 Before Removing Hopper Drive Unit (M) ................................................................................................................................................... 3-61
3.4.3.4 Removing Hopper Drive Unit (M) ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-61
3.4.4 Hopper Drive Unit (C) ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-62
3.4.4.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Drive Unit (C) ................................................................................................................................. 3-62
3.4.4.2 Removing the Hopper Drive Unit (C) .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-62
3.4.4.3 Before Removing Hopper Drive Unit (C) .................................................................................................................................................... 3-62
3.4.4.4 Removing Hopper Drive Unit (C) ................................................................................................................................................................ 3-62
3.4.5 Hopper Drive Unit (Bk) ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-62
3.4.5.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Drive Unit (Bk) ............................................................................................................................... 3-62
3.4.5.2 Removing the Hopper Drive Unit (Bk) ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-63
3.4.5.3 Before Removing Hopper Drive Unit (Bk) .................................................................................................................................................. 3-63
3.4.5.4 Removing Hopper Drive Unit (Bk) .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-63
3.4.6 Hopper Shutter Unit (Y) ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-63
3.4.6.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Y) .................................................................................................................... 3-63
3.4.6.2 Removing the Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Y).............................................................................................................................................. 3-63
3.4.6.3 Before Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Y)........................................................................................................................................ 3-64
3.4.6.4 Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Y) ................................................................................................................................................... 3-64
3.4.7 Hopper Shutter Unit (M)............................................................................................................................................................ 3-65
3.4.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (M).................................................................................................................... 3-65
3.4.7.2 Removing the Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (M) ............................................................................................................................................. 3-65
3.4.7.3 Before Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (M) ....................................................................................................................................... 3-66
3.4.7.4 Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (M)................................................................................................................................................... 3-66
3.4.8 Hopper Shutter Unit(C).............................................................................................................................................................. 3-67
3.4.8.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (C)..................................................................................................................... 3-67
3.4.8.2 Removing the Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (C).............................................................................................................................................. 3-67
3.4.8.3 Before Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (C)........................................................................................................................................ 3-68
3.4.8.4 Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (C).................................................................................................................................................... 3-68
3.4.9 Hopper Shutter Unit (Bk)........................................................................................................................................................... 3-69
3.4.9.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Bk)................................................................................................................... 3-69
3.4.9.2 Removing the Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Bk)............................................................................................................................................ 3-69
3.4.9.3 Before Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Bk)...................................................................................................................................... 3-70
3.4.9.4 Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Bk).................................................................................................................................................. 3-70
3.4.10 Toner Supply Pipe Unit (Y)..................................................................................................................................................... 3-71
3.4.10.1 Preparation for Removing the Toner Supply Pipe Unit (Y) ....................................................................................................................... 3-71
3.4.10.2 Removing the Toner Supply Pipe Unit (Y) ................................................................................................................................................ 3-71
3.4.10.3 Before Removing Toner Supply Pipe Unit (Y) .......................................................................................................................................... 3-71
3.4.10.4 Removing Toner Supply Pipe Unit (Y) ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-72
3.4.11 Toner Supply Pipe Unit (M) .................................................................................................................................................... 3-72
3.4.11.1 Preparation for Removing the Toner Supply Pipe Unit (M) ...................................................................................................................... 3-72
3.4.11.2 Removing the Toner Supply Pipe Unit (M)................................................................................................................................................ 3-72
3.4.11.3 Before Removing Toner Supply Pipe Unit (M).......................................................................................................................................... 3-72
3.4.11.4 Removing Toner Supply Pipe Unit (M) ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-73
3.4.12 Toner Supply Pipe Unit (C) ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-73
3.4.12.1 Preparation for Removing the Toner Supply Pipe Unit (C) ....................................................................................................................... 3-73
3.4.12.2 Removing the Toner Supply Pipe Unit (C) ................................................................................................................................................ 3-73
3.4.12.3 Before Removing Toner Supply Pipe Unit (C) .......................................................................................................................................... 3-73
3.4.12.4 Removing Toner Supply Pipe Unit (C) ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-74
3.4.13 Toner Supply Pipe Unit (Bk) ................................................................................................................................................... 3-74
3.4.13.1 Preparation for Removing the Toner Supply Pipe Unit (Bk) ..................................................................................................................... 3-74
3.4.13.2 Removing the Toner Supply Pipe Unit (Bk) .............................................................................................................................................. 3-74
3.4.13.3 Before Removing Toner Supply Pipe Unit (Bk) ........................................................................................................................................ 3-74
3.4.13.4 Removing Toner Supply Pipe Unit (Bk) .................................................................................................................................................... 3-75
3.4.14 Hopper Supply Unit ................................................................................................................................................................. 3-75
3.4.14.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Supply Unit ................................................................................................................................... 3-75
3.4.14.2 Removing the Hopper Supply Unit ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-75
3.4.14.3 Before Removing Hopper Supply Unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-77
 Contents

3.4.14.4 Removing Hopper Supply Unit...................................................................................................................................................................3-77

3.4.15 Waste Toner Feeder Unit ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-80
3.4.15.1 Before Removing Waste Toner Primary Feed Unit....................................................................................................................................3-80
3.4.15.2 Removing Waste Toner Primary Feed Unit................................................................................................................................................3-80
3.4.16 Y/M Developing Motor ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-83
3.4.16.1 Preparation for Removing the Y/M_Developing Motor .............................................................................................................................3-83
3.4.16.2 Removing the Y/M_Developing Motor ......................................................................................................................................................3-83
3.4.16.3 Before Removing Y/M Developing Motor .................................................................................................................................................3-83
3.4.16.4 Removing Y/M Developing Motor.............................................................................................................................................................3-83
3.4.17 C/Bk Developing Motor .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-83
3.4.17.1 Preparation for Removing the C/Bk_Developing Motor ............................................................................................................................3-83
3.4.17.2 Removing the C/Bk_Developing Motor .....................................................................................................................................................3-84
3.4.17.3 Before Removing C/Bk Developing Motor ................................................................................................................................................3-84
3.4.17.4 Removing C/Bk Developing Motor ............................................................................................................................................................3-84
3.4.18 Y Developing Sylinder Clutch................................................................................................................................................. 3-84
3.4.18.1 Preparation for Removing the Y Developing Sleeve Clutch ......................................................................................................................3-84
3.4.18.2 Removing the Y Developing Sleeve Clutch ...............................................................................................................................................3-84
3.4.18.3 Before Removing Y Developing Sleeve Clutch .........................................................................................................................................3-85
3.4.18.4 Removing Y Developing Sleeve Clutch .....................................................................................................................................................3-85
3.4.19 M Developing Sylinder Clutch ................................................................................................................................................ 3-86
3.4.19.1 Preparation for Removing the M Developing Sleeve Clutch......................................................................................................................3-86
3.4.19.2 Removing the M Developing Sleeve Clutch...............................................................................................................................................3-86
3.4.19.3 Before Removing M Developing Sleeve Clutch.........................................................................................................................................3-86
3.4.19.4 Removing M Developing Sleeve Clutch.....................................................................................................................................................3-87
3.4.20 C Developing Sylinder Clutch ................................................................................................................................................. 3-87
3.4.20.1 Preparation for Removing the C Developing Sleeve Clutch ......................................................................................................................3-87
3.4.20.2 Removing the C Developing Sleeve Clutch................................................................................................................................................3-87
3.4.20.3 Before Removing C Developing Sleeve Clutch..........................................................................................................................................3-88
3.4.20.4 Removing C Developing Sleeve Clutch .....................................................................................................................................................3-88
3.4.21 Bk Developing Sylinder Clutch ............................................................................................................................................... 3-89
3.4.21.1 Preparation for Removing the Bk Developing Sleeve Clutch ....................................................................................................................3-89
3.4.21.2 Removing the Bk Developing Sleeve Clutch..............................................................................................................................................3-89
3.4.21.3 Before Removing Bk Developing Sleeve Clutch........................................................................................................................................3-89
3.4.21.4 Removing Bk Developing Sleeve Clutch ...................................................................................................................................................3-90
3.4.22 Intermediate Transfer Unit....................................................................................................................................................... 3-90
3.4.22.1 Removing the ITB.......................................................................................................................................................................................3-90
3.4.22.2 After Replacing the ITB..............................................................................................................................................................................3-91
3.4.22.3 Before Removing ITB.................................................................................................................................................................................3-91
3.4.22.4 Removing ITB.............................................................................................................................................................................................3-91
3.4.22.5 Points to Note When Replacing ITB...........................................................................................................................................................3-92
3.4.23 Secondary Transfer Outside Roller.......................................................................................................................................... 3-92
3.4.23.1 Preparation for Removing the Secondary Transfer Outside Roller ............................................................................................................3-92
3.4.23.2 Removing the Secondary Transfer Outside Roller .....................................................................................................................................3-92
3.4.23.3 Before Removing Secondary Transfer External Roller ..............................................................................................................................3-93
3.4.23.4 Removing Secondary Transfer External Roller ..........................................................................................................................................3-93
3.4.24 Waste Toner Sensor Unit ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-93
3.4.24.1 Preparation for Removing the Waste Toner Senser Unit............................................................................................................................3-93
3.4.24.2 Removing the Waste Toner Sensor Unit.....................................................................................................................................................3-93
3.4.24.3 Before Removing Waste Toner Sensor Unit...............................................................................................................................................3-93
3.4.24.4 Removing Waste Toner Sensor Unit...........................................................................................................................................................3-94
3.4.25 Y Toner Level Sensor .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-94
3.4.25.1 Preparation for Removing the Y Toner Level Sensor.................................................................................................................................3-94
3.4.25.2 Removing the Y Toner Level Sensor..........................................................................................................................................................3-94
3.4.25.3 Before Removing Y toner Level Sensor .....................................................................................................................................................3-94
3.4.25.4 Removing Y toner Level Sensor .................................................................................................................................................................3-94
3.4.26 M Toner Level Sensor ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-94
3.4.26.1 Preparation for Removing the M Toner Level Sensor ................................................................................................................................3-94
3.4.26.2 Removing the M Toner Level Sensor .........................................................................................................................................................3-95
3.4.26.3 Before Removing M toner Level Sensor ....................................................................................................................................................3-95
3.4.26.4 Removing M toner Level Sensor ................................................................................................................................................................3-95
Contents

3.4.27 C Toner Level Sensor .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-95

3.4.27.1 Preparation for Removing the C Toner Level Sensor................................................................................................................................. 3-95
3.4.27.2 Removing the C Toner Level Sensor.......................................................................................................................................................... 3-95
3.4.27.3 Before Removing C toner Level Sensor ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-95
3.4.27.4 Removing C toner Level Sensor ................................................................................................................................................................. 3-95
3.4.28 Bk Toner Level Sensor ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-96
3.4.28.1 Preparation for Removing the Bk Toner Level Sensor............................................................................................................................... 3-96
3.4.28.2 Removing the Bk Toner Level Sensor........................................................................................................................................................ 3-96
3.4.28.3 Before Removing Bk toner Level Sensor ................................................................................................................................................... 3-96
3.4.28.4 Removing Bk toner Level Sensor ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-96
3.4.29 Y Toner Supply Amount Sensor.............................................................................................................................................. 3-96
3.4.29.1 Preparation for Removing the Y Toner Supply Level Sensor .................................................................................................................... 3-96
3.4.29.2 Removing the Y Toner Supply Level Sensor ............................................................................................................................................. 3-96
3.4.29.3 Before Removing Y Toner Supply Sensor ................................................................................................................................................. 3-96
3.4.29.4 Removing Y Toner Supply Sensor ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-96
3.4.30 M Toner Supply Amount Sensor ............................................................................................................................................. 3-97
3.4.30.1 Preparation for Removing the M Toner Supply Level Sensor ................................................................................................................... 3-97
3.4.30.2 Removing the M Toner Supply Level Sensor ............................................................................................................................................ 3-97
3.4.30.3 Before Removing M Toner Supply Sensor................................................................................................................................................. 3-97
3.4.30.4 Removing M Toner Supply Sensor ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-97
3.4.31 C Toner Supply Amount Sensor .............................................................................................................................................. 3-97
3.4.31.1 Preparation for Removing the C Toner Supply Level Sensor .................................................................................................................... 3-97
3.4.31.2 Removing the C Toner Supply Level Sensor ............................................................................................................................................. 3-97
3.4.31.3 Before Removing C Toner Supply Sensor ................................................................................................................................................. 3-97
3.4.31.4 Removing C Toner Supply Sensor ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-97
3.4.32 Bk Toner Supply Amount Sensor ............................................................................................................................................ 3-97
3.4.32.1 Preparation for Removing the Bk Toner Supply Level Sensor .................................................................................................................. 3-97
3.4.32.2 Removing the Bk Toner Supply Level Sensor ........................................................................................................................................... 3-97
3.4.32.3 Before Removing Bk Toner Supply Sensor ............................................................................................................................................... 3-98
3.4.32.4 Removing Bk Toner Supply Sensor ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-98
3.4.33 Toner Cartridge Sensor ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-98
3.4.33.1 Preparation for Removing the Toner Cartridge Sensor .............................................................................................................................. 3-98
3.4.33.2 Removing the Toner Cartridge Sensor ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-98
3.4.33.3 Before Removing Toner Cartridge Sensor ................................................................................................................................................. 3-99
3.4.33.4 Removing Toner Cartridge Sensor ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-99
3.4.34 Waste Toner Shutter Open/closed Sensor.............................................................................................................................. 3-101
3.4.34.1 Preparation for Removing the Waste Toner Shutter Open/Closed Sensor ............................................................................................... 3-101
3.4.34.2 Removing the Waste Toner Shutter Open/Closed Sensor ........................................................................................................................ 3-101
3.4.34.3 Before Removing Waste Toner Shutter Sensor ........................................................................................................................................ 3-102
3.4.34.4 Removing Waste Toner Shutter Sensor.................................................................................................................................................... 3-102
3.4.35 Toner Shutter Position Sensor ............................................................................................................................................... 3-103
3.4.35.1 Preparation for Removing the Toner Supply Shutter Open/Closed Sensor.............................................................................................. 3-103
3.4.35.2 Removing the Toner Supply Shutter Open/Closed Sensor....................................................................................................................... 3-103
3.4.35.3 Before Removing Toner Supply Shutter Sensor....................................................................................................................................... 3-104
3.4.35.4 Removing Toner Supply Shutter Sensor .................................................................................................................................................. 3-104
3.4.36 Waste Toner Case Sensor ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-105
3.4.36.1 Preparation for Removing the Waste Toner Case Sensor......................................................................................................................... 3-105
3.4.36.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case Sensor.................................................................................................................................................. 3-105
3.4.36.3 Before Removing Waste Toner Case Sensor............................................................................................................................................ 3-106
3.4.36.4 Removing Waste Toner Case Sensor........................................................................................................................................................ 3-106
3.4.37 Y Toner Supply Motor........................................................................................................................................................... 3-106
3.4.37.1 Preparation for Removing the Y Toner Supply Motor ............................................................................................................................. 3-106
3.4.37.2 Removing the Y Toner Supply Motor ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-106
3.4.37.3 Before Removing Y Toner Supply Motor ................................................................................................................................................ 3-106
3.4.37.4 Removing Y Toner Supply Motor ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-106
3.4.38 M Toner Supply Motor .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-106
3.4.38.1 Preparation for Removing the M Toner Supply Motor ............................................................................................................................ 3-106
3.4.38.2 Removing the M Toner Supply Motor ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-106
3.4.38.3 Before Removing M Toner Supply Motor ............................................................................................................................................... 3-107
3.4.38.4 Removing M Toner Supply Motor ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-107
 Contents

3.4.39 C Toner Supply Motor ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-107

3.4.39.1 Preparation for Removing the C Toner Supply Motor..............................................................................................................................3-107
3.4.39.2 Removing the C Toner Supply Motor.......................................................................................................................................................3-107
3.4.39.3 Before Removing C Toner Supply Motor.................................................................................................................................................3-107
3.4.39.4 Removing C Toner Supply Motor.............................................................................................................................................................3-107
3.4.40 Bk Toner Supply Motor ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-107
3.4.40.1 Preparation for Removing the Bk Toner Supply Motor............................................................................................................................3-107
3.4.40.2 Removing the Bk Toner Supply Motor.....................................................................................................................................................3-107
3.4.40.3 Before Removing Bk Toner Supply Motor...............................................................................................................................................3-108
3.4.40.4 Removing Bk Toner Supply Motor...........................................................................................................................................................3-108
3.4.41 Waste Toner Feed Motor ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-108
3.4.41.1 Preparation for Removing the Waste Toner Feeding Motor.....................................................................................................................3-108
3.4.41.2 Removing the Waste Toner Feeding Motor..............................................................................................................................................3-108
3.4.41.3 Before Removing Waste Toner Feed Motor .............................................................................................................................................3-108
3.4.41.4 Removing Waste Toner Feed Motor.........................................................................................................................................................3-108
3.4.42 Waste Toner Detection PCB .................................................................................................................................................. 3-109
3.4.42.1 Preparation for Removing the Waste Toner Case Full Sensor .................................................................................................................3-109
3.4.42.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case Full Sensor...........................................................................................................................................3-109
3.4.42.3 Before Removing Waste Toner Full Level Sensor ...................................................................................................................................3-109
3.4.42.4 Removing Waste Toner Full Level Sensor ...............................................................................................................................................3-109
3.4.43 Waste Toner Case .................................................................................................................................................................. 3-110
3.4.43.1 Removing the Waste Toner Case ..............................................................................................................................................................3-110
3.4.43.2 Detaching Waste Toner Case ....................................................................................................................................................................3-110
3.5 PICKUP/FEEDING/DELIVERY SYSTEM .............................................................................................................3-111
3.5.1 Pickup Motor ........................................................................................................................................................................... 3-111
3.5.1.1 Preparation for Removing the Pickup Motor ..............................................................................................................................................3-111
3.5.1.2 Removing the Pickup Motor .......................................................................................................................................................................3-111
3.5.1.3 Before Removing Pickup Motor .................................................................................................................................................................3-111
3.5.1.4 Removing Pickup Motor .............................................................................................................................................................................3-111
3.5.2 Cassette Pickup Roller ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-111
3.5.2.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Roller.........................................................................................................................................................3-111
3.5.2.2 Before Detaching Cassette Pickup Roller ...................................................................................................................................................3-112
3.5.2.3 Detaching Cassette Pickup Roller ...............................................................................................................................................................3-112
3.5.3 Cassette Size Switch ................................................................................................................................................................ 3-112
3.5.3.1 Removing the Cassette Size Switch ............................................................................................................................................................3-112
3.5.3.2 Before Detaching Cassette Size Switch ......................................................................................................................................................3-112
3.5.3.3 Detaching Cassette Size Switch ..................................................................................................................................................................3-112
3.5.4 Cassette Paper Sensor .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-113
3.5.4.1 Preparation for Removing the Cassette Paper Sensor.................................................................................................................................3-113
3.5.4.2 Removing the Cassette Paper Sensor ..........................................................................................................................................................3-115
3.5.4.3 Before Removing Cassette Paper Sensor ....................................................................................................................................................3-115
3.5.4.4 Removing Cassette Paper Sensor................................................................................................................................................................3-115
3.5.5 Cassette Pickup Clutch ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-117
3.5.5.1 Preparation for Removing the Cassette Pickup Clutch ...............................................................................................................................3-117
3.5.5.2 Removing the Cassette Pickup Clutch ........................................................................................................................................................3-117
3.5.5.3 Before Removing Cassette Pickup Clutch ..................................................................................................................................................3-117
3.5.5.4 Removing Cassette Pickup Clutch ..............................................................................................................................................................3-117
3.5.6 Cassette Separation Pad ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-118
3.5.6.1 Removing the Cassette Separation Pad.......................................................................................................................................................3-118
3.5.6.2 Before Detaching Cassette Separation Pad .................................................................................................................................................3-118
3.5.6.3 Detaching Cassette Separation Pad .............................................................................................................................................................3-118
3.5.7 Manual Pickup Unit ................................................................................................................................................................. 3-119
3.5.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Manual Pickup Unit....................................................................................................................................3-119
3.5.7.2 Removing the Manual Pickup Unit.............................................................................................................................................................3-119
3.5.7.3 Before Removing Manual Feed Pickup Unit ..............................................................................................................................................3-120
3.5.7.4 Removing Manual Feed Pickup Unit ..........................................................................................................................................................3-121
3.5.8 Manual Pickup Roller .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-122
3.5.8.1 Preparation for Removing the Manual Pickup Roller.................................................................................................................................3-122
3.5.8.2 Removing the Manual Pickup Roller ..........................................................................................................................................................3-122
3.5.8.3 Before Detaching Manual Feed Pickup Roller ...........................................................................................................................................3-123
Contents

3.5.8.4 Detaching Manual Feed Pickup Roller ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-123

3.5.9 Manual Paper Sensor ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-123
3.5.9.1 Removing the Manual Paper Sensor........................................................................................................................................................... 3-123
3.5.9.2 Before Removing Manual Feed Paper Sensor ............................................................................................................................................ 3-123
3.5.9.3 Removing Manual Feed Paper Sensor........................................................................................................................................................ 3-123
3.5.10 Multi-purpose Pickup Solenoid ............................................................................................................................................. 3-124
3.5.10.1 Preparation for Removing the Manual Pickup Solenoid .......................................................................................................................... 3-124
3.5.10.2 Removing the Manual Pickup Solenoid ................................................................................................................................................... 3-124
3.5.10.3 Before Removing Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid..................................................................................................................................... 3-127
3.5.10.4 Removing Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid ................................................................................................................................................ 3-127
3.5.11 Manual Separation Pad .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-130
3.5.11.1 Preparation for Removing the Manual Separation Pad ............................................................................................................................ 3-130
3.5.11.2 Removing the Manual Separation Pad...................................................................................................................................................... 3-130
3.5.11.3 Before Removing the Manual Feed Separation Pad ................................................................................................................................. 3-131
3.5.11.4 Removing the Manual Feed Separation Pad............................................................................................................................................. 3-131
3.5.12 Pre-registration Sensor........................................................................................................................................................... 3-132
3.5.12.1 Preparation for Removing the Sheet-to-sheet Sensor ............................................................................................................................... 3-132
3.5.12.2 Removing the Sheet-to-sheet Sensor ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-132
3.5.12.3 Before Removing the Sheet-to-Sheet Sensor............................................................................................................................................ 3-134
3.5.12.4 Removing the Paper-To-Paper Sensor...................................................................................................................................................... 3-134
3.5.13 Registration Before Sensor .................................................................................................................................................... 3-136
3.5.13.1 Preparation for Removing the Registration Sensor .................................................................................................................................. 3-136
3.5.13.2 Removing the Registration Sensor ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-136
3.5.13.3 Before Removing the Registration Sensor................................................................................................................................................ 3-138
3.5.13.4 Removing the Registration Sensor ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-138
3.5.14 Duplexing Motor.................................................................................................................................................................... 3-140
3.5.14.1 Preparation for Removing the Duplexing Motor ...................................................................................................................................... 3-140
3.5.14.2 Removing the Duplexing Motor ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-140
3.5.14.3 Before Removing the Duplex Motor ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-140
3.5.14.4 Removing the Duplex Motor .................................................................................................................................................................... 3-141
3.5.15 Duplexing Sensor................................................................................................................................................................... 3-141
3.5.15.1 Preparation for Removing the Duplexing Sheet Sensor ........................................................................................................................... 3-141
3.5.15.2 Removing the Duplexing Sheet Sensor .................................................................................................................................................... 3-142
3.5.15.3 Before Removing the Duplex Paper Sensor ............................................................................................................................................. 3-142
3.5.15.4 Removing the Duplex Paper Sensor ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-142
3.5.16 Delivery Sensor...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-142
3.5.16.1 Preparation for Removing the Delivery Sensor ........................................................................................................................................ 3-142
3.5.16.2 Removing the Delivery Sensor ................................................................................................................................................................. 3-143
3.5.16.3 Before Removing the Delivery Sensor ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-143
3.5.16.4 Removing the Delivery Sensor ................................................................................................................................................................. 3-143
3.5.17 Finisher .................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-144
3.5.17.1 Removing the Finisher............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-144
3.5.17.1.1 Removing the Finisher...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-144
3.5.17.2 External Covers......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-145
3.5.17.2.1 Removing the Top Cover.................................................................................................................................................................. 3-145
3.5.17.3 Staple Unit ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3-145
3.5.17.3.1 Removing the Staple Unit................................................................................................................................................................. 3-145
3.5.17.4 Offset Unit ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3-146
3.5.17.4.1 Removing the Offset Unit................................................................................................................................................................. 3-146
3.5.17.5 Process Tray Unit...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-147
3.5.17.5.1 Removing the Process Tray Unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-147
3.5.17.6 Offset Motor ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-148
3.5.17.6.1 Removing the Offset Motor .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-148
3.5.17.7 Feed Motor................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3-148
3.5.17.7.1 Removing the Feed Motor ................................................................................................................................................................ 3-148
3.5.17.8 Gripper Solenoid....................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-149
3.5.17.8.1 Removing the Gripper Solenoid ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-149
3.5.17.9 Process Roller ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-149
3.5.17.9.1 Removing the Process Roller............................................................................................................................................................ 3-149
3.5.17.10 Finisher Controller PCB ......................................................................................................................................................................... 3-149
3.5.17.10.1 Removing the Finisher Controller PCB.......................................................................................................................................... 3-149
 Contents

3.5.17.11 Power Supply PCB..................................................................................................................................................................................3-150

3.5.17.11.1 Removing the Power Supply PCB ..................................................................................................................................................3-150
3.5.17.12 Paper Full Sensor ....................................................................................................................................................................................3-150
3.5.17.12.1 Removing the Paper Full Sensor.....................................................................................................................................................3-150
3.5.17.13 Inlet Sensor..............................................................................................................................................................................................3-151
3.5.17.13.1 Removing the Inlet Sensor ..............................................................................................................................................................3-151
3.5.17.14 Stack Slide Sensor...................................................................................................................................................................................3-151
3.5.17.14.1 Removing the Stack Slide HP Sensor .............................................................................................................................................3-151
3.5.17.15 Exhasust Heat Fan...................................................................................................................................................................................3-151
3.5.17.15.1 Removing the Exhaust Heat Fan.....................................................................................................................................................3-151
3.6 FIXING SYSTEM .....................................................................................................................................................3-152
3.6.1 Fixing Assembly ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-152
3.6.1.1 Removing the Fixing Assembly..................................................................................................................................................................3-152
3.6.1.2 Removing the Fixing Assembly..................................................................................................................................................................3-153
3.6.2 Fixing Sleeve Unit ................................................................................................................................................................... 3-153
3.6.2.1 Removing the Fixing Sleeve Unit ...............................................................................................................................................................3-153
3.6.2.2 Before Removing the Fixing Sleeve Unit ...................................................................................................................................................3-155
3.6.2.3 Removing the Fixing Sleeve Unit ...............................................................................................................................................................3-155
3.6.3 Fixing Pressure Roller.............................................................................................................................................................. 3-156
3.6.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller ................................................................................................................................3-156
3.6.3.2 Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller .........................................................................................................................................................3-156
3.6.3.3 Before Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller .............................................................................................................................................3-157
3.6.3.4 Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller .........................................................................................................................................................3-157
3.6.4 Looping Sensor ........................................................................................................................................................................ 3-157
3.6.4.1 Removing the Arching Sensor ....................................................................................................................................................................3-157
3.6.4.2 Before Removing the Arch Level Sensor ...................................................................................................................................................3-158
3.6.4.3 Removing the Arch Level Sensor ...............................................................................................................................................................3-158
3.6.5 Fixing Motor ............................................................................................................................................................................ 3-158
3.6.5.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Motor...............................................................................................................................................3-158
3.6.5.2 Removing the Fixing Motor........................................................................................................................................................................3-159
3.6.5.3 Before Removing the Fixing Motor ............................................................................................................................................................3-159
3.6.5.4 Removing the Fixing Motor........................................................................................................................................................................3-159
 Chapter 3

3.1 Before Parts Replacement

3.1.1 General
0009-8997

LBP5960

Here, steps involved in the disassembly/assembly of the machine are explained.

Be sure to follow the instructions to remove/mount specific parts. (The same is true of consumables.)
Keep the following in mind:

- Remove the toner cartridge and the drum cartridge before disassembling, assembling, or moving the machine to avoid damage.
The instructions that follow assume that the cartridges have been removed. Also, be sure to use a protective bag to protect them against light.
- Note: For safety reason, be sure to disconnect the power cable from the host machine and the outlet prior to the disassembly/assembly work.
- Unless otherwise indicated, parts may be assembled by reversing the order used to disassemble them.
- Identify the screws by type (length, diameter, location).
- As a rule, do not operate the machine with any of its parts removed.
- When handling a PCB, touch a metal portion of the machine before the work so as to discharge the build-up of static electricity.
- Do not touch the pickup roller, registration pad, secondary transfer outside roller, ITB, photosensitive drum, fixing sleeve, and fixing pressure roller.
- The main drive unit [1] is shipped after adjustment at the factory, and cannot be replaced in the field. The 18 screws [2] used to secure the unit are glued in
place, and must not be removed.

[2] [2] [2] [2] [2]

[2] [1] [2]

F-3-1

3.1.2 Arrangement of the External Covers

0013-3849

LBP5960

The machine is protected by 11 types of external covers, and specific covers are removed depending on the type of work.
Study the diagram to avoid removing covers unnecessarily.

3-1
 Chapter 3

[1]
[2]

[6]

[3]

[11]

[9] [4]

[10]

[5]

[7]

[8]
F-3-2

[1]Upper cover [7]Front cover (left)

[2]Right cover [8]Inside front cover (left)

[3]Inside right cover [9]Inside left cover

[4]Inside front cover (right) [10]Left cover

[5]Front cover (right) [11]Rear cover

[6]Front cover

3.1.3 Points to Note About the Optional HDD

0010-0716

LBP5960

The optional hard disk, if used, can suffer damage if the power plug is disconnected or the power switch is turned off without following a specific set of steps.
Be sure to go through the following when turning off the power:

1) Check to be sure that the machine's Job lamp and HDD lamp are off.
2) Press the On-line key.
3) Press the Reset key.
4) Using the < or > key, select 'SHUT DOWN' and press the Enter key.
5) When a message appears on the display panel asking you to turn off the power, turn off the power switch.

3.1.4 Removing the Toner Cartridge

0009-8999

LBP5960

1) Open the toner cartridge cover [1].

3-2
 Chapter 3

[1]

F-3-3
2) Raise the lock release lever [1] in the direction of the arrow.

[1]

F-3-4
3) Shift up the toner cartridge [1] upright to remove it from the machine.

[1]

F-3-5
4) Likewise, remove all color toner cartridges from the machine.

3.1.5 Removing the Drum Cartridge

0009-9106

LBP5960

1) Push the release lever [1] found on the right side of the front cover, and open the front cover [2].

[1]

[2]

F-3-6
2) Press the 2 release buttons [1] in the direction of the arrow.

3-3
 Chapter 3

[1]

[1]

F-3-7
3) Holding the 2 grips [1], shift down the fixing assembly [2] in the direction of the arrow.

[1]

[2]

[1]

F-3-8
4) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover [2].

3-4
 Chapter 3

[2] [1]

F-3-9
5) Move the lock release lever [1] of the drum cartridge in the direction of the arrow to release.

[1]

F-3-10
6) Slide out the drum cartridge [1] in the direction of the arrow.

[1]

F-3-11
7) Remove all color drum cartridges in the same way.

3-5
 Chapter 3

3.1.6 General
0016-5949

LBP5970 / LBP5975

Here, steps involved in the disassembly/assembly of the machine are explained.

Be sure to follow the instructions to remove/mount specific parts. (The same is true of consumables.)
Keep the following in mind:

- Remove the toner cartridge and the drum cartridge before disassembling, assembling, or moving the machine to avoid damage.
The instructions that follow assume that the cartridges have been removed. Also, be sure to use a protective bag to protect them against light.
- Note: For safety reason, be sure to disconnect the power cable from the host machine and the outlet prior to the disassembly/assembly work.
- Unless otherwise indicated, parts may be assembled by reversing the order used to disassemble them.
- Identify the screws by type (length, diameter, location).
- As a rule, do not operate the machine with any of its parts removed.
- When handling a PCB, touch a metal portion of the machine before the work so as to discharge the build-up of static electricity.
- Do not touch the pickup roller, registration pad, secondary transfer outside roller, ITB, photosensitive drum, fixing sleeve, and fixing pressure roller.
- The main drive unit [1] is shipped after adjustment at the factory, and cannot be replaced in the field. The 18 screws [2] used to secure the unit are glued in
place, and must not be removed.

[2] [2] [2] [2] [2]

[2] [1] [2]

F-3-12

3.1.7 Arrangement of the External Covers

0016-5950

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine is protected by 12 types of external covers, and specific covers are removed depending on the type of work.
Study the diagram to avoid removing covers unnecessarily.

3-6
 Chapter 3

[3]

[2]

[14]
[1]

[4]

[13] [5]

[6]

[11] [7]

[12]

[8]

[9]

[10]
F-3-13

[1] Upper cover (LBP5970) [2] Upper cover (LBP5975)

[3] Top mount finisher (LBP5975) [4] Right cover
[5] Inside right cover [6] Front cover
[7] Front cover (right) [8] Inside front cover (right)
[9] Front cover (left) [10] Inside front cover (left)
[11] Inside left cover [12] Left cover
[13] Rear cover (LBP5975) [14] Rear cover (LBP5970)

3.1.8 Points to Note About the Optional HDD

0016-5951

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The optional hard disk, if used, can suffer damage if the power plug is disconnected or the power switch is turned off without following a specific set of steps.
Be sure to go through the following when turning off the power:

1) Check to be sure that the machine's Job lamp and HDD lamp are off.
2) Press the On-line key.
3) Press the Reset key.
4) Using the < or > key, select 'SHUT DOWN' and press the Enter key.
5) When a message appears on the display panel asking you to turn off the power, turn off the power switch.

3.1.9 Removing the Toner Cartridge

0016-5952

LBP5970 / LBP5975
1) Open the toner cartridge cover [1].

3-7
 Chapter 3

[1]

F-3-14
2) Raise the lock release lever [1] in the direction of the arrow.

[1]
F-3-15
3) Shift up the toner cartridge [1] upright to remove it from the machine.

[1]

F-3-16
4) Likewise, remove all color toner cartridges from the machine.

3.1.10 Removing the Drum Cartridge

0016-5953

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Push the release lever [1] found on the right side of the front cover, and open the front cover [2].

[2]

[1]

F-3-17
2) Press the 2 release buttons [1] in the direction of the arrow.

3-8
 Chapter 3

[1]

[1]
[2]

F-3-18
3) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover [2].

[2]

[1]

F-3-19
4) Move the lock release lever [1] of the drum cartridge in the direction of the arrow to release.

[1]
F-3-20
5) Slide out the drum cartridge [1] in the direction of the arrow.

[1]

F-3-21
6) Remove all color drum cartridges in the same way.

3-9
 Chapter 3

[2]
3.2 EXTERNAL AND CONTROLS SYSTEM [1]

3.2.1 Rear Cover

3.2.1.1 Removing the Rear Cover

0013-3851

LBP5960

1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the rear cover [2].

[2] [1]

F-3-24
3) Detach the rear cover [1].
- 4 screws [2]

[1]
[2]
F-3-22

When replacing the cover, take care not to bend the metal portion of the
IEEE1284 connector. [2] [1]
F-3-25
3.2.1.2 Detaching Rear Cover
0016-5955 3.2.2 Right Cover
LBP5970 / LBP5975
3.2.2.1 Preparation for Removing the Right Cover
1) Disengage the claw [1] and fold the delivery tray [2] in the direction of the 0012-9566

arrow. LBP5960

[2] 1) Remove the rear cover.

2) Remove the fixing assembly.
3) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover
[2].

[2] [1]

[1]

F-3-26
F-3-23
2) With upper rear cover [1] opened, remove the screw [2]. 3.2.2.2 Removing the Right Cover
0009-9860

LBP5960

1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the right cover [2] by pushing it in
the indicated order: [A] through [C].

3-10
 Chapter 3

[1]
[1]

[2]

[1]

[A] [A]

[1]

[B]

[2] [3]
[B]
[C]

F-3-27 F-3-30

3.2.2.3 Before Detaching Right Cover 3.2.3 Inside Right Cover

0016-5956

LBP5970 / LBP5975 3.2.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Inside Right Cover
0012-9567

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover] LBP5960

2) Detach the delivery tray [1] in the direction of the arrow.
1) Remove the rear cover.
[1] 2) Remove the fixing assembly.
3) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover
[2].

[2] [1]

F-3-28
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly]
4) With opening the upper rear cover [1], press the upper cover lock release F-3-31
button [2] to open the upper cover [3].
4) Remove the right cover.
[1] 3.2.3.2 Removing the Inside Right Cover
0009-9923

LBP5960
[3]
1) Loosen the screw [1], and detach the inside right cover [2].

[2] [2]

[1]

F-3-29

3.2.2.4 Detaching Right Cover

0016-5957

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the 2 TP screws [1] and the P-tightening screw [2], then pull the
right cover [3] in the direction from [A] to [B] to detach.
F-3-32

3.2.3.3 Before Detaching Inner Right Cover

0016-5958

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Detach the delivery tray [1] in the direction of the arrow.

3-11
 Chapter 3

[1] [2]

F-3-33 [1]
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly] F-3-36
4) With opening the upper rear cover [1], press the upper cover lock release 2) Open the waste toner cover [1].
button [2] to open the upper cover [3].

[1]

[3]

[2]

F-3-34
5) Detach the right cover. (page 3-11)Reference[Detaching Right Cover] [1]
3.2.3.4 Detaching Inner Right Cover F-3-37
0016-5959
3) Remove the following parts.
LBP5970 / LBP5975 - 1 P-tightening screw [1]
- 1 RS-tightening screw [2]
1) Loosen the screw [1] and detach the inner right cover [2] in the direction
of the arrow.

[2]
[1]
[1]

[2]

F-3-35
F-3-38
3.2.4 Left Cover 4) Open the toner cartridge cover [1].

3.2.4.1 Before Detaching Left Cover

0017-1940
[1]
LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

3.2.4.2 Detaching Left Cover

0016-5960

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) With pressing the release lever [1] at the right side of the front cover, open
the front cover [2].

F-3-39
5) Remove the following parts.
- 1 P tightening screw [1]
- 1 TP screw [2]
- 1 claw [3]

3-12
 Chapter 3

[2]
[1]

[3]

[1]
F-3-43
4) Remove the 2 screws [1].

F-3-40
6) Close the toner cartridge cover. [1]
7) Detach the left cover [1].
- 1 TP screw [2]
- 1 RS tightening screw [3]

[2]

F-3-44

[1] 5) Open the toner cartridge cover [1] in the direction of the arrow.

[1]

[3]
F-3-41

3.2.4.3 Removing the Left Cover

0009-9866

LBP5960

1) Remove the rear cover.

2) Push the release lever [1] found on the right side of the front cover, and
open the front cover [2].

F-3-45
[1]
6) Remove the 3 screws [1], and unhook the claw [2].

[1]

[2]
[2]

F-3-42
3) Open the waste toner cover [1].
F-3-46
7) Close the toner cartridge cover.
8) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the left cover [2].

3-13
 Chapter 3

[2] [2]

[1]

[2] [1]
F-3-47 F-3-50

3.2.5 Inside Left Cover 3.2.5.4 Removing the Inside Left Cover
0009-9924

LBP5960
3.2.5.1 Before Detaching Inner Left Cover
LBP5970 / LBP5975
0016-5961

1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the cable cover [2].

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover] [1] [2]
2) Detach the cassette [1].

F-3-51
[1]
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the inside left cover [2].
F-3-48
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the [1]
Fixing Assembly]
4) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]

3.2.5.2 Preparation for Removing the Inside Left Cover

0012-9569

LBP5960

1) Remove the rear cover.

2) Remove the cassette.
3) Remove the fixing assembly.
4) Remove the left cover.

3.2.5.3 Detaching Inner Left Cover

0016-5962

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the cable cover [1].

- 1 screw [2]
- 2 claws [3] (disengage)
[1] [2]
[2] [1]
F-3-52

3.2.6 Upper Cover

3.2.6.1 Before Detaching Upper Cover

0016-5964

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the

Fixing Assembly]
2) Press the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover [2].

[3]
F-3-49
2) Detach the inner left cover [1].
- 2 screws [2]

3-14
 Chapter 3

[1]

[2]

[1]

F-3-53
3) Remove the ITB. (page 3-91)Reference[Removing ITB]

3.2.6.2 Detaching Upper Cover

0016-5965

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Close the upper cover [1] halfway and open the upper rear cover [2].

[1] After installing this unit, be sure to press the lock release spring [1] with a
screwdriver etc. so that the shutter lever [2] will be released (shutter lever is
in the down position).

[2]

[2]

F-3-54
2) Pull out the shaft [1] in the direction of the arrow and detach the upper rear [1]
cover [2].

[2] [1]

4) Detach the sensor support plate [1].

- Free the harness from the wire saddle [2]
- 2 screws [3]

[1]

[3]
F-3-55
3) Remove the ITB protection shutter unit [1].
- 3 screws [2]
[2]
[1]
F-3-57
5) Disconnect the 2 connecters [1].

[2]

F-3-56 [1] [1]

F-3-58
6) Remove the 5 screws [1].
When installing this unit, be sure to install it with the ITB protection shutter
[1] opened as below.

3-15
 Chapter 3

[1]

[2]
[1] [1] F-3-63
F-3-59 2) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the ITB protective shutter unit [2].
7) Lower the upper cover [1] and hold it as below, then lift the rear side until
the position where the claw [2] can be disengaged. [2]

[1]

[1]
[2]

F-3-60
8) Pay attention to the upper cover base [1] that opens by the spring force and
detach the upper cover.
F-3-64

When mounting the unit, be sure to keep the ITB protection shutter [1] open
as shown.

[1]

[1]
F-3-61

3.2.6.3 Preparation for Removing the Upper Cover

0012-9571

LBP5960

1) Remove the fixing assembly.

2) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover
[2].

[2] [1]
F-3-65

After mounting the unit, be sure to push the lock release spring [1] with a
screwdriver, thus releasing the shutter lever [2] (i.e., the shutter lever is
down).

F-3-62
3) Remove the ITB.

3.2.6.4 Removing the Upper Cover

0009-9925

LBP5960
1) While pushing the upper cover [1] slightly down, move the rear upper cov-
er [2] in the direction of the arrow.

3-16
 Chapter 3

3.2.7 Front Cover

3.2.7.1 Before Detaching Front Cover

0016-5966

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

[2] 2) Detach the delivery tray [1] in the direction of the arrow.

[1]

[1]

F-3-66

3) Remove the 5 screws [1].

F-3-70
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly]
4) With opening the upper rear cover [1], press the upper cover lock release
button [2] to open the upper cover [3].
[1]
[1]

[3]

[1]
[2]
F-3-67
4) While pushing the upper cover [1] slightly down, move the upper cover
[1] in the order indicated to detach ([A], then [B]).

[1] F-3-71

[B] 5) Detach the right cover. (page 3-11)Reference[Detaching Right Cover]

6) Detach the inner right cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Inner
[A] Right Cover]
7) Detach the inner front cover (right). (page 3-22)Reference[Detaching
Inner Front Cover (Right)]
8) Detach the inner front cover (left). (page 3-23)Reference[Detaching In-
ner Front Cover (Left)]

3.2.7.2 Detaching Front Cover

0016-5967

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Loosen the screw [1] and remove the screw [2].

[2]
F-3-68

When mounting the upper cover, be sure to match the hole [2] of the upper
cover against the claw [1] of the machine.

[1]

[1]

[2]
F-3-72
2) Loosen the TP screw [1] and remove the P-tightening screw [2] and the
TP screw [3].
F-3-69

3-17
 Chapter 3

[3] [2] [1]

[2]

[1]

F-3-76
F-3-73 4) Remove the right cover.
3) Remove the screw [1] and with opening the [A] part, detach the front cov- 5) Remove the inside right cover.
er [2] in the direction of the arrow. 6) Remove the inside front cover (right).
7) Remove the inside front cover (left).

3.2.7.4 Removing the Front Cover

0009-9285

Be careful not to apply any load on the harness of the control panel. LBP5960

1) Remove the 2 screws [1] found on the right side of the machine.
[1]

[2] [1]

[A]

F-3-77
2) Remove the 3 screws [1] found on the left side of the machine.

F-3-74
[1]
4) Disconnect the connecter [1] and detach the front cover [2].

[2]

[1]

F-3-78
[1] 3) After removing the screw [1], move the front cover [2] in the direction of
the arrow while opening the section identified as [A].

F-3-75

3.2.7.3 Preparation for Removing the Front Cover

0012-9572

LBP5960

1) Remove the rear cover.

2) Remove the fixing assembly.
3) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover
[2].

3-18
 Chapter 3

[1] [1]

[2] [3]

[2]

F-3-82
[A] 5) Detach the right cover. (page 3-11)Reference[Detaching Right Cover]
6) Detach the inner right cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Inner
Right Cover]
7) Detach the inner front cover (right). (page 3-22)Reference[Detaching
Inner Front Cover (Right)]
8) Detach the inner front cover (left). (page 3-23)Reference[Detaching In-
ner Front Cover (Left)]
9) Detach the front cover. (page 3-17)Reference[Detaching Front Cover]
F-3-79
3.2.8.2 Detaching Front Cover (Left)
4) Turn over the front cover, and disconnect the connector [1]; then, detach 0016-5969

the front cover [2]. LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Open the manual feed tray [1].

[2]

[1]
[1]
F-3-83
F-3-80
2) Detach the front cover (left) [1].
- 1 screw [2] (loosen)
3.2.8 Front Cover (left) - 1 screw [3]
3.2.8.1 Before Detaching Front Cover (Left)
0016-5968

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Detach the delivery tray [1] in the direction of the arrow.

[1]

[2]

[1] [3]
F-3-84
F-3-81
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the 3.2.8.3 Preparation for Removing the Front Cover (left)
Fixing Assembly] 0012-9573

4) With opening the upper rear cover [1], press the upper cover lock release LBP5960
button [2] to open the upper cover [3].
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the fixing assembly.
3) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover
[2].

3-19
 Chapter 3

[2] [1] [1]

[3]

[2]

F-3-88
5) Detach the right cover. (page 3-11)Reference[Detaching Right Cover]
6) Detach the inner right cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Inner
Right Cover]
F-3-85
7) Detach the inner front cover (right). (page 3-22)Reference[Detaching
4) Remove the right cover. Inner Front Cover (Right)]
5) Remove the inside right cover. 8) Detach the inner front cover (left). (page 3-23)Reference[Detaching In-
6) Remove the inside front cover (right). ner Front Cover (Left)]
7) Remove the inside front cover (left).
8) Remove the front cover. 9) Detach the front cover. (page 3-17)Reference[Detaching Front Cover]
10) Detach the front cover (left). (page 3-19)Reference[Detaching Front
3.2.8.4 Removing the Front Cover (left) Cover (Left)]
0010-0162

LBP5960 3.2.9.2 Detaching Front Cover (Right)

0016-5971

1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the front cover (left) [2]. LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the delivery duct cover [1].

[2] - 1 TP screw [2]
- 3 P-tightening screws [3]

[2] [1]

[1]

[1]

F-3-86

3.2.9 Front Cover (right) [3]

F-3-89
3.2.9.1 Before Detaching Front Cover (Right) 2) Free the 2 harnesses [1] from the harness guide.
LBP5970 / LBP5975
0016-5970
- Free the harness from the wire saddle [2]
- 2 connecters [3]
1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Detach the delivery tray [1] in the direction of the arrow. [3]

[1]

[1] [2] [1]

F-3-90
F-3-87
3) Detach the following parts.
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the - 2 P-tightening screws [1]
Fixing Assembly] - 1 TP screw [2] (loosen)
4) With opening the upper rear cover [1], press the upper cover lock release
button [2] to open the upper cover [3].

3-20
 Chapter 3

[2] [1] [2]

F-3-91
4) Detach the front cover (right) [1].
- 4 screws [2]
[1]
[1]

F-3-94
2) Remove the front cover (right) [3].
- 4 cable clamps [1]
- 4 screws [2]

[1] [3] [1]

[2]
F-3-92

3.2.9.3 Preparation for Removing the Front Cover (right)

0012-9575

LBP5960

1) Remove the rear cover.

2) Remove the fixing assembly.
3) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover
[2].

[2] [1]
[2]
F-3-95

3.2.10 Inside Front Cover (right)

3.2.10.1 Before Detaching Inner Front Cover (Right)

0016-5972

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Detach the delivery tray [1] in the direction of the arrow.

[1]

F-3-93
4) Remove the right cover.
5) Remove the inside right cover.
6) Remove the inside front cover (right).
7) Remove the inside front cover (left).
8) Remove the front cover.
9) Remove the front cover (left).

3.2.9.4 Removing the Front Cover (right)

0009-9931

LBP5960

1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 3 screws [2].

F-3-96
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly]
4) With opening the upper rear cover [1], press the upper cover lock release
button [2] to open the upper cover [3].

3-21
 Chapter 3

[1] [1]

[3]

[2]

F-3-97 [2]
5) Detach the right cover. (page 3-11)Reference[Detaching Right Cover]
6) Detach the inner right cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Inner
Right Cover]
F-3-100
3.2.10.2 Preparation for Removing the Inside Front Cover
(right) 3.2.10.4 Detaching Inner Front Cover (Right)
0012-9576 0016-5973

LBP5960 LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the rear cover. 1) Detach the release button cover [1].
2) Remove the fixing assembly. - 1 screw [2]
3) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover
[2]. [2]
[2] [1]

[1]

F-3-98
4) Remove the right cover.
5) Remove the inside right cover. F-3-101
2) Detach the inner front cover (right) [1].
3.2.10.3 Removing the Inside Front Cover (right) - 4 screws [2]
0009-9284

LBP5960
[2]
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the guide.

[1]

[1]

[2]
F-3-102

3.2.11 Inside Front Cover (left)

3.2.11.1 Removing the Inside Front Cover (left)

F-3-99
0009-9282

LBP5960
2) Remove the 4 screws [1], detach the inside front cover (right) [2].
1) While pushing the release lever [1] found on the right side of the front cov-
er, open the front cover [2].

3-22
 Chapter 3

[3]
[1]

[2]

[1]

[2]

F-3-106

3.2.12 Waste Toner Cover

F-3-103
3.2.12.1 Removing the Waste Toner Cover
2) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the inside front cover (left) [2]. 0009-9869

LBP5960

1) Remove the waste toner case.

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the waste toner cover (front) [2].

[2]
[2]

[1]
F-3-104
[1]
3.2.11.2 Before Detaching Inner Front Cover (Left) F-3-107
0017-1958

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) With pressing the release lever [1] at the right side of the front cover, open
the front cover [2]. When mounting the waste toner cover (front), be sure to fit the shaft of the
waste toner cover to the bearing.
[2]
3) Push down the shaft [1] found in the middle of the waste toner cover to
detach it from the bearing; then, move the waste toner cover [2] toward
the front to detach.

[1]

[1]

F-3-105

3.2.11.3 Detaching Inner Front Cover (Left)

0016-5974

LBP5970 / LBP5975 [2]

1) Detach the inner front cover (left) [1]. F-3-108
- 1 P-tightening screw [2]
- 2 RS-tightening screws [3] 3.2.12.2 Detaching Waste Toner Cover
0016-5975

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Pull out the cassette [1].

3-23
 Chapter 3

[2] [1]
[1]
F-3-113
F-3-109
2) With pressing the release lever [1] at the right side of the front cover, open
the front cover [2]. Points to note when attaching the waste toner cover
Be sure not to forget to insert the hinge shaft at the front side of the waste
toner cover into the lower front left cover.

7) Open the waste toner cover [1] and press the cover at the position around
the center hinge shaft [2] to disengage the hinge shaft [2].
[2]

[1]

[1] [2]
F-3-110 F-3-114
3) Open the waste toner cover [1]. 8) Detach the waste toner cover [1] in the direction of the arrow.

[1]

[1]

F-3-111
4) Detach the waste toner container [1].
F-3-115

3.2.13 Controller Box

3.2.13.1 Before Removing Controller Box

0017-1960

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Detach the delivery tray [1] in the direction of the arrow.

[1]

F-3-112
5) Close the waste toner cover.
6) Detach the lower front left cover [1] in the direction of the arrow.
- 1 screw [2]

3-24
 Chapter 3

[1] [1]

[2]

F-3-116 F-3-119
2) Pull out the shaft [1] in the direction of the arrow and detach the upper rear
3.2.13.2 Removing the Controller Box cover [2].
0013-3889

LBP5960 [2] [1]

1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Unhook the 4 claws [1], detach the expansion slot cover [2].

[2]

[1]

[1] F-3-120
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly]
4) Press the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover [2].

F-3-117
3) Remove the 12 screws [1], detach the controller box [2] in the horizontal [2]
direction.

[2] [1]
[1] [1]

F-3-121
5) Press the lever [1] at the right side of the upper cover as below and open
the ITB unit cover [2].

[2]
[1]

[1]

[1]
F-3-118

3.2.13.3 Removing Controller Box

0016-5978

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Close the upper [1] cover halfway and open the upper rear cover [2].
F-3-122
6) Detach the right cover. (page 3-11)Reference[Detaching Right Cover]
7) Close the upper cover.
8) Free the harness [1] from the harness guide.

3-25
 Chapter 3

[1] [1]

[2]

[2]

[2]
F-3-123 F-3-127
9) Disconnect the connecter [1].
3.2.14 DC Controller PCB

3.2.14.1 Preparation for Removing the DC Controller PCB

0012-9577

LBP5960

1) Remove the rear cover.

2) Remove the controller box.

3.2.14.2 Removing the DC Controller PCB

0010-0072

LBP5960

1) Disconnect the 25 connectors [2].

[1] [1] [1]

[1]
F-3-124
10) Detach the inner rear cover [1].
- 2 screws [2]

[1]
[1]
[1] [1]
[1] [1]

[1] [1]
F-3-128
2) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the DC controller PCB [2].

[1]

[2]
F-3-125
11) Remove the 4 screws [1].

[1]

[1] [2] [1]

F-3-129
F-3-126
12) Pull out the controller box [1] and remove it.
- 7 screws [2]
When replacing the DC control PCB, be sure to physically transfer the EEP-
ROM (ICS18) to the new PCB.

3.2.14.3 Before Removing DC Controller PCB

0016-5979

LBP5970 / LBP5975

3-26
 Chapter 3

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Remove the controller box. (page 3-25)Reference[Removing Controller 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], detach the face cover [2].
Box]
[2] [1]
3.2.14.4 Removing DC Controller PCB
0016-5980

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Disconnect the 27 connecters [1] and 2 flat cables [2].

[1] [1]

[1] [1]
[1]
[1] F-3-132
[1]
2) Disconnect the connector [1].

[1]

[1] [1] [2] [1] [1]

F-3-130
2) Remove the DC controller PCB [1].
- 8 screws [2]

[2]

[1]

F-3-133

[2]
F-3-131
Do not detach the controller cover first.
A fan (controller fan) is mounted on the back of the controller cover. Detach-
ing the cover first will strain the cable, possibly cutting it.
When replacing the DC controller PCB, be sure to Remove the EEPROM
(IC19S) [1] from the old PCB and install it on the new PCB. 3) Remove the 12 screws [1], and detach the control cover [2].

[1] [1]
[2]

[1]

3.2.15 Video Controller PCB

3.2.15.1 Preparation for Removing the Video Controller

PCB
0012-9578

LBP5960
[1]
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the controller box. F-3-134
4) Remove the screw [1], and detach the expansion board guide [2].
3.2.15.2 Before Removing Video Controller PCB
0016-5983

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Remove the controller box. (page 3-25)Reference[Removing Controller
Box]

3.2.15.3 Removing the Video Controller PCB

0009-9930

LBP5960

3-27
 Chapter 3

[2] [1]
[2] [1]
2) Remove the video controller PCB [1].
F-3-135 - 3 connecters [2]
5) Remove the 6 screws [1], and detach the video controller PCB [2]. - 11 screws [3]

[1] [2] [2] [3] [1]

[3]

[3]

[2]

[3] [2]

[3]
[1] F-3-138
F-3-136

When replacing the video controller PCB, be sure to Remove the EEPROM
When detaching the PCB, be sure to hold it upright to protect the connector (IC47S) [1] from the old PCB and install it on the new PCB. If the optional
ROMDIMM or ROMDIMM for HDD is installed, install it on the new PCB
from damage.
as well.

[1]
When replacing the video controller, be sure to physically transfer the EEP-
ROM (IC11) to the new PCB. This is also true when an optional ROM
DIMM or HDD ROM DIMM is mounted.

3.2.15.4 Removing Video Controller PCB

0016-5984

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the controller cover [1] in the direction of the arrow.

- 11 TP screws [2]
- 1 binding screw [3]

[2]
3.2.16 HDD

3.2.16.1 Removing the HDD

0010-1051

LBP5960

1) Open the sub rear cover [1] toward you, and detach it in the direction of
the arrow.
[2]

[1]

[1]
[3]
[2] [2]
F-3-137

Points to note when installing

The plate [1] may contact the connecter [2] and it may interfere with
installation; thus, place the plate [1] above the connecter [2] when installing.
F-3-139
2) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the slot cover [2].

3-28
 Chapter 3

[2]

[1]

[1]

F-3-140
[1]
3) Disconnect the connector [1] on the HDD side.
F-3-144
2) Open the power supply fan unit [3].
- 1 cable clamp [1]
[1] - 2 screws [2]

[1] [3]

F-3-141
4) Detach the HDD connector [1] found on the video controller PCB, and
disconnect the HDD cable [2].

[1]

[2] [2]
F-3-145

F-3-142 3) Remove the power supply unit [3].

- 2 connectors [1]
5) Remove the 2 screws [1] to detach the HDD [2]. - 5 screws [2]

[1]

[1]

[2]

[1]
F-3-143

3.2.17 Low-Voltage Power Supply Assembly

3.2.17.1 Preparation for Removing the Low-Voltage

Power Supply Unit
0012-9579

LBP5960

1) Remove the rear cover. [2] [3] [2]

2) Remove the left cover. F-3-146
3) Remove the controller box.

3.2.17.2 Removing the Low-Voltage Power Supply Unit 3.2.17.3 Before Removing Low-Voltage Power Unit
0016-5987

0010-1534
LBP5970 / LBP5975
LBP5960
1) Disconnect the 4 connectors [1]. 1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]
3) Remove the controller box. (page 3-25)Reference[Removing Controller
Box]

3.2.17.4 Removing Low-Voltage Power Unit

0016-5988

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Disconnect the 5 connecters [1].

3-29
 Chapter 3

[1]

[2] [2]
[1]

F-3-150
2) Remove the all-night power supply PCB [1].
[1] [1] - 2 connecters [2]
- 6 screws [3]
F-3-147
2) Remove the power supply fan unit [1]. [1] [3]
- Free the harness from the harness guide [2]
- 2 screws [3]
- 1 connecter [4]
[2]
[3]
[3]

[2]
[2] [3]
F-3-151

3.2.19 HVT1
[4] [1]
3.2.19.1 Preparation for Removing the HVT1
0012-9580

LBP5960
[4] 1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the controller box.
F-3-148 3) Remove the fixing assembly.
3) Remove the power supply unit [1]. 4) Remove the waste toner case.
- 2 connecters [2] 5) Remove the waste toner cover.
- 5 screws [3] 6) Remove the left cover.
7) Remove the inside left cover.
8) Remove the interlock switch.
9) Remove the hopper drive units.
[2] 9-1) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y).
9-2) Remove the hopper drive unit (M).
9-3) Remove the hopper drive unit (C).
9-4) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk).

3.2.19.2 Removing the HVT1

0010-0371

LBP5960
[2]
[3]
1) Disconnect the 16 connectors [1], and remove the 3 cable clamps [2] and
the 3 edge saddles [3].

[2] [3]

[3]
[3]

[3]
[1] [1] [1]
F-3-149 [1]

3.2.18 All Night Power Supply PCB

3.2.18.1 Before Removing All-Night Power Supply PCB

0017-2226 [1] [3] [1]
LBP5970 / LBP5975
F-3-152
1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover] 2) Remove the power supply fan unit [4].
- 1 cable clamp [1]
3.2.18.2 Removing All-Night Power Supply PCB - 1 connector [2]
0017-2227 - 2 screws [3]
LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the all-night power supply cover [1].

- 2 screws [2]

3-30
 Chapter 3

[1] [2]

[1]
[2]

[3] [4]
F-3-153
3) Open the harness guide unit [3] in the direction of the arrow.
- 2 connectors [1]
- 2 screws [2]

[1] [2] [1]

[1]
F-3-156
6) Open the harness guide [3] in the direction of the arrow.
- 3 screws [1]
- 3 grounding wires [2] (to be freed from the guide)

[1] [2] [1] [2] [1]

[3]
F-3-154
4) Remove the screw [1], and detach the waste toner inside cover [2] in the
direction of the arrow. [3]
F-3-157
7) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the HVT1 support plate [2].

[1]

[1] [2]
F-3-155
5) Remove the 3 grounding wire screws [1], and disconnect the 4 connectors
[2].
[2]
F-3-158
8) Shift down the HVT1 [3] in the direction of the arrow.
- 2 screws [1]
- 4 claws [2]

3-31
 Chapter 3

Hopper Drive Unit (C)]

[2] 9-4) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk). (page 3-63)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (Bk)]

3.2.19.4 Removing HVT1

0016-5991

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove 2 screws [1].

[1] [3]
F-3-159
[1]

Take care not to damage the connector found on the back.

9) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and detach the HVT1 [2].

[1]
[1]
F-3-162
2) Detach the waste toner inner cover [1] in the direction of the arrow.
- 1 screw [2]

[2]
F-3-160

3.2.19.3 Before Removing HVT1

LBP5970 / LBP5975
0016-5989
[2] [1]
F-3-163
1) Detach the cassette [1]. 3) Remove the 2 screws [1] of the grounding wire and disconnect the 4 con-
necters [2].

[2]

[1]
F-3-161
2) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]
3) Remove the controller box. (page 3-25)Reference[Removing Controller [1]
Box] F-3-164
4) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly] 4) Open the harness guide [1] in the direction of the arrow.
5) Detach the waste toner cover. (page 3-23)Reference[Detaching Waste - Free the 3 grounding wires [2] from the harness guide
Toner Cover] - 3 screws [3]
6) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]
7) Detach the inner left cover. (page 3-14)Reference[Detaching Inner Left
Cover]
8) Remove the inter lock switch. (page 3-42)Reference[Removing Inter
Lock Switch]
9) Remove the hopper drive unit.
9-1) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (Y)]
9-2) Remove the hopper drive unit (M). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (M)]
9-3) Remove the hopper drive unit (C). (page 3-62)Reference[Removing

3-32
 Chapter 3

[3] [2] [3] [2] [3] [1]

[2]
[1] F-3-168

F-3-165 3.2.20 HVT2

5) Detach the HVT1 support plate [1].
- 4 screws [2] 3.2.20.1 Before Removing HVT2
0016-5997

[2] LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the

Fixing Assembly]
2) Press the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover [2].

[2]

[1]

[1]
F-3-166
6) Fold the HVT1 [1] in the direction of the arrow.
- 2 screws [2] F-3-169
- 4 claws [3] 3) Remove the ITB. (page 3-91)Reference[Removing ITB]
4) Detach the upper cover. (page 3-15)Reference[Detaching Upper Cover]
5) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]
6) Remove the controller box. (page 3-25)Reference[Removing Controller
The harness is connected at the back. Be sure not to apply any force.
Box]

3.2.20.2 Preparation for Removing the HVT2

[3] LBP5960
0012-9581

1) Remove the fixing assembly.

2) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover
[2].

[2] [1]

[2] [1]
F-3-167
7) Disconnect the 2 connecters [1] and Remove HVT1 [2]. F-3-170
3) Remove the ITB.
4) Remove the upper cover.
5) Remove the rear cover.
6) Remove the controller box.

3.2.20.3 Removing HVT2

0016-5999

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Free the harness from the 2 wire saddles [1].

3-33
 Chapter 3

[1]
[1]
F-3-175
F-3-171
2) Unhook the 3 claws [1], and detach the high-voltage contact cover [2].
2) Remove the screw [1] and free the grounding wire [2] from the edge sad-
dle [3].
3) Disconnect the 2 connecters [4]. [1] [2]

[4]

[1]

F-3-176
3) Remove the HVT2 [3].
[1] [2] [3] - 2 connectors [1]
F-3-172 - 3 claws [2]
4) Disengage the 3 claws [1] with flat-blade screwdriver etc from the back
and detach the high-voltage contact cover [2]. [3]

[1] [2]

[1]

[2] [1]
F-3-177
F-3-173
5) Remove HVT2 [1]. 3.2.21 Fuse Contact PCB
- 3 claws [2]
3.2.21.1 Preparation for Removing the Fuse Contact PCB
[1] 0012-9583

LBP5960
[2]
1) Remove the fixing assembly.
2) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover
[2].

[2] [1]

F-3-174

3.2.20.4 Removing the HVT2

0009-9926

LBP5960
1) Remove the grounding screw [1]. F-3-178

3-34
 Chapter 3

3) Remove the ITB.

4) Remove the rear cover. [1] [3]
5) Remove the left cover.
6) Remove the right cover.
7) Remove the drive fan [3] together with the fan duct.
- 1 connector [1]
- 2 screws [2]

[3]

[2]

[1] [2]
F-3-181
12) Open the harness guide unit [3] in the direction of the arrow.
- 2 connectors [1]
- 2 screws [2]

[1] [2] [1]

F-3-179
8) Remove the controller box.
9) Remove the DC controller PCB.
10) Remove the DC controller cover.
- 1 connector [1]
- 5 cable clamps [2]
- 3 edge saddles [3]
- 8 screws [4]

[2] [4] [2] [4] [2] [4] [3]

[1]
[5] [3]
[2]
F-3-182
[3] 13) Remove the power supply unit [3].
- 2 connectors[1]
- 5 screws [2]

[1]

[2] [4] [3]

F-3-180
11) Open the power supply fan unit [3].
- 1 cable clamp [1]
- 2 screws [2]
[1]

[2] [3] [2]

F-3-183
14) Remove the laser scanner unit.

3.2.21.2 Removing the Fuse Contact PCB

0010-0580

LBP5960

1) Remove the fuse contact PCB cover [3].

- 1 screw [1]
- 3 edge saddles [2]

3-35
 Chapter 3

necter [3].
[1]

[2]

[3]

[1]

[2]

F-3-187
7) Remove the drive fan unit [1].
- 1 connecter [2]
- 2 screws [3]
[3] - Free the harness from the harness guide [4]
F-3-184
[3] [1]

[2]

[3] [4] [2]

F-3-185 F-3-188
2) Remove the fuse contact PCB [3]. 8) Remove the laser scanner unit. (page 3-54)Reference[Removing Laser
- 2 screws [1] Scanner Unit]
- 1 connector [2]
3.2.21.4 Removing Fuse Contact PCB
0016-6002

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the fuse contact PCB cover [1]. (together with the harness)
- 1 screw [2]
- 1 emboss [3]

[2]
[2]

[3]
[1] [3]
F-3-189
[1] 2) Remove the fuse contact PCB [1].
F-3-186 - 2 screws [2]
- 1 connecter [3]
3.2.21.3 Before Removing Fuse Contact PCB
0016-6000

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Remove the controller box. (page 3-25)Reference[Removing Controller
Box]
3) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]
4) Remove the ITB. (page 3-91)Reference[Removing ITB]
5) Remove the DC controller PCB. (page 3-27)Reference[Removing DC
Controller PCB]
6) Open the wire saddle [1] and the edge saddle [2], then pull out the con-

3-36
 Chapter 3

[2]

[1]
[3]

[2] [1]
F-3-190 [3]
F-3-193
3.2.22 Color Displacement Sensor PCB A

3.2.22.1 Removing the Color Displacement Sensor PCB

A When mounting the PCB, check to make sure that the 2 dust-blocking shutter
0009-9906

LBP5960 shafts [1] of the PCB are in the arm hole [2] of the shutter solenoid.

1) Remove the fixing assembly. [1]

2) Push the upper cover lock release button [1], and detach the upper cov-
er.

[2] [1]

[2]

F-3-191
3) Unhook the 2 claws [1], and detach the dust-blocking cover [2].

[1]
F-3-194

6) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the dust-blocking shutter unit [2] and
the 2 color displacement sensors [3].

[1]

[2]
F-3-192
4) Free the 2 dust-blocking shutter shafts [2] from the arm hole [1] of the
shutter solenoid.
5) Remove the spring [3].

[3] [2] [3]

F-3-195
7) Remove the 2 screws [1].

3-37
 Chapter 3

[1]
[3]

[2]

F-3-196
8) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the color displacement sensor
PCB A [2].

[2] [1]

[1]
F-3-200

Points to note at installation

When installing the dust proof shutter, be sure that the 2 dust proof shutter
F-3-197 pins [1] are securely fit into the arm holes [2] on the shutter solenoid.

3.2.22.2 Before Removing Color Displacement Sensor [1]

PCB A
0017-1991

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the

Fixing Assembly]
2) Press the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover [2].
[2]

4) Remove the 4 screws [1] and Remove the dust proof shutter unit [2] and
[2] the 2 color displacement sensor covers [3].

[1]

[1]

F-3-198

3.2.22.3 Removing Color Displacement Sensor PCB A

0016-6003

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the duct proof cover [1].

- 2 claws [2]

[2]
[3] [2] [3]
F-3-201
5) Remove the 2 screws [1].

[1]

[1]
F-3-199
2) Remove the spring [1].
3) Disengage the 2 dust proof shutter shafts [3] from the arm holes [2] of the
shutter solenoid.
F-3-202
6) Disconnect the connecter [1] and Remove the color displacement sensor

3-38
 Chapter 3

PCB A [2].
[3]
[2] [1]

[2]

F-3-203

3.2.23 Color Displacement Sensor PCB B

3.2.23.1 Before Removing Color Displacement Sensor

PCB B
0017-1995

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the

Fixing Assembly]
2) Press the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover [2].

[1]
F-3-206
[2]

Points to note at installation

When installing the dust proof shutter, be sure that the 2 dust proof shutter
[1] pins [1] are securely fit into the arm holes [2] on the shutter solenoid.

[1]

F-3-204

3.2.23.2 Removing Color Displacement Sensor PCB B

0016-6005

LBP5970 / LBP5975
[2]
1) Detach the duct proof cover [1].
- 2 claws [2] 4) Remove the 4 screws [1] and Remove the dust proof shutter unit [2] and
the 2 color displacement sensor covers [3].
[2]
[1]

[1]
F-3-205 [3] [2] [3]
2) Remove the spring [1]. F-3-207
3) Disengage the 2 dust proof shutter shafts [3] from the arm holes [2] of the
shutter solenoid. 5) Remove the 2 screws [1].

[1]

F-3-208
6) Disconnect the connecter [1] and Remove the color displacement sensor
PCB B [2].

3-39
 Chapter 3

[2] [1] [2]

[1]

F-3-209

3.2.23.3 Removing the Color Displacement Sensor PCB

B
0009-9908

LBP5960

1) Remove the fixing assembly.

2) Push the upper cover lock release button [1], and open the upper cover.

[2] [1]

[3]
F-3-212

When mounting the PCB, check to make sure that the 2 dust-blocking shutter
shafts [1] of the PCB are in the arm hole [2] of the shutter solenoid.

[1]
F-3-210
3) Unhook the 2 claws [1], and detach the dust-blocking cover [2].

[1]

[2]

[2]
F-3-211
4) Free the 2 dust-blocking shutter shafts [2] from the arm hole [1] of the F-3-213
shutter solenoid.
5) Remove the spring [3]. 6) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the dust-blocking shutter unit [2] and
the 2 color displacement sensors [3].

[1]

[3] [2] [3]

F-3-214
7) Remove the 2 screws [1].

3-40
 Chapter 3

[1]

[1]

[3]
[2]
F-3-215 F-3-218
8) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the color displacement sensor
PCB B [2]. 3.2.24.3 Before Removing External Environment Sensor
0016-6006

LBP5970 / LBP5975
[2] [1]
1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Detach the delivery tray [1] in the direction of the arrow.

[1]

F-3-216

3.2.24 Machine Outside Environment Sensor

3.2.24.1 Preparation for Removing the Machine Outside

Environment Sensor
0012-9584

LBP5960
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the fixing assembly. F-3-219
3) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover 3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
[2]. Fixing Assembly]
4) With opening the upper rear cover [1], press the upper cover lock release
[2] [1] button [2] to open the upper cover [3].

[1]

[3]

[2]

F-3-220

F-3-217 5) Detach the right cover. (page 3-11)Reference[Detaching Right Cover]

4) Remove the right cover. 3.2.24.4 Removing External Environment Sensor
0016-6007

3.2.24.2 Removing the Machine Outside Environment LBP5970 / LBP5975

Sensor
0010-1522
1) Remove the external environment sensor [1].
LBP5960 - 2 claws [2]
- 1 connecter [3]
1) Remove the machine outside environment sensor [3].
- 1 connector [1]
- 1 claw [2]

3-41
 Chapter 3

[1]

[3]

[2]
[2]
[1]
F-3-221
[3] [2]
3.2.25 Interlock Switch F-3-224

3.2.25.1 Preparation for Removing the Interlock Switch 3.2.25.3 Before Removing Inter Lock Switch
0016-6008
0012-9585

LBP5960 LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the rear cover. 1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Remove the fixing assembly. 2) Detach the cassette [1].
3) Remove the left cover.
4) Remove the inside left cover.

3.2.25.2 Removing the Interlock Switch

0010-0202

LBP5960

1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the drawer connector [2].

[1]

[1]
F-3-225
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly]
4) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]
5) Detach the inner left cover. (page 3-14)Reference[Detaching Inner Left
Cover]

3.2.25.4 Removing Inter Lock Switch

0016-6009

LBP5970 / LBP5975

[2] 1) Remove the drawer connecter [1] (together with the harness).
- 3 screws [2]
F-3-222
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the connector [1] and the harness [2]
[2] from the guide.

[1]
F-3-226
2) Disconnect the connecter [1] and put the connecter [2] through the harness
[1] [2] guide hole, then free the harness [3] from the harness guide.
F-3-223
3) Remove the interlock switch [3].
- 1 cable clamp [1]
- 1 screw [2]

3-42
 Chapter 3

[5] [1] [2]

[1] [2] [3]

F-3-227
3) Remove the inter lock switch [1]. [4] [3]
- Free the harness from the wire saddle [2] F-3-230
- 1 screw [3]
3.2.26.2 Before Removing Cartridge Fan
[2] 0017-2007

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

3.2.26.3 Removing Cartridge Fan

0016-6011

LBP5970 / LBP5975
1) Remove the 2 screws [1].

[1] [3]
F-3-228

3.2.26 Cartridge Fan

3.2.26.1 Removing the Cartridge Fan [1]

0010-0640

LBP5960
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the power supply unit [2].

[1]

F-3-231
2) Remove the cartridge fan [1].
- 1 connecter [2]
- 3 claws [3]

[3]
[2]
[1]

[1]

[2]
F-3-229
3) Move the harness guide unit [3] slightly in the direction of the arrow.
- 2 screws [1]
- 1 connector [2]
4) Unhook the 3 claws [4], and detach the cartridge fan [5]. [3]
F-3-232

3-43
 Chapter 3

3.2.27 Power Supply Fan

3.2.27.1 Removing the Power Supply Fan

0009-9875

LBP5960
[1]
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the power supply fan [3].
- 1 connector [1]
- 3 claws [2]

[2]
F-3-235

[1] 3.2.28 Drive Fan

3.2.28.1 Before Removing Drive Fan

0016-6016

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Remove the controller box. (page 3-25)Reference[Removing Controller
Box]

3.2.28.2 Preparation for Removing the Drive Fan

0012-9586

LBP5960

[2] [3] 1) Remove the rear cover.

2) Remove the fixing assembly.
3) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover
F-3-233 [2].
3.2.27.2 Before Removing Power Supply Fan [2]
0017-2009
[1]
LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

3.2.27.3 Removing Power Supply Fan

0016-6013

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the power supply fan unit [1].

- Free the harness from the harness guide [2]
- 1 connecter [3]
- 2 screws [4]

F-3-236
[3] 4) Remove the right cover.

3.2.28.3 Removing Drive Fan

0016-6017

LBP5970 / LBP5975
[2]
1) Open the wire saddle [1] and the edge saddle [2], then pull out the con-
necter [3].

[1]
[4]

[3]
[4]
[1]
F-3-234
[2]
2) Remove the power supply fan [1].
- 2 screws [2]
F-3-237
2) Remove the drive fan unit [1].
- 1 connecter [2]
- 2 screws [3]
- Free the harness from the harness guide [4]

3-44
 Chapter 3

[3] [1]

[1]
[2]

F-3-241

3.2.29 Fixing Fan 1

[3] [4] [2]
F-3-238 3.2.29.1 Before Removing Fixing Fan 1
3) Remove the drive fan [1]. LBP5970 / LBP5975
0016-6019

- 2 claws [2]
1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Detach the delivery tray [1] in the direction of the arrow.

[1]

[2]
[1]

F-3-239

3.2.28.4 Removing the Drive Fan

0009-9877

LBP5960 F-3-242
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
1) Remove the drive fan [3] together with the fan duct. Fixing Assembly]
- 1 connector [1] 4) With opening the upper rear cover [1], press the upper cover lock release
- 2 screws [2] button [2] to open the upper cover [3].

[3] [1]

[3]

[2] [2]

F-3-243
5) Detach the right cover. (page 3-11)Reference[Detaching Right Cover]
[1] 6) Detach the inner right cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Inner
Right Cover]
7) Detach the inner front cover (right). (page 3-22)Reference[Detaching
Inner Front Cover (Right)]
8) Detach the inner front cover (left). (page 3-23)Reference[Detaching In-
ner Front Cover (Left)]
9) Detach the front cover. (page 3-17)Reference[Detaching Front Cover]

3.2.29.2 Removing Fixing Fan 1

0016-6020

F-3-240 LBP5970 / LBP5975

2) Remove the 2 claws [1], and free the drive fan [2] from the fan duct.
1) Detach the delivery duct cover [1].
- 1 TP screw [2]
- 3 P-tightening screws [3]

3-45
 Chapter 3

[2] [1] [1]

[2]
[3]
F-3-247
F-3-244
2) Remove the fixing fan 1 [3].
2) Remove the fixing fan 1 [1]. - 1 connector [1]
- 1 connecter [2] - 2 claws [2]
- 2 claws [3]
[2] [3] [2] [1]
[3] [1] [3] [2]

F-3-245 F-3-248

3.2.29.3 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Fan 1 3.2.30 Fixing Fan 2
0012-9588

LBP5960 3.2.30.1 Before Removing Fixing Fan 2

0016-6022

1) Remove the rear cover. LBP5970 / LBP5975

2) Remove the fixing assembly.
3) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover 1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]
[2]. 2) Detach the delivery tray [1] in the direction of the arrow.

[2] [1] [1]

F-3-246 F-3-249
4) Remove the right cover. 3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
5) Remove the inside right cover. Fixing Assembly]
6) Remove the inside front cover (right). 4) With opening the upper rear cover [1], press the upper cover lock release
7) Remove the inside front cover (left). button [2] to open the upper cover [3].
8) Remove the front cover.

3.2.29.4 Removing the Fixing Fan 1 [1]

0009-9851

LBP5960
[3]
1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the fan duct [2].

[2]

F-3-250
5) Detach the right cover. (page 3-11)Reference[Detaching Right Cover]
6) Detach the inner right cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Inner

3-46
 Chapter 3

Right Cover] 3.2.30.4 Removing the Fixing Fan 2

7) Detach the inner front cover (right). (page 3-22)Reference[Detaching 0009-9856

Inner Front Cover (Right)] LBP5960

8) Detach the inner front cover (left). (page 3-23)Reference[Detaching In- 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the fan duct [2].
ner Front Cover (Left)]
9) Detach the front cover. (page 3-17)Reference[Detaching Front Cover]
[1]
3.2.30.2 Removing Fixing Fan 2
0016-6023

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the delivery duct cover [1].

- 1 TP screw [2]
- 3 P-tightening screws [3]

[2] [1]

[2]
F-3-254
2) Remove the fixing fan 2 [3].
- 1 connector [1]
- 2 claws [2]

[2] [3] [2]

[3]
F-3-251
2) Remove the fixing fan 2 [1].
- 1 connecter [2]
- 2 claws [3]

[3] [1] [3]

[1]
F-3-255

[2] 3.2.31 Controller Fan

3.2.31.1 Preparation for Removing the Controller Fan

0012-9590

LBP5960
1) Remove the rear cover.
F-3-252 2) Remove the controller box.
3.2.30.3 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Fan 2 3.2.31.2 Removing the Controller Fan
0012-9589 0009-9897

LBP5960 LBP5960
1) Remove the rear cover. 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the face cover [2].
2) Remove the fixing assembly.
3) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover [2] [1]
[2].

[2] [1]

F-3-256
2) Disconnect the connector [1].
F-3-253
4) Remove the right cover.
5) Remove the inside right cover.
6) Remove the inside front cover (right).
7) Remove the inside front cover (left).
8) Remove the front cover.

3-47
 Chapter 3

3.2.31.4 Removing Controller Fan

0016-6027

LBP5970 / LBP5975
[1]
1) Open the blanking cover [1].
- 6 screws [2]

[1]

[2] [2]

F-3-260
2) Disconnect the connecter [1].

F-3-257

Do not detach the controller cover first.

A controller fan is mounted to the back of the controller cover; as such, de-
taching the controller cover first can strain the fan cable, possibly cutting it.

3) Remove the 12 screws [1] and detach the control cover [2].
[1]
[1] [1]
[2]

F-3-261
3) Remove the controller fan [1].
- Free the harness from the edge saddle [2]
- 2 screws [3]

[1] [3]

[1]
F-3-258
4) Turn over the control cover; then, remove the edge saddle [1] and the 2
screws [2] to detach the controller fan [3].

[1] [2]
[3] [2]
F-3-262

3.2.32 Color Displacement Sensor Shutter Solenoid

3.2.32.1 Removing the Color Displacement Sensor

Solenoid
0009-9912

LBP5960

1) Remove the fixing assembly.

2) Push the upper cover lock release button [1], and detach the upper cov-
er.

[3]
F-3-259

3.2.31.3 Before Removing Controller Fan

0016-6024

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

3-48
 Chapter 3

[2] [1] [1]

[2]

F-3-263
3) Unhook the 2 claws [1], and detach the dust-blocking cover [2].

[1]

F-3-266

6) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the 2 screws [2].

[2]

[2]
F-3-264
4) Free the 2 dust-blocking shutter shafts [2] from the arm hole [1] of the
shutter solenoid.
5) Remove the spring [3].

[2]
[1]
F-3-267
7) Remove the edge saddle [1], and detach the shutter solenoid unit [2].
[1] [2] [1]

F-3-268
8) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the color displacement sensor sole-
noid [2].

[3] [2]
F-3-265

When mounting the shutter solenoid, check to make sure that the 2 dust-
blocking shutter shafts [1] are in the arm hole [2] of the shutter solenoid.

[1]
F-3-269

3-49
 Chapter 3

3.2.32.2 Before Removing Color Displacement Sensor [1]

Shutter Solenoid
0017-2021

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the

Fixing Assembly]
2) Press the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover [2].
[2]

[2] 4) Remove the following parts.

- 1 connecter [1]
- 2 screws [2]

[2]
[1]

F-3-270

3.2.32.3 Removing Color Displacement Sensor Shutter

Solenoid
0016-6028

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the duct proof cover [1].

- 2 claws [2]

[2] [1]
F-3-273
5) Free the harness from the edge saddle [1] and Remove the shutter solenoid
[2].

[2] [1]

[1]
F-3-271
2) Remove the spring [1]. F-3-274
3) Disengage the 2 dust proof shutter shafts [3] from the arm holes [2] of the
shutter solenoid. 6) Remove the color displacement sensor shutter solenoid [1].
- 2 screws [2]

[3] [1]

[2]

[2]
F-3-275

3.3 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3.3.1 Laser Scanner Unit

3.3.1.1 Preparation for Removing the Laser Scanner Unit

0012-9591

[1] LBP5960
F-3-272 1) Remove the ITB.
2) Remove the rear cover.
3) Remove the left cover.
Points to note at installation 4) Remove the right cover.
When installing the dust proof shutter, be sure that the 2 dust proof shutter 5) Remove the controller box.
pins [1] are securely fit into the arm holes [2] on the shutter solenoid. 6) Remove the DC controller PCB.

3-50
 Chapter 3

3.3.1.2 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit

LBP5960
0010-7733
[1] [3]

When you replace the laser scanner unit (or remove the laser scanner stay),
be sure to make an adjustment of color displacement.
As to the adjustment procedure, refer to Chapter 5 Troubleshooting > Rem-
edy > Image fault > Displacement/Blurring/Distortion/Out-of-focus > Color
displacement.

1) Remove the drive fan [3] with the fan duct.

- 1 connector [1]
- 2 screws [2]

[3]

[2]
F-3-278
[2]
4) Open the harness guide unit [3] in the direction of the arrow.
- 2 connectors [1]
- 2 screws [2]

[1] [2] [1]

[1]

F-3-276
2) Detach the DC controller cover [5].
- 1 connector [1]
- 5 cable clamps [2]
- 3 edge saddles [3]
- 8 screws [4]
[3]
[2] [4] [2] [4] [2] [4] [3]
F-3-279
5) Remove the power supply unit [3].
- 2 connectors [1]
- 5 screws [2]
[1]
[2] [5]
[1]
[3]

[1]
[2] [4] [3]
F-3-277
3) Open the power supply fan unit [3].
- 1 clamp [1]
- 2 screws [2]

[2] [3] [2]

F-3-280
6) Unhook the 2 claws [1] and detach the dustproof cover [2].

3-51
 Chapter 3

[1]

[1]

[2]

F-3-284
10) Remove the spring [2] of the shutter-linked shaft [1].
[2]
F-3-281 [2]
7) Remove each supply drive shaft stopper [1] and 4 supply drive shafts [2].

[1]

[1]
F-3-285
11) Remove the E-ring [1], the screw [2], and 7 screws [3].

[1] [2]

[1] [2]
F-3-282
8) Lifting out the boss [1], remove the dustproof shutter and the guide [2] in
the direction of the arrow.

[1] [3]
[1]
F-3-286

When you mount the laser scanner stay, be sure to fix the screw [2] first and
then mount 6 screws [3].

12) Remove the screw [1], and detach the Y toner supply pipe unit fixing
member [2].

[2]
F-3-283
9) Remove 3 screws [1] and 3 springs [2].

3-52
 Chapter 3

[2] [1] [1]

F-3-290

F-3-287

When you hold new laser scanner unit, be sure to hold the parts [1] shown in
the figure below.
Do not to hold the parts [2] where the mounting screw holes are located.
When you mount the Y toner supply pipe unit fixing member, insert the pro-
trusion [1] into the hole [2] first and then mount it with the screw [3].

[3]
[1]

[1]

[2]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[3] [2]

[2]
F-3-291
[1]
When you mount the laser scanner unit, be sure to hold the underside [1] of
the unit.
Also, avoid applying force around the area [2] where the mounting screw
holes are located.
F-3-288

13) Free the harness [1] from the edge saddle.

14) Lift the laser scanner unit [2], unhook the boss [3] from the boss hole,
and pull out the laser scanner stay [4] toward the rear.

[2] [4]

[1] [3]
F-3-289
15) Pull out the laser scanner unit [1] toward the rear.

3-53
 Chapter 3

[3] [1]

[3] [4] [2]

[1]
F-3-294

3.3.1.5 Removing Laser Scanner Unit

0016-6031

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the PCB cover [1].

- 2 screws [2]
[2]
F-3-292

Be sure not to damage the connected harness.

3.3.1.3 After Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit
0010-7579

LBP5960
[2]
When you replace the laser scanner unit (or remove the laser scanner stay),
be sure to make an adjustment of color displacement.
As to the adjustment procedure, refer to Chapter 5 Troubleshooting > Rem-
edy > Image fault > Displacement/Blurring/Distortion/Out-of-focus > Color
displacement.

3.3.1.4 Before Removing Laser Scanner Unit

LBP5970 / LBP5975
0016-6029
[1]

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Remove the controller box. (page 3-25)Reference[Removing Controller
Box]
3) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]
4) Remove the ITB. (page 3-91)Reference[Removing ITB]
5) Remove the DC controller PCB. (page 3-27)Reference[Removing DC
Controller PCB]
6) Open the wire saddle [1] and the edge saddle [2], then pull out the con- [2]
necter [3]. F-3-295
2) Disconnect the connecter [1] and free the harness [2] (leave the harness
connected to the PCB cover).

[3]
[1]
[1]

[2]
[2]
F-3-293
7) Remove the drive fan unit [1].
- 1 connecter [2]
F-3-296
- 2 screws [3]
- Free the harness from the harness guide [4] 3) Remove the PCB [1].
- 4 screws [2]

3-54
 Chapter 3

[3]
[1]

[2]

[4] [1]

[2]
F-3-297
4) Detach the PCB support plate [1]. [4]
- 2 screws [2]
F-3-301
8) Remove the power supply unit [1].
[1] - 2 connecters [2]
- 5 screws [3]

[2]

[2]
[3]

[2]
F-3-298
5) Remove the screw [1].

[1]
[3]

[3]
[1]
F-3-302
9) Remove the following parts.
- 1 connecter [1]
- Free the harness from the 7 wire saddles [2] and the 3 edge saddles [3]

[2]
[1]

[2]
F-3-299
6) Remove the 3 screws [1].
[3]

[3]

[2]

F-3-303
10) Detach the DC controller case [1].
- 8 screws [2]
- 1 ring terminal [3]

[1]
F-3-300
7) Remove the power supply fan unit [1].
- Free the harness from the harness guide [2]
- 1 connecter [3]
- 2 screws [4]

3-55
 Chapter 3

[1] [2] [3] [2]

[1]

[2]
F-3-304
11) Open the harness guide unit [1] in the direction of the arrow.
- Free the 2 harnesses [2] from the harness guide.
- 2 screws [3]

[3]

[1] [2]
F-3-307
14) With the boss disengaged [1], move the shutter guide [2] in the direction
of the arrow and remove the shutter guide together with the dust proof
shutter. (4 each) (Detach together with link [3] other than Bk.)
[2]

[3] [2]

[1] [1]
F-3-305
12) Detach the dust proof cover [1].
- 2 claws [2]

[2]

F-3-308
15) Detach the link support plate [1].
- 2 screws [2]
- 1 link [3] (leave it connected at left side)

[3] [1] [2]

[1]
F-3-306
13) Detach the each supply drive shaft stopper [1] and remove the 4 supply
drive shafts [2].

F-3-309
16) Remove the following parts.
- 3 stepping screws [1]
- 3 springs [2]

3-56
 Chapter 3

[2] [4]

[1]

[2]

F-3-310
17) Remove the spring [2] of the shutter drive shaft [1].

[2] [1] [3]

F-3-313
21) Remove the link [1].

[1]

F-3-314
22) Pull out the laser scanner unit [1] to remove.

[1] [1]
F-3-311
18) Remove the following parts.
- 1 E-ring [1]
- 1 P-tightening screw [2]
- 6 TP screws [3]

[1] [2]

F-3-315
[3] [3]

For new laser scanner unit, be sure to hold the position [1] indicated below.
Be careful not to hold the position [2] where the screw hole is located.

F-3-312
19) Free the harness from the edge saddle [1].
20) Lift the laser scanner unit [2] from the bottom to disengage the boss [3]
from the boss hole and pull out the laser scanner stay [4].

3-57
 Chapter 3

[1]

[1]

[2]

[2]

When installing the laser scanner unit, be sure to hold the bottom [1] of the
unit.
In addition, be careful not to apply any pressure to the face [2] where the
screw hole is located.

[1]

[2]

3.3.1.6 Points to Note When Replacing Laser Scanner

Unit
0016-6032

LBP5970 / LBP5975

If replacing the laser scanner unit (if laser scanner stay is removed), be sure
to perform the color displacement correction.

MEMO:
As to the adjustment procedure, refer to Chapter 5 Troubleshooting >
Remedy > Image fault > Displacement/Blurring/Distortion/Out-of-focus >
Color displacement.

3-58
 Chapter 3

[1]
3.4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
[2]
3.4.1 Drum/ITB Motor

3.4.1.1 Preparation for Removing the Drum/ITB Motor

0012-9592

LBP5960

1) Remove the rear cover.

2) Remove the fixing assembly.
3) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover
[2].

[2] [1] [3] [2]

F-3-319
4) Remove the drum/ITB motor [3].
- 2 connectors [1]
- 4 screws [2]

[2] [1]

F-3-316
4) Remove the right cover.
5) Remove the right inside cover.
6) Remove the inside front cover (right).

3.4.1.2 Removing the Drum/ITB Motor

0009-9881
[2] [3]
LBP5960
F-3-320
1) Remove the screw [1] and detach the harness guide (white) [2].
3.4.1.3 Before Removing Drum/ITB Motor
0016-6033

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Detach the delivery tray [1] in the direction of the arrow.

[1]

[1] [2]
F-3-317
2) Remove the 2 screws [1].

F-3-321
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly]
4) With opening the upper rear cover [1], press the upper cover lock release
button [2] to open the upper cover [3].

[1]

[3]

[2]
[1]
F-3-318
3) Remove the lower right plate [3].
- 3 cable clamps [1] F-3-322
- 7 screws [2] 5) Detach the right cover. (page 3-11)Reference[Detaching Right Cover]

3.4.1.4 Removing Drum/ITB Motor

0016-6034

LBP5970 / LBP5975

3-59
 Chapter 3

1) Remove the external environment sensor unit [1] (leave the harness con- 3.4.2 Hopper Drive Unit (Y)
nected).
- 1 screw [2] 3.4.2.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Drive Unit
(Y)
0012-9602

LBP5960

1) Remove the fixing assembly.

2) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover
[2].

[2] [1]

[2] [1]
F-3-323
2) Remove the 2 screws [1].

F-3-327
3) Remove the rear cover.
4) Remove the controller box.
5) Remove the waste toner case.
6) Remove the waste toner cover.
7) Remove the left cover.

3.4.2.2 Removing the Hopper Drive Unit (Y)

0010-0193

LBP5960

1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the 2 grounding plates [2].

[1] [1]
[1]
F-3-324
3) Slightly lower the lower right plate [1].
- 6 screws [2]

[2]

[2]

F-3-328
2) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y) [5].
- 1 connector [1]
[1] [2] - harness [2] (to be freed from the guide [3])
- 2 screws [4]
F-3-325
4) Remove the drum/ITB motor [1]. [5] [4]
- 2 connecters [2]
- 4 screws [3]

[3] [2]

[1] [2] [3]

F-3-329
[3] [1]
3.4.2.3 Before Removing Hopper Drive Unit (Y)
F-3-326 0016-6037

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]

3-60
 Chapter 3

3.4.2.4 Removing Hopper Drive Unit (Y)

LBP5970 / LBP5975
0016-6038
[1] [1]

1) Remove the contact springs 1 & 2 [1] [2].

- 4 P-tightening screws [3]
- 4 binding screws [4]

[3]

[4] [2]

[4] F-3-333
2) Remove the hopper drive unit (M) [5].
- 1 connector [1]
- harness [2] (to be freed from the guide [3])
[1] [2] - 2 screws [4]
F-3-330
[4] [5]
2) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y) [1].
- 1 connecter [2]
- Free the harness [3] from the harness guide
- 2 screws [4]

[1] [4]

[1] [2] [3]

F-3-334

3.4.3.3 Before Removing Hopper Drive Unit (M)

0016-6039

LBP5970 / LBP5975
[2] [3]
F-3-331 1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]
3.4.3 Hopper Drive Unit (M)
3.4.3.4 Removing Hopper Drive Unit (M)
3.4.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Drive Unit LBP5970 / LBP5975
0016-6040

(M)
0012-9603
1) Remove the contact springs 1 & 2 [1] [2].
LBP5960 - 4 P-tightening screws [3]
- 4 binding screws [4]
1) Remove the fixing assembly.
2) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover
[2]. [3]

[2] [1]

[4]

[4]

[1] [2]
F-3-335
2) Remove the hopper drive unit (M) [1].
- 1 connecter [2]
F-3-332 - Free the harness [3] from the harness guide
3) Remove the rear cover. - 2 screws [4]
4) Remove the controller box.
5) Remove the waste toner case.
6) Remove the waste toner cover.
7) Remove the left cover.

3.4.3.2 Removing the Hopper Drive Unit (M)

0010-0194

LBP5960

1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the 2 grounding plates [2].

3-61
 Chapter 3

[4] [1] [4] [5]

[2] [3] [1] [2] [3]

F-3-336 F-3-339

3.4.4 Hopper Drive Unit (C) 3.4.4.3 Before Removing Hopper Drive Unit (C)
0016-6041

LBP5970 / LBP5975
3.4.4.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Drive Unit
(C) 1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]
LBP5960
0012-9604
2) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]

1) Remove the fixing assembly. 3.4.4.4 Removing Hopper Drive Unit (C)
0016-6042

2) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover LBP5970 / LBP5975
[2].
1) Remove the contact springs 2 [1].
[2] [1] - 2 P-tightening screws [2]
- 3 binding screws [3]

[2]

[3]

F-3-337 [1]
3) Remove the rear cover. F-3-340
4) Remove the controller box. 2) Remove the hopper drive unit (C) [1].
5) Remove the waste toner case. - 1 connecter [2]
6) Remove the waste toner cover. - Free the harness [3] from the harness guide
7) Remove the left cover. - 2 screws [4]
3.4.4.2 Removing the Hopper Drive Unit (C)
0010-0196
[4] [1]
LBP5960

1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the 2 grounding plates [2].

[1] [1]

[2] [3]
F-3-341
[2]
3.4.5 Hopper Drive Unit (Bk)
F-3-338
2) Remove the hopper drive unit (C) [5]. 3.4.5.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Drive Unit
- 1 connector [1] (Bk)
- harness [2] (to be freed from the guide [3]) 0012-9606

- 2 screws [4] LBP5960

1) Remove the fixing assembly.

2) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover
[2].

3-62
 Chapter 3

[2] [1] [2]

[3]

[1]
F-3-345
2) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk) [1].
F-3-342
- 1 connecter [2]
3) Remove the rear cover. - Free the harness [3] from the harness guide
4) Remove the controller box. - 3 screws [4]
5) Remove the waste toner case.
6) Remove the waste toner cover. [4]
7) Remove the left cover.

3.4.5.2 Removing the Hopper Drive Unit (Bk)

0010-0197

LBP5960

1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the 2 grounding plates [2].

[1] [1]

[1]

[2] [3]
F-3-346

3.4.6 Hopper Shutter Unit (Y)

[2] 3.4.6.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Shutter
Drive Unit (Y)
F-3-343 0012-9769

LBP5960
2) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk) [5].
- 1 connector [1] 1) Remove the fixing assembly.
- harness [2] (to be freed from the guide [3]) 2) Remove the rear cover.
- 3 screws [4] 3) Remove the controller box.
4) Remove the waste toner case.
[4] 5) Remove the waste toner cover.
6) Remove the left cover.
7) Remove the inside left cover.
8) Remove the interlock switch.
9) Remove the hopper drive unit.
9-1) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y).
9-2) Remove the hopper drive unit (M).
9-3) Remove the hopper drive unit (C).
9-4) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk).
10) Remove HVT1.
11) Remove the waste toner sensor unit.

3.4.6.2 Removing the Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Y)

0010-0434

LBP5960

1) Unhook the 2 claws [1], and detach the waste toner shutter seal [2].

[1] [5] [2] [3] [1] [2]

F-3-344

3.4.5.3 Before Removing Hopper Drive Unit (Bk)

0016-6043

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]

3.4.5.4 Removing Hopper Drive Unit (Bk)

0016-6044

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the contact springs 2 [1].

- 2 P-tightening screws [2]
- 3 binding screws [3]
F-3-347
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the waste toner case vibrator lever

3-63
 Chapter 3

[2].

[1] [2] [2]

[1] [2]

F-3-348
3) Remove the 2 cable clamps [1], and disconnect the 4 connectors [2].

[1]
[1] [3]
F-3-351

3.4.6.3 Before Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Y)

0016-6045

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Detach the cassette [1].

[2] [2]
F-3-349
4) Remove the high-voltage relay holder [3].
- 5 connectors [1]
- 4 screws [2]

[3] [1] [2] [1]

F-3-352
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly]
4) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]
5) Detach the inner left cover. (page 3-14)Reference[Detaching Inner Left
Cover]
6) Remove the inter lock switch. (page 3-42)Reference[Removing Inter
Lock Switch]
7) Remove the hopper drive unit.
7-1) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (Y)]
7-2) Remove the hopper drive unit (M). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (M)]
7-3) Remove the hopper drive unit (C). (page 3-62)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (C)]
[2] [1] [2] [1] 7-4) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk). (page 3-63)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (Bk)]
F-3-350 8) Remove the HVT1. (page 3-32)Reference[Removing HVT1]
5) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (Y) [3].
- 2 screws [1] 3.4.6.4 Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Y)
- 1 claw [2] 0016-6046

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the waste toner shutter seal [1].

- 2 claws [2]

3-64
 Chapter 3

- 2 screws [2]
[2] [1] - 1 claw [3]

[3]
[2] [3]

F-3-353
2) Detach the waste toner case vibration lever [1]. [2] [1]
- 2 screws [1] F-3-357

[2] [1] 3.4.7 Hopper Shutter Unit (M)

3.4.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Shutter

Drive Unit (M)
0012-9779

LBP5960

1) Remove the fixing assembly.

2) Remove the rear cover.
3) Remove the controller box.
4) Remove the waste toner case.
5) Remove the waste toner cover.
6) Remove the left cover.
7) Remove the inside left cover.
8) Remove the interlock switch.
9) Remove the hopper drive unit.
F-3-354 9-1) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y).
9-2) Remove the hopper drive unit (M).
3) Remove the 2 cable clamps [1] and disconnect the 4 connecters [2]. 9-3) Remove the hopper drive unit (C).
9-4) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk).
[1] 10) Remove HVT1.
11) Remove the waste toner sensor unit.

3.4.7.2 Removing the Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (M)

0010-0436

LBP5960

1) Unhook the 2 claws [1], and detach the waste toner shutter seal [2].

[1] [2]

[2] [2]
F-3-355
4) Remove the high-voltage relay holder [1].
- 5 connecters [2]
- 4 screws [3]

[1] [2] [3] F-3-358

2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the waste toner case vibrator lever
[2].

[3] [2] [3] [2]

F-3-356
5) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (Y) [1].

3-65
 Chapter 3

[1] [2]
[2]

[1] [2]

F-3-359
3) Remove the 2 cable clamps [1], and disconnect the 4 connectors [2].

[1]

[1] [3]
F-3-362

3.4.7.3 Before Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (M)

0016-6047

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Detach the cassette [1].

[2] [2]
F-3-360
4) Remove the high-voltage relay holder [3].
- 5 connectors [1]
- 4 screws [2]

[3] [1] [2]

[1]
F-3-363
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly]
4) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]
5) Detach the inner left cover. (page 3-14)Reference[Detaching Inner Left
Cover]
6) Remove the inter lock switch. (page 3-42)Reference[Removing Inter
Lock Switch]
7) Remove the hopper drive unit.
7-1) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (Y)]
7-2) Remove the hopper drive unit (M). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (M)]
7-3) Remove the hopper drive unit (C). (page 3-62)Reference[Removing
[2] [1] [2] [1] Hopper Drive Unit (C)]
7-4) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk). (page 3-63)Reference[Removing
F-3-361 Hopper Drive Unit (Bk)]
5) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (M) [3]. 8) Remove the HVT1. (page 3-32)Reference[Removing HVT1]
- 2 screws [1]
- 1 claw [2] 3.4.7.4 Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (M)
0016-6048

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the waste toner shutter seal [1].

- 2 claws [2]

3-66
 Chapter 3

- 2 screws [2]
[2] [1] - 1 claw [3]

[2] [3] [3]

F-3-364 [2] [1]

2) Detach the waste toner case vibration lever [1]. F-3-368
- 2 screws [1]
3.4.8 Hopper Shutter Unit(C)
[2] [1]
3.4.8.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Shutter
Drive Unit (C)
0012-9786

LBP5960

1) Remove the fixing assembly.

2) Remove the rear cover.
3) Remove the controller box.
4) Remove the waste toner case.
5) Remove the waste toner cover.
6) Remove the left cover.
7) Remove the inside left cover.
8) Remove the interlock switch.
9) Remove the hopper drive unit.
9-1) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y).
F-3-365 9-2) Remove the hopper drive unit (M).
9-3) Remove the hopper drive unit (C).
3) Remove the 2 cable clamps [1] and disconnect the 4 connecters [2]. 9-4) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk).
10) Remove HVT1.
[1] 11) Remove the waste toner sensor unit.

3.4.8.2 Removing the Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (C)

0010-0437

LBP5960
1) Unhook the 2 claws [1], and detach the waste toner shutter seal [2].

[1] [2]

[2] [2]
F-3-366
4) Remove the high-voltage relay holder [1].
- 5 connecters [2]
- 4 screws [3]
F-3-369
[1] [2] [3]
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the waste toner case vibrator lever
[2].

[1] [2]

[3] [2] [3] [2]

F-3-367
5) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (M) [1]. F-3-370

3-67
 Chapter 3

3) Remove the 2 cable clamps [1], and disconnect the 4 connectors [2].

[1]

[1]
F-3-374
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly]
4) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]
5) Detach the inner left cover. (page 3-14)Reference[Detaching Inner Left
[2] [2] Cover]
F-3-371 6) Remove the inter lock switch. (page 3-42)Reference[Removing Inter
4) Remove the high-voltage relay holder [3]. Lock Switch]
- 5 connectors [1] 7) Remove the hopper drive unit.
- 4 screws [2] 7-1) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (Y)]
[3] [1] [2] 7-2) Remove the hopper drive unit (M). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (M)]
7-3) Remove the hopper drive unit (C). (page 3-62)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (C)]
7-4) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk). (page 3-63)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (Bk)]
8) Remove the HVT1. (page 3-32)Reference[Removing HVT1]

3.4.8.4 Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (C)

0016-6050

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the waste toner shutter seal [1].

- 2 claws [2]

[2] [1]

[2] [1] [2] [1]

F-3-372
5) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (C) [3].
- 2 screws [1]
- 1 claw [2]

[2]

F-3-375
[1] [2] 2) Detach the waste toner case vibration lever [1].
- 2 screws [1]

[2] [1]

[1] [3]
F-3-373

3.4.8.3 Before Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (C)

0016-6049

LBP5970 / LBP5975 F-3-376

3) Remove the 2 cable clamps [1] and disconnect the 4 connecters [2].
1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Detach the cassette [1].

3-68
 Chapter 3

11) Remove the waste toner sensor unit.

[1]
3.4.9.2 Removing the Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Bk)
0012-9795

LBP5960

1) Unhook the 2 claws [1], and remove the waste toner shutter seal [2].

[1] [2]

[2] [2]
F-3-377
4) Remove the high-voltage relay holder [1].
- 5 connecters [2]
- 4 screws [3] F-3-380
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the waste toner case vibrator lever
[1] [2] [3] [2].

[1] [2]

[3] [2] [3] [2]

F-3-378 F-3-381
5) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (C) [1]. 3) Remove the 2 cable clamps [1], and disconnect the 4 connectors [2].
- 2 screws [2]
- 1 claw [3]
[1]
[2] [3]
[3]

[2] [1]
F-3-379
[2] [2]
3.4.9 Hopper Shutter Unit (Bk) F-3-382
4) Remove the high-voltage relay holder [3].
3.4.9.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Shutter - 5 connectors [1]
Drive Unit (Bk) - 4 screws [2]
0012-9794

LBP5960

1) Remove the fixing assembly.

2) Remove the rear cover.
3) Remove the controller box.
4) Remove the waste toner case.
5) Remove the waste toner cover.
6) Remove the left cover.
7) Remove the left inside cover.
8) Remove the interlock switch.
9) Remove the hopper drive unit.
9-1) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y).
9-2) Remove the hopper drive unit (M).
9-3) Remove the hopper drive unit (C).
9-4) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk).
10) Remove HVT1.

3-69
 Chapter 3

Hopper Drive Unit (Bk)]

[3] [1] [2] 8) Remove the HVT1. (page 3-32)Reference[Removing HVT1]

3.4.9.4 Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Bk)

0016-6052

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the waste toner shutter seal [1].

- 2 claws [2]

[2] [1]

[2] [1] [2] [1]

F-3-383
5) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (Bk) [3].
- 2 screws [1]
- 1 claw [2]

[2]
F-3-386
2) Detach the waste toner case vibration lever [1].
- 2 screws [1]

[2] [1]

[1] [2]

[1] [3] F-3-387

F-3-384 3) Remove the 2 cable clamps [1] and disconnect the 4 connecters [2].

3.4.9.3 Before Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Bk) [1]

0016-6051

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Detach the cassette [1].

[2] [2]
[1] F-3-388
F-3-385 4) Remove the high-voltage relay holder [1].
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the - 5 connecters [2]
Fixing Assembly] - 4 screws [3]
4) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]
5) Detach the inner left cover. (page 3-14)Reference[Detaching Inner Left
Cover]
6) Remove the inter lock switch. (page 3-42)Reference[Removing Inter
Lock Switch]
7) Remove the hopper drive unit.
7-1) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (Y)]
7-2) Remove the hopper drive unit (M). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (M)]
7-3) Remove the hopper drive unit (C). (page 3-62)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (C)]
7-4) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk). (page 3-63)Reference[Removing

3-70
 Chapter 3

14-4) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (Bk).

[1] [2] [3] 15) Remove the hopper supply unit.

3.4.10.2 Removing the Toner Supply Pipe Unit (Y)

0010-0456

LBP5960

1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the toner supply pipe unit (Y) [2].

[2]

[3] [2] [3] [2]

F-3-389
5) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (Bk) [1].
- 2 screws [2]
- 1 claw [3]
[1]
[1] [2] F-3-392
[3]

Be sure to place paper before starting the work. Removing the toner supply
pipe will cause leakage of toner.

3.4.10.3 Before Removing Toner Supply Pipe Unit (Y)

0016-6053

LBP5970 / LBP5975
1) Detach the cassette [1].
[1] [3]
F-3-390

3.4.10 Toner Supply Pipe Unit (Y)

3.4.10.1 Preparation for Removing the Toner Supply Pipe

Unit (Y)
0012-9612

LBP5960
1) Remove the fixing assembly.
2) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover
[2].

[2] [1] [1]

F-3-393
2) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly]
3) Press the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover [2].

[2]

[1]
F-3-391
3) Remove the ITB.
4) Remove the rear cover.
5) Remove the controller box. F-3-394
6) Remove the waste toner case.
7) Remove the waste toner cover. 4) Remove the ITB. (page 3-91)Reference[Removing ITB]
8) Remove the left cover. 5) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]
9) Remove the inside left cover. 6) Remove the controller box. (page 3-25)Reference[Removing Controller
10) Remove the interlock switch. Box]
11) Remove the hopper drive unit. 7) Detach the waste toner cover. (page 3-23)Reference[Detaching Waste
11-1) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y). Toner Cover]
11-2) Remove the hopper drive unit (M). 8) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]
11-3) Remove the hopper drive unit (C).
11-4) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk). 9) Detach the inner left cover. (page 3-14)Reference[Detaching Inner Left
12) Remove HVT1. Cover]
13) Remove the waste toner sensor unit. 10) Remove the inter lock switch. (page 3-42)Reference[Removing Inter
14) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit. Lock Switch]
14-1) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (Y). 11) Remove the hopper drive unit.
14-2) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (M). 11-1) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing
14-3) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (C). Hopper Drive Unit (Y)]

3-71
 Chapter 3

11-2) Remove the hopper drive unit (M). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing 12) Remove HVT1.
Hopper Drive Unit (M)] 13) Remove the waste toner sensor unit.
11-3) Remove the hopper drive unit (C). (page 3-62)Reference[Removing 14) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit.
Hopper Drive Unit (C)] 14-1) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (Y).
11-4) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk). (page 3-63)Reference[Remov- 14-2) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (M).
ing Hopper Drive Unit (Bk)] 14-3) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (C).
14-4) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (Bk).
12) Remove the HVT1. (page 3-32)Reference[Removing HVT1] 15) Remove the hopper supply unit.
13) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit.
13-1) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (Y). (page 3-64)Reference[Re- 3.4.11.2 Removing the Toner Supply Pipe Unit (M)
moving Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Y)] 0010-0458

13-2) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (M). (page 3-66)Refer- LBP5960
ence[Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (M)]
13-3) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (C). (page 3-68)Reference[Re- 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the toner supply pipe unit (M) [2].
moving Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (C)]
13-4) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (Bk). (page 3-70)Refer- [2]
ence[Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Bk)]
14) Remove the hopper supply unit. (page 3-77)Reference[Removing
Hopper Supply Unit]

3.4.10.4 Removing Toner Supply Pipe Unit (Y)

0016-6054

LBP5970 / LBP5975

When Removing the toner supply pipe unit, toner always drops. Be sure to
place the paper etc before operation.

1) Remove the toner supply pipe unit (Y) [1].

- 2 screws [2] [1]
F-3-397
[1]

Be sure to place paper before starting the work. Removing the toner supply
pipe unit will cause leakage of toner.

3.4.11.3 Before Removing Toner Supply Pipe Unit (M)

0017-3318

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the cassette [1].

[2]
F-3-395

3.4.11 Toner Supply Pipe Unit (M)

3.4.11.1 Preparation for Removing the Toner Supply Pipe

Unit (M)
0012-9613

LBP5960

1) Remove the fixing assembly.

2) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover
[2].

[2] [1] [1]

F-3-398
2) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly]
3) Press the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover [2].

[2]

[1]

F-3-396
3) Remove the ITB.
4) Remove the rear cover.
5) Remove the controller box. F-3-399
6) Remove the waste toner case.
7) Remove the waste toner cover. 4) Remove the ITB. (page 3-91)Reference[Removing ITB]
8) Remove the left cover. 5) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]
9) Remove the inside left cover. 6) Remove the controller box. (page 3-25)Reference[Removing Controller
10) Remove the interlock switch. Box]
11) Remove the hopper drive unit. 7) Detach the waste toner cover. (page 3-23)Reference[Detaching Waste
11-1) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y). Toner Cover]
11-2) Remove the hopper drive unit (M). 8) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]
11-3) Remove the hopper drive unit (C). 9) Detach the inner left cover. (page 3-14)Reference[Detaching Inner Left
11-4) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk). Cover]

3-72
 Chapter 3

10) Remove the inter lock switch. (page 3-42)Reference[Removing Inter 11) Remove the hopper drive unit.
Lock Switch] 11-1) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y).
11) Remove the hopper drive unit. 11-2) Remove the hopper drive unit (M).
11-1) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing 11-3) Remove the hopper drive unit (C).
Hopper Drive Unit (Y)] 11-4) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk).
11-2) Remove the hopper drive unit (M). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing 12) Remove HVT1.
Hopper Drive Unit (M)] 13) Remove the waste toner sensor unit.
14) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit.
11-3) Remove the hopper drive unit (C). (page 3-62)Reference[Removing 14-1) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (Y).
Hopper Drive Unit (C)] 14-2) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (M).
11-4) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk). (page 3-63)Reference[Remov- 14-3) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (C).
ing Hopper Drive Unit (Bk)] 14-4) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (Bk).
12) Remove the HVT1. (page 3-32)Reference[Removing HVT1] 15) Remove the hopper supply unit.
13) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit.
13-1) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (Y). (page 3-64)Reference[Re- 3.4.12.2 Removing the Toner Supply Pipe Unit (C)
moving Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Y)] 0010-0464

13-2) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (M). (page 3-66)Refer- LBP5960
ence[Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (M)]
13-3) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (C). (page 3-68)Reference[Re- 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the toner supply pipe unit (C) [2].
moving Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (C)]
13-4) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (Bk). (page 3-70)Refer- [2]
ence[Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Bk)]
14) Remove the hopper supply unit. (page 3-77)Reference[Removing
Hopper Supply Unit]

3.4.11.4 Removing Toner Supply Pipe Unit (M)

0016-6056

LBP5970 / LBP5975

When Removing the toner supply pipe unit, toner always drops. Be sure to
place the paper etc before operation.

1) Remove the toner supply pipe unit (M) [1].

- 3 screws [2] [1]
F-3-402
[1]

Be sure to place paper before starting the work. Removing the toner supply
pipe unit will cause leakage of toner.

3.4.12.3 Before Removing Toner Supply Pipe Unit (C)

0017-3322

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the cassette [1].

[2]
F-3-400

3.4.12 Toner Supply Pipe Unit (C)

3.4.12.1 Preparation for Removing the Toner Supply Pipe

Unit (C)
0012-9614

LBP5960

1) Remove the fixing assembly.

2) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover
[2].

[2] [1] [1]

F-3-403
2) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly]
3) Press the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover [2].

[2]

[1]

F-3-401
3) Remove the ITB.
4) Remove the rear cover.
5) Remove the controller box. F-3-404
6) Remove the waste toner case.
7) Remove the waste toner cover. 4) Remove the ITB. (page 3-91)Reference[Removing ITB]
8) Remove the left cover. 5) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]
9) Remove the left inside cover. 6) Remove the controller box. (page 3-25)Reference[Removing Controller
10) Remove the interlock switch. Box]

3-73
 Chapter 3

7) Detach the waste toner cover. (page 3-23)Reference[Detaching Waste 6) Remove the waste toner case.
Toner Cover] 7) Detach the waste toner cover.
8) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover] 8) Detach the left cover.
9) Detach the inner left cover. (page 3-14)Reference[Detaching Inner Left 9) Detach the left inside cover.
Cover] 10) Remove the interlock switch.
11) Remove the hopper drive unit.
10) Remove the inter lock switch. (page 3-42)Reference[Removing Inter 11-1) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y).
Lock Switch] 11-2) Remove the hopper drive unit (M)
11) Remove the hopper drive unit. 11-3) Remove the hopper drive unit (C).
11-1) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing 11-4) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk).
Hopper Drive Unit (Y)] 12) Remove HVT1.
11-2) Remove the hopper drive unit (M). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing 13) Remove the waste toner sensor unit.
Hopper Drive Unit (M)] 14) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit.
11-3) Remove the hopper drive unit (C). (page 3-62)Reference[Removing 14-1) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (Y).
Hopper Drive Unit (C)] 14-2) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (M).
11-4) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk). (page 3-63)Reference[Remov- 14-3) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (C).
ing Hopper Drive Unit (Bk)] 14-4) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (Bk).
12) Remove the HVT1. (page 3-32)Reference[Removing HVT1] 15) Remove the hopper supply unit.
13) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit.
13-1) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (Y). (page 3-64)Reference[Re- 3.4.13.2 Removing the Toner Supply Pipe Unit (Bk)
moving Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Y)] LBP5960
0010-0467

13-2) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (M). (page 3-66)Refer-
ence[Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (M)] 1) Remove the 3 screws [1] and the toner supply pipe unit (Bk).
13-3) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (C). (page 3-68)Reference[Re-
moving Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (C)] [2]
13-4) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (Bk). (page 3-70)Refer-
ence[Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Bk)]
14) Remove the hopper supply unit. (page 3-77)Reference[Removing
Hopper Supply Unit]

3.4.12.4 Removing Toner Supply Pipe Unit (C)

0016-6058

LBP5970 / LBP5975

When Removing the toner supply pipe unit, toner always drops. Be sure to
place the paper etc before operation.

1) Remove the toner supply pipe unit (C) [1].

- 3 screws [2] [1]
F-3-407
[1]

Removing the toner supply pipe unit will cause toner leakage. Be sure to
place paper prior to the work.

3.4.13.3 Before Removing Toner Supply Pipe Unit (Bk)

0017-3325

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the cassette [1].

[2]
F-3-405

3.4.13 Toner Supply Pipe Unit (Bk)

3.4.13.1 Preparation for Removing the Toner Supply Pipe

Unit (Bk)
0012-9615

LBP5960
1) Remove the fixing assembly.
2) Press the top cover lock release button [1] to open the top cover [2].

[2] [1] [1]

F-3-408
2) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly]
3) Press the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover [2].

[2]

[1]

F-3-406
3) Remove the ITB.
4) Detach the rear cover.
5) Remove the controller box. F-3-409

3-74
 Chapter 3

4) Remove the ITB. (page 3-91)Reference[Removing ITB] 3) Remove the ITB.

5) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover] 4) Detach the rear cover.
6) Remove the controller box. (page 3-25)Reference[Removing Controller 5) Remove the controller box.
Box] 6) Remove the waste toner case.
7) Detach the waste toner cover.
7) Detach the waste toner cover. (page 3-23)Reference[Detaching Waste 8) Detach the left cover.
Toner Cover] 9) Detach the left inside cover.
8) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover] 10) Remove the interlock switch.
9) Detach the inner left cover. (page 3-14)Reference[Detaching Inner Left 11) Remove the hopper drive unit.
Cover] 11-1) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y).
10) Remove the inter lock switch. (page 3-42)Reference[Removing Inter 11-2) Remove the hopper drive unit (M)
Lock Switch] 11-3) Remove the hopper drive unit (C).
11) Remove the hopper drive unit. 11-4) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk).
11-1) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing 12) Remove the HVT1.
Hopper Drive Unit (Y)] 13) Remove the waste toner sensor unit.
11-2) Remove the hopper drive unit (M). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing 14) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit.
Hopper Drive Unit (M)] 14-1) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (Y).
11-3) Remove the hopper drive unit (C). (page 3-62)Reference[Removing 14-2) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (M).
Hopper Drive Unit (C)] 14-3) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (C).
11-4) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk). (page 3-63)Reference[Remov- 14-4) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (Bk).
ing Hopper Drive Unit (Bk)]
12) Remove the HVT1. (page 3-32)Reference[Removing HVT1]
3.4.14.2 Removing the Hopper Supply Unit
0010-0446

13) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit. LBP5960

13-1) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (Y). (page 3-64)Reference[Re-
moving Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Y)] 1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and unhook the 3 claws [2].
13-2) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (M). (page 3-66)Refer-
ence[Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (M)] [1]
13-3) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (C). (page 3-68)Reference[Re- [1]
moving Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (C)]
13-4) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (Bk). (page 3-70)Refer-
ence[Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Bk)]
14) Remove the hopper supply unit. (page 3-77)Reference[Removing
Hopper Supply Unit]

3.4.13.4 Removing Toner Supply Pipe Unit (Bk)

0016-6060

LBP5970 / LBP5975

When Removing the toner supply pipe unit, toner always drops. Be sure to
place the paper etc before operation.

1) Remove the toner supply pipe unit (Bk) [1].

- 3 screws [2]

[1]
[2]

[2]

F-3-412
2) Hold the claw [1]. Pulling it in the direction of the arrow [A], unhook the
[2] 2 bosses [2] and the cartridge guide [3] in the direction of the arrow [B].
F-3-410
[2]
3.4.14 Hopper Supply Unit [3]
3.4.14.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Supply
[B]
Unit
0013-1900

LBP5960
1) Remove the fixing assembly.
2) Press the top cover lock release button [1] to open the top cover [2].

[2] [1] [A]

[2] [1]
F-3-413
3) Remove the 4 supply drive shaft stoppers [1] and the 4 supply drive shafts
[2].

F-3-411

3-75
 Chapter 3

[1]
[1]

[2]

F-3-417
7) Free the harness [1] from the harness guide.

[1]

[1] [2]
F-3-414
4) Remove the 6 screws [1] and the 3 hopper unit fixing members [2].

[1]

F-3-418
8) Remove the 3 screws [1] and the 3 grounding wires [2].

[1]

[2]
F-3-415
5) Remove the screw [1].

[1]

[2] [2]
F-3-419
9) Remove the 3 screws [1] and the hopper supply unit [2].

[2] [1]

F-3-416
6) Remove the 4 screws [1] and the sheet metal [2].

[1]

F-3-420

3-76
 Chapter 3

3.4.14.3 Before Removing Hopper Supply Unit

LBP5970 / LBP5975
0016-6061
[1]

1) Detach the cassette [1].

F-3-423
2) Remove the following parts.
[1] - 2 P-tightening screws [1]
F-3-421 - 2 TP-screws [2]
- 3 claws [3]
2) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly]
3) Press the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover [2]. [1] [2]

[2]

[2]
[1]

F-3-422
4) Remove the ITB. (page 3-91)Reference[Removing ITB]
5) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]
6) Remove the controller box. (page 3-25)Reference[Removing Controller [3]
Box]
7) Detach the waste toner cover. (page 3-23)Reference[Detaching Waste
Toner Cover]
8) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]
9) Detach the inner left cover. (page 3-14)Reference[Detaching Inner Left
Cover] [3]
10) Remove the inter lock switch. (page 3-42)Reference[Removing Inter
Lock Switch] F-3-424
11) Remove the hopper drive unit. 3) While pulling the tab [1] in [A] direction, disengage the 2 bosses [2] and
11-1) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing detach the cartridge guide [3] in [B] direction.
Hopper Drive Unit (Y)]
11-2) Remove the hopper drive unit (M). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing [2]
Hopper Drive Unit (M)]
11-3) Remove the hopper drive unit (C). (page 3-62)Reference[Removing [3]
Hopper Drive Unit (C)]
11-4) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk). (page 3-63)Reference[Remov-
ing Hopper Drive Unit (Bk)] [B]
12) Remove the HVT1. (page 3-32)Reference[Removing HVT1]
13) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit.
13-1) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (Y). (page 3-64)Reference[Re-
moving Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Y)]
13-2) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (M). (page 3-66)Refer-
ence[Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (M)]
[A]
13-3) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (C). (page 3-68)Reference[Re-
moving Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (C)]
13-4) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (Bk). (page 3-70)Refer-
ence[Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Bk)]

3.4.14.4 Removing Hopper Supply Unit

0016-6062

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Lower the 4 levers [1].

[2] [1]
F-3-425
4) Remove the each supply drive shaft stopper [1] and remove the 4 supply
drive shafts [2].

3-77
 Chapter 3

[2] [2] [2]

[1]

[1]
F-3-429
8) Remove the screw [1].

[1]
[1] [2]
F-3-426
5) With the boss disengaged [1], move the shutter guide [2] in the direction
of the arrow and remove the shutter guide together with the dust proof
shutter. (4 each) (Detach together with link [3] other than Bk.)

F-3-430

[3] [2] 9) Detach the PCB cover [1].

- 2 screws [2]
[1]

Be careful not to damage the connected harness.

[2]

[1]

F-3-427
6) Detach the link support plate [1].
- 2 screws [2]
- 1 link [3] (leave it connected at left side)

[3] [1] [2]

[2]
F-3-431
10) Disconnect the connecter [1] and free the harness [2] (leave the harness
connected to the PCB cover).

[1]

F-3-428
7) Remove the 3 hopper fixing members [1]. [2]
- 2 screws each [2]

F-3-432
11) Remove the PCB [1].

3-78
 Chapter 3

- 4 screws [2]
[3] [2]

[1]

[2]
F-3-433
12) Detach the PCB support plate [1]. [1]
- 2 screws [2]
F-3-437
17) Detach the cartridge fan [1].
[1] - 1 connecter [2]
- 3 claws [3]

[3]
[2]

[1]

[2]
F-3-434
13) Detach the plate [1].
- 1 P-tightening screw [2]
- 2 TP screws [3] securing the grounding wire [3]
- 3 TP screws [4] F-3-438
18) Remove the screw [1].
[1] [2]
[1]

[4]

[3]

[4] F-3-439

F-3-435 19) Remove the hopper supply unit [1].

- 3 screws [2]
14) Free the harness [1] from the harness guide.
[1] [2]

[1]

[2]
F-3-436
15) Remove the 3 grounding wires [1].
- 3 screws [2] F-3-440
16) Disconnect the connecter [3].
20) Remove the link [1] from the hopper supply unit.

3-79
 Chapter 3

ence[Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Bk)]

14) Remove the hopper supply unit. (page 3-77)Reference[Removing
Hopper Supply Unit]
15) Remove the waste toner sensor unit.

3.4.15.2 Removing Waste Toner Primary Feed Unit

0017-2229

LBP5970 / LBP5975

[1] 1) Detach the cover [1].

- 2 screws [2]

[1] [2]

F-3-441

3.4.15 Waste Toner Feeder Unit

3.4.15.1 Before Removing Waste Toner Primary Feed

Unit
0017-2228

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the cassette [1].

F-3-444
2) Remove the waste toner feed motor unit [1].
- 1 screw [2]

[1]
F-3-442
2) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly]
3) Press the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover [2].

[3] [1] [4] [2]

[2] F-3-445
3) Remove the waste toner shutter unit [1].
- 2 screws [2]
[1] [2] [1]

F-3-443
4) Remove the ITB. (page 3-91)Reference[Removing ITB]
5) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]
6) Remove the controller box. (page 3-25)Reference[Removing Controller
Box]
7) Detach the waste toner cover. (page 3-23)Reference[Detaching Waste
Toner Cover]
8) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]
9) Detach the inner left cover. (page 3-14)Reference[Detaching Inner Left
Cover]
10) Remove the inter lock switch. (page 3-42)Reference[Removing Inter
Lock Switch]
11) Remove the hopper drive unit.
11-1) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing F-3-446
Hopper Drive Unit (Y)]
11-2) Remove the hopper drive unit (M). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing 4) Detach the toner box stay [1].
Hopper Drive Unit (M)] - 3 screws [2]
11-3) Remove the hopper drive unit (C). (page 3-62)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (C)]
11-4) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk). (page 3-63)Reference[Remov-
ing Hopper Drive Unit (Bk)]
12) Remove the HVT1. (page 3-32)Reference[Removing HVT1]
13) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit.
13-1) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (Y). (page 3-64)Reference[Re-
moving Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (Y)]
13-2) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (M). (page 3-66)Refer-
ence[Removing Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (M)]
13-3) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (C). (page 3-68)Reference[Re-
moving Hopper Shutter Drive Unit (C)]
13-4) Remove the hopper shutter drive unit (Bk). (page 3-70)Refer-

3-80
 Chapter 3

[1] [1]
[2]

[1]

[1]
F-3-447
5) Remove the toner shutter cam gear unit [1] together with the gear [2].
- 3 screws [3] [2]

[4]

[3]
[2] F-3-450

Points to note at installation (1)

Install the rack with the rack holder as below.
[3]

[1] [4]
F-3-448

Points to note at installation

Be sure that the [A] part of the ratchet gear unit [1] is positioned as Points to note at installation (2)
indicated. When installing the rack [1] with the lever [2], be sure to match the each
hole [3].

[1] [1]
[A]

[3]

[2]

6) While pushing the rack holder [1] in the direction of the arrow, remove the
gear [2].
Points to note at installation (3)
Align the leading edge [1] of the rack with the cut-off [2] on the shutter plate
before installing the rod drive rack unit [3].
[1]
[2] [1]

[2]

[3]
F-3-449
7) Remove the rod drive rack unit [1]. 8) Remove the registration motor unit [1].
- 1 spring [2] - 3 screws [2]
- 1 screw [3]

4 rollers [1] attached inside the rack holder are not fixed. Be careful not to
lose them.

3-81
 Chapter 3

[2]

[1]

[1]

[2]

[2]
F-3-454
F-3-451
12) Detach the shutter plate [1].
9) Remove the JAM process knob [1]. - 1 spring [2]

[1]

[2] [1]
F-3-455
13) Detach the fixing plate [1].
F-3-452 - 1 spring [2]
10) Detach the support plate [1]. - 1 screw [3]
- 3 screws [2]
[1]
[3]

[2]

[1]

[2]
F-3-456
[2] 14) Remove the waste toner primary feed unit [1].
- 3 screws [2]

[2]

F-3-453
11) Remove the drive unit [1].
- 2 screws [2]

[1]
F-3-457

Points to note at installation

When installing the waste toner primary feed unit, be sure that the open/
close lever [2] is placed on the release lever [1].

3-82
 Chapter 3

[1]
[2]

[1]

3.4.16 Y/M Developing Motor

3.4.16.1 Preparation for Removing the Y/M_Developing F-3-460

Motor 3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
0012-9617

LBP5960 Fixing Assembly]

4) With opening the upper rear cover [1], press the upper cover lock release
1) Detach the rear cover. button [2] to open the upper cover [3].
2) Remove the fixing assembly.
3) Press the top cover lock release button [1] to open the top cover [2]. [1]

[2] [1]
[3]

[2]

F-3-461
5) Detach the right cover. (page 3-11)Reference[Detaching Right Cover]

3.4.16.4 Removing Y/M Developing Motor

0016-6064

LBP5970 / LBP5975
F-3-458
1) Remove the Y/M developing motor [1].
4) Detach the right cover. - 1 connecter [2]
- 3 screws [3]
3.4.16.2 Removing the Y/M_Developing Motor
0009-9882

LBP5960 [1] [3]

1) Remove the Y/M_developing motor [3].
- 1 connector [1]
- 3 screws [2]

[3] [2]

[2] [3]
F-3-462

3.4.17 C/Bk Developing Motor

[1] [2] 3.4.17.1 Preparation for Removing the C/Bk_Developing

F-3-459 Motor
0012-9618

LBP5960
3.4.16.3 Before Removing Y/M Developing Motor
0016-6063
1) Detach the rear cover.
LBP5970 / LBP5975 2) Remove the fixing assembly.
3) Press the top cover lock release button [1] to open the top cover [2].
1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Detach the delivery tray [1] in the direction of the arrow.

3-83
 Chapter 3

[2] [1] [1]

[3]

[2]

F-3-466
5) Detach the right cover. (page 3-11)Reference[Detaching Right Cover]

3.4.17.4 Removing C/Bk Developing Motor

F-3-463 0016-6066

4) Detach the right cover. LBP5970 / LBP5975

3.4.17.2 Removing the C/Bk_Developing Motor 1) Remove the C/Bk developing motor [1].
0009-9883 - 1 connecter [2]
LBP5960 - 3 screws [3]
1) Remove the C/Bk_developing motor [3]. [1] [3]
- 1 connector [1]
- 3 screws [2]

[3] [2]

[2] [3]
F-3-467

[1] [2] 3.4.18 Y Developing Sylinder Clutch

F-3-464
3.4.18.1 Preparation for Removing the Y Developing
3.4.17.3 Before Removing C/Bk Developing Motor Sleeve Clutch
0012-9619
0016-6065

LBP5970 / LBP5975 LBP5960

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover] 1) Detach the rear cover.
2) Detach the delivery tray [1] in the direction of the arrow. 2) Remove the fixing assembly.
3) Press the top cover lock release button [1] to open the top cover [2].
[1]
[2] [1]

F-3-465
F-3-468
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the 4) Detach the right cover.
Fixing Assembly]
4) With opening the upper rear cover [1], press the upper cover lock release
button [2] to open the upper cover [3]. 3.4.18.2 Removing the Y Developing Sleeve Clutch
0010-0557

LBP5960

1) Disconnect the 4 connectors [1] and free the 4 harnesses [2] from the
guide.

3-84
 Chapter 3

[1] [1] [1]

F-3-472
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly]
4) With opening the upper rear cover [1], press the upper cover lock release
button [2] to open the upper cover [3].
[2]
F-3-469 [1]
2) Remove the 3 screws [1] and the developing sleeve clutch support sheet
metal [2].
[3]
[1]
[2]

F-3-473
5) Detach the right cover. (page 3-11)Reference[Detaching Right Cover]

3.4.18.4 Removing Y Developing Sleeve Clutch

0016-6068

LBP5970 / LBP5975
1) Disconnect the 4 connecters [1] and free the 4 harnesses [2] from the har-
ness guide.

[2] [1] [1]

F-3-470

When you remove the developing sleeve clutch support sheet metal, do not
drop the developing sleeve clutch.

3) Remove the Y developing sleeve clutch [1].

[2]
F-3-474
2) Detach the developing sleeve clutch support plate [1].
[1] - 3 screws [2]
F-3-471

3.4.18.3 Before Removing Y Developing Sleeve Clutch When detaching the developing sleeve clutch support plate, be careful not
0016-6067
to drop the developing sleeve clutch.
LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Detach the delivery tray [1] in the direction of the arrow.

3-85
 Chapter 3

[2] [1] [1]

[1]
F-3-475
3) Detach the Y developing sleeve clutch [1].
[2]
F-3-478
2) Remove the 3 screws [1] and the developing sleeve clutch support sheet
metal [2].

[1]

[1]
F-3-476

3.4.19 M Developing Sylinder Clutch

3.4.19.1 Preparation for Removing the M Developing

Sleeve Clutch
0012-9620 [2]
LBP5960
F-3-479
1) Detach the rear cover.
2) Remove the fixing assembly.
3) Press the top cover lock release button [1] to open the top cover [2].
When you remove the developing sleeve clutch support sheet metal, do not
[2] [1] drop the developing sleeve clutch.

3) Remove the M developing sleeve clutch [1].

F-3-477
4) Detach the right cover.
[1]
3.4.19.2 Removing the M Developing Sleeve Clutch F-3-480
0010-0558

LBP5960
3.4.19.3 Before Removing M Developing Sleeve Clutch
1) Disconnect the 4 connectors [1] and free the 4 harnesses [2] from the 0016-6069

guide. LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Detach the delivery tray [1] in the direction of the arrow.

3-86
 Chapter 3

[1] [2]

F-3-481
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the [1]
Fixing Assembly] F-3-484
4) With opening the upper rear cover [1], press the upper cover lock release
button [2] to open the upper cover [3]. 3) Detach the M developing sleeve clutch [1].

[1]

[3]

[2]

F-3-482
5) Detach the right cover. (page 3-11)Reference[Detaching Right Cover] [1]
3.4.19.4 Removing M Developing Sleeve Clutch F-3-485
0016-6070

LBP5970 / LBP5975 3.4.20 C Developing Sylinder Clutch

1) Disconnect the 4 connecters [1] and free the 4 harnesses [2] from the har-
ness guide. 3.4.20.1 Preparation for Removing the C Developing
Sleeve Clutch
[1] [1] LBP5960
0012-9621

1) Detach the rear cover.

2) Remove the fixing assembly.
3) Press the top cover lock release button [1] to open the top cover [2].

[2] [1]

[2]
F-3-483 F-3-486
2) Detach the developing sleeve clutch support plate [1]. 4) Detach the right cover.
- 3 screws [2]
3.4.20.2 Removing the C Developing Sleeve Clutch
0010-0559

LBP5960
When detaching the developing sleeve clutch support plate, be careful not 1) Disconnect the 4 connectors [1] and free the 4 harnesses [2] from the
to drop the developing sleeve clutch. guide.

3-87
 Chapter 3

[1] [1] [1]

F-3-490
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly]
4) With opening the upper rear cover [1], press the upper cover lock release
button [2] to open the upper cover [3].
[2]
F-3-487 [1]
2) Remove the 3 screws [1] and the developing sleeve clutch support sheet
metal [2].
[3]
[1]
[2]

F-3-491
5) Detach the right cover. (page 3-11)Reference[Detaching Right Cover]

3.4.20.4 Removing C Developing Sleeve Clutch

0016-6072

LBP5970 / LBP5975
1) Disconnect the 4 connecters [1] and free the 4 harnesses [2] from the har-
ness guide.

[2] [1] [1]

F-3-488

When you remove the developing sleeve clutch support sheet metal, do not
drop the developing sleeve clutch.

3) Remove the C developing sleeve clutch [1].

[2]
F-3-492
2) Detach the developing sleeve clutch support plate [1].
- 3 screws [2]
[1]
F-3-489

3.4.20.3 Before Removing C Developing Sleeve Clutch When detaching the developing sleeve clutch support plate, be careful not
0016-6071 to drop the developing sleeve clutch.
LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Detach the delivery tray [1] in the direction of the arrow.

3-88
 Chapter 3

[2] [1] [1]

[1]
F-3-493
3) Detach the C developing sleeve clutch [1].
[2]
F-3-496
2) Remove the 3 screws [1] and the developing sleeve clutch support sheet
metal [2].

[1]

[1]
F-3-494

3.4.21 Bk Developing Sylinder Clutch

3.4.21.1 Preparation for Removing the Bk Developing

Sleeve Clutch
0012-9622
[2]
LBP5960 F-3-497
1) Detach the rear cover.
2) Remove the fixing assembly.
3) Press the top cover lock release button [1] to open the top cover [2].
When you remove the developing sleeve clutch support sheet metal, do not
[2] [1] drop the developing sleeve clutch.

3) Remove the Bk developing sleeve clutch [1].

F-3-495
4) Detach the right cover.
[1]
3.4.21.2 Removing the Bk Developing Sleeve Clutch
0010-0560 F-3-498
LBP5960
3.4.21.3 Before Removing Bk Developing Sleeve Clutch
1) Disconnect the 4 connectors [1] and free the 4 harnesses [2] from the 0016-6073

guide. LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Detach the delivery tray [1] in the direction of the arrow.

3-89
 Chapter 3

[1] [2]

F-3-499
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the [1]
Fixing Assembly] F-3-502
4) With opening the upper rear cover [1], press the upper cover lock release
button [2] to open the upper cover [3]. 3) Detach the Bk developing sleeve clutch [1].

[1]

[3]

[2]

F-3-500
5) Detach the right cover. (page 3-11)Reference[Detaching Right Cover]
[1]
3.4.21.4 Removing Bk Developing Sleeve Clutch F-3-503
0016-6074

LBP5970 / LBP5975
3.4.22 Intermediate Transfer Unit
1) Disconnect the 4 connecters [1] and free the 4 harnesses [2] from the har-
ness guide. 3.4.22.1 Removing the ITB
0010-7734

[1] [1] LBP5960

When you replace the ITB unit, adjust the color displacement correction.
As to the adjustment procedure, refer to Chapter 5 Troubleshooting > Rem-
edy > Image fault > Displacement/Blurring/Distortion/Out-of-focus > Color
displacement.

1) Remove the fixing assembly.

2) Press the top cover lock release button [1] to open the top cover [2].

[2] [1]

[2]
F-3-501
2) Detach the developing sleeve clutch support plate [1].
- 3 screws [2]

When detaching the developing sleeve clutch support plate, be careful not F-3-504
to drop the developing sleeve clutch.
3) Press the lever [1] on the right side of the top cover as shown in the figure
below, and open the ITB unit cover [2].

3-90
 Chapter 3

[2]

[2]

[1]
[1]

F-3-508
F-3-505
4) Loosen each screw [1] of the lock release lever on both sides and remove 3.4.22.4 Removing ITB
the 2 lever retainers [2] while pushing them as shown in the figure below. 0016-6076

LBP5970 / LBP5975
[1] [2] 1) Press the lever [1] on the right side of the upper cover to open ITB unit
cover [2].

[2]
[1]

[2]

F-3-509
2) Loosen the each screw [1] of the lock release lever at both sides and re-
move the 2 lever retainers [2].
F-3-506
5) Pushing the lock releasing levers [1] on the both sides, remove the ITB [2].
[1] [2]
[2]

[2]

[1]

F-3-507

3.4.22.2 After Replacing the ITB

0010-7580

LBP5960

When you replace the ITB, adjust the color displacement correction. F-3-510
As to the adjustment procedure, refer to Chapter 5 Troubleshooting > Rem- 3) With pressing the lock release lever [1] at both sides, Remove ITB [2].
edy > Image fault > Displacement/Blurring/Distortion/Out-of-focus > Color
displacement.
[2]
3.4.22.3 Before Removing ITB
0017-1903

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the

Fixing Assembly]
2) Press the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover [2].

[1]

F-3-511

3-91
 Chapter 3

[1]
When Removing ITB, hold the grip [1] to detach.

[1]
[2]

[1]

Place the removed ITB with the contacting surface for photosensitive drum
facing down.
If placing the ITB with the contacting surface for photosensitive drum
facing up, lock release lever [1] may be damaged. F-3-513
2) Lift the secondary transfer outside roller holder [1] in the direction of the
[1] arrow.

3.4.22.5 Points to Note When Replacing ITB

0016-6077
[1]
LBP5970 / LBP5975 F-3-514
After replacing ITB, be sure to perform the color displacement correction.

MEMO:
As to the adjustment procedure, refer to Chapter 5 Troubleshooting > When you lift the secondary transfer outside roller holder, do not bend the
Remedy > Image fault > Displacement/Blurring/Distortion/Out-of-focus > contact spring [1].
Color displacement.
[1]
3.4.23 Secondary Transfer Outside Roller

3.4.23.1 Preparation for Removing the Secondary

Transfer Outside Roller
0012-9725

LBP5960

1) Remove the fixing assembly.

2) Press the top cover lock release button [1] to open the top cover [2].

[2] [1]

F-3-515

3) Move the secondary transfer outside roller [1] in the direction of the arrow
to remove.

F-3-512

3.4.23.2 Removing the Secondary Transfer Outside

Roller
LBP5960
0009-9889
[1]
F-3-516
1) Remove the 2 screws [1] and the paper guide plate [2].

3-92
 Chapter 3

3.4.23.3 Before Removing Secondary Transfer External

Roller
0016-6078

LBP5970 / LBP5975
[A]
1) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the [B]
Fixing Assembly]
2) Press the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover [2].

[2]
[1]
F-3-519

[1] 3.4.24 Waste Toner Sensor Unit

3.4.24.1 Preparation for Removing the Waste Toner

Senser Unit
0013-4349

LBP5960
F-3-517
1) Remove the fixing assembly.
3.4.23.4 Removing Secondary Transfer External Roller 2) Remove the rear cover.
LBP5970 / LBP5975
0016-6079
3) Remove the controller box.
4) Remove the waste toner case.
1) Detach the paper guide plate [1]. 5) Remove the waste toner cover.
- 1 screw [2] 6) Remove the left cover.
- 1 screw [3] (with washer) 7) Remove the inside left cover.
- 1 ring terminal [4] 8) Remove the interlock switch.
9) Remove the hopper drive unit.
9-1) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y).
9-2) Remove the hopper drive unit (M).
[2] 9-3) Remove the hopper drive unit (C).
9-4) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk).
10) Remove HVT1.
[1]
3.4.24.2 Removing the Waste Toner Sensor Unit
0013-4348

LBP5960
1) Remove screw [1] and then remove the sensor cover [2].

[3] [4]

F-3-518
2) Move the secondary transfer external roller [1] from the arrow [A] to [B] [1] [2]
direction in order. F-3-520
2) Pull the waste toner sensor unit [2].
- 1 screw [1]
- 2 connectors [3]
When lifting the secondary transfer external roller holder, be careful not to
bend the contact spring [1].
[3]
[1]

[2] [1]
F-3-521

3.4.24.3 Before Removing Waste Toner Sensor Unit

0016-6080

LBP5970 / LBP5975

3-93
 Chapter 3

1) Detach the waste toner cover. (page 3-23)Reference[Detaching Waste [1]

Toner Cover]

3.4.24.4 Removing Waste Toner Sensor Unit

0016-6081

LBP5970 / LBP5975
[5]
1) Detach the sensor cover [1].
- 1 screw [2]

[3]
[4]
[2]
F-3-524

[2] [1]
Be sure to place paper prior to the work, as removing the toner level sensor
F-3-522 will cause toner leakage.
2) Remove the waste toner sensor unit [1].
- 1 screw [2]
- 2 connecters [3] 3.4.25.3 Before Removing Y toner Level Sensor
0016-6082

LBP5970 / LBP5975
[3]
1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]
3) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (Y)]

3.4.25.4 Removing Y toner Level Sensor

0016-6083

LBP5970 / LBP5975

When Removing the toner level sensor, toner always drops. Be sure to place
the paper etc before operation.

1) Remove the Y toner level sensor [1].

- 1 connecter [2]
[1] [2] - 2 screws [3]
- 1 sensor cover [4]
F-3-523
- 1 grounding wire [5]
3.4.25 Y Toner Level Sensor [2]
3.4.25.1 Preparation for Removing the Y Toner Level
Sensor
0012-9624

LBP5960 [1]
1) Detach the rear cover.
2) Detach the left cover.
3) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y).

3.4.25.2 Removing the Y Toner Level Sensor

0010-0510

LBP5960

1) Remove the Y toner level sensor [5].

- 1 connector [1]
- 2 screws [2]
- 1 sensor cover [3] [4]
- 1 grounding wire [4] [5]
[3]
F-3-525

3.4.26 M Toner Level Sensor

3.4.26.1 Preparation for Removing the M Toner Level

Sensor
0012-9625

LBP5960
1) Detach the rear cover.
2) Detach the left cover.
3) Remove the hopper drive unit (M).

3-94
 Chapter 3

3.4.26.2 Removing the M Toner Level Sensor 3.4.27 C Toner Level Sensor
0010-1580

LBP5960
3.4.27.1 Preparation for Removing the C Toner Level
1) Remove the M toner level sensor [5]. Sensor
- 1 connector [1] 0012-9626

- 2 screws [2] LBP5960

- 1 sensor cover [3]
- 1 grounding wire [4] 1) Detach the rear cover.
2) Detach the left cover.
3) Remove the hopper drive unit (C).
[1]
3.4.27.2 Removing the C Toner Level Sensor
0010-1581

LBP5960

[5] 1) Remove the C toner level sensor [5].

- 1 connector [1]
- 2 screws [2]
- 1 sensor cover [3]
- 1 grounding wire [4]

[1]

[5]
[3]
[4]
[2]
F-3-526

Be sure to place paper prior to the work, as removing the toner level sensor
will cause toner leakage.

[3]
3.4.26.3 Before Removing M toner Level Sensor [4]
0016-6084
[2]
LBP5970 / LBP5975
F-3-528
1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]
3) Remove the hopper drive unit (M). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (M)] Be sure to place paper prior to the work, as removing the toner level sensor
will cause toner leakage.
3.4.26.4 Removing M toner Level Sensor
0016-6085

LBP5970 / LBP5975
3.4.27.3 Before Removing C toner Level Sensor
0016-6086

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

When Removing the toner level sensor, toner always drops. Be sure to place
the paper etc before operation.
2) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]
3) Remove the hopper drive unit (C). (page 3-62)Reference[Removing
1) Remove the M toner level sensor [1]. Hopper Drive Unit (C)]
- 1 connecter [2]
- 2 screws [3] 3.4.27.4 Removing C toner Level Sensor
- 1 sensor cover [4] LBP5970 / LBP5975
0016-6087

- 1 grounding wire [5]

[2]

When Removing the toner level sensor, toner always drops. Be sure to place
the paper etc before operation.

[1] 1) Remove the C toner level sensor [1].

- 1 connecter [2]
- 2 screws [3]
- 1 grounding wire [4]
- 1 sensor cover [5]

Be sure not to loose the grounding plate [1] attached to the sensor cover.

[4]
[5]
[3]
F-3-527
[1]

3-95
 Chapter 3

1) Remove the Bk toner level sensor [1].

- 1 connecter [2]
[2] - 2 screws [3]
- 1 sensor cover [4]
- 1 grounding wire [5]
[3] [2]

[1]

[1]

[5]
[4]
[3]
F-3-529

3.4.28 Bk Toner Level Sensor

[4]
3.4.28.1 Preparation for Removing the Bk Toner Level [5]
Sensor [3]
0012-9627
F-3-531
LBP5960

1) Remove the rear cover. 3.4.29 Y Toner Supply Amount Sensor

2) Remove the left cover.
3) Remove the hopper driving unit (Bk). 3.4.29.1 Preparation for Removing the Y Toner Supply
Level Sensor
3.4.28.2 Removing the Bk Toner Level Sensor 0012-9628

0010-1582 LBP5960
LBP5960
1) Remove the rear cover.
1) Remove the Bk toner level sensor [5]. 2) Remove the left cover.
- 1 connector [1] 3) Remove the hopper driving unit (Y).
- 2 screws [2]
- 1 sensor cover [3] 3.4.29.2 Removing the Y Toner Supply Level Sensor
- 1 grounding wire [4] 0010-0495

LBP5960
[1]
1) Remove connector [1] and then remove the Y toner supply level sensor
[2].

[1]
[5]

[3]
[4]
[2]
[2]
F-3-530
F-3-532

3.4.29.3 Before Removing Y Toner Supply Sensor

0016-6090

On removing the toner level sensor, the rest of the toner is spilt. Spread a pa- LBP5970 / LBP5975
per sheet prior to operation.
1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]
3.4.28.3 Before Removing Bk toner Level Sensor 3) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing
LBP5970 / LBP5975
0016-6088
Hopper Drive Unit (Y)]

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover] 3.4.29.4 Removing Y Toner Supply Sensor
0016-6091

2) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover] LBP5970 / LBP5975
3) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk). (page 3-63)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (Bk)] 1) Disconnect the connecter [1] and Remove the Y toner supply sensor [2].

3.4.28.4 Removing Bk toner Level Sensor

0016-6089

LBP5970 / LBP5975

When Removing the toner level sensor, toner always drops. Be sure to place
the paper etc before operation.

3-96
 Chapter 3

3.4.31 C Toner Supply Amount Sensor

[1]
3.4.31.1 Preparation for Removing the C Toner Supply
Level Sensor
0012-9631

LBP5960

1) Remove the rear cover.

2) Remove the left cover.
3) Remove the hopper driving unit (C).

3.4.31.2 Removing the C Toner Supply Level Sensor

0010-0500

LBP5960

1) Remove connector [1] and then remove the C toner supply level sensor
[2].
[2]
[2] [1]
F-3-533

3.4.30 M Toner Supply Amount Sensor

3.4.30.1 Preparation for Removing the M Toner Supply

Level Sensor
0012-9629

LBP5960

1) Remove the rear cover.

2) Remove the left cover.
3) Remove the hopper driving unit (M).

3.4.30.2 Removing the M Toner Supply Level Sensor

0010-0499

LBP5960

1) Remove connector [1] and then remove the M toner supply level sensor F-3-536
[2].
3.4.31.3 Before Removing C Toner Supply Sensor
0016-6094

[2] [1] LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]
3) Remove the hopper drive unit (C). (page 3-62)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (C)]

3.4.31.4 Removing C Toner Supply Sensor

0016-6095

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Disconnect the connecter [1] and Remove the C toner supply sensor [2].

[2] [1]

F-3-534

3.4.30.3 Before Removing M Toner Supply Sensor

0016-6092

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]
3) Remove the hopper drive unit (M). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (M)]

3.4.30.4 Removing M Toner Supply Sensor

0016-6093

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Disconnect the connecter [1] and Remove the M toner supply sensor [2]. F-3-537

[2] [1] 3.4.32 Bk Toner Supply Amount Sensor

3.4.32.1 Preparation for Removing the Bk Toner Supply

Level Sensor
0012-9632

LBP5960

1) Remove the rear cover.

2) Remove the left cover.
3) Remove the hopper driving unit (Bk).

3.4.32.2 Removing the Bk Toner Supply Level Sensor

0010-0505

LBP5960

1) Remove connector [1] and then remove the Bk toner supply level sensor
[2].
F-3-535

3-97
 Chapter 3

[2] [1] [1] [2]

F-3-538 F-3-541
2) Remove 4 screws [1] and then unhook the 3 claws [2].
3.4.32.3 Before Removing Bk Toner Supply Sensor
0016-6096

LBP5970 / LBP5975 [1] [1]

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]
3) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk). (page 3-63)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (Bk)]

3.4.32.4 Removing Bk Toner Supply Sensor

0016-6097

LBP5970 / LBP5975 [1]

1) Disconnect the connecter [1] and Remove the Bk toner supply sensor [2].

[2] [1]

[2]

[2]

F-3-542
3) While pulling the claw assembly [1] in the direction of [A], unhook the 2
F-3-539 bosses [2] and then remove the cartridge guide [3] in the direction of [B].

3.4.33 Toner Cartridge Sensor [2]

3.4.33.1 Preparation for Removing the Toner Cartridge [3]

Sensor
0012-9633 [B]
LBP5960

1) Remove the fixing assembly.

2) Press the upper cover lock release button [1] and open the upper cover
[2].

[2] [1] [A]

[2] [1]
F-3-543
4) Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the sheet metal [2].

F-3-540
3) Remove the ITB.
4) Remove the rear cover.
5) Remove the left cover.

3.4.33.2 Removing the Toner Cartridge Sensor

0010-0518

LBP5960

1) Remove 2 screws [1] and tilt the left inside cover [2] in the direction
shown by the arrow.

3-98
 Chapter 3

3.4.33.4 Removing Toner Cartridge Sensor

[1] LBP5970 / LBP5975
0016-6099

1) Remove the 2 screws [1] and tilt the inner left cover [2] in the direction of
the arrow.

[1]

[2]
F-3-544
5) Remove connector [1] and then remove the toner cartridge sensor [2].

[1] [2] [2]

F-3-548
2) Lower the 4 levers [1].

[1]

F-3-545

3.4.33.3 Before Removing Toner Cartridge Sensor

0016-6098 F-3-549
LBP5970 / LBP5975 3) Remove the following parts.
- 2 P-tightening screws [1]
1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover] - 2 TP screws [2]
2) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover] - 3 claws [3]
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly] [1] [2]
4) Detach the delivery tray [1] in the direction of the arrow.

[1]

[2]

[3]
F-3-546
5) With opening the upper rear cover [1], press the upper cover lock release
button [2] to open the upper cover [3].

[1]
[3]
[3] F-3-550
4) While pulling the tab [1] in [A] direction, disengage the 2 bosses [2] and
detach the cartridge guide [3] in [B] direction.
[2]

F-3-547
6) Remove the ITB. (page 3-91)Reference[Removing ITB]

3-99
 Chapter 3

[2] [2]
[3]

[B]

[1]

[A]

[2]
F-3-554
8) Disconnect the connecter [1] and free the harness [2] (leave the harness
[2] [1] connected to the PCB cover).
F-3-551
5) Free the harness [1] from the harness guide.

[1]

[1]

[2]

F-3-555
9) Remove the PCB [1].
- 4 screws [2]

F-3-552
6) Disconnect the connecter [1]. [1]

[2]
F-3-556
10) Detach the PCB support plate [1].
[1] - 2 screws [2]
F-3-553
7) Detach the PCB cover [1]. [1]
- 2 screws [2]

Be careful not to damage the connected harness.

[2]
F-3-557
11) Detach the reinforcement plate [1] (leave the harness connected).
- 2 P-tightening screws [2]
- 3 TP screws [3]

3-100
 Chapter 3

[1] [1] [3]

[2]

[3]
F-3-558
12) Disconnect the connecter [1] and Remove the toner cartridge sensor [2].
[2]
[1] [2] F-3-560
2) Open the harness guide unit [3] in the direction shown by the arrow.
- 2 connectors [1]
- 2 screws [2]

[1] [2] [1]

F-3-559

3.4.34 Waste Toner Shutter Open/closed Sensor

3.4.34.1 Preparation for Removing the Waste Toner

Shutter Open/Closed Sensor
LBP5960
0012-9634
[3]
F-3-561
1) Remove the fixing assembly.
3) Remove screw [1] and remove the waste toner inside cover [2] in the di-
2) Remove the rear cover. rection shown by the arrow.
3) Remove the waste toner case.
4) Remove the waste toner cover.
5) Remove the left cover.
6) Remove the left inside cover.
7) Remove the inter lock switch.
8) Remove the hopper driving unit.
8-1) Remove the hopper driving unit (Y).
8-2) Remove the hopper driving unit (M).
8-3) Remove the hopper driving unit (C).
8-4) Remove the hopper driving unit (Bk).

3.4.34.2 Removing the Waste Toner Shutter Open/Closed

Sensor
0010-0625

LBP5960
[1] [2]
1) Open the power supply fan unit [3].
- 1 clamp [1] F-3-562
- 2 screws [2] 4) Remove 3 screws [1] and remove 4 connectors [2] for the ground wire.

3-101
 Chapter 3

[2] [1]

[1]
[2]

F-3-566

3.4.34.3 Before Removing Waste Toner Shutter Sensor

0016-6100

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the

Fixing Assembly]
2) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]
3) Detach the waste toner cover. (page 3-23)Reference[Detaching Waste
Toner Cover]
4) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]
[1] 5) Detach the inner left cover. (page 3-14)Reference[Detaching Inner Left
F-3-563 Cover]
6) Remove the inter lock switch. (page 3-42)Reference[Removing Inter
5) Open the harness guide [3] in the direction shown by the arrow. Lock Switch]
- 3 screws [1] 7) Remove the hopper drive unit.
- 3 ground wires [2] (Remove from the guide)
7-1) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (Y)]
[1] [2] [1] [2] [1] 7-2) Remove the hopper drive unit (M). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (M)]
7-3) Remove the hopper drive unit (C). (page 3-62)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (C)]
7-4) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk). (page 3-63)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (Bk)]

3.4.34.4 Removing Waste Toner Shutter Sensor

0016-6101

LBP5970 / LBP5975
1) Detach the waste toner inner cover [1] in the direction of the arrow.
- 1 screw [2]

[3]
F-3-564
6) Unhook the 2 claws [1] and then remove the waste toner shutter open/
closed sensor mount [2] on the backside of the harness guide removed in
the procedure 5).

[2]

[2] [1]
F-3-567
2) Remove the 2 screws [1] of the grounding wire and disconnect the 4 con-
necters [2].

[2]

[1]
F-3-565
7) Remove connector [1] and then remove the waste toner shutter open/
closed sensor [2].

[1]
F-3-568
3) Open the harness guide [1] in the direction of the arrow.
- Free the 3 grounding wires [2] from the harness guide
- 3 screws [3]

3-102
 Chapter 3

[3] [2] [3] [2] [3] [3] [1] [2]

[1]
F-3-569 [2] [1] [2] [1]
4) Disengage the 2 claws [1] and remove the waste toner shutter sensor base
F-3-572
[2] at the back of the harness guide disengaged by step 3).
11) Remove the waste toner sensor unit.
[2]
3.4.35.2 Removing the Toner Supply Shutter Open/
Closed Sensor
0013-1919

LBP5960

1) Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the cover [1].

[2] [1]

[1]
F-3-570
5) Disconnect the connecter [1] and Remove the waste toner shutter sensor
[2].

[2] [1] F-3-573

2) Remove screw [1] and then remove the waste toner feeding motor unit [2].

F-3-571

3.4.35 Toner Shutter Position Sensor

3.4.35.1 Preparation for Removing the Toner Supply [2] [1]

Shutter Open/Closed Sensor F-3-574
0013-1918
3) Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove waste toner shutter unit [2].
LBP5960

1) Remove the fixing assembly.

2) Remove the rear cover.
3) Remove the waste toner case.
4) Remove the waste toner cover.
5) Remove the left cover.
6) Remove the left inside cover.
7) Remove the inter lock switch.
8) Remove the hopper driving unit.
8-1) Remove the hopper driving unit (Y).
8-2) Remove the hopper driving unit (M).
8-3) Remove the hopper driving unit (C).
8-4) Remove the hopper driving unit (Bk).
9) Remove the HVT1.
10) Remove the high voltage transit holder [3].
- 5 connectors [1]
- 4 screws [2]

3-103
 Chapter 3

2) Detach the cassette [1].

[1] [2]

[1]
F-3-579
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly]
F-3-575 4) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]
4) Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the toner box stay [2]. 5) Detach the inner left cover. (page 3-14)Reference[Detaching Inner Left
Cover]
[1] 6) Remove the inter lock switch. (page 3-42)Reference[Removing Inter
Lock Switch]
7) Remove the hopper drive unit.
7-1) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (Y)]
7-2) Remove the hopper drive unit (M). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (M)]
7-3) Remove the hopper drive unit (C). (page 3-62)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (C)]
7-4) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk). (page 3-63)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (Bk)]
8) Remove the HVT1. (page 3-32)Reference[Removing HVT1]
9) Remove the waste toner sensor unit.

3.4.35.4 Removing Toner Supply Shutter Sensor

[2] 0016-6103

LBP5970 / LBP5975
F-3-576
5) Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the toner shutter cam gear unit [2]. 1) Detach the cover [1].
- 2 screws [2]
[1]
[1] [2]

F-3-580
2) Remove the waste toner feed motor unit [1].
[2] - Free the harness from the wire saddle [2].
F-3-577 - 1 connecter [3]
- 1 screw [4]
6) Remove the toner supply shutter open/closed sensor [1].

[1]

[3] [1] [4] [2]

F-3-578
F-3-581
3.4.35.3 Before Removing Toner Supply Shutter Sensor 3) Remove the waste toner shutter unit [1].
0016-6102
- 2 screws [2]
LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

3-104
 Chapter 3

[2] [1] [4]

[2]

[3]

[1] [4]
F-3-582 F-3-585
4) Detach the toner box stay [1].
- 3 screws [2]
Points to note at installation
[2] Be sure that the [A] part of the ratchet gear unit [1] is positioned as
indicated.

[1]
[A]

[1]
F-3-583 7) Remove the toner supply shutter sensor [1].
5) Remove the high-voltage relay holder [1].
- 5 connecters [2] [1]
- 4 screws [3]

[1] [2] [3]

F-3-586

3.4.36 Waste Toner Case Sensor

3.4.36.1 Preparation for Removing the Waste Toner Case

[3] [2] [3] [2] Sensor
0013-1923

F-3-584 LBP5960
6) Remove the toner shutter cam gear unit [1] together with the gear [2].
- 1 connecter [3] 1) Remove the waste toner case.
- 3 screws [4] 2) Remove the waste toner cover.
3) Remove the waste toner sensor unit.

3.4.36.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case Sensor

0010-0485

LBP5960
1) Remove the waste toner case sensor [1].

3-105
 Chapter 3

[1] [1]

F-3-587
[2]
3.4.36.3 Before Removing Waste Toner Case Sensor F-3-589
0016-6104

LBP5970 / LBP5975 3.4.37.3 Before Removing Y Toner Supply Motor

0016-6106

1) Detach the waste toner cover. (page 3-23)Reference[Detaching Waste LBP5970 / LBP5975
Toner Cover]
2) Remove the waste toner sensor unit. 1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]
3.4.36.4 Removing Waste Toner Case Sensor 3) Remove the hopper drive unit (Y). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing
LBP5970 / LBP5975
0016-6105
Hopper Drive Unit (Y)]

1) Remove the waste toner case sensor [1]. 3.4.37.4 Removing Y Toner Supply Motor
0016-6107

LBP5970 / LBP5975
[1]
1) Remove the Y toner supply motor [1].
- 2 screws [2]

[2]

F-3-588

3.4.37 Y Toner Supply Motor

3.4.37.1 Preparation for Removing the Y Toner Supply [1]

Motor F-3-590
0012-9637

LBP5960
3.4.38 M Toner Supply Motor
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the left cover. 3.4.38.1 Preparation for Removing the M Toner Supply
3) Remove the hopper driving unit (Y).
Motor
3.4.37.2 Removing the Y Toner Supply Motor
0012-9638

0010-0524
LBP5960
LBP5960
1) Remove the rear cover.
1) Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the Y toner supply motor [2]. 2) Remove the left cover.
3) Remove the hopper driving unit (M).

3.4.38.2 Removing the M Toner Supply Motor

0010-0534

LBP5960

1) Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the M toner supply motor [2].

3-106
 Chapter 3

[1] [1]

[2]
[2] F-3-593
F-3-591
3.4.39.3 Before Removing C Toner Supply Motor
3.4.38.3 Before Removing M Toner Supply Motor LBP5970 / LBP5975
0016-6110

0016-6108

LBP5970 / LBP5975
1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]
1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover] 2) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]
2) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover] 3) Remove the hopper drive unit (C). (page 3-62)Reference[Removing
3) Remove the hopper drive unit (M). (page 3-61)Reference[Removing Hopper Drive Unit (C)]
Hopper Drive Unit (M)]
3.4.39.4 Removing C Toner Supply Motor
3.4.38.4 Removing M Toner Supply Motor LBP5970 / LBP5975
0016-6111

0016-6109

LBP5970 / LBP5975
1) Remove the C toner supply motor [1].
1) Remove the M toner supply motor [1]. - 2 screws [2]
- 2 screws [2]
[2]
[2]

[1]
F-3-594
[1]
F-3-592 3.4.40 Bk Toner Supply Motor
3.4.39 C Toner Supply Motor 3.4.40.1 Preparation for Removing the Bk Toner Supply
Motor
3.4.39.1 Preparation for Removing the C Toner Supply 0012-9640

Motor LBP5960
0012-9639

LBP5960 1) Remove the rear cover.

2) Remove the left cover.
1) Remove the rear cover. 3) Remove the hopper driving unit (Bk).
2) Remove the left cover.
3) Remove the hopper driving unit (C). 3.4.40.2 Removing the Bk Toner Supply Motor
0010-0537

3.4.39.2 Removing the C Toner Supply Motor LBP5960

0010-0536

LBP5960 1) Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the Bk toner supply motor [2].

1) Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the C toner supply motor [2].

3-107
 Chapter 3

[1] [2] [1]

F-3-597
2) Remove screw [1] and then remove the waste toner feeding motor unit [2].

[2]
F-3-595

3.4.40.3 Before Removing Bk Toner Supply Motor

0016-6112

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]
3) Remove the hopper drive unit (Bk). (page 3-63)Reference[Removing
Hopper Drive Unit (Bk)]

3.4.40.4 Removing Bk Toner Supply Motor

0016-6113

LBP5970 / LBP5975
[2] [1]
1) Remove the Bk toner supply motor [1]. F-3-598
- 2 screws [2] 3) Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the waste toner feeding motor [2].
[2]
[1] [2]

F-3-599

3.4.41.3 Before Removing Waste Toner Feed Motor

0016-6114

[1] LBP5970 / LBP5975

F-3-596
1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]
3.4.41 Waste Toner Feed Motor 2) Detach the left cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Left Cover]
3) Detach the waste toner cover. (page 3-23)Reference[Detaching Waste
3.4.41.1 Preparation for Removing the Waste Toner Toner Cover]
4) Remove the waste toner sensor unit.
Feeding Motor
LBP5960
0013-1926
3.4.41.4 Removing Waste Toner Feed Motor
0016-6115

LBP5970 / LBP5975
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the waste toner case. 1) Detach the cover [1].
3) Remove the waste toner cover. - 2 screws [2]
4) Remove the left cover.
5) Remove the waste toner sensor unit.

3.4.41.2 Removing the Waste Toner Feeding Motor

0013-1928

LBP5960

1) Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the cover [2].

3-108
 Chapter 3

[1] [2]

[1] [2]
F-3-600
F-3-603
2) Remove the waste toner feed motor unit [1].
- Free the harness from the wire saddle [2] 2) Remove the waste toner case full sensor circuit PCB [1].
- 1 connecter [3]
- 1 screw [4]

[3] [1] [4] [2] [1]

F-3-601 F-3-604
3) Remove the waste toner feed motor [1].
- 2 screws [2] 3.4.42.3 Before Removing Waste Toner Full Level Sensor
0016-6116

LBP5970 / LBP5975
[2] [1]
1) Detach the waste toner cover. (page 3-23)Reference[Detaching Waste
Toner Cover]
2) Remove the waste toner sensor unit.

3.4.42.4 Removing Waste Toner Full Level Sensor

0016-6117

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the cover [1] and the grounding plate [2].

- 1 screw [3]

F-3-602 [2]
3.4.42 Waste Toner Detection PCB
[1]
3.4.42.1 Preparation for Removing the Waste Toner Case
Full Sensor
0013-1931

LBP5960

1) Remove the waste toner case.

2) Remove the waste toner cover.
3) Remove the waste toner sensor unit. [3]
F-3-605
3.4.42.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case Full Sensor
0010-0478 2) Remove the waste toner full level sensor PCB [1].
LBP5960

1) Remove screw [1] and then remove the grounding plate [2].

3-109
 Chapter 3

[1]

[1]
F-3-609
F-3-606
3.4.43.2 Detaching Waste Toner Case
3.4.43 Waste Toner Case 0016-6118

LBP5970 / LBP5975
3.4.43.1 Removing the Waste Toner Case 1) With pressing the release lever [1] at the right side of the front cover, open
0012-9861

LBP5960 the front cover [2].

1) While pressing the release lever [1] on the right side of the front cover, [2]
open the front cover [2].

[1]

[2]

[1]

F-3-610
2) Open the waste toner cover [1].

F-3-607
2) Open the waste toner cover [1].

[1]
F-3-611
3) Detach the waste toner case [1].

[1]
F-3-608 [1]
3) Remove the waste toner case [1].

F-3-612

3-110
 Chapter 3

3.5 PICKUP/FEEDING/DELIVERY SYSTEM

[1]
3.5.1 Pickup Motor

3.5.1.1 Preparation for Removing the Pickup Motor

0012-9643

LBP5960

1) Remove the rear cover.

2) Remove the fixing assembly.
3) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover
[2].

[2] [1]

F-3-616
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly]
4) With opening the upper rear cover [1], press the upper cover lock release
button [2] to open the upper cover [3].

[1]

[3]

F-3-613 [2]
4) Remove the right cover.

3.5.1.2 Removing the Pickup Motor

0009-9884

LBP5960
F-3-617
1) Remove the harness guide (black) [4]. 5) Detach the right cover. (page 3-11)Reference[Detaching Right Cover]
- 4 connectors [1]
- 1 cable clamp [2] 3.5.1.4 Removing Pickup Motor
- 1 screw [3] 0016-6120

LBP5970 / LBP5975
[2] [1] [4]
1) Shift the pickup motor [1] in the direction of the arrow and pull it out.
- 1 connecter [2]
- 2 screws [3]

[3]

[1] [3]
F-3-614
2) Remove 2 screws [1] and the pickup motor [2].

[1] [2] [1]

[1] [2]
F-3-618

3.5.2 Cassette Pickup Roller

3.5.2.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Roller

0009-9935

LBP5960

1) Pull out the cassette.

2) Move the pickup release lever [1] in the direction of the arrow and re-
move the cassette pickup roller [2].

F-3-615

3.5.1.3 Before Removing Pickup Motor

0016-6119

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Detach the delivery tray [1] in the direction of the arrow.

3-111
 Chapter 3

[1] [1]

[2]
F-3-619
[2]
3.5.2.2 Before Detaching Cassette Pickup Roller F-3-623
0017-2112

LBP5970 / LBP5975 3.5.3.2 Before Detaching Cassette Size Switch

0017-2113

1) Detach the cassette [1]. LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the cassette [1].

[1]
F-3-620
[1]
3.5.2.3 Detaching Cassette Pickup Roller F-3-624
0016-6121

LBP5970 / LBP5975 3.5.3.3 Detaching Cassette Size Switch

0016-6122

1) Shift the pickup release lever [1] in the direction of the arrow and detach LBP5970 / LBP5975
the cassette pickup roller [2].
1) Remove the screw [1].
[1]
[1]

[2]
F-3-621
F-3-625
3.5.3 Cassette Size Switch 2) Disconnect the connecter [1] and detach the cassette size switch [2].

3.5.3.1 Removing the Cassette Size Switch [1]

0009-9904

LBP5960

1) Pull out the cassette.

2) Open the front cover.
3) Remove the screw [1].

[1]

[2]
F-3-626

If it is hard to disconnect the connecter, open the front cover and access from
above.

F-3-622
4) Remove the connector [1] and the cassette size switch [2].

3-112
 Chapter 3

3.5.4 Cassette Paper Sensor

[1]
3.5.4.1 Preparation for Removing the Cassette Paper
Sensor
0012-9661

LBP5960

1) Remove the fixing assembly.

2) Press the upper cover lock release button [1] and open the upper cover
[2].

[2] [1]

[2] [3]
F-3-630

F-3-627
3) Remove the secondary transfer outside roller.
4) Unhook the 2 claws [1] and detach the dustproof cover [2].
You cannot mount the connector [1] to the sensor unless the harness [2] is
freed from the guide [3].
7) Remove the shaft [1] from the bearing [2] and remove the guide [3].

[1]

[1] [2]
[3]

[2]
F-3-628 F-3-631
5) Remove 2 screws [1] of the inside harness guide.

[1]
Points to Note When Attaching the shaft
1) Place the spring [1] as shown in the figure.

[1]

[1]
F-3-629
F-3-632
6) Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and remove the guide [3] from the harness
[2]. 2) Insert the guide shaft [1] into the bearing [2].
At this time, be sure to attach the spring [3] to the left guide shaft [1] and
insert the shaft into the bearing [2].

3-113
 Chapter 3

[A]
[1]

[2] [3]
[1] [2]

[1] F-3-636
F-3-633 2) As shown in the figure, insert the right bearing [2] into the part [A] while
holding the spring [1] with the Philips screw driver and the like.
3) Hook the tip [1] of spring on the notch [2] of the guide.

[1] [A]

[1] [2]

[2]

F-3-634

8) Remove the registration roller unit [4].

- 2 screws [1]
- 2 fixing plates [2]
- 2 springs [3]

[4] F-3-637
3) Check to see that the spring [1] is mounted as shown in the figure.

[1]

[1] [2] [3] [3] [2] [1]

F-3-635

Points to Note When Attaching the Registration Roller Unit

1) Insert the left bearing [1] into the part [A].
F-3-638

9) Remove 2 screws [1] and pull out the guide [2] toward the front.

[1] [2] [1]

F-3-639

3-114
 Chapter 3

3.5.4.2 Removing the Cassette Paper Sensor

LBP5960
0010-0620
[1]

1) Remove the screw [1] and the sensor holder [2].

[1] [2]

[1]
F-3-640 F-3-644
2) Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the cassette paper sensor [2]. 3) Disconnect the connecter [1] and free the harness [2] from the harness
guide [3].

[1]

[1] [2]
F-3-641

3.5.4.3 Before Removing Cassette Paper Sensor

0016-6124

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the

Fixing Assembly]
2) Press the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover [2].

[2] [3]
F-3-645
[2] 4) Detach the shaft [1] from the shaft support [2] and Remove the merge
guide [3].

[1]

F-3-642
3) Detach the secondary transfer external roller. (page 3-93)Reference[Re-
moving Secondary Transfer External Roller]
[4]
3.5.4.4 Removing Cassette Paper Sensor
0016-6125
[1] [2]
LBP5970 / LBP5975
[3]
1) Detach the dust proof cover [1].
- 2 claws [2]

[2]
F-3-646

Points to note at installation

1) Place the spring [1] as indicated.

[1]
F-3-643
2) Remove the 2 screws [1] of the harness guide.

3-115
 Chapter 3

[1]
Points to note at installation
1) Insert the shaft support [1] at the left into [A] part.

[A]
[1]

2) Put the shaft [1] at the left side of the merge guide through the spring [2]
and insert it into the link [3], then insert it into the shaft support [4].
3) Insert the shaft [5] at the right side of the merge guide into the masher [6].

2) With holding the spring [1] with the flat-blade screwdriver etc. as
indicated, insert the shaft support [2] at the right into [A] part.

[A]

[1] [2]
[4] [3] [2]
[5] [6]

[1]

4) Hook the leading edge [1] of the spring onto the cut-off [2].

[1]

3) Check that the spring [1] is installed as indicated.

[1]

[2]

5) Remove the registration roller unit [1].

- 2 screws [2]
- 1 spring retainer (right) [3]
- 1 spring [4] (right)
- 1 spring retainer (left) [5]
- 1 spring (left) [6]

[1] 6) Detach the guide [1].

- 2 screws [2]

Be sure not to apply any load on the connected sensor harness.

[6] [4]
[5] [3]

[2] [2]

F-3-647

3-116
 Chapter 3

[2] [1] [4]

[2] [1] [2]

F-3-648
7) Disconnect the 2 connecters [1].

[1] [3]
F-3-652
2) Remove the E-ring [1] and the cassette pickup clutch [2].

[1]
F-3-649
8) Detach the sensor holder [1] (leave the harness connected).
- 1 screw [2]

[2] [1]

[2] [1]
F-3-653

3.5.5.3 Before Removing Cassette Pickup Clutch

0017-2128

LBP5970 / LBP5975

F-3-650 1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

9) Disconnect the connecter [1] and Remove the cassette paper sensor [2]. 2) Detach the delivery tray [1] in the direction of the arrow.

[1]

[1] [2]
F-3-651

3.5.5 Cassette Pickup Clutch

3.5.5.1 Preparation for Removing the Cassette Pickup

Clutch F-3-654
0012-9644

LBP5960 3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the

Fixing Assembly]
1) Remove the rear cover. 4) With opening the upper rear cover [1], press the upper cover lock release
2) Remove the fixing assembly. button [2] to open the upper cover [3].
3) Remove the right cover.
[1]
3.5.5.2 Removing the Cassette Pickup Clutch
0009-9895

LBP5960
[3]
1) Remove the harness guide (black) [4].
- 4 connectors [1]
- 1 cable clamp [2] [2]
- 1 screw [3]

F-3-655
5) Detach the right cover. (page 3-11)Reference[Detaching Right Cover]

3.5.5.4 Removing Cassette Pickup Clutch

0017-2129

LBP5970 / LBP5975

3-117
 Chapter 3

1) Detach the harness guide [1].

- 4 connecters [2]
- Free the harness from the wire saddle [3] [1]
- 1 screw [4]

[3] [2]

[1]

[2] [4]
F-3-656
2) Remove the cassette pickup clutch [1].
- 1 E-ring [2]

F-3-659

When you remove the cassette separation pad, be careful not to lose the
spring, as it is removed together with the pad.

3.5.6.2 Before Detaching Cassette Separation Pad

0017-2132

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the cassette [1].

[1] [2]
F-3-657

3.5.6 Cassette Separation Pad

3.5.6.1 Removing the Cassette Separation Pad

0009-9900

LBP5960
1) Pull out the cassette.
2) Turn the cassette upside down and unhook the 2 claws [1].

[1] [1]
F-3-660

3.5.6.3 Detaching Cassette Separation Pad

0016-6128

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Turn over the cassette and disengage the 2 claws [1] (Cassette separation
pad will be detached).

F-3-658
3) Turn up the cassette and remove the cassette separation pad [1].

3-118
 Chapter 3

[3]
[1]

[1]

[2]
F-3-664
2) Remove the spring [1].
3) Unhook the claw [2] and remove the manual feeder retaining roll [3].

[1]

F-3-661
2) Remove the spring [2] from the cassette separation pad [1].

[2] [1]

[2] [3]
F-3-662 F-3-665
4) Remove the manual feed drive gear [1].
3.5.7 Manual Pickup Unit

3.5.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Manual Pickup Unit

0012-9645

LBP5960

1) Remove the rear cover.

2) Remove the fixing assembly.
3) Press the upper cover lock release button [1] and open the upper cover
[2].

[2] [1]

[1]

F-3-666
5) Push the lever [1] of manual pickup solenoid in the direction of Release
(Push in the direction of the arrow [A]), and turn the knob [2] of bearing
(right) counterclockwise (in the direction of [B]).
F-3-663
4) Remove the right cover.
5) Remove the inside right cover.
6) Remove the inside front cover (right).
7) Remove the manual paper sensor.

3.5.7.2 Removing the Manual Pickup Unit

0009-9902

LBP5960
1) Remove the screw [1], the grounding plate [2], and the grounding terminal
[3].

3-119
 Chapter 3

[B]

[A] [1]

[1] [2]
F-3-667
6) Pull out the bearing (right) [1] in the direction of the arrow.

F-3-670
9) Move the manual pickup unit [1] in the direction of [A] and [B], in that
order.

[1]

[1]
[A]
F-3-668
7) Move the holding plate lifting roll [1] to the right and remove the parallel
pin [2].
[B]

F-3-671

3.5.7.3 Before Removing Manual Feed Pickup Unit

0016-6129

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Detach the delivery tray [1] in the direction of the arrow.
[2] [1]
F-3-669
[1]
8) Turn the knob [1] of bearing (left) to the position shown in the figure be-
low.

F-3-672
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly]
4) With opening the upper rear cover [1], press the upper cover lock release
button [2] to open the upper cover [3].

3-120
 Chapter 3

[1]
[1]

[3]

[2]

F-3-673
5) Detach the right cover. (page 3-11)Reference[Detaching Right Cover]
6) Open the manual feed tray.

3.5.7.4 Removing Manual Feed Pickup Unit

0016-6130

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the manual feed inner cover [1]. [2] [3]

- 2 screws [2] F-3-677
6) Remove the manual feed drive gear [1].

Be careful not to apply any load on the connected sensor harness.

[2]

[1]
F-3-674 [1]
2) Disconnect the connecter [1] from the manual feed inner cover.
F-3-678
7) Shift the lever [1] of the manual feed pickup solenoid to the release posi-
tion (push it to arrow [A] direction.) and rotate the tab [2] of the shaft sup-
port (right) counterclockwise (arrow [B] direction).

[2]

[1]

[B]

[A]
F-3-675
3) Remove the grounding terminal [1] and the grounding plate [2].
- 1 screw [3]

[1]

[3]

[1]
F-3-679
[2]
8) Remove the shaft support (right) [1] in the direction of the arrow.

F-3-676
4) Remove the spring [1].
5) Disengage the claw [2] and remove the manual feed retaining wheel [3].

3-121
 Chapter 3

2) Remove the fixing assembly.

3) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover
[2].

[2] [1]

[1]
F-3-680
9) Move the middle plate wheel [1] in the direction of the arrow and remove
the parallel pin [2].
F-3-684
4) Remove the right cover.
5) Remove the right inside cover.
6) Remove the inside front cover (right).
7) Remove the manual paper sensor.
8) Remove the manual pickup unit.

3.5.8.2 Removing the Manual Pickup Roller

0009-9903

LBP5960

1) Remove the holding plate lifting roll [1].

2) Unhook the claw [2] and remove the pickup roll [3].
3) Remove the E-ring [4] and the roller fixing plate [5].
[2] [1]
F-3-681
10) Rotate the tab [1] of the shaft support (left) in the direction of the arrow.

[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-3-685

When you remove the manual pickup roller, be careful not to lose the parallel
pin [1].

F-3-682
11) Move the manual feed pickup unit [1] in the arrow [A] to [B] direction
in order and Remove it.

[1] [1]
F-3-686

[A] 4) Remove the manual pickup roller [1].

[1]
[B]

F-3-683
F-3-687
3.5.8 Manual Pickup Roller

3.5.8.1 Preparation for Removing the Manual Pickup

Roller When mounting the roller, place the D-cut area of the manual pickup roller
0012-9646

LBP5960 [1] downward as shown in the above table.

1) Remove the rear cover.

3-122
 Chapter 3

3.5.8.3 Before Detaching Manual Feed Pickup Roller

0016-6131

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Detach the delivery tray [1] in the direction of the arrow.

[1]
[1]

4) Detach the manual feed pickup roller [1].

[1]

F-3-691
F-3-688
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly] Points to note when attaching.
4) With opening the upper rear cover [1], press the upper cover lock release Be sure to place the D-cut facet of the manual feed pickup roller [1] facing
button [2] to open the upper cover [3]. down.

[1] 3.5.9 Manual Paper Sensor

3.5.9.1 Removing the Manual Paper Sensor

[3] 0009-9887

LBP5960

[2] 1) Open the manual feed tray.

2) Remove 2 screws [1] and detach the manual feed inside cover [2].

[1]

F-3-689
5) Detach the right cover. (page 3-11)Reference[Detaching Right Cover]
6) Detach the inner right cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Inner
Right Cover]
7) Detach the inner front cover (right). (page 3-22)Reference[Detaching
Inner Front Cover (Right)]
8) Open the manual feed tray.
9) Remove the manual feed pickup unit. (page 3-121)Reference[Remov-
ing Manual Feed Pickup Unit]

3.5.8.4 Detaching Manual Feed Pickup Roller [2]

0016-6132

LBP5970 / LBP5975 F-3-692

3) Turn the manual feed inside cover upside down, disconnect the connector
1) Remove the middle plate wheel [1]. [1], and remove the manual paper sensor [2].
2) Disengage the claw [2] and remove the pickup wheel [3].
3) Remove the E-ring [4] and roller fixing plate [5].
[2]

[1]

[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-3-690
F-3-693

3.5.9.2 Before Removing Manual Feed Paper Sensor

0017-2147

Be careful not to lose the parallel pin [1] when detaching the manual feed LBP5970 / LBP5975
pickup roller.
1) Open the manual feed tray.

3.5.9.3 Removing Manual Feed Paper Sensor

0016-6133

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the manual feed inner cover [1].

- 2 screws [2]

3-123
 Chapter 3

[1]
Be careful not to apply any load on the connected sensor harness.

[2]

[2]
F-3-697
2) Remove the screw [1], the grounding plate [2] and the grounding terminal
[3].
[1]
[3]
F-3-694
2) Disconnect the connecter [1] and Remove the manual feed paper sensor
[2].

[2]
[1]

[2]
[1]
F-3-698
3) Remove the spring [1].
4) Unhook the claw [2] and remove the manual feeder retaining roll [3].

[1]
F-3-695

3.5.10 Multi-purpose Pickup Solenoid

3.5.10.1 Preparation for Removing the Manual Pickup

Solenoid
0012-9647

LBP5960
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the fixing assembly.
3) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover
[2].

[2] [1]

[2] [3]
F-3-699
5) Remove the manual feed drive gear [1].

F-3-696
4) Remove the right cover.
5) Remove the right inside cover.
6) Remove the inside front cover (right).
7) Remove the inside front cover (left).
8) Remove the front cover.
9) Remove the front cover (left).
10) Remove the front cover (right).

3.5.10.2 Removing the Manual Pickup Solenoid

0009-9934
[1]
LBP5960
F-3-700
1) Remove 2 screws [1] and detach the manual feed inside cover [2].
6) Remove 3 screws [1] and 3 grounding terminals [2].

3-124
 Chapter 3

[1]

[2] [1]

[2]
F-3-701
7) Remove 3 cable clamps [1] and free the harness [2].

[1]

F-3-704
10) Move the shutter lever [1] in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
[2]
F-3-702
8) Remove the E-ring [1] and the fixing pin (short) [2].

[2]

[1]
[1]

F-3-703
9) Unhook the boss [1], move the shutter lever cover [2] in the direction of
the arrow, and remove it.
F-3-705
11) Remove E-ring [1] and then remove the fixing pin (long) [2].

3-125
 Chapter 3

[2]

[2]
[1] [3]
F-3-708
[1]

There are the spacer [1] and the link [2] on the backside of the front cover
F-3-706 arm (right), which are not fixed. Be careful not to lose them.

[2]

The front cover assembly (right side) will come off as a result of this opera-
tion. Sustain the front cover assembly with hands. [1]
12) Lift the front cover assembly as indicated in the figure below, and then
move it to a position where the shaft is shown [1].
13) Remove E-ring [2] and then remove fixing pin (middle) [3] and spring
support shaft [4].

F-3-709

Fix the front cover assembly in place temporarily to make the rest of opera-
tions easier.
Follow the operation procedures below.
1) Join the fixing hole [1] on the front cover assembly and the shaft hole [2]
of the body.
2) Joint the front cover assembly to the body by inserting the fixing pin
[1] (long) [3] removed in the procedure 11).

[2] [3]

[2]

[1]
[4] [3] F-3-710

F-3-707 16) Remove cable clamp [1] and the connector (white-colored) [2].
14) Remove screw [1].
15) Lift the front cover assembly [2] and remove the front cover arm
(right) [3].

3-126
 Chapter 3

5) Detach the right cover. (page 3-11)Reference[Detaching Right Cover]

6) Detach the inner right cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Inner
[2] Right Cover]
7) Detach the inner front cover (right). (page 3-22)Reference[Detaching
[1] Inner Front Cover (Right)]
8) Detach the inner front cover (left). (page 3-23)Reference[Detaching In-
ner Front Cover (Left)]
9) Detach the front cover. (page 3-17)Reference[Detaching Front Cover]
10) Detach the front cover (left). (page 3-19)Reference[Detaching Front
Cover (Left)]
11) Detach the front cover (right). (page 3-20)Reference[Detaching Front
Cover (Right)]

3.5.10.4 Removing Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid

0016-6135

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the manual feed inner cover [1].

- 2 screws [2]

Be careful not to apply any load on the connected sensor harness.

F-3-711 [2]
17) Remove the screw [1] and then remove the manual pickup solenoid [2].

[2]

[1]
F-3-715
2) Disconnect the connecter [1] from the manual feed inner cover.
[1]
F-3-712

3.5.10.3 Before Removing Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid

0016-6134

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Detach the delivery tray [1] in the direction of the arrow. [1]

[1]

F-3-716
3) Remove the grounding terminal [1] and the grounding plate [2].
- 1 screw [3]

[1]

[3]

F-3-713
[2]
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly]
4) With opening the upper rear cover [1], press the upper cover lock release
button [2] to open the upper cover [3].

[1]
F-3-717
[3] 4) Remove the spring [1].
5) Disengage the claw [2] and remove the manual feed retaining wheel [3].

[2]

F-3-714

3-127
 Chapter 3

9) Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the fixing pin (short) [2].

[1]
[2]

[1]

[2] [3]
F-3-718
6) Remove the manual feed drive gear [1].

F-3-722
10) With disengaging the boss [1], pull the shutter lever cover [2] in the di-
rection of the arrow to detach it.

[2] [1]

[1]

F-3-719
7) Remove the 3 grounding terminals [1].
- 2 P-tightening screws [2]
- 1 TP screw [3]

[3] [2]

F-3-723
11) Shift the shutter lever [1] in the direction of the arrow to detach.

[1]
F-3-720
8) Free the harness [1] from the 3 wire saddles [2].

[2]

[1]

F-3-724
12) Remove the E-ring [1] and stand the front cover unit so that the tension
can be released, then remove the fixing pin (long) [2].

After this operation, front cover unit (right) comes off so hold the front
[1] cover unit with hand.
F-3-721

3-128
 Chapter 3

[2]

[2]

[1] [3]
[1] F-3-727

F-3-725 The spacer [1] and the link [2] are located at the back of the front cover arm
13) Move the front cover unit until the hinge unit [1] is visible. (right). They are not fixed so be careful not to lose them.
14) Remove the following parts. [2]
- 1 E-ring [2]
- 1 fixing pin (middle) [3]
- 1 spring support shaft [4]
[1]

To make the later smooth operation, temporally secure the front cover unit.
The following is operation procedures.
[1] 1) Match the fixing hole [1] of the front cover unit with the shaft hole [2] of
the host machine.
2) Insert the fixing pin (long) [3] removed by step 12) into those holes to
temporally secure the front cover unit to the host machine.

[2]
[2] [3]

[4] [3]

F-3-726
15) Remove the screw [1].
16) With lifting the front cover unit [2], detach the front cover arm (right) [3]. [1]

17) Free the harness from the wire saddle [1] and disconnect the connecter
[2].

3-129
 Chapter 3

[2] [1]

[1]

F-3-728
18) Remove the manual feed pickup solenoid [1].
- 1 screw [1] F-3-731
2) While holding the manual separation pad with a hand, remove the lifting
plate [2] by moving in the direction shown by the arrow.

[2] [1]

[1] [2]
F-3-729

3.5.11 Manual Separation Pad

F-3-732
3.5.11.1 Preparation for Removing the Manual Separation 3) Remove the manual separation pad [1].
Pad
0012-9649
[1]
LBP5960

1) Remove the rear cover.

2) Remove the fixing assembly.
3) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover
[2].

[2] [1]

F-3-733

When attaching the manual separation pad, make sure that the claw on the
right side of the lifting plate [1] is placed inside the cut-off [2] of the body.

[2]

F-3-730
4) Remove the right cover.
5) Remove the right inside cover.
6) Remove the inside front cover (right).
7) Remove the manual feed paper sensor.
8) Remove the manual pickup unit.
[1] [1]
3.5.11.2 Removing the Manual Separation Pad
0009-9921 F-3-734
LBP5960

1) Remove the shaft [1] on the left side of the lifting plate.
When attaching the manual separation pad, make sure that 3 springs [2] are
attached to the protrusion [1] on the backside of the lifting plate. (Remove
the cassette and confirm from the bottom of the body.)

3-130
 Chapter 3

7) Detach the inner right cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Inner

Right Cover]
[1]
8) Detach the inner front cover (right). (page 3-22)Reference[Detaching
Inner Front Cover (Right)]
9) Open the manual feed tray.
10) Remove the manual feed pickup unit. (page 3-121)Reference[Remov-
ing Manual Feed Pickup Unit]

3.5.11.4 Removing the Manual Feed Separation Pad

0016-6137

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the shaft [1] at the left of the middle plate.

[1]

[2]
F-3-735

3.5.11.3 Before Removing the Manual Feed Separation

Pad
0016-6136

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Detach the delivery tray [1] in the direction of the arrow.
F-3-739
[1] 2) While holding the manual feed separation pad [1] with your hand, move
the middle plate [2] in the direction of the arrow to remove.

[2] [1]

F-3-736
F-3-740
3) Remove the cassette [1].
3) Remove the manual feed separation pad [1] downward.

[1]

F-3-741

[1]
F-3-737 Point to note at installation (1)
4) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the Be sure to check that the claw [1] at the right of the middle plate is fitted
Fixing Assembly] with the cut-off [2] when installing the manual feed separation pad.
5) With opening the upper rear cover [1], press the upper cover lock release
button [2] to open the upper cover [3].
[2]
[1]

[3]

[2]
[1] [1]

Point to note at installation (2)

Be sure to check that the 3 springs [2] are installed to the protrusions [1] at
F-3-738 the back of the middle plate when installing the manual feed separation pad
6) Detach the right cover. (page 3-11)Reference[Detaching Right Cover] (check from the bottom of the host machine while the cassette is removed).

3-131
 Chapter 3

[1] [1]

[2] [1]
F-3-744
3.5.12 Pre-registration Sensor 3) Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and remove the guide [3] from the harness
[2].
3.5.12.1 Preparation for Removing the Sheet-to-sheet
[1]
Sensor
0012-9650

LBP5960

1) Remove the fixing assembly.

2) Press the upper cover lock release button [1] and open the upper cover
[2].

[2] [1]

[2] [3]
F-3-745

F-3-742 You cannot mount the connector [1] to the sensor unless the harness [2] is
3) Remove the secondary transfer outside roller. freed from the guide [3].

3.5.12.2 Removing the Sheet-to-sheet Sensor 4) Remove the shaft [1] from the bearing [2] and remove the guide [3].
0010-0614

LBP5960

1) Unhook the 2 claws [1] and detach the dustproof cover [2].

[1]

[1] [2]
[3]

F-3-746
[2]
F-3-743
2) Remove 2 screws [1] of the inside harness guide. Points to Note When Attaching the Shaft
1) Place the spring [1] as shown in the figure.

3-132
 Chapter 3

[1] Points to Note When Attaching the Registration Roller Unit

1) Insert the left bearing [1] into the part [A].

[A]
[1]

F-3-747
2) Insert the guide shaft [1] into the bearing [2].
At this time, be sure to attach the spring [3] to the left guide shaft [1] and
insert the shaft into the bearing [2].
F-3-751
2) As shown in the figure, insert the right bearing [2] into the part [A] while
holding the spring [1] with the Philips screw driver and the like.

[A]

[1] [2]
[2] [3]
[1] [2]

[1]
F-3-748
3) Hook the tip [1] of spring on the notch [2] of the guide.

[1]

F-3-752
3) Check to see that the spring [1] is mounted as shown in the figure.

[1]

[2]

F-3-749

5) Remove the registration roller unit [4].

- 2 screws [1]
- 2 fixing plates [2]
- 2 springs [3]

[4]

F-3-753

6) Remove 2 screws [1] and pull out the guide [2] toward the front.

[1] [2] [3] [3] [2] [1]

F-3-750

3-133
 Chapter 3

[1]

[1] [2] [1]

F-3-754
7) Remove the sheet-to-sheet sensor [1].

[1]
F-3-758
3) Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the harness guide [3] from the
harness [2].

[1]

[1]
F-3-755

3.5.12.3 Before Removing the Sheet-to-Sheet Sensor

0016-6138

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the

Fixing Assembly]
2) Press the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover [2].

[2] [3]
[2] F-3-759
4) Remove the shaft [1] from the shaft support [2] and remove the merge
guide [3] and the twist spring [4].
[1]

F-3-756
3) Detach the secondary transfer external roller. (page 3-93)Reference[Re-
moving Secondary Transfer External Roller]

3.5.12.4 Removing the Paper-To-Paper Sensor

0016-6139 [4]
LBP5970 / LBP5975 [1] [2]
1) Detach the dust-proof cover [1]. [3]
- 2 claws [2]

[2]

F-3-760

Points to note at installation

1) Place the spring [1] as shown in the figure.

[1]
F-3-757
2) Remove the 2 screws [1] of the harness guide.

3-134
 Chapter 3

[1] [A]
[1]

2) Put the shaft [1] at the left of the merge guide through the spring [2] and
the link [3] to insert into the shaft support [4]. 2) While holding the spring [1] with a flat-head screwdriver as shown in the
3) Insert the shaft [5] at the right of the merge guide into the shaft support figure, insert the shaft support [2] (at the right) into [A] area.
[6].

[A]

[1] [2]

[4] [3] [2]

[5] [6]

[1]

4) Hook the lead edge [1] of the spring on the cut-off [2] of the guide.

[1]
3) Check that the spring [1] is installed as shown in the figure.

[1]

[2]

5) Remove the registration roller unit [1].

- 2 screws [2]
- 1 spring retainer (right) [3]
- 1 spring (right) [4]
- 1 spring retainer (left) [5]
- 1 spring (left) [6] 6) Remove the guide [1].
- 2 screws [2]
[1]

Do not apply stress because the sensor harness is connected.

[6] [4]
[5] [3]

[2] [2]

F-3-761

[2] [1] [2]

Points to note at installation
1) Insert the shaft support [1] (at the left) into [A] area. F-3-762
7) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].

3-135
 Chapter 3

[1]

[1]
F-3-763
8) Remove the sheet-to-sheet sensor [1].

[1]
F-3-767
3) Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and remove the guide [3] from the harness
[2].

[1]

[1]
F-3-764

3.5.13 Registration Before Sensor

3.5.13.1 Preparation for Removing the Registration

Sensor
0012-9651

LBP5960
1) Remove the fixing assembly.
2) Press the upper cover lock release button [1] and open the upper cover
[2].

[2] [1] [2] [3]

F-3-768

You cannot mount the connector [1] to the sensor unless the harness [2] is
freed from the guide [3].

4) Remove the shaft [1] from the bearing [2] and remove the guide [3].

F-3-765
3) Remove the secondary transfer outside roller.

3.5.13.2 Removing the Registration Sensor

0010-0599

LBP5960

1) Unhook the 2 claws [1] and detach the dustproof cover [2].
[1] [2]
[1] [3]

F-3-769

Points to Note When Attaching the Shaft

1) Place the spring [1] as shown in the figure.

[2]
F-3-766
2) Remove 2 screws [1] of the inside harness guide.

3-136
 Chapter 3

[1] Points to Note When Attaching the Registration Roller Unit

1) Insert the left bearing [1] into the part [A].

[A]
[1]

F-3-770
2) Insert the guide shaft [1] into the bearing [2].
At this time, be sure to attach the spring [3] to the left guide shaft [1] and
insert the shaft into the bearing [2].
F-3-774
2) As shown in the figure, insert the right bearing [2] into the part [A] while
holding the spring [1] with the Philips screw driver and the like.

[A]

[1] [2]
[2] [3]
[1] [2]

[1]
F-3-771
3) Hook the tip [1] of spring on the notch [2] of the guide.

[1]

F-3-775
3) Check to see that the spring [1] is mounted as shown in the figure.

[1]

[2]

F-3-772

5) Remove the registration roller unit [4].

- 2 screws [1]
- 2 fixing plates [2]
- 2 springs [3]

[4]

F-3-776

6) Remove 2 screws [1] and pull out the guide [2] toward the front.

[1] [2] [3] [3] [2] [1]

F-3-773

3-137
 Chapter 3

[1]

[1] [2] [1]

F-3-777
7) Remove the registration sensor [1].

[1]
F-3-781
3) Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the harness guide [3] from the
harness [2].

[1]

[1]
F-3-778

3.5.13.3 Before Removing the Registration Sensor

0017-4218

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the

Fixing Assembly]
2) Press the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover [2].

[2] [2] [3]

F-3-782
4) Remove the shaft [1] from the shaft support [2] and remove the merge
guide [3] and the twist spring [4].
[1]

F-3-779
3) Detach the secondary transfer external roller. (page 3-93)Reference[Re-
moving Secondary Transfer External Roller]

3.5.13.4 Removing the Registration Sensor

0016-6141

LBP5970 / LBP5975 [4]

1) Detach the dust-proof cover [1]. [1] [2]
- 2 claws [2] [3]
[2]

F-3-783

Points to note at installation

1) Place the spring [1] as shown in the figure.

[1]
F-3-780
2) Remove the 2 screws [1] of the harness guide.

3-138
 Chapter 3

[1] [A]
[1]

2) Put the shaft [1] at the left of the merge guide through the spring [2] and
the link [3] to insert into the shaft support [4]. 2) While holding the spring [1] with a flat-head screwdriver as shown in the
3) Insert the shaft [5] at the right of the merge guide into the shaft support figure, insert the shaft support [2] (at the right) into [A] area.
[6].

[A]

[1] [2]

[4] [3] [2]

[5] [6]

[1]

4) Hook the lead edge [1] of the spring on the cut-off [2] of the guide.

[1]
3) Check that the spring [1] is installed as shown in the figure.

[1]

[2]

5) Remove the registration roller unit [1].

- 2 screws [2]
- 1 spring retainer (right) [3]
- 1 spring (right) [4]
- 1 spring retainer (left) [5]
- 1 spring (left) [6] 6) Remove the guide [1].
- 2 screws [2]
[1]

Do not apply stress because the sensor harness is connected.

[6] [4]
[5] [3]

[2] [2]

F-3-784

[2] [1] [2]

Points to note at installation
1) Insert the shaft support [1] (at the left) into [A] area. F-3-785
7) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].

3-139
 Chapter 3

[1]
[2]

[1]
F-3-786
8) Remove the registration sensor [1].

[1] [1]
F-3-789
2) Remove the fixing driving gear unit [3].
- 1 cable clamp [1]
- 6 screws [2]

[2] [2]

[1]
F-3-787 [3]
3.5.14 Duplexing Motor

3.5.14.1 Preparation for Removing the Duplexing Motor

0012-9652

LBP5960
[1]
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the fixing assembly.
3) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover
[2].

[2] [1]
[2]
F-3-790
3) Remove the duplexing motor unit [3].
- 3 screws [1]
- 1 connector [2]

F-3-788
4) Remove the right cover.
5) Remove the inside right cover.
6) Remove the inside front cover (right).
7) Remove the inside front cover (left). [1] [2]
8) Remove the front cover. F-3-791
9) Remove the front cover (left).
10) Remove the fixing motor. 4) Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the duplexing motor [2] from the
duplexing motor unit.
3.5.14.2 Removing the Duplexing Motor
0009-9858 [2]
LBP5960

1) Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the drawer unit [2].

[1]

F-3-792

3.5.14.3 Before Removing the Duplex Motor

0016-6142

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

3-140
 Chapter 3

2) Detach the delivery tray [1] in the direction of the arrow.

[2] [2]
[1]

[1]

F-3-793
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the [2]
Fixing Assembly]
4) With opening the upper rear cover [1], press the upper cover lock release F-3-796
button [2] to open the upper cover [3]. 3) Remove the duplex motor unit [1].
- 1 connector [2]
[1] - 3 screws [3]

[3]

[2]
[1]

F-3-794
5) Detach the right cover. (page 3-11)Reference[Detaching Right Cover]
6) Detach the inner right cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Inner [3] [2]
Right Cover] F-3-797
7) Detach the inner front cover (right). (page 3-22)Reference[Detaching 4) Remove the duplex motor [1].
Inner Front Cover (Right)] - 2 screws [2]
8) Detach the inner front cover (left). (page 3-23)Reference[Detaching In-
ner Front Cover (Left)]
[1]
9) Detach the front cover. (page 3-17)Reference[Detaching Front Cover]
10) Detach the front cover (left). (page 3-19)Reference[Detaching Front
Cover (Left)]
11) Remove the fixing motor. (page 3-160)Reference[Removing the Fix-
ing Motor]

3.5.14.4 Removing the Duplex Motor

0016-6143

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the drawer unit [1].

- 5 screws [2]
[2]
[2]
F-3-798
[1]
3.5.15 Duplexing Sensor

3.5.15.1 Preparation for Removing the Duplexing Sheet

Sensor
0012-9653

LBP5960

1) Remove the rear cover.

2) Remove the fixing assembly.
3) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover
[2].
[2] [2]
F-3-795
2) Remove the fixing drive gear unit [1].
- 6 screws [2]

3-141
 Chapter 3

[2] [1] [1]

[3]

[2]

F-3-802
5) Detach the right cover. (page 3-11)Reference[Detaching Right Cover]
6) Detach the inner right cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Inner
Right Cover]
F-3-799
7) Detach the inner front cover (right). (page 3-22)Reference[Detaching
4) Remove the right cover. Inner Front Cover (Right)]
5) Remove the inside right cover. 8) Detach the inner front cover (left). (page 3-23)Reference[Detaching In-
6) Remove the inside front cover (right). ner Front Cover (Left)]
7) Remove the inside front cover (left).
8) Remove the front cover. 9) Detach the front cover. (page 3-17)Reference[Detaching Front Cover]
9) Remove the front cover (left). 10) Detach the front cover (left). (page 3-19)Reference[Detaching Front
10) Remove the front cover (right). Cover (Left)]
11) Detach the front cover (right). (page 3-20)Reference[Detaching Front
3.5.15.2 Removing the Duplexing Sheet Sensor Cover (Right)]
0009-9932

LBP5960 3.5.15.4 Removing the Duplex Paper Sensor

0016-6145

1) Remove connector [1] and then remove the duplexing sheet sensor [2]. LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Disconnect the connector [1] to remove the duplex paper sensor [2].

[1] [2]
F-3-800
[1] [2]
3.5.15.3 Before Removing the Duplex Paper Sensor F-3-803
0016-6144

LBP5970 / LBP5975 3.5.16 Delivery Sensor

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]
2) Detach the delivery tray [1] in the direction of the arrow. 3.5.16.1 Preparation for Removing the Delivery Sensor
0012-9654

LBP5960
[1]
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the fixing assembly.
3) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover
[2].

[2] [1]

F-3-801
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly]
4) With opening the upper rear cover [1], press the upper cover lock release
button [2] to open the upper cover [3].
F-3-804
4) Remove the right cover.
5) Remove the inside right cover.
6) Remove the inside front cover (right).
7) Remove the inside front cover (left).
8) Remove the front cover.
9) Remove the front cover (left).
10) Remove the front cover (right).

3-142
 Chapter 3

3.5.16.2 Removing the Delivery Sensor

0009-9933

LBP5960

1) Remove connector [1] and then remove the delivery sensor [2].

[1] [2]
F-3-808

[1] [2]
F-3-805

3.5.16.3 Before Removing the Delivery Sensor

0016-6146

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Detach the delivery tray [1] in the direction of the arrow.

[1]

F-3-806
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly]
4) With opening the upper rear cover [1], press the upper cover lock release
button [2] to open the upper cover [3].

[1]

[3]

[2]

F-3-807
5) Detach the right cover. (page 3-11)Reference[Detaching Right Cover]
6) Detach the inner right cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Inner
Right Cover]
7) Detach the inner front cover (right). (page 3-22)Reference[Detaching
Inner Front Cover (Right)]
8) Detach the inner front cover (left). (page 3-23)Reference[Detaching In-
ner Front Cover (Left)]
9) Detach the front cover. (page 3-17)Reference[Detaching Front Cover]
10) Detach the front cover (left). (page 3-19)Reference[Detaching Front
Cover (Left)]
11) Detach the front cover (right). (page 3-20)Reference[Detaching Front
Cover (Right)]

3.5.16.4 Removing the Delivery Sensor

0016-6147

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Disconnect the connector [1] to remove the delivery sensor [2].

3-143
 Chapter 3

4) Detach the cover [1].

3.5.17 Finisher - Screw [2] 3 pcs.

3.5.17.1 Removing the Finisher [1]

3.5.17.1.1 Removing the Finisher
0018-3462
LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Release the left and right levers [1], and then open the front cover [2].
[2]

[2] [1]
F-3-809
2) Release the left and right fixing unit release levers [1], and then open the
fixing unit [2].

[1]

F-3-811
5) Release the cable from the clamp [1].
6) Remove the two connectors [2].

[1] [2]

[2]
F-3-810
3) Press the lever [1] to open the upper cover [2].

To protect the drum, open the upper cover until the shutter is closed.

[2]

F-3-812

[1]

3-144
 Chapter 3

7) Remove the finisher [1]. 1) Detach the top cover [1].

- Screw [2] 1 pc. - Screw [2] 2 pcs.
T-3-1
[2]

To avoid finisher falling, support the finisher and detach.

[2]

[1]

F-3-814

[1] Be careful not to lose the leaf spring [1].

[1]

F-3-813

Finisher Installation Precautions

When installing the finisher, fit the left and right boss of the host
machine in the mounting hole [2] of the finisher.

[2]

T-3-2

Notice when attaching on to the main body

Since the screw whole of the right side of the top cover is long, when there
is a gap between the front cover of the main body and the upper cover,
adjust the position of the screw and change the position of the upper
[1] cover.

3.5.17.2 External Covers

3.5.17.2.1 Removing the Top Cover 3.5.17.3 Staple Unit
0018-3463 3.5.17.3.1 Removing the Staple Unit
LBP5970 / LBP5975
0018-3464
LBP5970 / LBP5975

3-145
 Chapter 3

1) Detach the top cover. 1) Detach the top cover.

2) Remove the leaf spring [1]. 2) Remove the leaf spring [1].
- Screw [2] 1 pc. 3) Remove the paper guide [2].
3) Remove the screw [3]. - Projection [3] 2 pcs.

[1] [2]

[1]

[3] [3]
F-3-815
4) Remove the staple unit [1].
- Connector [2] 1 pc.

[1]
[3]

[2]

[2]

F-3-817

F-3-816

3.5.17.4 Offset Unit

3.5.17.4.1 Removing the Offset Unit
0018-3465
LBP5970 / LBP5975

3-146
 Chapter 3

4) Remove the cover plate [1]. 9) Remove the offset HP sensor unit [1].
- Screw [2] 1 pc. - Spring [2] 1 pc.
- Bearing [3] 1 pc.
[2] - Screw [4] 2 pcs.

[1]
[1]
F-3-818
5) Remove the pressure plate [1].
- Screw [2] 1pc. [3] [2]
- Retaining plate [3] 1pc.
6) Remove the three resin E-rings [4].
7) Remove the three gears [5].
8) Remove the timing belt [6].

[3] [2]

[4]

F-3-820
10) Remove the offset unit [1].

[1]

[1]
F-3-819 [2]

F-3-821

After installation, check the gear [2] for smooth rotation.

If you removed the gears shown below, reinstall them with the arrow
marks [1] aligned with each other.

3-147
 Chapter 3

3) Remove the process tray unit [1].

[1] - Spring [2] 1 pc.
- Connector [3] 1 pc.
- Screw [4] 1 pc.

[1] [2]

3.5.17.5 Process Tray Unit

3.5.17.5.1 Removing the Process Tray Unit [3] [4]
0018-3466 F-3-823
LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the offset unit. Notice on attachment of the process tray

2) Remove the lower guide [1]. 1.The process tray can be installed easily with the paper holders raised.
- Screw [2] 2 pcs. 2.After the attachment, turn the gear and leave the stack delivery claw on
the paper feeder side. If the stack delivery claw is on the paper ejecting
[1] [2] side, it will interfere with the process roller and would not proceed the
initial operation.

[1]

F-3-822

When installing the gears in the frame section after removing the process
tray unit, align the arrow mark [1] with the recession [2].

3-148
 Chapter 3

5)Remove the left side panel unit [1].

- Resin E-ring [2] 1 pc.
- Gear [3] 2 pcs.
- Timing belt [4] 1 pc.
[1] [2] - Screw [5] 1 pc.

[4] [1]

[3]

[2] [5]
3.5.17.6 Offset Motor F-3-825
3.5.17.6.1 Removing the Offset Motor 6) Remove the feed motor [1].
- Connector [2] 1 pc.
0018-3467 - Screw [3] 2 pcs.
LBP5970 / LBP5975
[2] [1]
1) Remove the offset unit.
2) Remove the lower guide.
3) Remove the process tray unit.
4) Remove the offset motor.
- Connector [2] 1 pc.
- Screw [3] 2 pcs.

[3]

[3]
F-3-826

3.5.17.8 Gripper Solenoid

3.5.17.8.1 Removing the Gripper Solenoid
0018-3469
LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the power supply PCB.

[1] [2]
F-3-824

3.5.17.7 Feed Motor

3.5.17.7.1 Removing the Feed Motor
0018-3468
LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the offset unit.

2) Remove the lower guide.
3) Remove the process tray unit.
4) Remove the bottom plate.

3-149
 Chapter 3

2) Remove the gripper solenoid [1]. 1) Remove he bottom plate [1].

- Screw [2] 2 pcs. - Screw [2] 5 pcs.

[2]

[1]

[1]
[2]
F-3-827

3.5.17.9 Process Roller F-3-829

2) Disconnect all connectors on the finisher controller PCB.
3.5.17.9.1 Removing the Process Roller 3) Remove the finisher controller PCB [1].
- Screw [2] 3 pcs.
0018-3470
LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the offset unit. [2]

2) Remove the two process rollers [1].

[1]

[1]

F-3-830

3.5.17.11 Power Supply PCB

3.5.17.11.1 Removing the Power Supply PCB
0018-3472
F-3-828 LBP5970 / LBP5975

3.5.17.10 Finisher Controller PCB 1) Remove the offset unit.

2) Remove the lower guide.
3.5.17.10.1 Removing the Finisher Controller PCB 3) Remove the process tray unit.
4) Remove the bottom plate.
0018-3471 5) Remove the connector (J108) on the finisher controller PCB, and then re-
LBP5970 / LBP5975 lease the cable from the cable guide.
6) Remove the right side panel [1].
- Cam [2] 1 pc.
- Screw [3] 2 pcs.

[1] [2]

[3]
F-3-831

3-150
 Chapter 3

7) Remove the solenoid base unit [1]. 1) Remove the bottom plate.
- Spring [2] 1 pc. 2) Remove the paper full sensor unit [1].
- Solenoid base [3] 1 pc. - Screw [2] 1 pc.
- Screw [4] 1 pc. 3) Remove the paper full sensor [3].
- Clamp [5] 1 pc.
- Connector [6] 2 pcs. [1] [3]

[6]

[2]
F-3-834

[4] [1] 3.5.17.13 Inlet Sensor

3.5.17.13.1 Removing the Inlet Sensor
0018-3474
LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the offset unit.

2) Remove the lower guide.
3) Remove the inlet sensor [1].
- Connector [2] 1 pc.

[3] [2] [5] [6]

F-3-832
8) Remove the power supply PCB [1].
- Screw [2] 1 pc.
- Locking support [3] 2 pcs.

[1] [2]

[1] [2]
F-3-835

3.5.17.14 Stack Slide Sensor

3.5.17.14.1 Removing the Stack Slide HP Sensor
0018-3475
LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the offset unit.

2) Remove the lower guide.
3) Remove the process tray unit.
[3]
F-3-833

3.5.17.12 Paper Full Sensor

3.5.17.12.1 Removing the Paper Full Sensor
0018-3473
LBP5970 / LBP5975

3-151
 Chapter 3

4) Remove the stack slide HP sensor [1].

- Connector [2] 1 pc.

[2] [1]
F-3-836

3.5.17.15 Exhasust Heat Fan

3.5.17.15.1 Removing the Exhaust Heat Fan
0018-3477
LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the offset unit.

2) Remove the lower guide.
3) Remove the process tray unit.
4) Remove the bottom plate.
5) Remove the connector (J110) on the finisher controller PCB, and then re-
lease the cable from the cable guide.
6) Remove the exhaust heat fan [1].
- Claw [2] 2 pcs.

[1]

[2]
F-3-837

3-152
 Chapter 3

3.6 FIXING SYSTEM

[1]
3.6.1 Fixing Assembly

3.6.1.1 Removing the Fixing Assembly

0009-9874

LBP5960

1) Press the release lever [1] on the right side of the front cover and open the
front cover [2].

[1] [2]

[2]

[1]

F-3-838
2) Press 2 release buttons [1] in the direction shown by the arrow.
F-3-840
4) Tilt 2 fixing release lever [1] in the direction shown by the arrow.
[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

F-3-839
3) Hold 2 grips [1] and tilt the fixing assembly [2] in the direction shown by
F-3-841
the arrow.
5) Hold 2 grips [1] and remove the fixing assembly in an upward direction.

3-153
 Chapter 3

[1]

[1]

[1]
[2]
F-3-842

3.6.1.2 Removing the Fixing Assembly

0016-6148

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) While pushing the release lever [1] at the right of the front cover, open the
front cover [2].
F-3-845
[2]
4) Remove the fixing assembly [2] upward while holding the 2 handles [1].

[1]

[1]

F-3-843
[2]
2) While pushing the 2 release buttons [1], move down the fixing assembly
[2] toward the front. F-3-846

3.6.2 Fixing Sleeve Unit

3.6.2.1 Removing the Fixing Sleeve Unit

[1]
0009-9276

LBP5960

[1] 1) Remove the fixing assembly.

[2] 2) Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the fixing upper cover [2].

[1]

F-3-844
3) Move down the 2 fixing release levers [1] in the direction of the arrow. [2]
F-3-847
3) Remove screw [1] and then remove the pressure release holder [2] on the
left side and the pressure release spring (left) [3].

3-154
 Chapter 3

[3] [2]

[A]

[B]

[1] [2] [1]

F-3-851
8) Remove the auxiliary cable guide [1] in the direction shown by the arrow.

L 9) Remove 2 connectors [2].

[1] [2]

F-3-848
4) Remove screw [1] and then remove the pressure release holder [2] on the
right side and the pressure release spring (right) [3].

[2] [3]

F-3-852
10) Remove the cable guide [1] in the direction shown by the arrow. (R Side)

[1]

R
F-3-849
5) Unhook claw [1] and then remove the fixing drive gear [2].

[1]
F-3-853
11) Remove the auxiliary cable guide [1] in the direction shown by the ar-
row.

[1]

[2] [1]
F-3-850
6) Open the fixing delivery roller assembly [1] in the direction of [A].
7) Remove the cable guide [2] in the direction of [B].

F-3-854
12) While supporting the fixing sleeve unit [1] with fingers, stand the fixing
assembly as shown in the figure below.
13) Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove 3 fixing terminal [3].

3-155
 Chapter 3

[1] [2] [1]

[2] [3]

F-3-858
3) Remove the pressure release holder (right) [1] and the pressure release
spring (right) [2] on the right side.
- 1 screw [3]

[1] [2]
[3] [3]

F-3-855
14) Remove 3 fixing terminal [1] and then remove the fixing sleeve unit [2]
upward. R
[2]

[3]

F-3-859
4) Release the claw [1] to remove the fixing drive gear [2].

[1]
F-3-856

3.6.2.2 Before Removing the Fixing Sleeve Unit

0017-2213

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the

Fixing Assembly]

3.6.2.3 Removing the Fixing Sleeve Unit

0016-6149 [2] [1]
LBP5970 / LBP5975
F-3-860
1) Detach the fixing upper cover [1]. 5) Open the fixing delivery roller assembly [1] in the direction of the arrow
- 2 screws [2] [A].
6) Remove the cable guide [2] in the direction of the arrow [B].
[2]

[A]

[B]

[1]
F-3-857
2) Remove the pressure release holder (left) [1] and the pressure release
spring (left) [2] on the left side. [2] [1]
- 1 screw [3] F-3-861

3-156
 Chapter 3

7) Remove the auxiliary cable guide [1] in the direction of the arrow.
8) Disconnect the 2 connectors [2]. [1]
[1] [2]

[2]
F-3-862
9) Remove the cable guide [1] in the direction of the arrow (R-side).

[3]

F-3-865
13) Remove the fixing sleeve unit [1] upward.

[1]

[1]
F-3-863
10) Remove the auxiliary cable guide [1] in the direction of the arrow.

[1]

F-3-866

3.6.3 Fixing Pressure Roller

3.6.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Pressure

Roller
0012-9655

LBP5960

1) Remove the fixing assembly.

2) Remove the fixing sleeve unit.
F-3-864
11) While holding the fixing sleeve unit [1] with your fingers, put the fixing 3.6.3.2 Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller
assembly stand as shown in the figure. LBP5960
0009-9280

12) Remove the 3 screws [2] to remove the 3 fixing terminals [3].
1) Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the fixing delivery guide [2].

[1]

[2]
F-3-867
2) Lift the fixing pressure roller shaft (shorter one) [1] by using tools such as
screwdriver.

3-157
 Chapter 3

[1] [2]

[1]
F-3-868 F-3-871
3) Remove the fixing pressure roller unit (including bush and bearing) [1] by 2) Lift up the fixing pressure roller shaft (shorter one) [1] with a screwdriver.
moving it in the direction shown by the arrow.
[1]
[1]

F-3-869
F-3-872
3) Move the fixing pressure roller [1] in the direction of the arrow to remove.

Be sure to place the removed fixing pressure roller unit on paper or the like [1]
to avoid soiling.

4) Remove the fixing pressure roller [1] from the fixing pressure roller unit.
- 2 bushes [2]
- 2 bearings [3]

[3] [2] [1] [3] [2]

F-3-873

Be sure to place the removed fixing pressure roller unit on sheets to prevent
soil.

F-3-870 4) Remove the following parts from the fixing pressure roller unit [1].
- 2 bushings [2]
3.6.3.3 Before Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller - 2 shaft supports [3]
0016-6150

LBP5970 / LBP5975
[1] [3] [2]
[3] [2]
1) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly]
2) Remove the fixing sleeve unit. (page 3-156)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Sleeve Unit]

3.6.3.4 Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller

0016-6151

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the fixing delivery guide [1].

- 2 screws [2]
F-3-874

3.6.4 Looping Sensor

3.6.4.1 Removing the Arching Sensor

0009-9273

LBP5960

1) Remove the fixing assembly.

2) Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the fixing upper cover [2].

3-158
 Chapter 3

[1] [2]

[2] [1]
F-3-875 F-3-879
3) Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the fixing delivery guide [2]. 2) Remove the fixing delivery guide [1].
- 2 screws [2]
[1]

Do not apply stress because the sensor harness is connected.

Do not make the fixing delivery guide hit against the roller.

[2]

[2]
F-3-876
4) Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the sensor cover [2].

[1]

[1]
F-3-880
3) Remove the sensor base [1].
- 2 screws [2]

[2]

[2]
F-3-877
5) Remove connector [1] and then remove the arching sensor [2].

[1] [2]

[1]
F-3-881
4) Disconnect the connector [1] to remove the arch level sensor [2].

[1] [2]

F-3-878

3.6.4.2 Before Removing the Arch Level Sensor

0017-2217

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the

Fixing Assembly]

3.6.4.3 Removing the Arch Level Sensor

0016-6152 F-3-882
LBP5970 / LBP5975
3.6.5 Fixing Motor
1) Detach the fixing upper cover [1].
- 2 screws [2]
3.6.5.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Motor
0012-9656

LBP5960

1) Remove the rear cover.

2) Remove the fixing assembly.
3) Push the upper cover lock release button [1] to open the upper cover
[2].

3-159
 Chapter 3

[2] [1] [1]

[3]

[2]

F-3-886
5) Detach the right cover. (page 3-11)Reference[Detaching Right Cover]
6) Detach the inner right cover. (page 3-12)Reference[Detaching Inner
Right Cover]
F-3-883
7) Detach the inner front cover (right). (page 3-22)Reference[Detaching
4) Remove the right cover. Inner Front Cover (Right)]
5) Remove the inside right cover. 8) Detach the inner front cover (left). (page 3-23)Reference[Detaching In-
6) Remove the inside front cover (right). ner Front Cover (Left)]
7) Remove the inside front cover (left).
8) Remove the front cover. 9) Detach the front cover. (page 3-17)Reference[Detaching Front Cover]
9) Remove the front cover (left). 10) Detach the front cover (left). (page 3-19)Reference[Detaching Front
Cover (Left)]
3.6.5.2 Removing the Fixing Motor
0009-9857 3.6.5.4 Removing the Fixing Motor
LBP5960 0016-6154

LBP5970 / LBP5975
1) Remove the fixing motor [3].
- 1 connector [1] 1) Remove the fixing motor [1].
- 2 screws [1] - 1 connector [2]
- 2 screws [3]
- 1 round-shape terminal [4]

[2]
[3]
[3]
[1]

[4]

[1]
[2]
F-3-884
F-3-887
3.6.5.3 Before Removing the Fixing Motor
0016-6153

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Detach the rear cover. (page 3-10)Reference[Detaching Rear Cover]

2) Detach the delivery tray [1] in the direction of the arrow.

[1]

F-3-885
3) Remove the fixing assembly. (page 3-154)Reference[Removing the
Fixing Assembly]
4) With opening the upper rear cover [1], press the upper cover lock release
button [2] to open the upper cover [3].

3-160
Chapter 4 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
 Contents

Contents

4.1 Periodically Replaced Parts ...........................................................................................................................................4-1

4.1.1 Periodically Replaced Parts ......................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Periodically Replaced Parts ......................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Consumables ..................................................................................................................................................................4-1
4.2.1 Durables Replaced by the User.................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.2 Durables Replaced by the Service Person ................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.3 Durables Replaced by the User.................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.4 Durables Replaced by the Service Person ................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.3 Periodical Service ..........................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.3.1 Scheduled Servicing..................................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.3.2 Scheduled Servicing..................................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.4 Cleaning .........................................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.4.1 Cleaning Items ............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-2
4.4.2 Cleaning Items ............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-3
 Chapter 4

4.1 Periodically Replaced Parts

4.1.1 Periodically Replaced Parts

0008-9439

LBP5960

The machine does not have parts that require periodical replacement.

4.1.2 Periodically Replaced Parts

0016-5896

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine does not have parts that require periodical replacement.

4.2 Consumables

4.2.1 Durables Replaced by the User

0013-8012

LBP5960

Some parts of the machine may require replacement once or more because of deterioration or damage over the period of product warranty. Replace them as neces-
sary.
T-4-1

No. Parts name Parts No. Q'ty Estimated life

1 Fixing assembly FM2-5618 1 150,000 prints

2 Waste toner case - 1 6,200 prints

4.2.2 Durables Replaced by the Service Person

0008-9441

LBP5960

Some parts of the machine may require replacement once or more because of deterioration or damage over the period of product warranty. Replace them as neces-
sary.
T-4-2

No. Parts name Parts No. Q'ty Estimated life Remarks

1 Secondary transfer outside roller FC5-7806 1 150,000 prints

2 Cassette pickup roller FL2-1258 1 150,000 prints To be replaced at the same time.

3 Cassette separation pad FC6-2995 1 150,000 prints

4 Manual feeder pickup roller FC6-0702 1 150,000 prints To be replaced at the same time.

5 Manual feeder separation pad FC6-5354 1 150,000 prints

6 1 To be replaced at the same time.

Optional cassette pickup roller FB6-3405 120,000 prints

7 Optional cassette transport roller FC5-6934 1 120,000 prints

8 Optional cassette separation roller FC6-6661 1 120,000 prints

9 ITB unit FM2-1866 1 150,000 prints

4.2.3 Durables Replaced by the User

0016-5897

LBP5970 / LBP5975

Some parts of the machine may require replacement once or more because of deterioration or damage over the period of product warranty. Replace them as neces-
sary.
T-4-3

No. Parts name Parts No. Q'ty Estimated life

120V: FM2-5626
1 Fixing assembly 1 150,000 prints
230V: FM2-5618

4-1
 Chapter 4

No. Parts name Parts No. Q'ty Estimated life

2 Waste toner case - 1 6,200 prints

3 Staple Cartridge - 1 1,000 pieces

4.2.4 Durables Replaced by the Service Person

0016-5898

LBP5970 / LBP5975

Some parts of the machine may require replacement once or more because of deterioration or damage over the period of product warranty. Replace them as neces-
sary.
T-4-4

No. Parts name Parts No. Q'ty Estimated life Remarks

1 Secondary transfer outside roller FC5-7806 1 150,000 prints

2 Cassette pickup roller FL2-1258 1 150,000 prints To be replaced at the same time.

3 Cassette separation pad FC6-2995 1 150,000 prints

4 Manual feeder pickup roller FC6-0702 1 150,000 prints To be replaced at the same time.

5 Manual feeder separation pad FC6-5354 1 150,000 prints

6 1 To be replaced at the same time.

Optional cassette pickup roller FB6-3405 120,000 prints

7 Optional cassette transport roller FC5-6934 1 120,000 prints

8 Optional cassette separation roller FC6-6661 1 120,000 prints

9 ITB unit FM3-3516 1 150,000 prints

4.3 Periodical Service

4.3.1 Scheduled Servicing

0008-9443

LBP5960
The machine does not have parts that require scheduled servicing.

4.3.2 Scheduled Servicing

0016-5899

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine does not have parts that require scheduled servicing.

4.4 Cleaning

4.4.1 Cleaning Items

0013-4253

LBP5960

T-4-5

By Area Timing

User Laser exposure window As necessary; when replacing the drum cartridge.

User ITB *1 When the ITB has become soiled.

4-2
 Chapter 4

By Area Timing

Service Color displacement sensor window *2 When the sensor window has become soiled with toner or color displacement has occurred.

*1 :To clean the ITB, execute 'ITB cleaning' in user mode as shown below.
Settings Menu>USER MAIN>CLEANING
*2 :Do not dry-wipe the color displacement sensor window [1]. Be sure always to use lint-free paper moistened with water.

[1]

F-4-1

4.4.2 Cleaning Items

0016-5901

LBP5970 / LBP5975

T-4-6

By Area Timing

User Laser exposure window As necessary; when replacing the drum cartridge.

User ITB *1 When the ITB has become soiled.

Service Color displacement sensor window *2 When the sensor window has become soiled with toner or color displacement has occurred.

*1 :To clean the ITB, execute 'ITB cleaning' in user mode as shown below.
Settings Menu>USER MAIN>CLEANING
*2 :Do not dry-wipe the color displacement sensor window [1]. Be sure always to use lint-free paper moistened with water.

[1]

F-4-2

4-3
Chapter 5 TROUBLESHOOTING
 Contents

Contents

5.1 MEASUREMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ....................................................................................................................5-1

5.1.1 Adjustment of Laser Exposure System....................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1.1 When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit (color correction) ...........................................................................................................................5-1
5.1.1.2 When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit (color correction) ...........................................................................................................................5-1
5.1.2 Adjustment of Image Formation System .................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.2.1 When Replacing the Secondary Transfer Outside Roller ...............................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.2.2 When Replacing the ITB.................................................................................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.2.3 When Replacing the Drum Cartridge..............................................................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.2.4 When Replacing the Secondary Transfer Outside Roller ...............................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.2.5 When Replacing the ITB.................................................................................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.2.6 When Replacing the Toner Cartridge .............................................................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.2.7 When Replacing the ITB (color displacement correction) .............................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.2.8 When Replacing the Drum Cartridge..............................................................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.2.9 When Replacing the Toner Cartridge .............................................................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.2.10 When Replacing the ITB (color displacement correction) ...........................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.2.11 When Photosensitive Drum Cleaner Shutter Phase is shifted.......................................................................................................................5-3
5.1.3 Adjustment of Electrical Components ........................................................................................................................................ 5-4
5.1.3.1 When Replacing the DC Controller PCB........................................................................................................................................................5-4
5.1.3.2 When Replacing the Video Controller PCB ...................................................................................................................................................5-4
5.1.3.3 When Replacing the DC Controller PCB........................................................................................................................................................5-5
5.1.3.4 When Replacing the HDD ..............................................................................................................................................................................5-5
5.1.3.5 When Replacing the Video Controller PCB ...................................................................................................................................................5-5
5.1.3.6 When Replacing the HDD ..............................................................................................................................................................................5-5
5.1.4 Adjustment of Fixing System ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-5
5.1.4.1 Checking the Pressure (nip) of the Fixing Pressure Roller .............................................................................................................................5-5
5.1.4.2 When Replacing the Fixing Assembly............................................................................................................................................................5-5
5.1.4.3 Checking the Pressure (nip) of the Fixing Pressure Roller .............................................................................................................................5-5
5.1.4.4 When Replacing the Fixing Assembly............................................................................................................................................................5-6
5.1.5 Adjustment of Pickup/Feeding/Delivery System........................................................................................................................ 5-6
5.1.5.1 When Replacing the Cassette Pickup Roller/Cassette Separation Pad (printer body)....................................................................................5-6
5.1.5.2 When Replacing the Manual Pickup Roller/Manual Separation Pad (printer body) ......................................................................................5-6
5.1.5.3 When Replacing the Cassette Transport Roller/Cassette Separation Roller (paper feeder) ...........................................................................5-6
5.1.5.4 When Replacing the Cassette Pickup Roller/Cassette Separation Pad (printer body)....................................................................................5-7
5.1.5.5 When Replacing the Manual Pickup Roller/Manual Separation Pad (printer body) ......................................................................................5-7
5.1.5.6 When Replacing the Cassette Transport Roller/Cassette Separation Roller (paper feeder) ...........................................................................5-7
5.2 SERVICE TOOLS .........................................................................................................................................................5-8
5.2.1 Standard Tools ............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-8
5.2.2 Solvents and Oils ......................................................................................................................................................................... 5-8
5.2.3 Standard Tools ............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-9
5.2.4 Solvents and Oils ......................................................................................................................................................................... 5-9
5.3 Location of Convectors ................................................................................................................................................5-10
5.3.1 Connectors ................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-10
5.3.2 Connectors ................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-12
5.4 ERROR CODE ............................................................................................................................................................5-14
5.4.1 Error Code.................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-14
5.4.2 A4-XX_ERROR ........................................................................................................................................................................ 5-19
5.4.3 A5-XX_ERROR ........................................................................................................................................................................ 5-19
5.4.4 A7-XX_ERROR ........................................................................................................................................................................ 5-19
5.4.5 D0-XX_ERROR ........................................................................................................................................................................ 5-20
5.4.6 D7-XX_ERROR ........................................................................................................................................................................ 5-20
5.4.7 D8-XX_ERROR ........................................................................................................................................................................ 5-20
5.4.8 D9-XX_ERROR ........................................................................................................................................................................ 5-20
5.4.9 Error Code.................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-20
 Contents

5.4.10 A4-XX_ERROR ...................................................................................................................................................................... 5-25

5.4.11 A5-XX_ERROR ...................................................................................................................................................................... 5-25
5.4.12 A7-XX_ERROR ...................................................................................................................................................................... 5-25
5.4.13 D0-XX_ERROR ...................................................................................................................................................................... 5-26
5.4.14 D7-XX_ERROR ...................................................................................................................................................................... 5-26
5.4.15 D8-XX_ERROR ...................................................................................................................................................................... 5-26
5.4.16 D9-XX_ERROR ...................................................................................................................................................................... 5-26
5.4.17 Jam Code.................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-26
5.5 Version Up .................................................................................................................................................................. 5-27
5.5.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................ 5-27
5.5.1.1 Overview of Upgrading Work ...................................................................................................................................................................... 5-27
5.5.1.2 Construction of Firmware ............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-27
5.5.1.3 Outline of the Service Support Tool ............................................................................................................................................................. 5-28
5.5.1.4 Overview of Upgrading Work ...................................................................................................................................................................... 5-29
5.5.1.5 Construction of Firmware ............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-29
5.5.1.6 Outline of the Service Support Tool ............................................................................................................................................................ 5-30
5.5.2 Making Preparations .................................................................................................................................................................. 5-31
5.5.2.1 Registering the Firmware.............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-31
5.5.2.2 Making Connections ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-33
5.5.2.3 Registering the Firmware............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-34
5.5.2.4 Making Connections ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-36
5.5.3 Downloading the System Software............................................................................................................................................ 5-37
5.5.3.1 Downloading Procedure ............................................................................................................................................................................... 5-37
5.5.3.2 Downloading Procedure ............................................................................................................................................................................... 5-39
5.5.4 Version Upgrade using USB...................................................................................................................................................... 5-42
5.5.4.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-42
5.5.4.2 Types of System Software ............................................................................................................................................................................ 5-42
5.5.4.3 System Downloading .................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-42
5.5.5 Other Upgrade Methods............................................................................................................................................................. 5-44
5.5.5.1 Upgrading of Finisher ................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-44
5.6 Service Mode............................................................................................................................................................... 5-53
5.6.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................ 5-53
5.6.1.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-53
5.6.1.2 Overview....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-53
5.6.2 Service Mode Table ................................................................................................................................................................... 5-54
5.6.2.1 Service Mode ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5-54
5.6.2.2 Service Mode ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5-58
 Chapter 5

5.1 MEASUREMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

5.1.1 Adjustment of Laser Exposure System

5.1.1.1 When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit (color

correction) -1] [A-2]
0010-6244

LBP5960
ment
1
If you have replaced the laser scanner unit (i.e., if you have removed the laser C adjustment
value 2
scanner stay), perform color displacement correction. [-16]
For instructions, see the following: chapter 5 troubleshooting>remedial
work>image faults>displacement/blurring/distortion/poor focus>color dis-
placement.

5.1.1.2 When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit (color

correction)
0016-5902

LBP5970 / LBP5975

If you have replaced the laser scanner unit (i.e., if you have removed the laser
scanner stay), perform color displacement correction.
1) Print a color displacement correction PG as follows: [B-1] [B-2]
1-1) While holding down the Job Cancel key and the Utility key at the same
time, turn on the power.
1-2) Execute the following:
utility>test print AR
F-5-2
Color Displacement Correction PG * If you cannot identify the pair with the most overlap, look for 2 pairs
The color displacement correction PG consists of A-1 and A-2 for main showing noticeable overlap between C line and Bk line; then, use the
scanning direction and B1 and B2 for sub scanning direction, patterns numerical value of the pair in between these 2 pairs as C adjustment
specially designed to correct color displacement in specific directions. values 1 and 2.

[A-1] [A-2]

[B-1] [B-2]
F-5-1
2) Correct the color displacement in main scanning direction.
2-1) In A-1 and A-2 for main scanning direction, find the pair with the most
overlap between Bk line and C line. Note the numerical values to the
left of the pairs: C adjustment value 1, C adjustment value 2. (in the
following figure, C adjustment value 1 = 0, C adjustment value 2 = -
16)
F-5-3
Likewise, identify M adjustment values 1 and 2 and Y adjustment
values 1 and 2 for magenta and yellow.
2-2) Compute the average of C adjustment value 1 and C adjustment value 2
(i.e., (C adjustment value 1 + C adjustment value 2)/2), and use the re-
sult as the adjustment value for C main scanning direction. (in the case
of the above figure, C main direction adjacent value = ((0 + (-16))/2))
= -8.
Likewise, obtain the M main scanning direction adjustment value and
the Y main scanning direction adjustment value for magenta and
yellow.
2-3) Add the Y/M/C main scanning direction adjustment value to the values
indicated in service mode:
Be sure to add the adjustment value to the existing value, not replacing
the latter with the former:
Y: service mode>ADJUST_GR>IMG-REG>REG-H-Y
M: service mode>ADJUST_GR>IMG-REG>REG-H-M
C: service mode>ADJUST_GR>IMG-REG>REG-H-C
3) Correct the color displacement sub scanning direction.
As with the correction in main scanning direction, correct color
displacement in sub scanning direction.
Points to Note:
- Use the following service mode items:
Y: service mode>ADJUST_GR>IMG-REG>REG-V-Y
M: service mode>ADJUST_GR>IMG-REG>REG-V-M
C: service mode>ADJUST_GR>IMG-REG>REG-V-C
- If the sub scanning direction adjustment value cannot be divided, round
up to the nearest whole number.

4) Print a color displacement correction PG, and check to see that the point
of the Bk line with the most overlap with other color line is identified by
0.

5-1
 Chapter 5

5.1.2 Adjustment of Image Formation System 5.1.2.8 When Replacing the Drum Cartridge
0018-8786

LBP5970 / LBP5975
5.1.2.1 When Replacing the Secondary Transfer Outside
Roller If you have replaced the drum cartridge with a new one, the counter reading
0013-4255 will automatically be reset.
LBP5960 However, if you replaced it with a more or less new cartridge (making about
100 prints; see *1), be sure to reset the counter reading in the following serv-
If you are replacing the secondary transfer outside roller, be sure to reset the ice mode:
counter reading using the following service mode item: SERVICE MODE>COUNTER GR.>INIT.DV-UNIT-X (see *2)
SERVICE MODE>COUNTER GR.>INIT.2TR-ROLL

5.1.2.2 When Replacing the ITB *1:

0013-4256
For instance, if the drum cartridge is approaching the end of its life and is re-
LBP5960 placed with a more or less new drum (e.g., having made 150 prints), the ma-
chine is nevertheless likely to assume that the cartridge has been replaced
If you are replacing the ITB, be sure to reset the counter reading in the fol- with an old one, prompting the user to replace it soon after the replacement.
lowing service mode:
SERVICE MODE>COUNTER GR.>INIT.ITB UNIT Be sure to reset the drum counter to avoid such a situation.
This work, however, must be limited to the replacement of the drum car-
tridge, as it will all together initialize the cartridge data.
5.1.2.3 When Replacing the Drum Cartridge
0013-4257

LBP5960 *2:
X represents the type (color) of cartridge being replaced.
If you have replaced the drum cartridge with a new one, the counter reading Y: yellow
will automatically be reset. M: magenta
However, if you replaced it with a more or less new cartridge (making about C: cyan
100 prints; see *1), be sure to reset the counter reading in the following serv- K: black
ice mode:
SERVICE MODE>COUNTER GR.>INIT.DV-UNIT-X (see *2) 5.1.2.9 When Replacing the Toner Cartridge
0018-8787

*1:
For instance, if the drum cartridge is approaching the end of its life and is re-
placed with a more or less new drum (e.g., having made 150 prints), the ma-
chine is nevertheless likely to assume that the cartridge has been replaced
with an old one, prompting the user to replace it soon after the replacement.
Be sure to reset the drum counter to avoid such a situation.
This work, however, must be limited to the replacement of the drum car-
tridge, as it will all together initialize the cartridge data.
LBP5970 / LBP5975
If you replace the toner cartridge while the machine is not indicating the need
for replacement, a discrepancy is likely to occur in the cartridge data. Be sure
to reset the counter as follows (only if you replaced it without being prompt-
ed):
Reset>CHANGE TONER>X TONER

*2: X represents the type (color) of toner cartridge you have replaced:
X represents the type (color) of cartridge being replaced. Y: yellow
Y: yellow M: magenta
M: magenta C: cyan
C: cyan K: black
K: black

5.1.2.4 When Replacing the Secondary Transfer Outside 5.1.2.10 When Replacing the ITB (color displacement
Roller correction)
0016-5903
0016-5907

LBP5970 / LBP5975 LBP5970 / LBP5975

If you are replacing the secondary transfer outside roller, be sure to reset the If you have replaced the ITB, perform color correction.
counter reading using the following service mode item:
SERVICE MODE>COUNTER GR.>INIT.2TR-ROLL 1) Print a color displacement correction PG as follows:
1-1) While holding down the Job Cancel key and the Utility key at the same
5.1.2.5 When Replacing the ITB time, turn on the power.
LBP5970 / LBP5975
0018-8784
1-2) Execute the following:
utility>test print AR
If you are replacing the ITB, be sure to reset the counter reading in the fol-
lowing service mode:
SERVICE MODE>COUNTER GR.>INIT.ITB UNIT Color Displacement Correction PG
The color displacement correction PG consists of A-1 and A-2 for main
scanning direction and B1 and B2 for sub scanning direction, patterns
5.1.2.6 When Replacing the Toner Cartridge specially designed to correct color displacement in specific directions.
0013-4258

LBP5960

If you replace the toner cartridge while the machine is not indicating the need
for replacement, a discrepancy is likely to occur in the cartridge data. Be sure
to reset the counter as follows (only if you replaced it without being prompt-
ed):
Reset>CHANGE TONER>X TONER

X represents the type (color) of toner cartridge you have replaced:

Y: yellow
M: magenta
C: cyan
K: black

5.1.2.7 When Replacing the ITB (color displacement

correction)
0010-7577

LBP5960

If you have replaced the ITB, perform color correction:

For instructions, see the following: chapter 5 troubleshooting>remedial
work>image faults>displacement/blurring/distortion/poor focus>color dis-
placement.

5-2
 Chapter 5

[A-1] [A-2]

F-5-6
[B-1] [B-2] Likewise, identify M adjustment values 1 and 2 and Y adjustment
values 1 and 2 for magenta and yellow.
2-2) Compute the average of C adjustment value 1 and C adjustment value 2
(i.e., (C adjustment value 1 + C adjustment value 2)/2), and use the re-
sult as the adjustment value for C main scanning direction. (in the case
of the above figure, C main direction adjacent value = ((0 + (-16))/2))
F-5-4 = -8.
Likewise, obtain the M main scanning direction adjustment value and
2) Correct the color displacement in main scanning direction. the Y main scanning direction adjustment value for magenta and
2-1) In A-1 and A-2 for main scanning direction, find the pair with the most yellow.
overlap between Bk line and C line. Note the numerical values to the 2-3) Add the Y/M/C main scanning direction adjustment value to the values
left of the pairs: C adjustment value 1, C adjustment value 2. (in the indicated in service mode:
following figure, C adjustment value 1 = 0, C adjustment value 2 = - Be sure to add the adjustment value to the existing value, not replacing
16) the latter with the former:
Y: service mode>ADJUST_GR>IMG-REG>REG-H-Y
M: service mode>ADJUST_GR>IMG-REG>REG-H-M
C: service mode>ADJUST_GR>IMG-REG>REG-H-C
3) Correct the color displacement sub scanning direction.
As with the correction in main scanning direction, correct color
displacement in sub scanning direction.
-1] [A-2]
Points to Note:
- Use the following service mode items:
Y: service mode>ADJUST_GR>IMG-REG>REG-V-Y
ment M: service mode>ADJUST_GR>IMG-REG>REG-V-M
1
C adjustment C: service mode>ADJUST_GR>IMG-REG>REG-V-C
value 2
[-16]
- If the sub scanning direction adjustment value cannot be divided, round
up to the nearest whole number.

4) Print a color displacement correction PG, and check to see that the point
of the Bk line with the most overlap with other color line is identified by
0.

5.1.2.11 When Photosensitive Drum Cleaner Shutter

Phase is shifted
0018-0121

LBP5970 / LBP5975

[B-1] [B-2] 1) Turn OFF and then ON the power, and remove the drum cartridge.
T-5-1

MEMO: When the drum cartridge cannot be removed

F-5-5
* If you cannot identify the pair with the most overlap, look for 2 pairs
showing noticeable overlap between C line and Bk line; then, use the
numerical value of the pair in between these 2 pairs as C adjustment
values 1 and 2.
1) Detach the waste toner cover.(page 3-23)[Detaching Waste Toner
Cover]
2) Detach the sensor cover.(page 3-94)[Removing Waste Toner Sensor
Unit]
3) Push the protrusion [1] at the upper rear side of the waste toner sensor
unit with a screwdriver until you hear the click sound.

5-3
 Chapter 5

[3] [2]

[1]

[1]

[1]
F-5-8
T-5-2

MEMO
Be sure to perform the work above (not only the photosensitive drum
cleaner shutter that has displacement problem, but also) to all of the
photosensitive drum cleaner shutters.

4) Install the drum cartridge.

4) Remove the drum cartridge.
5.1.3 Adjustment of Electrical Components

2) While turning the photosensitive drum cleaner shutter [1] in the direction 5.1.3.1 When Replacing the DC Controller PCB
of the arrow [A], pull it out in the direction of the arrow [B]. 0010-4067

LBP5960

If you have replaced the DC controller, be sure to physically transfer the

EEPROM (IC18) from the old PCB to the new:

J115 J123 J114 J113 J112 J111 J108

[A]

[B] J126
J130
[1] 3

IC22 IC20 IC18

IC16

J125 IC4
IC5

IC17 IC9
IC2

J105 J104 IC13 IC1

128 J127
ICS18
(IC21) J102
J119 J106

J101 J103
[1] F-5-9
F-5-7
5.1.3.2 When Replacing the Video Controller PCB
3) Fit the cutoff [2] of the photosensitive drum cleaner shutter [1] to the po- 0010-3878

sition [3] of triangle marking on the host machine to install the photosen- LBP5960
sitive drum cleaner shutter [1].
If you have replaced the video controller PCB, be sure to physically transfer
the EEPROM (ICS11S) from the old PCB to the new.

5-4
 Chapter 5

J7
IC47S
C28
J5 IC7
J7
IC24 J6
IC6
IC11S J13
IC58
C9 IC3 IC

IC29 IC3
J6

IC19 IC2
J13 IC1
BAT1
IC30
J11 J2000
J10 J9 IC39
J101 IC25
J2
J8 J2001

IC2 IC21

J1
F-5-10 BAT1

F-5-12

If you have replaced the EEPROM (IC11S), all settings that may have been
made through the control panel menus will be lost, possibly requiring you to If you have replaced the EEPROM (IC47S), all settings that may have been
make settings newly. made through the control panel menus will be lost, possibly requiring you to
make settings newly.
5.1.3.3 When Replacing the DC Controller PCB
LBP5970 / LBP5975
0016-5908
5.1.3.6 When Replacing the HDD
0016-5911

LBP5970 / LBP5975
If you have replaced the DC controller, be sure to physically transfer the
EEPROM (ICS19) from the old PCB to the new: When the hard disk has been replaced, the machine will automatically format
it when it is turned on for the first time thereafter; if formatting fails to start
J115 J123 J114 J113 J112 J111 J108 automatically, be sure to execute the following user mode item:
Forcing the Machine to Format the HDD
Settings Menu>USER MAIN>HDD MAINTENANCE>STD FORMAT
J126
J130
3 5.1.4 Adjustment of Fixing System
IC22 IC20 IC18
5.1.4.1 Checking the Pressure (nip) of the Fixing
Pressure Roller
IC16 0010-0715

LBP5960
J125 IC4
IC5
The machine does not allow adjustment of its fixing assembly nip; neverthe-
IC17 IC9 less, if the nip is not correct, fixing faults are likely.
IC2 Be sure to check the fixing assembly nip as follows; if not as indicated, re-
place the fixing assembly.
J105 J104 IC13 IC1 - median value (a): 8.0 to 10.0 mm
128 J127
ICS19 - left/right difference ($): 0.l5 mm or less
J119 J106 J102

J101 J103
c 10mm
F-5-11

5.1.3.4 When Replacing the HDD Paper feed direction

0010-0714 a Center of paper
LBP5960
When the hard disk has been replaced, the machine will automatically format
it when it is turned on for the first time thereafter; if formatting fails to start b 10mm
automatically, be sure to execute the following user mode item:
Forcing the Machine to Format the HDD 30 mm
Settings Menu>USER MAIN>HDD MAINTENANCE>STD FORMAT (approx.)

5.1.3.5 When Replacing the Video Controller PCB F-5-13

0016-5910

LBP5970 / LBP5975
5.1.4.2 When Replacing the Fixing Assembly
If you have replaced the video controller PCB, be sure to physically transfer 0013-4259

LBP5960
the EEPROM (ICS11S) from the old PCB to the new.
If you have replaced the fixing assembly, be sure to reset the counter reading
in user mode as follows:
Settings Menu>USER MAIN>INIT.COUNTER>FIXING UNIT

5.1.4.3 Checking the Pressure (nip) of the Fixing

Pressure Roller
0016-5912

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine does not allow adjustment of its fixing assembly nip; neverthe-
less, if the nip is not correct, fixing faults are likely.
Be sure to check the fixing assembly nip as follows; if not as indicated, re-
place the fixing assembly.

5-5
 Chapter 5

- median value (a): 8.0 to 10.0 mm

- left/right difference ($): 0.5 mm or less

c 10mm

Paper feed direction

a Center of paper

b 10mm

30 mm
(approx.)

F-5-14

5.1.4.4 When Replacing the Fixing Assembly

0018-8788

LBP5970 / LBP5975

If you have replaced the fixing assembly, be sure to reset the counter reading
in user mode as follows:
Settings Menu>USER MAIN>INIT.COUNTER>FIXING UNIT

5.1.5 Adjustment of Pickup/Feeding/Delivery System

5.1.5.1 When Replacing the Cassette Pickup Roller/

Cassette Separation Pad (printer body)
0013-4260

LBP5960

If you have replaced the cassette pickup roller/cassette separation pad of the
printer, be sure to reset the following counter:
SERVICE MODE>COUNTER GR.>IN.C1-PULL-RL

5.1.5.2 When Replacing the Manual Pickup Roller/Manual

Separation Pad (printer body)
0013-4261

LBP5960

Be sure to reset the counter reading in service mode if you have replaced the
manual feeder pickup roller/manual feeder separation pad.
SERVICE MODE>COUNTER GR.>INIT.M-PULL-RL

5.1.5.3 When Replacing the Cassette Transport Roller/

Cassette Separation Roller (paper feeder)
0013-4262

LBP5960
If you have replaced the cassette pickup roller/cassette transport roller/cas-
sette separation roller of the paper feeder, be sure to reset the following coun-
ter:
SERVICE MODE>COUNTER GR.>INIT.C2-PULL-RL (cassette 2)
SERVICE MODE>COUNTER GR.>INIT.C3-PULL-RL (cassette 3)
SERVICE MODE>COUNTER GR.>INIT.C4-PULL-RL (cassette 4)

Cassettes 2 through 4 are defined as follows (with 3 paper feeders installed):

cassette 2: top cassette of the paper feeder
cassette 3: middle cassette of the paper feeder
cassette 4: bottom cassette of the paper feeder

5-6
 Chapter 5

5.1.5.4 When Replacing the Cassette Pickup Roller/

Cassette Separation Pad (printer body)
0018-8789

LBP5970 / LBP5975

If you have replaced the cassette pickup roller/cassette separation pad of the
printer, be sure to reset the following counter:
SERVICE MODE>COUNTER GR.>IN.C1-PULL-RL

5.1.5.5 When Replacing the Manual Pickup Roller/Manual

Separation Pad (printer body)
0018-8790

LBP5970 / LBP5975

Be sure to reset the counter reading in service mode if you have replaced the
manual feeder pickup roller/manual feeder separation pad.
SERVICE MODE>COUNTER GR.>INIT.M-PULL-RL

5.1.5.6 When Replacing the Cassette Transport Roller/

Cassette Separation Roller (paper feeder)
0018-8791

LBP5970 / LBP5975

If you have replaced the cassette pickup roller/cassette transport roller/cas-

sette separation roller of the paper feeder, be sure to reset the following coun-
ter:
SERVICE MODE>COUNTER GR.>INIT.C2-PULL-RL (cassette 2)
SERVICE MODE>COUNTER GR.>INIT.C3-PULL-RL (cassette 3)
SERVICE MODE>COUNTER GR.>INIT.C4-PULL-RL (cassette 4)

Cassettes 2 through 4 are defined as follows (with 3 paper feeders installed):

cassette 2: top cassette of the paper feeder
cassette 3: middle cassette of the paper feeder
cassette 4: bottom cassette of the paper feeder

5-7
 Chapter 5

5.2 SERVICE TOOLS

5.2.1 Standard Tools

0010-0708

LBP5960

T-5-3

No. Tool name Tool No. Remarks

1 tool bag TKN-0001
2 jumper wire TKN-0069 w/ clip
3 gap gauge CK-0057 0.02 to 0.3 mm
4 spring gauge CK-0058 for checking cassette spring pressure: 0 to 600 g
5 Phillips screwdriver CK-0101 M4, M5: 363 mm in length

6 Phillips screwdriver CK-0104 M3, M4: 155 mm in length

7 Phillips screwdriver CK-0105 M4, M5: 191 mm in length
8 Phillips screwdriver CK-0106 M4, M5: 85 mm in length
9 flat-blade screwdriver CK-0111
10 flat-blade precision screwdriver set CK-0114 6 pc, as a set

11 hex key wrench set CK-0151 5 pc as a set

12 fine file CK-0161
13 hex screwdriver CK-0170 M4: 107 mm in length
14 nippers CK-0201
15 radio wrench CK-0202

16 pliers CK-0203
17 stop ring pliers CK-0205 for shift ring
18 contact pliers CK-0218
19 tweezers CK-0302
20 ruler CK-0303 for measurement (150 mm)

21 soldering iron CK-0309 100 V, 30 W

22 plastic hammer CK-0314
23 brush CK-0315
24 pen light CK-0327
25 plastic bottle CK-0328 100 cc

26 solder CK-0329
mm dia 1.5 (mm) x1(mm)
27 solder collector CK-0330
1.5 mm
28 lint-free paper CK-0336
500 SH/PKG
29 oil applying tool CK-0349
30 cc
30 plastic bottle CK-0351 30 cc
31 digital multimeter FY9-2032

5.2.2 Solvents and Oils

0010-0711

LBP5960

T-5-4

No. Name Uses Remarks

1 alcohol cleaning - Do not bring closer to fire.

EX: - Procure locally.
plastic (Note)
rubber
metal
(oil stain, toner stain)

2 lubricant between gear and shaft lubricant

- fixing drive unit tool No.: CK-0551-020
- delivery duplexing drive unit

To clean the external covers, use a cloth moistened with water (well wrung).

5-8
 Chapter 5

5.2.3 Standard Tools

0016-5930

LBP5970 / LBP5975

T-5-5

No. Tool name Tool No. Remarks

1 tool bag TKN-0001
2 jumper wire TKN-0069 w/ clip
3 gap gauge CK-0057 0.02 to 0.3 mm
4 spring gauge CK-0058 for checking cassette spring pressure: 0 to 600 g
5 Phillips screwdriver CK-0101 M4, M5: 363 mm in length

6 Phillips screwdriver CK-0104 M3, M4: 155 mm in length

7 Phillips screwdriver CK-0105 M4, M5: 191 mm in length
8 Phillips screwdriver CK-0106 M4, M5: 85 mm in length
9 flat-blade screwdriver CK-0111
10 flat-blade precision screwdriver set CK-0114 6 pc, as a set

11 hex key wrench set CK-0151 5 pc as a set

12 fine file CK-0161
13 hex screwdriver CK-0170 M4: 107 mm in length
14 nippers CK-0201
15 radio wrench CK-0202

16 pliers CK-0203
17 stop ring pliers CK-0205 for shift ring
18 contact pliers CK-0218
19 tweezers CK-0302
20 ruler CK-0303 for measurement (150 mm)

21 soldering iron CK-0309 100 V, 30 W

22 plastic hammer CK-0314
23 brush CK-0315
24 pen light CK-0327
25 plastic bottle CK-0328 100 cc

26 solder CK-0329
mm dia 1.5 (mm) x1(mm)
27 solder collector CK-0330
1.5 mm
28 lint-free paper CK-0336
500 SH/PKG
29 oil applying tool CK-0349
30 cc
30 plastic bottle CK-0351
30 cc
31 digital multimeter FY9-2032

5.2.4 Solvents and Oils

0016-5931

LBP5970 / LBP5975

T-5-6

No. Name Uses Remarks

1 alcohol cleaning - Do not bring closer to fire.

EX: - Procure locally.
plastic (Note)
rubber
metal
(oil stain, toner stain)

2 lubricant between gear and shaft lubricant

- fixing drive unit tool No.: CK-0551-020
- delivery duplexing drive unit

To clean the external covers, use a cloth moistened with water (well wrung).

5-9
 Chapter 5

5.3 Location of Convectors

5.3.1 Connectors
0010-1620

LBP5960

J1119

J111

J22
J109

J691

J1033
J1114
J102

J1113 J1111
J1118 J1112
J1115
J1032

J21

J1117

J1021
J1031 J1116

F-5-15

J115
J123
J114

J1145

J401
J106
J105
J1147 J104

J1234
J1233
J1232 J451
J1141

J1231

J1
J1151

J1142
J1152
J1143
J1153
J1144
J1154

J1148
J1146
F-5-16

5-10
 Chapter 5

J126
J113
J112

J110
J1103
J116

J1105 J352
J351
J521

J1101
J1104

J1102

J1161
J301
J302
J1109
J1108
J1107
J1106
F-5-17

J1301 CN1

J108
J103 J1005

J107

J124

J15

J1004
J14
J16

J1002 J1084
J1003 J1086
J1001
J1085

J1083

J1082

F-5-18

5-11
 Chapter 5

J1214

J1212

J1223

J1222

J1225
J1226

J1254 J1297 J129

J1224 J1295 J1253
J1298 J101
J1296 J121 J1
J1211 J125

J1221
J122
J13
J1215 J118
J117
CN1

CN2
CN1
CN1
F-5-19

5.3.2 Connectors
0016-5932

LBP5970 / LBP5975

J1119

J111

J22
J109

J691

J1033
J1114
J102

J1113 J1111
J1118 J1112
J1115
J1032

J21

J1117

J1021
J1031 J1116

F-5-20

5-12
 Chapter 5

J115
J123
J114

J1145

J401
J106
J105
J1147 J104

J1234
J1233
J1232 J451
J1141

J1231

J1
J1151

J1142
J1152
J1143
J1153
J1144
J1154

J1148
J1146
F-5-21

J126
J113
J112

J110
J1103
J116

J1105 J352
J351
J521

J1101
J1104

J1102

J1161
J301
J302
J1109
J1108
J1107
J1106
F-5-22

5-13
 Chapter 5

J1301 CN1

J108
J103 J1005

J107

J124

J15

J1004
J14
J16

J1002 J1084
J1003 J1086
J1001
J1085

J1083

J1082

F-5-23

J1214

J1212

J1223

J1222

J1225
J1226

J1254 J1297 J129

J1224 J1295 J1253
J1298 J101
J1296 J121 J1
J1211 J125

J1221
J122
J13
J1215 J118
J117
CN1

CN2
CN1
CN1
F-5-24

5.4 ERROR CODE

5.4.1 Error Code

0009-7026

LBP5960

T-5-7

Code Description Remedial action

E000 no DC controller EEPROM
Description: - Transfer the EEPROM from the existing PCB to the new PCB.
Indicates the absence of DC controller EEPROM or the presence of a faulty - Replace the DC control PCB (i.e., one fitted with EEPROM).
FFFF EEPROM.
E001 Fixing error temperature
Condition: - Replace the fixing sleeve unit (main thermistor).
The main thermistor reading is 255 deg C or more. - Replace the DC controller PCB. *1
Cause:
The main thermistor is faulty. The DC PCB is faulty.
0000

5-14
 Chapter 5

Code Description Remedial action

Condition: - Replace the fixing sleeve unit (sub thermistor).
The sub thermistor reading is 290 deg C or more. - Replace the DC controller PCB. *1
Cause:
The sub main thermistor is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
0001
Condition: - Replace the DC controller PCB. *1
The safety circuit (in the DC controller) has detected a high temperature
error (about 260 deg C or more).
Cause:
The thermal switch is faulty. The low-voltage power supply PCB is faulty.
0002 The DC controller PCB is faulty.
E003 Fixing low temperature

Condition: - Replace the fixing sleeve unit (main thermistor).

As much as 20 sec after the fixing heater has gone on, the main thermistor - Replace the DC controller PCB. *1
reading is 120 deg C or less.
Cause:
The main thermistor is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. The
0000 connector has poor contact, or the harness is faulty.
Condition: - Replace the fixing sleeve unit (sub thermistor).
While printing temperature control is under way, the sub thermistor reading - Replace the DC controller PCB. *1
is 90 deg C or less for 1 sec or more.
Cause:
The sub thermistor is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. The
0001 connector has poor contact, or the harness is faulty.
Condition: - Replace the fixing sleeve unit (main thermistor).
During initial rotation, the main thermistor reading is 50 deg C or less 0.2 - Replace the DC controller PCB. *1
sec after the start of temperature control.
Cause:
The DC controller PCB is faulty. The connector has poor contact, or the
0002 harness is faulty.
E012 Drum/ITB motor error

Condition: - Replace the drum/ITB motor.

A motor ready state does not occur within 3 sec after the motor has been - Replace the DC controller PCB.
started.
Cause:
0000 The drum/ITB motor is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
Condition: - Replace the drum/ITB.
A motor ready state remains for 3 sec or more even though the motor has - Replace the DC controller PCB.
not been driven.
Cause:
0001 The drum/ITB motor is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
E013 Waste toner motor error

Condition: - Replace the waste toner feedscrew and the feedscrew drive unit.
The waste toner feedscrew is clogged. - Replace the DC controller PCB.
Cause:
The waste toner motor is faulty. (An over-current (350 mA or more) has
0000 been detected about 0.1 sec after the motor has been driven.)
Condition: - Replace the waste toner motor harness.
The waste toner motor has an open circuit. (An open circuit (50 mA or less) - Check the connector.
has been detected about 0.1 sec after the motor has been driven.) - Replace the DC controller PCB.
Cause:
The waste toner motor harness has an open circuit. The connector has poor
0001 contact.
E020 Developing assembly error (ATR error)
Cause:
The drum cartridge is not mounted properly. The drum cartridge is faulty. The patch image read mechanism is faulty.

5-15
 Chapter 5

Code Description Remedial action

At time of installation or during replacement of the drum cartridge, the ATR - Remove and mount the drum cartridge.
control mechanism has found that the Y patch density data is outside the - Replace the drum cartridge.
range of correction (lower limit). - Clean/replace the ITB.
- Clean/replace the patch image read sensor.
0020
At time of installation or during replacement of the drum cartridge, the ATR
control mechanism has found that the M patch density data is outside the
range of correction (lower limit).

0021
At time of installation or during replacement of the drum cartridge, the ATR
control mechanism has found that the C patch density data is outside the
range of correction (lower limit).

0022
At time of installation or during replacement of the drum cartridge, the ATR
control mechanism has found that the Bk patch density data is outside the
range of correction (lower limit).

0023
At time of installation or during replacement of the drum cartridge, the ATR
control mechanism has found that the Y patch density data is outside the
range of correction (upper limit).

0010
At time of installation or during replacement of the drum cartridge, the ATR
control mechanism has found that the M patch density data is outside the
range of correction (upper limit).
0011
At time of installation or during replacement of the drum cartridge, the ATR
control mechanism has found that the C patch density data is outside the
range of correction (upper limit).
0012
At time of installation or during replacement of the drum cartridge, the ATR
control mechanism has found that the Bk patch density data is outside the
range of correction (upper limit).
0013
During printing, the ATR control mechanism has found that the Y patch
density data is outside the range of correction (upper limit).

0100
During printing, the ATR control mechanism has found that the M patch
density data is outside the range of correction (upper limit).

0101
During printing, the ATR control mechanism has found that the C patch
density data is outside the range of correction (upper limit).

0102
During printing, the ATR control mechanism has found that the Bk patch
density data is outside the range of correction (upper limit).

0103
During printing, the ATR control mechanism has found that the Y patch
density data is outside the range of correction (lower limit).
0200
During printing, the ATR control mechanism has found that the M patch
density data is outside the range of correction (lower limit).
0201
During printing, the ATR control mechanism has found that the C patch
density data is outside the range of correction (lower limit).
0202
During printing, the ATR control mechanism has found that the Bk patch
density data is outside the range of correction (lower limit).
0203
E021 Development motor error
Cause:
The development motor is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.

5-16
 Chapter 5

Code Description Remedial action

YM development motor error (A motor ready state does not occur within 3 - Replace the development motor.
0000 sec after the motor has been started.) - Replace the DC controller PCB.
CK development motor error (A motor ready state does not occur within 3
0001 sec after the motor has been driven.)
YM development motor error (A motor ready state remains for 3 sec or
0100 more even though the motor has not been driven.)
CK development motor error (A motor ready state has remained for 3 sec or
0101 more even when the motor has been started.)
E025 Toner motor error
Cause:
The development motor is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
Y development assembly supply error (At time of toner supply, there is no - Replace the development motor.
0000 change in the input value of PS3 through PS6.) - Replace the DC controller PCB.
M developing assembly supply error (At time of toner supply, there is no
0001 change in the input value of PS3 through PS6.)
C developing assembly supply error (At time of toner supply, there is no
0002 change in the input value of PS3 through PS6.)
K developing assembly supply error (At time of toner supply, there is no
0003 change in the input value of PS3 through PS6.)
Y hopper supply error (At time of toner supply, there is no change in the
0100 input value of PS3 through PS6.)
M hopper supply error (At time of toner supply, there is no change in the
0101 input value of PS3 through PS6.)
C hopper supply error (At time of toner supply, there is no change in the
0102 input value of PS3 through PS6.)
K hopper supply error (At time of toner supply, there is no change in the
0103 input value of PS3 through PS6.)
E067 Primary transfer ATVC error
Cause:
HVT1/HVT2 is faulty.

Primary transfer ATVC error Replace HVT1/HVT2.

The measured level of current is above the upper limit.

0101
Primary transfer ATVC error
The current measured at 2 points are identical.

0102
Primary transfer ATVC error
The measured level of current does not change (both).

0103
E100 BD error
Cause:
The laser scanner unit is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
BD error - Replace the laser scanner unit.
During constant rotation, the cycle of the BD signal has incurred a - Replace the DC controller PCB.
0000 discrepancy of 1 sec or more from a specific cycle.
E110 Polygon mirror motor error
Cause:
The polygon mirror motor is faulty.

The revolution is not as indicated within 5 sec after the scanner motor has Replace the polygon mirror motor.
been started (BD control).
0000
The revolution is not as indicated within 5 sec after the scanner motor has
been started (FG control).
0001
E240 Video controller communication error
Cause:
The video controller PCB is faulty.

Communication error Replace the video controller PCB.

0000
As much as 180 sec has passed while the pickup output request signal is
being received.
0001
As much as 180 sec has passed while the image output request signal is
being received.
0002
Communication sequence error other than above
0003
E350 Communication error between DC controller and EEPROM

5-17
 Chapter 5

Code Description Remedial action

Communication error between DC controller and EEPROM Replace the DC controller PCB.
0000 to
0003

E440 Optional feeder-related error

Cause:
The feeder controller PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
Communication error while the pickup motor of an option is being driven - Replace the feeder controller PCB.
- Replace the DC controller PCB.
0001
Communication error during initial communication of an option

0002
Communication error other than above

0003
E602 HDD error

HDD capacity shortage -

The installed HDD does not provide enough memory required by software.
0001
An attempt to download the controller firmware has failed. - Download the controller firmware newly.
- Replace the controller board.
0002
HDD access error Replace the HDD.
An error has occurred (e.g., damage in a sector, device busy) caused by
hardware or device while the HDD is being accessed during execution of
0003 'bootrom'.
E604 Memory shortage

There is a shortage of memory. - Disconnect and then connect the additional memory.
- Replace the additional memory with an appropriate one.
- Replace the controller board.
0000
E733 Printer-related communication error
At power-on, an error has occurred in the communication between the DC - Turn the power back on.
controller and the video controller (caused by the video controller). - Replace the DC controller PCB.
0000
At times other than power-on, an error has occurred in the communication
between the DC controller and the video controller (caused by the DC
0001 controller).
A PPREADY signal timeout has occurred.
0002
E744 An illegal ID code has been detected while the controller firmware is being downloaded.

An illegal ID code has been detected while the controller firmware is being Check the appropriate project ID, and copy the correct project ID firmware.
downloaded.
1000
E760 A fault exits in the video controller software program.

A fault exits in the software program of the video controller. - Download the correct controller firmware.
0000 - Replace the controller board.
E804 Power supply cooling fan error

An error has occurred in the power supply cooling fan. - Replace the power supply fan.
Cause: - Replace the DC controller PCB.
0000 The power supply cooling fan is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
E805 Fixing fan error

An error has occurred in the Fixing fan. - Replace the fixing fan.
Cause: - Replace the DC controller PCB.
0000 The fixing fan is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
An error has occurred in the controller fan. - Replace the controller fan.
Cause: - Replace the video controller PCB.
0003 The fixing fan is faulty. The video controller PCB is faulty.
E806 Heat discharge error

An error has occurred in the heat discharge fan. - Replace the delivery fan.
0001 - Replace the DC controller PCB.
Drive fan error Replace the drive fan. Replace the DC controller PCB.
0002
E808 Low-voltage power supply fault (zero-cross error)

Low-voltage power supply PCB fault (zero-cross error) - Replace the low-voltage power supply PCB.
Cause: - Replace the controller PCB.
0000 Low-voltage power supply PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.

5-18
 Chapter 5

Code Description Remedial action

E811 The drum cartridge new/old detection mechanism is faulty. (The drum has been identified as being old, but an attempt to cut the fuse has failed.)

The drum cartridge new/old detection mechanism is faulty. (The drum has - Remove and then mount the drum cartridge, or replace it.
been identified as being old, but an attempt to cut the fuse has failed.) - Replace the fuse contact PCB.
Cause: - Replace the DC controller PCB.
The drum cartridge is not mounted properly, or is faulty. The fuse contact
PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. (The drum new/old
detection circuit is faulty.)

0000
E990 toner shutter error

The output of PS13 (waste toner shutter open/closed sensor) does not go - Remove and then mount the toner cartridge.
Low even when the pickup motor has been driven for 20 sec. - Replace the waste toner shutter open/closed sensor.
Cause: - Replace the waste toner shutter drive unit.
The toner cartridge is not mounted properly. The waste toner shutter open/ - Replace the DC controller PCB.
closed sensor is faulty. The waste toner shutter drive unit is faulty. The DC
controller PCB is faulty.
0000
The output of PS14 (toner supply shutter open/closed sensor) does not go - Remove and then mount the toner cartridge.
Low even when the pickup motor has been driven for 5 sec. - Replace the toner supply shutter open/closed sensor.
Cause: - Replace the toner supply shutter drive unit.
The toner cartridge is not mounted properly. The toner shutter open/closed - Replace the DC controller PCB.
sensor is faulty. The toner stutter drive unit is faulty. The DC controller PCB
is faulty.
0001

*1:
If E001 (fixing error high temperature) or E003 (fixing low temperature) has occurred 4 times continuously, the error must be reset as follows:
SERVICE MODE>FUNCTION GR.>CLEAR ERR

5.4.2 A4-XX_ERROR
0009-9347

LBP5960

T-5-8

Number field Description Corrective action

A4-00 to 06 A fault exits in the software program of the video controller. - Turn off and then on the power.
- Replace the video controller board.

5.4.3 A5-XX_ERROR
0009-9356

LBP5960

T-5-9

Number field Description Corrective action

A5-00 to 07 A fault has occurred while image data is being processed by the controller. 1) Turn on the power.
2) If step 1 fails, increase the memory.
3) If step 2 fails, replace the control board.

5.4.4 A7-XX_ERROR
0009-9358

LBP5960

T-5-10

Number field Description Corrective action

A7-00 A fault exits in the software program of the video controller. 1) Turn on the power once again.
2) If step 1 fails, replace the controller board.

5-19
 Chapter 5

5.4.5 D0-XX_ERROR
0009-9362

LBP5960

T-5-11

Number field Description Corrective action

D0-00 to 0B A fault has occurred in the firmware of the LIPS IV translator. 1) Turn on the power once again.
2) If step 1 fails, replace the controller board.

5.4.6 D7-XX_ERROR
0009-9364

LBP5960

T-5-12

Number field Description Corrective action

D7-00, 01 A fault has occurred in the firmware of the PCL translator. 1) Turn on the power.
2) If step 1 fails, replace the controller board.

5.4.7 D8-XX_ERROR
0009-9365

LBP5960

T-5-13

Number field Description Corrective action

D8-00 TO 0C A fault has occurred in the firmware of the LIPS LX (BLD) translator. 1) Turn on the power.
2) If step 1 fails, replace the controller board.

5.4.8 D9-XX_ERROR
0009-9367

LBP5960

T-5-14

Number field Description Corrective action

D9-00, 01 A fault has occurred in the firmware of the IMAGING translator. 1) Turn on the power once again.
2) If step 1 fails, replace the controller board.

5.4.9 Error Code

0018-7429

LBP5970 / LBP5975

5-20
 Chapter 5

T-5-15

Code Description Remedial action

E000 no DC controller EEPROM

FFFF Description: - Transfer the EEPROM from the existing PCB to the new PCB.
Indicates the absence of DC controller EEPROM or the presence of a faulty - Replace the DC control PCB (i.e., one fitted with EEPROM).
EEPROM.
E001 Fixing error temperature
0 Condition: - Replace the fixing sleeve unit (main thermistor).
The main thermistor reading is 255 deg C or more. - Replace the DC controller PCB. *1
Cause:
The main thermistor is faulty. The DC PCB is faulty.
1 Condition: - Replace the fixing sleeve unit (sub thermistor).
The sub thermistor reading is 290 deg C or more. - Replace the DC controller PCB. *1
Cause:
The sub main thermistor is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
3 Condition: - Replace the DC controller PCB. *1
The safety circuit (in the DC controller) has detected a high temperature
error (about 260 deg C or more).
Cause:
The thermal switch is faulty. The low-voltage power supply PCB is faulty.
The DC controller PCB is faulty.
E003 Fixing low temperature
0 Condition: - Replace the fixing sleeve unit (main thermistor).
As much as 20 sec after the fixing heater has gone on, the main thermistor - Replace the DC controller PCB. *1
reading is 120 deg C or less.
Cause:
The main thermistor is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. The
connector has poor contact, or the harness is faulty.
1 Condition: - Replace the fixing sleeve unit (sub thermistor).
While printing temperature control is under way, the sub thermistor reading - Replace the DC controller PCB. *1
is 90 deg C or less for 1 sec or more.
Cause:
The sub thermistor is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. The
connector has poor contact, or the harness is faulty.
2 Condition: - Replace the fixing sleeve unit (main thermistor).
During initial rotation, the main thermistor reading is 50 deg C or less 0.2 - Replace the DC controller PCB. *1
sec after the start of temperature control.
Cause:
The DC controller PCB is faulty. The connector has poor contact, or the
harness is faulty.
E012 Drum/ITB motor error
0 Condition: - Replace the drum/ITB motor.
A motor ready state does not occur within 3 sec after the motor has been - Replace the DC controller PCB.
started.
Cause:
The drum/ITB motor is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
100 Condition: - Replace the drum/ITB motor.
A motor ready state does not occur within 3 sec after the motor has been - Replace the DC controller PCB.
started.
Cause:
The drum/ITB motor is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
E013 Waste toner motor error
1 Condition: - Replace the waste toner feedscrew and the feedscrew drive unit.
The waste toner feedscrew is clogged. - Replace the DC controller PCB.
Cause:
The waste toner motor is faulty. (An over-current (350 mA or more) has
been detected about 0.1 sec after the motor has been driven.)

2 Condition: - Replace the waste toner motor harness.

The waste toner motor has an open circuit. (An open circuit (50 mA or less) - Check the connector.
has been detected about 0.1 sec after the motor has been driven.) - Replace the DC controller PCB.
Cause:
The waste toner motor harness has an open circuit. The connector has poor
contact.
E020 Developing assembly error (ATR error)
Cause:
The drum cartridge is not mounted properly. The drum cartridge is faulty. The patch image read mechanism is faulty.

5-21
 Chapter 5

Code Description Remedial action

20 At time of installation or during replacement of the drum cartridge, the ATR - Remove and mount the drum cartridge.
control mechanism has found that the Y patch density data is outside the - Replace the drum cartridge.
range of correction (lower limit). - Clean/replace the ITB.
- Clean/replace the patch image read sensor.
21 At time of installation or during replacement of the drum cartridge, the ATR
control mechanism has found that the M patch density data is outside the
range of correction (lower limit).
22 At time of installation or during replacement of the drum cartridge, the ATR
control mechanism has found that the C patch density data is outside the
range of correction (lower limit).
23 At time of installation or during replacement of the drum cartridge, the ATR
control mechanism has found that the Bk patch density data is outside the
range of correction (lower limit).
10 At time of installation or during replacement of the drum cartridge, the ATR
control mechanism has found that the Y patch density data is outside the
range of correction (upper limit).
11 At time of installation or during replacement of the drum cartridge, the ATR
control mechanism has found that the M patch density data is outside the
range of correction (upper limit).
12 At time of installation or during replacement of the drum cartridge, the ATR
control mechanism has found that the C patch density data is outside the
range of correction (upper limit).
13 At time of installation or during replacement of the drum cartridge, the ATR
control mechanism has found that the Bk patch density data is outside the
range of correction (upper limit).
100 During printing, the ATR control mechanism has found that the Y patch
density data is outside the range of correction (upper limit).
101 During printing, the ATR control mechanism has found that the M patch
density data is outside the range of correction (upper limit).
102 During printing, the ATR control mechanism has found that the C patch
density data is outside the range of correction (upper limit).
103 During printing, the ATR control mechanism has found that the Bk patch
density data is outside the range of correction (upper limit).
200 During printing, the ATR control mechanism has found that the Y patch
density data is outside the range of correction (lower limit).

201 During printing, the ATR control mechanism has found that the M patch
density data is outside the range of correction (lower limit).
202 During printing, the ATR control mechanism has found that the C patch
density data is outside the range of correction (lower limit).
203 During printing, the ATR control mechanism has found that the Bk patch
density data is outside the range of correction (lower limit).
E021 Development motor error
Cause:
The development motor is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
0 YM development motor error (A motor ready state does not occur within 3 - Replace the development motor.
sec after the motor has been started.) - Replace the DC controller PCB.
1 CK development motor error (A motor ready state does not occur within 3
sec after the motor has been driven.)
100 YM development motor error (A motor ready state remains for 3 sec or
more even though the motor has not been driven.)
101 CK development motor error (A motor ready state has remained for 3 sec
or more even when the motor has been started.)

E025 Toner motor error

Cause:
The development motor is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
0 Y development assembly supply error (At time of toner supply, there is no - Replace the development motor.
change in the input value of PS3 through PS6.) - Replace the DC controller PCB.
1 M developing assembly supply error (At time of toner supply, there is no
change in the input value of PS3 through PS6.)
2 C developing assembly supply error (At time of toner supply, there is no
change in the input value of PS3 through PS6.)
3 K developing assembly supply error (At time of toner supply, there is no
change in the input value of PS3 through PS6.)

100 Y hopper supply error (At time of toner supply, there is no change in the
input value of PS3 through PS6.)

101 M hopper supply error (At time of toner supply, there is no change in the
input value of PS3 through PS6.)
102 C hopper supply error (At time of toner supply, there is no change in the
input value of PS3 through PS6.)
103 K hopper supply error (At time of toner supply, there is no change in the
input value of PS3 through PS6.)
E067 Primary transfer ATVC error
Cause:
HVT1/HVT2 is faulty.

5-22
 Chapter 5

Code Description Remedial action

101 Primary transfer ATVC error Replace HVT1/HVT2.
The measured level of current is above the upper limit.
102 Primary transfer ATVC error
The current measured at 2 points are identical.
103 Primary transfer ATVC error
The measured level of current does not change (both).

E06F EEPROM errer

68 EEROM errer - Replace the video controller PCB
Cause
The video controller PCB is faulty.
(EEPROM errer)
E100 BD error
Cause:
The laser scanner unit is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.

0 BD error - Replace the laser scanner unit.

During constant rotation, the cycle of the BD signal has incurred a - Replace the DC controller PCB.
discrepancy of 1 sec or more from a specific cycle.
E110 Polygon mirror motor error
Cause:
The polygon mirror motor is faulty.

0 The revolution is not as indicated within 5 sec after the scanner motor has Replace the polygon mirror motor.
been started (BD control).
1 The revolution is not as indicated within 5 sec after the scanner motor has
been started (FG control).
E240 Video controller communication error
Cause:
The video controller PCB is faulty.

0 Communication error Replace the video controller PCB.

1 As much as 180 sec has passed while the pickup output request signal is
being received.

2 As much as 180 sec has passed while the image output request signal is
being received.
3 Communication sequence error other than above
E350 Communication error between DC controller and EEPROM

0000 to Communication error between DC controller and EEPROM Replace the DC controller PCB.
0003
E440 Optional feeder-related error
Cause:
The feeder controller PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
1 Communication error while the pickup motor of an option is being driven - Replace the feeder controller PCB.
- Replace the DC controller PCB.
2 Communication error during initial communication of an option

3 Communication error other than above

E500 Fault in finisher communication

- Check connection between the DC controller and the finisher controller
PCB
0000 to - Replace the finisher controller PCB
0102 Fault in finisher communication - Replace the DC controller PCB
E505 Fault in finisher BRAM
0001 Check some error - Check connection between the DC controller and the finisher controller
PCB
0002 Verifying error when writing - Replace the finisher controller PCB
E510
0000 Fault in finisher feed motor Replace finisher feed motor
E520
0001 When the process pad is in operation, it fails to return to the offset HP. - Replace offset motor
0002 When the process pad is in operation, it fails to move. - Replace offset HP sensor
0003 When the stack slider is in operation, it fails to return to stack delivery HP. - Replace offset motor
0004 When the stack slider is in operation, it fails to move - Replace stack delivery HP sensor
E531 Fault in staple motor
0001 When stapling, the staple fails to move the HP.
0002 When stapling, the staple fails to returns to the HP. Replace staple motor
E551 Finisher fan error
0001 Fault in finisher fan Replace the finisher fan
E602 HDD error
1 HDD capacity shortage -
The installed HDD does not provide enough memory required by software.

5-23
 Chapter 5

Code Description Remedial action

2 An attempt to download the controller firmware has failed. - Download the controller firmware newly.
- Replace the controller board.
3 HDD access error Replace the HDD.
An error has occurred (e.g., damage in a sector, device busy) caused by
hardware or device while the HDD is being accessed during execution of
'bootrom'.
E604 Memory shortage
0 There is a shortage of memory. - Disconnect and then connect the additional memory.
- Replace the additional memory with an appropriate one.
- Replace the controller board.
1 When I cannot secure the memory which is necessary for PDL start Increase the amount of the SDRAM memory.

E733 Printer-related communication error

0 At power-on, an error has occurred in the communication between the DC - Turn the power back on.
controller and the video controller (caused by the video controller). - Replace the DC controller PCB.

1 At times other than power-on, an error has occurred in the communication

between the DC controller and the video controller (caused by the DC
controller).
2 PPREADY signal time-out

E730

100A PDL software trouble power OFF and back ON.

When an initializing failure or other system error has occurred while a job
was being processed
C000 Initializing error Format the whole system, and re-install. Replace the video controller PCB.

C001 HDD access error Format the whole system, and re-install. Replace the HDD. Replace the
video controller PCB.

E740 Ethernet board trouble

2 When an illegal MAC address was detected at startup - Replace the Ethernet board.
- Replace the video controller PCB

4 When an illegal network ID was detected at startup

E744 An illegal ID code has been detected while the controller firmware is being downloaded.
1000 An illegal ID code has been detected while the controller firmware is being Check the appropriate project ID, and copy the correct project ID firmware.
downloaded.
E760 A fault exits in the video controller software program.

0 A fault exits in the software program of the video controller. - Download the correct controller firmware.
- Replace the controller board.

E748 Error of the video controller PCB

4000 No ASIC of each video controller PCB cannot be detected. Replace the video controller PCB

4020 It was detected that an invalid board was connected to the PCI expansion Attach a PCI expansion board supported by this machine
slot.

E804 Power supply cooling fan error

0 An error has occurred in the power supply cooling fan. - Replace the power supply fan.
Cause: - Replace the DC controller PCB.
The power supply cooling fan is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
E805 Fixing fan error

0 An error has occurred in the Fixing fan. - Replace the DC controller PCB.
Cause:
The fixing fan is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
3 An error has occurred in the controller fan. - Replace the controller fan.
Cause: - Replace the video controller PCB.
The fixing fan is faulty. The video controller PCB is faulty.
E806 Heat discharge error

1 An error has occurred in the heat discharge fan. - Replace the delivery fan.
- Replace the DC controller PCB.

2 Drive fan error Replace the drive fan. Replace the DC controller PCB.
E808 Low-voltage power supply fault (zero-cross error)

5-24
 Chapter 5

Code Description Remedial action

0 Low-voltage power supply PCB fault (zero-cross error) - Replace the low-voltage power supply PCB.
Cause: - Replace the controller PCB.
Low-voltage power supply PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
E811 The drum cartridge new/old detection mechanism is faulty. (The drum has been identified as being old, but an attempt to cut the fuse has failed.)
0 The drum cartridge new/old detection mechanism is faulty. (The drum has - Remove and then mount the drum cartridge, or replace it.
been identified as being old, but an attempt to cut the fuse has failed.) - Replace the fuse contact PCB.
Cause: - Replace the DC controller PCB.
The drum cartridge is not mounted properly, or is faulty. The fuse contact
PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. (The drum new/old
detection circuit is faulty.)
E990 toner shutter error

0 The output of PS13 (waste toner shutter open/closed sensor) does not go
Low even when the pickup motor has been driven for 20 sec.
Cause:
The toner cartridge is not mounted properly. The waste toner shutter open/
closed sensor is faulty. The waste toner shutter drive unit is faulty. The DC
controller PCB is faulty.
1 go Low even when the pickup motor has been driven for 5 sec.
Cause:
The toner cartridge is not mounted properly. The toner shutter open/closed
sensor is faulty. The toner stutter drive unit is faulty. The DC controller
PCB is faulty.
- Remove and then mount the toner cartridge.
- Replace the waste toner shutter open/closed sensor.
- Replace the waste toner shutter drive unit.
- Replace the DC controller PCB.
- Remove and then mount the toner cartridge.
- Replace the toner supply shutter open/closed sensor.
- Replace the toner supply shutter drive unit.
- Replace the DC controller PCB.

*1:
If E001 (fixing error high temperature) or E003 (fixing low temperature) has occurred 4 times continuously, the error must be reset as follows:
SERVICE MODE>FUNCTION GR.>CLEAR ERR

5.4.10 A4-XX_ERROR
0018-8934

LBP5970 / LBP5975

T-5-16

Number field Description Corrective action

A4-00 to 06 A fault exits in the software program of the video controller. - Turn off and then on the power.
- Replace the video controller board.

5.4.11 A5-XX_ERROR
0018-7433

LBP5970 / LBP5975

T-5-17

Number field Description Corrective action

A5-00 to 07 A fault has occurred while image data is being processed by the controller. 1) Turn on the power.
2) If step 1 fails, increase the memory.
3) If step 2 fails, replace the control board.

5.4.12 A7-XX_ERROR
0018-7435

LBP5970 / LBP5975

T-5-18

Number field Description Corrective action

A7-00 A fault exits in the software program of the video controller. 1) Turn on the power once again.
2) If step 1 fails, replace the controller board.

5-25
 Chapter 5

5.4.13 D0-XX_ERROR
0018-7436

LBP5970 / LBP5975

T-5-19

Number field Description Corrective action

D0-00 to 0B A fault has occurred in the firmware of the LIPS IV translator. 1) Turn on the power once again.
2) If step 1 fails, replace the controller board.

5.4.14 D7-XX_ERROR
0018-8935

LBP5970 / LBP5975

T-5-20

Number field Description Corrective action

D7-00, 01 A fault has occurred in the firmware of the PCL translator. 1) Turn on the power.
2) If step 1 fails, replace the controller board.

5.4.15 D8-XX_ERROR
0018-7437

LBP5970 / LBP5975

T-5-21

Number field Description Corrective action

D8-00 TO 0C A fault has occurred in the firmware of the LIPS LX (BLD) translator. 1) Turn on the power.
2) If step 1 fails, replace the controller board.

5.4.16 D9-XX_ERROR
0018-7438

LBP5970 / LBP5975

T-5-22

Number field Description Corrective action

D9-00, 01 A fault has occurred in the firmware of the IMAGING translator. 1) Turn on the power once again.
2) If step 1 fails, replace the controller board.

5.4.17 Jam Code

0017-2777

LBP5970 / LBP5975

5-26
 Chapter 5

T-5-23

Code Type of jam

01xx delay jam
02xx stationary jam
0Axx Power on jam
0Bxx door open jam
1009 TMF delay jam
1109 TMF stationary jam
1309 TMF Power on jam
1509 Staple jam
1609 Stack delivery jam
1709 Emergency stop jam

T-5-24

Code Sensor type

xx01 cassette1 paper sensor(PS8)
xx02 cassette2 paper sensor(SR3)
xx03 cassette3 paper sensor
xx04 cassette4 paper sensor
xx05 registration sensor (PS7)
xx06 delivery sensor
xx07 duplexing paper sensor (PS10)
xx09 Inlet sensor
0B00 -
0BE1 -
0BE2 -
0BE3 -
1009 Inlet sensor (PI3)
1109 Offset HP sensor(PI1), Inlet sensor (PI3)
1309 Inlet sensor (PI3)
1509 Stapling HP sensor
1609 stack slide HP sensor (PI2)
1709 -

5.5 Version Up

5.5.1 Outline

5.5.1.1 Overview of Upgrading Work

0010-3066

LBP5960
The machine's system software may be upgraded using a PC to which the Service Support Tool (SST) has been installed.

5.5.1.2 Construction of Firmware

0010-3067

LBP5960

T-5-25

Firmware Function Location Remarks

cont Controls overall machine operation. Video controller board Soldered to flash ROM (IC2)

5-27
 Chapter 5

Flash ROM
(System)
IC2

F-5-25

5.5.1.3 Outline of the Service Support Tool

0010-3068

LBP5960

The service support tool (SST, hereafter) provides the following functions:

PC for servicing LBP5900

SST

Firmware download

Firmware

Flash ROM

F-5-26

Memo:
The machine does not support uploading/downloading of the SST's backup mechanism.

To use the SST, put the machine in download mode:

Shifting to Download Mode

1) While holding down on the Online key (a) and the Cancel Job key (b), turn on the power.
2) Press the Settings key (c) several times; when 'SERVICE MODE' is indicated, press the Reset key (d) to start service mode.
3) Press the Settings key (c) several times; when 'F/W UPDATE GR.' is indicated, press the Reset key (d).
4) Press the Settings key (c) several times; when 'USB' is indicated, press the Reset key (d).
5) When 'OK?' is indicated, press the Enter key (c) to start download mode.

a b

Cancel Job Job

Online Enter
Utility Settings

Feeder Selection

Ready Message HDD Job

Reset

d c e
F-5-27

5-28
 Chapter 5

Main power-on

System ROM

Boot program

System program

Service mode
Download

Download control
program

Download mode

F-5-28

5.5.1.4 Overview of Upgrading Work

0016-5923

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The machine's system software may be upgraded using a PC to which the Service Support Tool (SST) has been installed.

5.5.1.5 Construction of Firmware

0016-5924

LBP5970 / LBP5975

T-5-26

Firmware Function Location Remarks

cont Controls overall machine operation. Video controller board ROMDIM(J2000)

boot Video controller start Video controller board

Dcon Control of the printer. DC controller board

Resource Controls overall machine operation. Controller ROM ROMDIM(J2001)

CPU Contol of the finisher. Finisher controller PCB only if equipped with the finisher.

5-29
 Chapter 5

J2000

J2001

F-5-29

5.5.1.6 Outline of the Service Support Tool

0016-5925

LBP5970 / LBP5975

The service support tool (SST, hereafter) provides the following functions:

PC for servicing LBP5975/5970

SST

Firmware download

Firmware

Flash ROM

F-5-30

Memo:
The machine does not support uploading/downloading of the SST's backup mechanism.

To use the SST, put the machine in download mode:

Shifting to Download Mode

1) While holding down on the Online key (a) and the Cancel Job key (b), turn on the power.
2) Press the Settings key (c) several times; when 'SERVICE MODE' is indicated, press the Reset key (d) to start service mode.
3) Press the Settings key (c) several times; when 'F/W UPDATE GR.' is indicated, press the Reset key (d).
4) Press the Settings key (c) several times; when 'USB' is indicated, press the Reset key (d).
5) When 'OK?' is indicated, press the Enter key (c) to start download mode.

[a] [b]

Cancel Job Job

Online Power
Utility Settings

OK
Feeder Selection
Ready Message HDD Job Main Power
Reset

[b] [c]
F-5-31

5-30
 Chapter 5

Main power-on

System ROM

Boot program

System program

Service mode
Download

Download control
program

Download mode

F-5-32

5.5.2 Making Preparations

5.5.2.1 Registering the Firmware

0013-4269

LBP5960
Copy the firmware from the system CD to the SST.

Making Preparations
Items to Prepare
- PC to which SST v3.21 or later has been installed
- system CD for the LBP5960

Copying the Firmware

1) Start up the PC.
2) Set the system CD in the PC.
3) Start up the SST.
4) Click [Register Firmware].

F-5-33

5-31
 Chapter 5

5) Select the drive in which you have set the system CD, and click [SEARCH].

F-5-34

6) See that a list has appeared indicating the software found on the system CD. Deselect (by removing the check mark) from those folders and system software files
you do not need; then, click [REGISTER].

F-5-35

7) When the result of copying the system software has appeared, click [OK].

5-32
 Chapter 5

F-5-36

5.5.2.2 Making Connections

0013-4271

LBP5960

Connect the PC to the machine.

Making Preparations
Items to Prepare
- PC to which SST v3.21 or higher and LBP5960 firmware have been installed
- USB cable (USB1.1,USB2.0)

Procedure
1) Start up the PC.
2) Connect the machine and the PCB with a USB cable.

USB cable
F-5-37

3) Turn on the main power as follows to start download mode.

Shifting to Download Mode
3-1) While holding down on the Online key (a) and the Cancel Job key (b), turn on the power.
3-2) Press the Settings key (c) several times; when 'SERVICE MODE' is indicated, press the Reset key (d) to start service mode.
3-3) Press the Settings key (c) several times; when 'F/W UPDATE GR.' is indicated, press the Reset key (d).
3-4) Press the Settings key (c) several times; when 'USB' is indicated, press the Reset key (d).
3-5) When 'OK?' is indicated, press the Enter key (e) to start download mode.

5-33
 Chapter 5

a b

Cancel Job Job

Online Enter
Utility Settings

Feeder Selection

Ready Message HDD Job

Reset

d c e
F-5-38

Memo:
The New Hardware Wizard appears on the PC screen. Click [Cancel].

F-5-39

4) Start up the SST.

5.5.2.3 Registering the Firmware

0016-5926

LBP5970 / LBP5975

Copy the firmware from the system CD to the SST.

Making Preparations
Items to Prepare
- PC to which SST v3.34 or later has been installed
- system CD for the LBP5970

Copying the Firmware

1) Start up the PC.
2) Set the system CD in the PC.
3) Start up the SST.
4) Click [Register Firmware].

F-5-40

5-34
 Chapter 5

5) Select the drive in which you have set the system CD, and click [SEARCH].

F-5-41

6) See that a list has appeared indicating the software found on the system CD. Deselect (by removing the check mark) from those folders and system software files
you do not need; then, click [REGISTER].

F-5-42

7) When the result of copying the system software has appeared, click [OK].

5-35
 Chapter 5

F-5-43

5.5.2.4 Making Connections

0016-5927

LBP5970 / LBP5975

Connect the PC to the machine.

Making Preparations
Items to Prepare
- PC to which SST v3.34 or higher and LBP5970 firmware have been installed
- USB cable (USB1.1,USB2.0)

Procedure
1) Start up the PC.
2) Connect the machine and the PCB with a USB cable.

USB cable
F-5-44

3) Turn on the main power as follows to start download mode.

Shifting to Download Mode
3-1) While holding down on the Online key (a) and the Cancel Job key (b), turn on the power.
3-2) Press the Settings key (c) several times; when 'SERVICE MODE' is indicated, press the Reset key (d) to start service mode.
3-3) Press the Settings key (c) several times; when 'F/W UPDATE GR.' is indicated, press the Reset key (d).
3-4) Press the Settings key (c) several times; when 'USB' is indicated, press the Reset key (d).
3-5) When 'OK?' is indicated, press the Enter key (e) to start download mode.

5-36
 Chapter 5

[a] [b] [a]

Cancel Job Job

Online Power
Utility Settings

OK
Feeder Selection
Ready Message HDD Job Main Power
Reset

[b] [c]
F-5-45

Memo:
The New Hardware Wizard appears on the PC screen. Click [Cancel].

F-5-46

4) Start up the SST.

5.5.3 Downloading the System Software

5.5.3.1 Downloading Procedure

0013-4272

LBP5960

1) Select the model (LBP5960) to connect.

F-5-47

2) Select 'CONT' (LBP5960), and click [START].

5-37
 Chapter 5

F-5-48

3) Select the version to download, and click [Start].

F-5-49

4) When the result of downloading is indicated, click [OK].

5-38
 Chapter 5

F-5-50

The end of work with the SST does not mean the end of work to be performed on the machine.
Be sure not to turn off the machine until it indicates '00 ready to print'.
It takes about 3 min from when [start] is clicked to when '00 ready to print' is indicated.
If interrupted while writing the program to its memory, the machine may fail to start up.

5) Click [EXIT].

F-5-51

After the Work

The new version will not be effective unless the power has been turned off and then back on.

5.5.3.2 Downloading Procedure

0016-5928

LBP5970 / LBP5975

1) Select the model (LBP5970) to connect.

5-39
 Chapter 5

F-5-52

2) Select 'CONT' (LBP5970), and click [START].

F-5-53

3) Select the version to download, and click [Start].

5-40
 Chapter 5

F-5-54

4) When the result of downloading is indicated, click [OK].

F-5-55

The end of work with the SST does not mean the end of work to be performed on the machine.
Be sure not to turn off the machine until it indicates '00 ready to print'.
It takes about 3 min from when [start] is clicked to when '00 ready to print' is indicated.
If interrupted while writing the program to its memory, the machine may fail to start up.

5) Click [EXIT].

5-41
 Chapter 5

F-5-56

After the Work

The new version will not be effective unless the power has been turned off and then back on.

5.5.4 Version Upgrade using USB

5.5.4.1 Overview
0017-2685

LBP5970 / LBP5975
This machine can update system software via USB memory by storing the system software into USB memory.
This machine only recognizes the file stored in LBP5970 folder in the USB memory.
Be sure to create LBP5970 folder in the top layer in the USB memory. Do not store anything other than the system software data of this machine.
This feature does not support writing from SST to USB memory.

5.5.4.2 Types of System Software

0017-2687

LBP5970 / LBP5975

T-5-27

Firmware Function Storing location Remarks

cont Overall control Video controller PCB ROMDIMM (J2000)

boot Starting video controller Video controller PCB

Dcon Printer engine control DC controller PCB

Resource Overall control Controller ROM ROMDIMM (J2001)

T-5-28

Be sure to store the only system software to upgrade in the USB memory because there is no guarantee as to which System software to be downloaded if there are
the same types of system softwares with different versions in the USB memory.
With the host machine that does not equip the optional Control ROM, executing download process of control ROM system software causes an error.
When downloading system software to the machine that does not equip the control ROM, be sure not to store the control ROM system software in the USB memory.

5.5.4.3 System Downloading

0017-2713

LBP5970 / LBP5975

Preparation
USB memory that stores system software of this machine.
When using USB memory, be sure to make the host machine enable to use USB memory.
1) Turn ON the power while pressing Online key (a) and Job Cancel key (b).
2) Press Setup key (c) several times. Once "Service Mode" is displayed, press Reset key (d) to get in Service Mode.
3) Press Setup key (c) several times. Once "Function GR" is displayed, press Reset key (d).
4) Press Setup key (c) several times. Once "USB-H" is displayed, press Reset key (d).

5-42
 Chapter 5

5) Press Setup key (c) to select ON.

6) Press OK key (e) to enable use of USB memory.

[a] [b] [a]

Cancel Job Job

Online Power
Utility Settings

OK
Feeder Selection
Ready Message HDD Job Main Power
Reset

[b] [c]
F-5-57
Downloading procedure
1) Turn OFF the host machine's power and connect the USB memory to the host machine.

F-5-58
2) Turn ON the main power by following the steps below to execute downloading.
2-1) Turn ON the power while pressing Online key (a) and Job Cancel key (b).
2-2) Press Setup key (c) several times. Once "Service Mode" is displayed, press Reset key (d) to get in Service Mode.
2-3) Press Setup key (c) several times. Once "F/W UPDATE GR" is displayed, press Reset key (d).
2-4) Press Setup key (c) several times. Once "USB STORAGE" is displayed, press Reset key (d).
2-5) Press Setup key (c) to select the type of system software, and then press OK (e) key.
T-5-29

Setting Item Operation

ALL To execute downloading of the entire system software
CONT To execute downloading of the video controller system software
BOOT To execute downloading of the system software for starting video controller
ROM To execute downloading of the control ROM system software
DCON To execute downloading of the DC controller system software

T-5-30

MEMO:
In the case of selecting "ALL", downloading is executed in the following order: video controller system software (CONT), system software for starting video
controller (BOOT), control ROM system software (ROM), printer engine system software (DCON).

[a] [b] [a]

Cancel Job Job

Online Power
Utility Settings

OK
Feeder Selection
Ready Message HDD Job Main Power
Reset

[b] [c]
F-5-59
2-6) Check the version of system software with the display panel.
T-5-31

MEMO:
In the case of selecting "ALL" in step 2-5), the system software's version is not displayed.

2-7) Pressing OK key (e) starts downloading. This machine is automatically restarted when upgrading is complete.

5-43
 Chapter 5

3) Output status print to check the version.

4) Turn OFF the power of the host machine. Then, while pressing Online key and Job Cancel key, turn ON the power to get in Service Mode.
5) Set OFF the setting of the following: "Function GR." > "USB-H"
T-5-32

Do not remove USB memory or turn OFF the power of the host machine during downloading, otherwise the host machine may not be started.

T-5-33

Downloading is not executed properly in the case of the followings:

1. If there is no system software of this machine in the USB memory, the machine shows "NO FILES" on the display panel and cancels downloading.
2. If there is more than one system software in the same kind with different versions, the machine starts downloading of the system software that is first found. There
is no guarantee as to which system software to be selected.
3. If the USB memory is not attached or recognized, the machine shows "NO FILES" on the display panel and cancels downloading.
4. If "ROM" is selected although the control ROM is not installed, an error occurs in the middle of downloading. In such cases, the machine is recovered by turning
OFF and then ON the power.
5. If "ALL" is selected although there is no control ROM installed to the host machine while the printer engine system software (DCON) and the control ROM
system software (ROM) are stored in the USB memory, an error occurs in the middle of downloading control ROM system software because the downloading is
executed in the order of video controller system software (CONT), system software for starting video controller (BOOT), control ROM system software (ROM)
and printer engine system software (DCON). In such cases, the machine is recovered by turning OFF and then ON the power; however, the printer engine system
software (DCON) will not be downloaded.

5.5.5 Other Upgrade Methods

5.5.5.1 Upgrading of Finisher

0018-3653

LBP5970 / LBP5975

Overview
A flash ROM is used for the CPU of the this machine. To upgrade this CPU, the downloader PCB (FY9-2034) is used. The operating instructions for it are given
below.

How to Use the Downloader PCB (FY9-2034)

1.When to Use the Downloader PCB
The downloader PCB is used when upgrading the CPU of the this machine's Controller PCB.
2.Member part of the downloader PCB

[5] [8] [1] [2] [3] [4] [7] [6]

F-5-60
T-5-34

No. Description Function

[1] START/STOP key A key to be pressed when you start or stop download

[2] LOAD LED To be lit when download is available.

5-44
 Chapter 5

No. Description Function

[3] Model LED To be lit when this machine is connected.

[4] Power LED To be lit when power is supplied from this machine to the downloader
PCB

[5] RS-232C cable (straight full A cable to connect the downloader PCB and a PC.Be sure to connect the
wiring; 9 pins) cable in a way that its ferrite core comes to the PC side.

[6] Cable A (9 pins) Length: A cable to connect the downloader PCB and other products
approx. 70cm

[7] Cable B (9 pins)Length: A cable to connect the downloader PCB and this machine
approx. 50cm

[8] RS-232C connector A connector to connect an RS-232C cable to the downloader PCB

3. Necessary Tool
The following item needs to be prepared for download.
Computer (PC)
Prerequisite: The service support tool (Ver. 3.34E or higher) must be installed to the PC.

4. Download Procedures

If any error occurs during downloading (for example, you forgot to press the Start key on the downloader PCB), delete the firmware registered in the service
support tool and then retry the procedure described in this document from the beginning.

a. Registering ROM data

1) Store ROM data to be downloaded in the 'C:\ServTool\NewROM' folder.
2) Start up the Service Support Tool.
C:\ProgramFiles\Service Support Tool\bpchost.exe
3) Select [Register Firmware].

F-5-61

5-45
 Chapter 5

4) Select the data inside the NewROM folder

F-5-62

5) Select [Register].

F-5-63

5-46
 Chapter 5

6) Select [OK] and register the data.

F-5-64

b. Connection to this machine

1) Turn off the power of the host machine.
2) Release the left and right lever [1], and then open the front cover [2].

[2] [1]
F-5-65
3) Release the left and right fixing release lever [1], and then open the fixing unit [2].

[1]

[2]
F-5-66

5-47
 Chapter 5

4) Push the lever [1] , and then open the top cover [2].
T-5-35

To protect the drum, open the upper cover until the shutter is closed.

[2]

[1]

5) Remove the cpver [1].

- Screw [2] 3pcs.

[1]

[2]

F-5-67

5-48
 Chapter 5

6) Connect the connector [2] to the downloader PCB cable B.

[1]

F-5-68
T-5-36

! Perform downloading with the upper cover open.

The drum is not protected with a shutter. Cover it with paper or the like for protection.

7) Connect the RS-232C cable to the RS-232C connectors of the circuit board and the PC.
8) Turn on the power of the host machine.

c. Download
1) Start up the Service Support Tool.
C:\ProgramFiles\Service Support Tool\bpchost.exe
2) Select the type of host machine and the data.

F-5-69

5-49
 Chapter 5

F-5-70

3) Press the START/STOP key of the downloader PCB.

LOAD LED is lit.
4)Select the data and press [START].

F-5-71

5-50
 Chapter 5

5) Follow the instructions on the screen to prepare for downloading.

A press on [OK] will bring up the next screen.

F-5-72

6) Select the data to download.

7) Press [START] to start downloading.

F-5-73

5-51
 Chapter 5

8) Press [START] so that the computer and the downloader PCB will start downloading the program.

F-5-74

9) If downloading ended normally, press [OK].

F-5-75

5-52
 Chapter 5

10)Return to the main menu and finish the download.

F-5-76

5. Release of Connection
1) Press the START/STOP key of the downloader PCB.
LOAD LED is turned off.
2) Turn off the power of the host machine.
3) Disconnect the cable B from the finisher.
4) Install the main body by reversing the procedure for removal.
5) Turn on the power of the host machine.

6. Checking the Operation

1)Check to make sure that this machine operates normal.

5.6 Service Mode

5.6.1 Outline

5.6.1.1 Overview
0009-9244

LBP5960
Shifting to Service Mode
1) While holding down the Online key (a) and the Cancel Job key (b), turn on the power.
2) Press the Settings key (c) so that 'SERVICE MODE' is indicated.
3) Press the Enter key so that the group name appears. (Use the down arrow key to move to the next item.)

a b

Cancel Job Job

Online Enter
Utility Settings

Feeder Selection

Ready Message HDD Job

Reset

c
F-5-77

5.6.1.2 Overview
0016-5934

LBP5970 / LBP5975

Shifting to Service Mode

1) While holding down the Online key (a) and the Cancel Job key (b), turn on the power.
2) Press the Settings key (c) so that 'SERVICE MODE' is indicated.
3) Press the OK key so that the group name appears. (Use the down arrow key to move to the next item.)

5-53
 Chapter 5

[a] [b]

Cancel Job Job

Online Power
Utility Settings

OK
Feeder Selection
Ready Message HDD Job Main Power
Reset

[b] [c]
F-5-78

5.6.2 Service Mode Table

5.6.2.1 Service Mode

0013-4697

LBP5960

COUNTER GR.
T-5-37

Item Description Setting

INIT.FIX.COUNT initializes the counter value of the fixing assembly. -

DV-UNT-C indicates the counter reading of the C drum cartridge 0 to 45000 (0*)
unit: 1

INIT.DV-UNT-C resets the counter reading of the C drum cartridge -

DV-UNT-M indicates the counter reading of the M drum cartridge 0 to 45000 (0*)
unit: 1

INIT.DV-UNT-M resets the counter reading of the M drum cartridge -

DV-UNT-Y indicates the counter reading of the Y drum cartridge 0 to 45000 (0*)
unit: 1

INIT.DV-UNT-Y resets the counter reading of the Y drum cartridge -

DV-UNT-K indicates the counter reading of the Bk drum cartridge 0 to 45000 (0*)
unit: 1

INIT.DV-UNT-K resets the counter reading of the Bk drum cartridge -

INIT.C1-PU-RL resets the counter reading of the pickup roller for cassette 1 (machine cassette) -

INIT.C2-PU-RL resets the counter reading of the pickup/transport/separation roller for cassette 2 (feeder 1) -

INIT.C3-PU-RL resets the counter reading of the pickup/transport/separation roller for cassette 3 (feeder 2) -

INIT.C4-PU-RL resets the counter reading of the pickup/transport/separation roller for cassette 4 (feeder 3) -

INIT.M-PU-RL resets the counter reading of the pickup roller (manual feeder) -

INIT.2TR-ROLL resets the counter reading of the secondary transfer outside roller -

INIT.ITB UNIT resets the ITB counter reading -

ADJUST GR.
T-5-38

Item Description Setting

CALIBRATION enables/disables calibration ON*, OFF

5-54
 Chapter 5

Item Description Setting

IMG-REG

REG-H-C adjusts the write start position in main scanning direction for C -127 to 127 (0*)
unit: 1

REG-H-M adjusts the write start position in main scanning direction for M -127 to 127 (0*)
unit: 1

REG-H-Y adjusts the write start position in main scanning direction for Y -127 to 127 (0*)
unit: 1

REG-H-K adjusts the write start position in main scanning direction for Bk -127 to 127 (0*)
unit: 1

REG-V-C adjusts the write start position in sub scanning direction for C -127 to 127 (0*)
unit: 1

REG-V-M adjusts the write start position in sub scanning direction for M -127 to 127 (0*)
unit: 1

REG-V-Y adjusts the write start position in sub scanning direction for Y -127 to 127 (0*)
unit: 1

REG-V-K adjusts the write start position in sub scanning direction for Bk -127 to 127 (0*)
unit: 1

VD-OFS-K sets the offset value of Vd (developing bias) for Bk -5 to 5 (0*)

unit: 1

VD-OFS-3 sets the offset value of Vd (developing bias) for color -5 to 5 (0*)
unit: 1

V-BACK-K sets the offset value of Vback (defogging bias) for Bk -3 to 3 (0*)
unit: 1

V-BACK-3 sets the offset value of Vback (defogging bias) for color -3 to 3 (0*)
unit: 1

P-TG-C sets the offset value of the ATR control target (C) -4 to 4 (0*)
unit: 1

P-TG-M sets the offset value of the ATR control target (M) -4 to 4 (0*)
unit: 1

P-TG-Y sets the offset value of the ATR control target (Y) -4 to 4 (0*)
unit: 1

P-TG-K sets the offset value of the ATR control target (Bk) -4 to 4 (0*)
unit: 1

OFSTAC-C sets the offset value of the charging AC bias for C 0 to 3 (0*)
unit: 1

OFSTAC-M sets the offset value of the charging AC bias for M 0 to 3 (0*)
unit: 1

OFSTAC-Y sets the offset value of the charging AC bias for Y 0 to 3 (0*)
unit: 1

OFSTAC-K sets the offset value of the charging AC bias for Bk 0 to 3 (0*)
unit: 1

T-SPLY-C sets the offset value of the C toner supply amount -3 to 3 (0*)
unit: 1

T-SPLY-M sets the offset value of the M toner supply amount -3 to 3 (0*)
unit: 1

T-SPLY-Y sets the offset value of the Y toner supply amount -3 to 3 (0*)
unit: 1

T-SPLY-K sets the offset value of the K toner supply amount -3 to 3 (0*)
unit: 1

1TR-TGC sets the offset value of the primary charging bias (C) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

1TR-TGM sets the offset value of the primary charging bias (M) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

1TR-TGY sets the offset value of the primary charging bias (Y) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

5-55
 Chapter 5

Item Description Setting

1TR-TGK1 sets the offset value of the primary charging bias (Bk) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

2TR-N1 sets the offset value of the secondary transfer bias (plain paper (600 dpi); 1st side) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

2TR-N2 sets the offset value of the secondary transfer bias (plain paper (600 dpi); 2nd side) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

2TR-H1 sets the offset value of the secondary transfer bias (heavy paper 1; 1st side) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

2TR-H2 sets the offset value of the secondary transfer bias (heavy paper 1; 2nd side) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

2TR-UH1 sets the offset value of the secondary transfer bias (heavy paper 2; 1st side) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

2TR-UH2 sets the offset value of the secondary transfer bias (heavy paper 2; 2nd side) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

2TR-P1 sets the offset value of the secondary transfer bias (envelope; 1st side) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

2TR-P2 sets the offset value of the secondary transfer bias (envelope; 2nd side) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

2TR-NH1 sets the offset value of the secondary transfer bias (plain paper (1200 dpi); 1st side) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

2TR-NH2 sets the offset value of the secondary transfer bias (plain paper (1200 dpi); 2nd side) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

2TR-L1 sets the offset value of the secondary transfer bias (label sheet) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

2TR-SP1 sets the offset value of the secondary transfer bias (special paper 1 / special paper 2) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

OPTION GR.
T-5-39

Item Description Setting

DEVL-VTH Sets the threshold for the mode used to discharge deteriorated toner (as when coarse images occur -1 to +2 (0*)
while continuously printing originals of a low image ratio) unit: 1

DRM-RTIM sets the start time of the sequence used to prevent drum lines -1 to +50 (0*)
-1: disable, 0: 10 min., ..., 50: 60
min
unit: 1

FX-SPD adjusts the speed of the fixing roller 0 to 2 (0*)

unit: 1

ITBB-TMG sets the frequency of the sequence used to prevent the edge of the ITB cleaning blade from turning -9 to 0 (0*)
over unit: 1

INTPPR-1 sets the frequency of ATR control -2 to +2 (0*)

unit: 1

FIX-TEMP sets the offset value of the fixing temperature control for improvement of fixing -2 to +2 (0*)
unit: 1

FX-S-TMP sets the offset value of the fixing temperature control start time used to prevent uneven gloss -5 to +5 (0*)
unit: 1

ADJ-LVL image stabilization control switch (for design dpt) ON, OFF*

CONFIG for adjustment at the factory 0*, 1

5-56
 Chapter 5

Item Description Setting

T-LW-LVL switches the timing at which the toner level warning is issued 0 to 3 (0*)
0: 5 % remaining, 1: 10 %
remaining, 2: 15 % remaining,
3: 20 % remaining
unit: 1

LONG SLEEP TIME sets the long sleep time 0 to 24 (8*)

unit: 1

FUNCTION GR.
T-5-40

Item Description Setting

CLEAR ERR resets error code -

SHIP-CLR for adjustment at factory -

2TR-CLN executes secondary transfer outside roller cleaning -

DEVL-CLN enables/disables the mode in which deteriorated toner is discharged (as when coarse images occur -
while continuously printing originals of a low image ratio)

COLOR MODE SLCT enables/disables the printer's mechanism by which color/mono printing occurs ON, OFF*

LOG GR.
T-5-41

Item Description Setting

SYSTEM LOG sets the system log mechanism ON*, OFF

SUBLOG FTP GET obtains the sublog without using serial console. -

LOGGING UTILITY sets the logging utility functions in utility menu. ON, OFF*

F/W UPDATE GR.

T-5-42

Item Description Setting

PARALLEL executes upgrading of the controller firmware -

USB executes upgrading of the controller firmware* (only if USB) -

NETWORK executes upgrading of the controller firmware -

NETWORK GR.
T-5-43

Item Description Setting

FTP SYSLOG Use it to set the various system log file acquisition functions. ON, OFF*

JOB SERIALIZE sets the connector serialization mechanism ON, OFF*

5-57
 Chapter 5

5.6.2.2 Service Mode

0016-5937

LBP5970 / LBP5975

T-5-44

Counter gr.
Item Description Setting
INIT.FIX.COUNT initializes the counter value of the fixing assembly. ----
DV-UNT-C indicates the counter reading of the C drum cartridge 0 to 45000 (0*)
INIT.DV-UNT-C resets the counter reading of the C drum cartridge ----
DV-UNT-M indicates the counter reading of the M drum cartridge 0 to 45000 (0*)
INIT.DV-UNT-M resets the counter reading of the M drum cartridge ----
DV-UNT-Y indicates the counter reading of the Y drum cartridge 0 to 45000 (0*)
INIT.DV-UNT-Y resets the counter reading of the Y drum cartridge ----
DV-UNT-K indicates the counter reading of the Bk drum cartridge 0 to 45000 (0*)
INIT.DV-UNT-K resets the counter reading of the Bk drum cartridge ----
INIT.C1-PU-RL resets the counter reading of the pickup roller for cassette 1 (machine cassette) ----
INIT.C2-PU-RL resets the counter reading of the pickup/transport/separation roller for cassette ----
2 (feeder 1)
INIT.C3-PU-RL resets the counter reading of the pickup/transport/separation roller for cassette ----
3 (feeder 2)
INIT.C4-PU-RL resets the counter reading of the pickup/transport/separation roller for cassette ----
4 (feeder 3)
INIT.M-PU-RL resets the counter reading of the pickup roller (manual feeder) ----
INIT.2TR-ROLL resets the counter reading of the secondary transfer outside roller ----
INIT.ITB-UNIT resets the ITB counter reading ----

T-5-45

ADJUST GR.

Item Description Setting

CALIBRATION enables/disables calibration ON*, OFF

IMG-REG

REG-H-C adjusts the write start position in main scanning direction for C -127 to 127 (0*)
unit: 1

REG-H-M adjusts the write start position in main scanning direction for M -127 to 127 (0*)
unit: 1

REG-H-Y adjusts the write start position in main scanning direction for Y -127 to 127 (0*)
unit: 1

REG-H-K adjusts the write start position in main scanning direction for Bk -127 to 127 (0*)
unit: 1

REG-V-C adjusts the write start position in sub scanning direction for C -127 to 127 (0*)
unit: 1

REG-V-M adjusts the write start position in sub scanning direction for M -127 to 127 (0*)
unit: 1

REG-V-Y adjusts the write start position in sub scanning direction for Y -127 to 127 (0*)
unit: 1

REG-V-K adjusts the write start position in sub scanning direction for Bk -127 to 127 (0*)
unit: 1

VD-OFS-K sets the offset value of Vd (developing bias) for Bk -5 to 5 (0*)

unit: 1

VD-OFS-3 sets the offset value of Vd (developing bias) for color -5 to 5 (0*)
unit: 1

V-BACK-K sets the offset value of Vback (defogging bias) for Bk -3 to 3 (0*)
unit: 1

V-BACK-3 sets the offset value of Vback (defogging bias) for color -3 to 3 (0*)
unit: 1

5-58
 Chapter 5

ADJUST GR.

Item Description Setting

P-TG-C sets the offset value of the ATR control target (C) -4 to 4 (0*)
unit: 1

P-TG-M sets the offset value of the ATR control target (M) -4 to 4 (0*)
unit: 1

P-TG-Y sets the offset value of the ATR control target (Y) -4 to 4 (0*)
unit: 1

P-TG-K sets the offset value of the ATR control target (Bk) -4 to 4 (0*)
unit: 1

OFSTAC-C sets the offset value of the charging AC bias for C 0 to 3 (0*)
unit: 1

OFSTAC-M sets the offset value of the charging AC bias for M 0 to 3 (0*)
unit: 1

OFSTAC-Y sets the offset value of the charging AC bias for Y 0 to 3 (0*)
unit: 1

OFSTAC-K sets the offset value of the charging AC bias for Bk 0 to 3 (0*)
unit: 1

T-SPLY-C sets the offset value of the C toner supply amount -3 to 3 (0*)
unit: 1

T-SPLY-M sets the offset value of the M toner supply amount -3 to 3 (0*)
unit: 1

T-SPLY-Y sets the offset value of the Y toner supply amount -3 to 3 (0*)
unit: 1

T-SPLY-K sets the offset value of the K toner supply amount -3 to 3 (0*)
unit: 1

1TR-TGC sets the offset value of the primary charging bias (C) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

1TR-TGM sets the offset value of the primary charging bias (M) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

1TR-TGY sets the offset value of the primary charging bias (Y) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

1TR-TGK1 sets the offset value of the primary charging bias (Bk) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

2TR-N1 sets the offset value of the secondary transfer bias (plain paper (600 dpi); 1st side) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

2TR-N2 sets the offset value of the secondary transfer bias (plain paper (600 dpi); 2nd side) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

2TR-H1 sets the offset value of the secondary transfer bias (heavy paper 1; 1st side) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

2TR-H2 sets the offset value of the secondary transfer bias (heavy paper 1; 2nd side) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

2TR-UH1 sets the offset value of the secondary transfer bias (heavy paper 2; 1st side) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

2TR-UH2 sets the offset value of the secondary transfer bias (heavy paper 2; 2nd side) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

2TR-P1 sets the offset value of the secondary transfer bias (envelope; 1st side) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

2TR-P2 sets the offset value of the secondary transfer bias (envelope; 2nd side) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

2TR-NH1 sets the offset value of the secondary transfer bias (plain paper (1200 dpi); 1st side) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

2TR-NH2 sets the offset value of the secondary transfer bias (plain paper (1200 dpi); 2nd side) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

2TR-L1 sets the offset value of the secondary transfer bias (label sheet) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

5-59
 Chapter 5

ADJUST GR.

Item Description Setting

2TR-SP1 sets the offset value of the secondary transfer bias (special paper 1 / special paper 2) -10 to 10 (0*)
unit: 1

T-5-46

Option gr.
Item Description Setting
DEVL-VTH Sets the threshold for the mode used to discharge deteriorated toner (as when
-1 to 2 (0*)
coarse images occur while continuously printing originals of a low image ratio)
DRM-RTIM sets the start time of the sequence used to prevent drum lines 1 to +50 (0*)
-1: disable, 0: 10 min., ..., 50: 60 min
FX-SPD adjusts the speed of the fixing roller 0 to 2 (0*)
unit: 1
ITBB-TMG sets the frequency of the sequence used to prevent the edge of the ITB cleaning 9 to 0 (0*)
blade from turning over unit: 1
INTPPR-1 sets the frequency of ATR control -9 to 0 (0*)
unit: 1
FIX-TEMP sets the offset value of the fixing temperature control for improvement of fixing -2 to +2 (0*)
unit: 1
FX-S-TMP sets the offset value of the fixing temperature control start time used to prevent -5 to +5 (0*)
uneven gloss unit: 1
ADJ-LVL image stabilization control switch (for design dpt) ON, OFF*
CONFIG for adjustment at the factory 0*, 1
T-LW-LVL switches the timing at which the toner level warning is issued 0 to 3 (0*)
0: 5 % remaining, 1: 10 % remaining, 2: 15 %
remaining, 3: 20 % remaining
unit: 1
LOG SLEEP TIME sets the long sleep time 0 to 24 (8*)
unit: 1
OUT-TRAY Operates as a model without the top mount finisher
B4-L-COUNT Use it to set so that soft counters 1 through will count B4 as being of large size
ON, OFF*
or small size.
SCT-ALL-CLR Setting whether to execute count all clear on "Department ID Management
ON*, OFF
Settings" screen of RUI
SCT-IDV-CLR Setting whether to execute count clear on "Edit Department" screen of RUI. ON*, OFF
VCNT_ADJ Sets video count threshold to determine whether to execute operation to prevent
-1 to 1 (0*)
delivery papers from being adhered.

T-5-47

function gr.
Item Description Setting
ECONF EXPORT Exports device settings data GENERAL/DEPEND/SECURITY/ALL
INPORT Imports device settings data ----
USB-H Sets USB host function ON, OFF*
SUBLOG TO USB Outputs sub log in USB memory ----
CLEAR_ERR resets error code ----
SHIP_CLR for adjustment at factory ----
2TR-CLN executes secondary transfer outside roller cleaning ----
DEVL-CLN enables/disables the mode in which deteriorated toner is discharged (as when
----
coarse images occur while continuously printing originals of a low image ratio)
COLOR_MODE_SLCT enables/disables the printer's mechanism by which color/mono printing occurs ON, OFF*
CLAW-UP Pulls the paper retaining claw when removing top mount finisher is removed. ----

T-5-48

LOG GR.
Item Description Setting
SYSTEM LOG sets the system log mechanism ON*, OFF

5-60
 Chapter 5

LOG GR.
Item Description Setting
SUBLOG FTP GET obtains the sublog without using serial console. -
LOGGING UTILITY sets the logging utility functions in utility menu. ON, OFF*

T-5-49

F/W update gr.

Item Description Setting
PALALLEL executes upgrading of the controller firmware ----
USB executes upgrading of the controller firmware* (only if USB) ----
NETWORK executes upgrading of the controller firmware ----
USB STOREGE executes upgrading of the controller firmware ALL/CONT/BOOT/ROM/DCON

T-5-50

Network gr.
Item Description Setting
FTP SYSLOG Use it to set the various system log file acquisition functions ON, OFF*
JOB SERIALIZE sets the connector serialization mechanism ON, OFF*
E-RDS E-RDS SWITCH E-RDS settings ON, OFF*
RGW-ADDRESS Specify URL of sales company server used in E-RDS
RGW-PORT Specify port number of sales company server used in E-RDS
COM-TEST Check connection with sales company server used in E-RDS
COM-LOG Display detailed results of communication test with sales
company server used in E-RDS
CLEAR Clear of the E-RDS setting
CA-KEY CLEAR CA authentication and key deleted together.
MIB CHARGECOUNT ALL ACCESS Obtains all of charge counter MIB information
DISP ACCESS Obtains only those displayed on LUI among charge counters
NON ACCESS Unable to obtain all of charge counter MIB information

5-61
Chapter 6 APPENDIX
 Contents

Contents

6.1 OUTLINE OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS...........................................................................................................6-1

6.1.1 Clutch/Solenoid............................................................................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.1.1.1 Clutches and Solenoids ...................................................................................................................................................................................6-1
6.1.1.2 Clutches and Solenoids ...................................................................................................................................................................................6-1
6.1.2 Motor............................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-3
6.1.2.1 Motors .............................................................................................................................................................................................................6-3
6.1.2.2 Motors .............................................................................................................................................................................................................6-3
6.1.3 Fan................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-5
6.1.3.1 Fans .................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-5
6.1.3.2 Fans .................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-6
6.1.4 Sensor........................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-7
6.1.4.1 Sensors ............................................................................................................................................................................................................6-7
6.1.4.2 Sensors ............................................................................................................................................................................................................6-8
6.1.5 Lamps, Heaters, and Others ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-9
6.1.5.1 Heaters, Switches, and Others.........................................................................................................................................................................6-9
6.1.5.2 Heaters, Switches, and Others.......................................................................................................................................................................6-10
6.1.6 PCBs .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.1.6.1 PCBs..............................................................................................................................................................................................................6-11
6.1.6.2 PCBs..............................................................................................................................................................................................................6-12
 Chapter 6

6.1 OUTLINE OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

6.1.1 Clutch/Solenoid

6.1.1.1 Clutches and Solenoids

0010-0721

LBP5960

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]

[6]

[5]

[7]
F-6-1
T-6-1

Ref. Notation Name

[1] CL1 Y developing sleeve clutch

[2] CL2 M developing sleeve clutch
[3] CL3 C developing sleeve clutch
[4] CL4 Bk developing sleeve clutch
[5] CL5 cassette pickup clutch
[6] SL1 manual feeder pickup solenoid
[7] SL2 color displacement sensor shutter solenoid

6.1.1.2 Clutches and Solenoids

0016-5917

LBP5970 / LBP5975

<Printer>

6-1
 Chapter 6

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]

[6]

[5]

[7]
F-6-2
T-6-2

Ref. Notation Name

[1] CL1 Y developing sleeve clutch

[2] CL2 M developing sleeve clutch
[3] CL3 C developing sleeve clutch
[4] CL4 Bk developing sleeve clutch
[5] CL5 cassette pickup clutch
[6] SL1 manual feeder pickup solenoid
[7] SL2 color displacement sensor shutter solenoid

<Finisher>

SL1

F-6-3
T-6-3

Symbol Name

SL1 Gripper solenoid

6-2
 Chapter 6

6.1.2 Motor

6.1.2.1 Motors
0010-0720

LBP5960

[2]

[3]

[1]
[5]

[8]

[9]
[10]
[11] [7]

[4]
[12]
[6]
F-6-4
T-6-4

Ref. Notation Name

[1] M1 drum/ITB motor

[2] M2 YM development motor
[3] M3 CBk development motor
[4] M4 fixing motor
[5] M5 pickup motor
[6] M6 registration motor
[7] M7 duplexing motor
[8] M8 Y toner supply motor
[9] M9 M toner supply motor
[10] M10 C toner supply motor
[11] M11 Bk toner supply motor
[12] M12 waste toner feed motor

6.1.2.2 Motors
0016-5918

LBP5970 / LBP5975
<Printer>

6-3
 Chapter 6

[2]

[3]

[1]
[5]

[8]

[9]
[10]
[11] [7]

[4]
[12]
[6]
F-6-5
T-6-5

Ref. Notation Name

[1] M1 drum/ITB motor

[2] M2 YM development motor
[3] M3 CBk development motor
[4] M4 fixing motor
[5] M5 pickup motor
[6] M6 registration motor
[7] M7 duplexing motor
[8] M8 Y toner supply motor
[9] M9 M toner supply motor
[10] M10 C toner supply motor
[11] M11 Bk toner supply motor
[12] M12 waste toner feed motor

6-4
 Chapter 6

<Finisher>

M1
M2
F-6-6
T-6-6

Symbol Name

M1 Offset motor
M2 Feed motor

6.1.3 Fan

6.1.3.1 Fans
0010-0722

LBP5960

[5]

[6]

[3]

[4]

[2]

[1]
F-6-7
T-6-7

Ref. Notation Name

[1] FM1 fixing fan 1

[2] FM2 fixing fan 2

[3] FM3 cartridge fan

6-5
 Chapter 6

Ref. Notation Name

[4] FM4 power supply fan

[5] FM5 drive fan

[6] FM6 controller fan

6.1.3.2 Fans
0016-5919

LBP5970 / LBP5975

<Printer>

[5]

[6]

[3]

[4]

[2]

[1]
F-6-8
T-6-8

Ref. Notation Name

[1] FM1 fixing fan 1

[2] FM2 fixing fan 2

[3] FM3 cartridge fan

[4] FM4 power supply fan

[5] FM5 drive fan

[6] FM6 controller fan

6-6
 Chapter 6

<Finisher>

FM1
F-6-9
T-6-9

Symbol Name

FM1 Exhasust heat fan

6.1.4 Sensor

6.1.4.1 Sensors
0010-0718

LBP5960

[20]

[11] [21]
[10]

[16] [1]

[3]
[2] [7]

[17]
[9]

[4]
[18]
[5]
[19]
[15]
[6]
[13]
[14]
[12] [8]
F-6-10
T-6-10

Ref. Notation Name

[1] PS1 delivery sensor

[2] PS2 arch sensor

6-7
 Chapter 6

Ref. Notation Name

[3] PS3 Y toner supply sensor

[4] PS4 M toner supply sensor
[5] PS5 C toner supply sensor
[6] PS6 Bk toner supply sensor
[7] PS7 registration sensor
[8] PS8 cassette paper sensor
[9] PS9 manual feed paper sensor
[10] PS10 duplexing paper sensor
[11] PS11 toner cartridge sensor
[12] PS12 waste toner case sensor
[13] PS13 waste toner shutter open/closed sensor
[14] PS14 toner supply shutter open/closed sensor
[15] PS15 sheet-to-sheet sensor
[16] TS1 Y toner level sensor
[17] TS2 M toner level sensor
[18] TS3 C toner level sensor
C toner level sensor
[19] TS4
Bk toner level sensor
[20] ENV1 outside machine environment sensor
[21] ENV2 inside machine environment sensor

6.1.4.2 Sensors
0016-5920

LBP5970 / LBP5975

<Printer>

[20]

[11] [21]
[10]

[16] [1]

[3]
[2] [7]

[17]
[9]

[4]
[18]
[5]
[19]
[15]
[6]
[13]
[14]
[12] [8]
F-6-11
T-6-11

Ref. Notation Name

[1] PS1 delivery sensor

[2] PS2 arch sensor
[3] PS3 Y toner supply sensor
[4] PS4 M toner supply sensor
[5] PS5 C toner supply sensor
[6] PS6 Bk toner supply sensor
[7] PS7 registration sensor
[8] PS8 cassette paper sensor

6-8
 Chapter 6

Ref. Notation Name

[9] PS9 manual feed paper sensor

[10] PS10 duplexing paper sensor
[11] PS11 toner cartridge sensor
[12] PS12 waste toner case sensor
[13] PS13 waste toner shutter open/closed sensor
[14] PS14 toner supply shutter open/closed sensor
[15] PS15 sheet-to-sheet sensor
[16] TS1 Y toner level sensor
[17] TS2 M toner level sensor
[18] TS3 C toner level sensor
C toner level sensor
[19] TS4
Bk toner level sensor
[20] ENV1 outside machine environment sensor
[21] ENV2 inside machine environment sensor

<Finisher>

PI4

PI1

PI3

PI2
F-6-12
T-6-12

Symbol Name

PI1 Offset HP sensor

PI2 Stack slide sensor
PI3 Inlet sensor
PI4 Paper full sensor

6.1.5 Lamps, Heaters, and Others

6.1.5.1 Heaters, Switches, and Others

0010-0717

LBP5960

6-9
 Chapter 6

[2]
[6]
[7]

[5]

[1]

[3]

[4]

F-6-13
T-6-13

Ref. Notation Name

[1] H1 main heater

[2] H2 sub heater

[3] SW1 interlock switch

[4] SW2 cassette size switch

[5] TH1 main thermistor

[6] TH2 sub thermistor

[7] TP1 thermal switch

6.1.5.2 Heaters, Switches, and Others

0016-5921

LBP5970 / LBP5975

6-10
 Chapter 6

[2]
[6]
[7]

[5]

[1]

[3]

[4]

F-6-14
T-6-14

Ref. Notation Name

[1] H1 main heater

[2] H2 sub heater

[3] SW1 interlock switch

[4] SW2 cassette size switch

[5] TH1 main thermistor

[6] TH2 sub thermistor

[7] TP1 thermal switch

6.1.6 PCBs

6.1.6.1 PCBs
0010-0719

LBP5960

6-11
 Chapter 6

[4]
[9]

[2]

[1]
[6]

[8]

[3]
[7]

[5]
F-6-15
T-6-15

Ref. Notation Name

[1] - low-voltage power supply PCB

[2] - DC controller PCB
[3] - HVT1

[4] - HVT2

[5] UN6 waste toner full sensor PCB

[6] - fuse contact PCB

[7] UN14 color displacement sensor PCB A*1

[8] UN15 color displacement sensor PCB B

[9] - video controller PCB

*1: Doubles as a patch image read sensor.

6.1.6.2 PCBs
0016-5922

LBP5970 / LBP5975

<Printer>

6-12
 Chapter 6

[4]
[9]

[2]

[1]
[6]

[8]

[3]
[7]

[5]
F-6-16
T-6-16

Ref. Notation Name

[1] - low-voltage power supply PCB

[2] - DC controller PCB
[3] - HVT1

[4] - HVT2

[5] UN6 waste toner full sensor PCB

[6] - fuse contact PCB

[7] UN14 color displacement sensor PCB A*1

[8] UN15 color displacement sensor PCB B

[9] - video controller PCB

*1ÅFñ{ÉZÉìÉTÇÕÅAÉpÉbÉ`âÊëúì«éÊÇËÉZÉìÉTLJåìópǵǃǢÇÈÅB

6-13
 Chapter 6

<Finisher>

[2]

[1]
F-6-17
T-6-17

No. symbol Name

[1] - Finisher controller PCB

[2] - Finisher power supply PCB

6-14
Chapter 6

6-15
Apr 17 2008